iV 


UNIVERSITY    OF    CALIFORNIA 


No.    J. 


ON 


*J?U( 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

Microsoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elementarygeograOOkingrich 


i    COLOTYM   CO.,  H    V.  *  Cm 


JAPANESE  CHILDREN 


KING'S    GEOGEAPHIES 


ELEMENTARY     GEOGRAPHY 


A  TEXT-BOOK   FOR   CHILDREN 


BY 

CHARLES  F.   KING 

MASTER    OF    THE    DEARBORN'    SCHOOL,    BOSTON  |    PRESIDENT    OF    THE    TEACHERS'    GEOGRAPHY    CLUB,    BOSTON  ;     FORMER 
MANAGER    OF    THE    NATIONAL    SCHOOL    OF   METHODS  ;    SECRETARY    TO    THE    GEOGRAPHY    CONFERENCE 

OF    THE    "COMMITTEE    OF    TEN" 
AUTHOR   OF    "METHODS   AND  AIMS    IN   GEOGRAPHY"    AND    "THE    PICTURESQUE    GEOGRAPHICAL   READERS" 


LOTHROP 


BOSTON 
PUBLISHING     COMPANY 
1903 


•       •        •    »  j  i 
*  >•     -        *    i 

,  ,  i    *  ,  *    »         >    j  * 


COPYRIGHT, 

1903, 
By   LOTHKOP 
PUBLISHING 
COMPANY. 

ALL   RIGHTS 
RESERVED. 


»a 


•     •••-••     • 

••     •  %•  •  •    • 
•    •      •  •    «    •• 


EDUCATION  DEPT. 


Nortnoob  $rrea 

J.  S.  Cashing  &  Co.—  Berwick  &  Smith  Co. 

Norwood,  Mass.,  U.S.A. 


cue 


PREFACE 


SCIENCE  declares  that  the  brain  develops  through 
the  senses  and  by  action.  Sensations  lead  to 
movement.  A  child  sees  an  object  and  at  once 
desires  to  approach  or  take  it.  By  seeing,  hearing,  tast- 
ing, touching,  and  moving,  the  child's  brain  grows  slowly 
in  the  power  to  think  and  reason.  Reasoning  power, 
however,  comes  later  than  that  of  observation. 

Sense  knowledge  is  gained  by  the  mind  of  the  child 
coming  in  contact  with  objects  directly  and  not  through 
the  medium  of  another  mind.  Spencer  says  in  his  "  Edu- 
cation," "  A  child's  restless  observation,  instead  of  being 
ignored  or  checked,  should  be  diligently  administered  to, 
and  made  as  accurate  and  complete  as  possible."  Sully 
says,  "  First-hand  knowledge  of  things  through  personal 
inspection  is  worth  far  more  than  any  second-hand  ac- 
count of  them  by  description." 

In  the  report  of  the  "  Committee  of  Ten "  are  found 
these  words :  — 

"  Observation  should  go  before  all  other  forms  of  geo- 
graphical study  and  prepare  the  way  for  them ;  its  object 
being  (1)  to  develop  the  power  and  habit  of  geographic 
observation,  (2)  to  give  the  pupils  true  and  vivid  basal 
ideas,  and  (3)  to  arouse  the  spirit  of  inquiry  and  thirst 
for  geographical  knowledge." 

The  report  of  the  New  England  Superintendents'  Com- 
mittee on  Geography  contains  the  following :  — 

"  The  teacher  needs  to  keep  constantly  in  mind  that 
ideas  gained  from  local  objects  and  relations  are  the  vital 
condition  for  imagining  distant  conditions. 

"  Pictures  are  used  to  recall  past  experiences  with 
nature  and  human  life  and  to  stimulate  to  new  thought." 

The  natural  order,  then,  for  children  to  pursue  in  the 
study  of  geography  is :  — 

1.  Eield  work,  or  observation  of  natural  phenomena 
about  the  home  and  the  schoolhouse,  together  with  study 
of  pictures  and  oral  recitation. 

2.  More  field  work,  with  reading  and  writing  about  the 
objects  observed,  or  about  similar  objects. 


.3.  Careful  study,  with  use  of  comparison  and  reasoning 
to  arrive  at  geographical  truths ;  more  reading,  longer  ex- 
cursions, followed  by  illustrated  written  work. 
L/In  other  words,  object  and  concrete  study  should  pre- 
cede the  study  of  definitions  and  abstract  and  didactic 
statements.  In  order  to  know  about  the  world  abroad, 
children  must  first  know  from  observation  the  world  at 
home.  Observation  and  the  study  of  pictures  will  help 
the  child's  imagination. 

The  first  steps,  observation  and  field  work,  should  be 
made  prominent  in  the  first  year  of  the  geography  course ; 
the  second  steps,  in  the  second  year ;  the  third  steps,  dur- 
ing subsequent  years.  In  this  arrangement,  careful  atten- 
tion has  been  paid  to  the  children's  activities. 

Hitherto,  in  the  preparation  of  primary  and  elementary 
geographies,  these  fundamental  principles  of  child  growth 
have  been  somewhat  systematically  ignored.  Little  dif- 
ference has  been  made  in  style  and  material  between  the 
elementary  and  the  advanced  geographies.  In  fact,  the 
first  book  has  usually  been  less  interesting  to  children 
than  the  second,  because  it  has  been  made  more  condensed 
and  abstract.  Is  it  any  wonder,  then,  that  children  have 
not  often  learned  from  text-books  to  like  this  charming 
study  ?  ( 

The  geographical  reader,  however,  has  presented  the 
subject  in  the  concrete,  more  in  strict  agreement  with 
children's  minds  and  taste,  and  hence  has  become  very 
popular. 

After  thirty  years'  study  of  children  in  school  and  at 
home,  and  after  much  experimenting  in  teaching  geog- 
raphy, the  author  ventures  to  place  before  the  public  an 
elementary  book  prepared  from  the  child's  standpoint  \,/ 
and  in  accordance  with  his  growth  and  nature.  The 
hope  is  that  it  may  make  children  love  geography  —  not 
hate  it. 

Here  home,  concrete,  and  journey  geography  are  made 
prominent  features.  A  field,  a  park,  a  hill,  a  river,  a 
prairie,  is  visited,  described,  and  pictured  by  the  camera, 


Hi 

5-i  I  121 


PREFACE 


and  made  real  to  the  children,  as  a  basis  of  further  study, 
by  an  actual  lesson  in  the  field  with  the  teacher. 

Children  naturally  prefer  types  to  generalities ;  there- 
fore a  lesson  is  devoted  to  a  typical  mountain,  river, 
coast-line,  and  valley,  in  place  of  general  descriptions  of 
such  natural  objects. 

Children  are  also  fond  of  the  personal  element  and  the 
story  form ;  for  this  reason  a  real  teacher  and  real  classes 
are  employed  in  the  text.  For  the  same  reason  the  style 
in  Part  IV,  or  in  the  journeys,  is  that  of  the  traveller 
telling  his  experiences.  This  method  of  presentation  will 
be  found  to  help  the  memory  wonderfully,  because  inter- 
est is  enlisted. 

The  almost  total  absence  of  small  type  has  made  it 
necessary  to  increase  the  size  of  the  book  by  a  few  pages, 
but  only  the  usual  amount  of  matter  is  presented.  By 
the  use  of  large  type  this  is  given  in  a  more  attractive 
and  useful  form.  Judicious  selection  has  been  necessary. 
The  selections  have  been  made  in  the  interest  of  the 
children  rather  than  of  adults. 

To  help  teachers  and  pupils  in  needed  economy  of 
time,  to  increase  the  power  of  understanding,  and  to 
( make  the  work  of  learning  easier,  geography  is  here 
systematically  correlated  with  nature  study  and  composi- 
tion in  easy  language  and  field  lessons. 

The  author  and  publishers  have  spared  neither  pains 
nor  expense  with  the  illustrations,  because  the  children 
are  so  dependent  upon  them  for  what  they  learn  in  this 
j  subject.  The  pictures  have  been  made  large  in  order 
that  they  may  be  the  more  fully  seen  and  studied  under 
the  guidance  of  the  teacher. 

After  careful  consideration,  the  best  half-tone  process 
has  been  selected,  for  the  reason  that  it  presents  the  ap- 
pearance of  nature  more  accurately  than  the  wood-engrav- 
ing process.  The  illustrations  are  made  from  photographs, 
more  than  half  of  which  were  taken  by  the  author 
especially  for  this  book.  Photographs  of  children  and 
adults  of  many  different  nationalities  are  frequently 
introduced.  Photographs  are  here,  for  the  first  time  in  a 
geography,  exclusively  used  as  a  basis  for  the  pictures  of 
wild  animals.  The  natural  love  of  children  for  color  is 
ministered  to  in  the  handsome  colored  plates  which 
embellish  the  work. 


Attention  is  called  to  the  number  and  excellence  of  the 
maps  made  by  the  well-known  engravers,  the  Matthews- 
Northrup  Co.  of  Buffalo,  H.T.  The  clearness  and  softness 
of  tone  meet  all  reasonable  expectations.  The  political 
maps  clearly  show  the  slopes  by  the  increasing  thickness 
of  the  lines  representing  the  rivers,  and  they  show  the 
elevations  by  the  shading.  Generous  space  has  been 
given  to  the  great  cities  of  the  world,  and,  to  aid  the  chil- 
dren in  their  imaginary  journeys  to  these  cities,  excellent 
outline  maps  have  been  made  a  feature  of  the  book. 

Great  care  has  been  exercised  that  statements  should 
be  accurate  and  up  to  date.  So  many  books  and  articles 
have  been  consulted  in  the  preparation  of  this  book  that 
it  is  practically  impossible  to  give  credit  where  it  belongs. 
The  material,  which  has  been  freely  used,  is  here  acknowl- 
edged, in  a  general  way,  with  sincere  gratitude. 

The  author  has  been  very  fortunate  in  the  kind  and 
generous  help  rendered  him  in  the  preparation  of  this 
volume. 

Manuscript  and  proof  have  been  read  and  criticised  by 
such  well-known  educators  as,  — 

Mr.  M.  T.  Pritchard,  Everett  School,  Boston. 

Mr.  J.  C.  Lyford,  Winslow  Grammar  School,  Worces- 
ter, Mass. 

Miss  Mary  C.  Mellyn,  Boston  Normal  School. 

Professor  William  C.  Moore,  State  Normal  School, 
Salem,  Mass. 

Mr.  Albert  E.  King,  Brooklyn  High  School,  N.Y. 

Professor  Edward  M.  Lehnerts,  Editor  of  the  Journal 
of  Geography,  and  Instructor  in  Geography,  State  Normal 
School,  Winona,  Minn. 

Assistance  has  been  rendered  by  such  practical  teachers 
as  Miss  Abbie  G.  Abbott,  Miss  Lucy  Hamlin,  and  Miss 
Lucy  H.  Littlefield,  who  have  taught  geography  as  herein 
described. 

Mrs.  Gratia  Cobb  King  has  been,  throughout,  the  un- 
failing helper  and  wise  critic. 

Acknowledgment  is  here  made  of  indebtedness  to  the 
Santa  Fe  Railroad,  the  American  Baptist  Missionary 
Union,  Boston,  and  Miss  Emma  E.  Harvey  of  Council 
Grove,  Kan.,  for  the  use  of  photographs ;  also  to  S.  R. 
Stoddard  of  Glens  Falls,  N.Y.,  for  the  use  of  copyrighted 
photographs. 


IV 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS 


PART   I 
HOME  GEOGRAPHY  BY  OBSERVATION 


PAGE 

1.  The  Park 1 

2.  Henry's  Field 3 

3.  Direction 6 

4.  The  ScuooLnousE 8 

5.  Near-by  Hills .  9 

6.  A  Trip  to  Another  Park 11 

7.  Air  in  Motion 17 


PAGE 

8.  The  Great  Rain  Circle 17 

9.  The  Umbrella  Party 19 

10.  Observations  of  the  Weather 21 

11.  The  Four  Seasons 22 

12.  A  Great  City 27 

13.  Soil 32 

14.  A  Trip  to  the  Seaside 35 


1ft 

A 

17. 

A 

is. 

A 

PART   II 
GEOGRAPHY  THROUGH   TYPE  FORMS 


Mountain  —  Mount  Washington      ....  41 

River  —  The  Hudson 44 

Typical  Valley 49 

Prairie 53 


19.  A  Bit  or  Coast 

20.  A  Cold  Country  —  Greenland     . 

21.  A  Hot  Country  —  Cuba         .... 

22.  A  Temperate  Country  —  The  United  States 


55 
60 
65 
70 


PART   III 
THE   EARTH   AS   A  WHOLE 


23.  The  Earth  and  its  Motions 75 

24.  Shape  of  the  Earth      . 76 

25.  Study  of  a  Globe  representing  the  Whole  Earth  76 

26.  Vicinity  of  the  Schoolhouse        .....  78 

27.  Making  Maps 79 


28.  The  Reading  of  Maps 80 

29.  The  Size  of  the  Earth 81 

30.  Surface  of  the  Earth 82 

31.  Belts  or  Zones  of  Heat  and  Cold     ....  85 


PART  IV 
JOURNEY   GEOGRAPHY 


IN  NORTH  AMERICA 


32.  New  York  City 89 

33.  New  York  City  (concluded) 94 

34.  "Made  in  New  England" 98 

35.  Maine  and  Jersey  Coasts 106 

36.  A  Southern  Trip Ill 

37.  Down  the  Mississippi  River  .         .        .         .         .118 

38.  The  Great  Lakes  and  Chicago   .....  125 

39.  The  Wheat  Belt 132 

40.  A  Ranch 133 

41.  A  Race— The  Indians 135 

42.  Pacific  Highland  Wonders 140 

43.  A  Land  of  Sunshine,  Fruit,  and  Flowers         .         .  146 

44.  A  Trip  across  Canada 150 


IN  SOUTH  AMERICA 

45.  Brazil  and  the  Amazon  River     . 

46.  Chile,  between  the  Sea  and  the  Mountains 

IN  EUROPE 

47.  Ireland,  and  crossing  the  Atlantic  . 

48.  England  and  her  People      .... 


49. 
50. 
51. 
52. 
53. 
54. 


55. 
56. 
57. 
58. 
59. 


London,  the  Largest  City  in  the  World 
Germany  and  the  Germans  .... 

Beautiful  Paris  and  the  French  People 
Switzerland,  the  Land  of  High  Mountains 
Sunny  Italy    ....... 

Russia  and  the  Russians       .... 


152 

60. 

156 

61. 

62. 

63. 

161 

64. 

164 

IN  AFRICA 


On  the  Desert 
Afloat  on  the  Nile 
An  African  School 
South  Africa 
The  Interior  of  Africa 


IN   ASIA  AND  AUSTRALIA 

The  Home  of  the  Chinese    . 
Japan,  the  Land  of  the  Rising  Sun 

Life  in  India 

Australia  and  Strange  Islands  . 
The  Philippines      .... 


168 
171 
174 
177 
180 
184 


187 
189 
192 
194 
196 


198 
202 
206 
209 
213 


DIRECTIONS    TO    TEACHERS 


This  book  is  so  simple  in  its  construction  and  appeals  in  such 
a  natural  way  to  the  children  that  it  needs  no  manual  to  tell 
experienced  teachers  how  to  use  it.  A  few  hints,  however,  may 
be  helpful  to  young  teachers. 

In  General.  —  This  book  may  be  used  for  both  reading  and 
study.  Let  the  children  read  a  lesson  and  then  tell  orally,  in 
their  own  language,  what  they  have  read.  In  this  exercise 
allow  the  children  to  substitute  their  own  teacher's  name  for 
that  of  Miss  Hale.  Encourage  them  to  examine  the  pictures, 
and  to  use  their  imagination  as  they  read.  The  pictures  will 
naturally  form  good  topics  for  talk  and  discussion.  All  of  the 
large  pictures,  as  well  as  the  few  specially  marked,  may  be  used 
for  picture  studies. 

Constantly  compare  the  descriptions  and  pictures  of  home 
and  type  forms  with  the  forms  found  around  the  schoolhouse 
where  this  book  is  used.  The  similarities  and  the  differences 
will  be  easily  noted,  especially  if  teacher  and  class  visit  the 
home  scenes  and  carefully  observe  the  conditions. 

The  intelligence  of  the  teacher  is  relied  upon  to  explain,  in  a 
few  cases,  new  words,  terms,  and  diagrams. 

A  few  map  questions  are  given  to  aid  the  teacher  in  making 
others.     Encourage  the  children  to  make  map  questions. 

The  teacher  is  strongly  urged  to  carry  on  the  language  work 
with  every  lesson,  thereby  economizing  time,  fixing  facts  in 
memory  by  means  of  reproduction,  and  giving  the  children 
something  to  do. 

The  language  lesson  is  sometimes  omitted  in  order  to  give 
the  teacher  an  opportunity  to  introduce  her  own  lesson. 

Though  the  lessons  are  arranged  in  what  seems  the  most 
logical  order,  teachers  should  not  hesitate  to  change  the  order 
to  suit  the  season  or  locality. 

Part  I. — Lessons  1,  2.  If  no  park  or  field  is  convenient 
to  the  schoolhouse,  a  road  or  part  of  a  street  will  answer.  Trees 
are  excellent  objects  for  outdoor  study  and  observation. 

Many  of  the  maps,  profiles,  and  diagrams  have  purposely  been 
made  very  simple  as  models  for  the  first  year's  work  of  this 
grade. 

3.  It  is  an  excellent  practice  to  have  the  children  point  in 
various  directions ;  to  point  to  their  homes  and  tell  the  direc- 
tion ;  to  the  church,  town-hall,  etc. 

5.  It  will  help  the  children  to  understand  a  profile  if  the 
teacher  will  illustrate  a  section  with  clay,  or  moulding  sand,  an 
apple,  an  orange,  or  a  potato. 


6.  Italics  are  occasionally  used  for  new  words  and  for  parts 
which  some  teachers  may  desire  to  have  memorized. 

7,  8.  It  is  hoped  that  the  teacher  will  perform  the  simple 
experiments  herein  described. 

9.  The  teacher  is  advised  to  take  only  a  part  of  her  class 
at  one  time  on  the  rainy-day  excursion. 

10.  The  weather  chart  should  at  first  be  simplified  by  omit- 
ting some  of  the  columns.  The  teacher  will  do  well  to  have 
the  chart,  for  the  first  week,  kept  on  the  blackboard  under  her 
supervision. 

11.  The  teacher  may  take  up  each  different  part  of  this 
lesson  in  its  proper  season.  The  diagrams  illustrating  the  effect 
of  the  rays  of  the  sun  at  different  angles  may  need  a  word  of 
explanation  from  the  teacher. 

12.  When  taking  a  class  to  a  city  or  a  village,  be  careful  not 
to  undertake  too  much  in  one  day. 

14.  If  the  ocean  cannot  be  reached,  a  lake  or  a  pond  makes 
a  good  substitute. 

Part  II.  —  Lesson  15.  After  reading  about  the  trip  to  the 
mountain,  the  class  will  be  eager  to  climb  some  neighboring 
elevation  and  make  notes  on  the  way. 

16.  Any  body  of  moving  water  will  be  worth  studying  if 
no  large  river  is  near  at  hand. 

Other  type  forms,  as  a  bay,  an  island,  a  plateau,  a  ridge,  a 
plain,  or  an  ocean,  may  be  found  near  the  school  and  easily 
observed. 

Part  III.  —  If  the  teacher  will  perform  before  the  class  the 
various  experiments  mentioned  in  this  part,  it  will  greatly  in- 
crease the  interest  of  the  pupils.  The  attention  of  the  class 
should  frequently  be  called  to  the  figures,  maps,  and  pictures 
used  in  these  lessons.  Encourage  the  children  to  draw  as  many 
of  the  figures  as  possible. 

Part  IV.  —  Require  the  children  to  consult  the  map  while 
following  these  journeys;  to  tell  what  they  have  learned  as 
they  read  a  paragraph  or  part  of  a  lesson ;  and  to  write  out 
a  summary  of  the  lesson  after  the  reading  and  study.  Thus 
their  attention  and  activity  will  be  exercised  and  the  statements 
will  be  readily  retained.  Encourage  the  children  to  use  their 
imagination  and  to  follow  the  travellers  in  their  various  journeys 
by  laud  and  sea. 


VI 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY    BY    OBSERVATION 

PART  I 


1.    THE   PARK 

THE  children  in  Miss  Hale's  class  in  school  were 
always  glad  when  she  told  them  they  might  put 
away  their  books  and  go  with  her  for  a  lesson  out  of 
doors.  One  June  day  she  took  them  to  a  large  park  in 
the  city  not  far  from  the  school.  Each  child  had  a 
blank-book  in  which  to  take  notes  and  make  sketches. 
A  short  ride  in  the  cars  brought  them  to  the  park. 
How  green  and  beautiful  it  was  after  the  dusty  streets  ! 
Miss  Hale  told  them  that  it  was  owned  and  kept  in 
order  by  the  city,  so  that  the  people  could  enjoy  the 
grass  and  trees  and  breathe  the  pure  air. 

"  You  see,"'  said  Miss  Hale,  "  with  what  care  the 
ground  is  laid  out  to  make  it  beautiful  to  look  at 
and  also  useful.   Paths  run  in  and  out  among  the  trees. 


Think  why  they  are  made.      Here  and  there  we  shall 
find  a  drinking  fountain."    When  the  children  were  walk- 


'.jtk  \T\if  dS3F290K9HM  -  ^3f  v 

Hf/  v j| 

Ll 

w*$ 

^^^^^_559B 

Trees  in  the  Park 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


•iDgover*  a  .low  piece  of  ground,  Miss  Hale  pointed  out 

'sorh'e  higher  places  beyond.     "That  difference  in  the 

ground  "is  very  common  in  most  parks,  streets,  and  other 

parts  of  the  earth,"  she  said.     "Come  with  me  to  the 

higher  part  and  notice  how  the  ground  slopes  up  to  it. 

"  Let  us  climb  to  the  top  and  see  the  fine  view  of  the 

park.     You  will  be  able  to  see  the  houses  on  its  very 

edge."      Large  trees  grew  on  this  hill,  and  when  they 

reached    the   highest   point   Miss    Hale    showed    them 

the  little  pond  in 

Fountain  and  Trees 
the  distance,  where 

some  of  them  sailed 
their  boats.    John 
said     he     thought 
views  were  always 
prettier     if     they 
had  water  in  them. 
That     very    after- 
noon children  were 
sailing  their  boats 
across    this    pond 
and  playing  on  the 
edge  of  it.  A  large 
boy  came  near  the  pond  and  threw 
a    stick  into  the  water;   immedi- 
ately    his     Newfoundland     dog 
jumped  in  and  swam  out  for  the 
stick,   which    he  brought  to   his 
master.      Then   the   children  all 
talked    about  the   usefulness    of 
water  as  well  as  its  beauty. 

With   a   little  help    from    the 
teacher  the  pupils  found  several 
kinds  of  trees  around   the  pond, 
and  in  other  parts  of  the  park, 
maples  and  a  few  chestnuts. 

Leaving  the  trees,  they  came  to  a  fountain  among 
flowering  shrubs.      Here  they  had  a  little  talk  about 


flowers.  They  learned  the  names  of  some  of  them  and 
made  a  fine  page  in  their  books,  telling  about  the  flowers, 
and  making  drawings  of  them  and  their  leaves.  "Where  a 
few  weeks  ago  tulips  and  hyacinths  were  blooming,  they 
now  found  handsome  beds  of  pansies,  roses,  geraniums, 
and  other  summer  flowers.  They  also  drew  branches  of 
the  shrubs  to  show  how  they  grew.  As  they  were  walk- 
ing they  frightened  a  bird  from  the  bushes  and  spent 
some  time  trying  to  find  its  nest.  Miss  Hale  said 
it  was  a  cat-bird,  and  all  the 
children  heard  its  cry,  which  is 
something  like  a  cat's.  There 
were  some  robins  and  many 
sparrows  and  blackbirds  in  the 
park. 

"We  have  been  observing  to- 
day," said  Miss  Hale,  "  a  part  of 
the  surface  of  the  earth  and  the 
life  upon  it.  There  is  much 
more  to  learn  about  these  things. 
Most  of  the  food 


which 
comes 
mals, 
plants. 


man  needs 

from     ani- 

trees,    and 

From  cat- 


There  were  elms  and 


tie  we  get  our  meat, 
and  the  hen  gives 
us  eggs;  trees  fur- 
nish fruit,  and  the 
seeds  of  plants  like 
wheat  supply  flour 
from  which  bread 
is  made." 

On  their  return 
through  the  park  to  the  car,  the  class  came  to  a  statue 
placed  there  in  honor  of  the  soldiers  who  fought  in  the 
Civil  War.  They  also  noticed  what  the  people  were  doing 
to  enjoy  themselves  in  this  lovely  spot. 


Flowers  and  Shrubbery 


LANGUAGE    LESSON 


Write  answers  to  these  questions :  — 

How  did  the  children  reach  the  park  ? 

How  did  it  look  to  them  ? 

Why  do  parks  have  paths  ? 

Where  were  the  trees? 

Tell  about  the  height  of  different  parts  of  the  park. 


Did  the  children  find  any  water  ?    Tell  about  it. 
What  kinds  of  trees  and  flowers  do  you  think  they  found? 
What  statue  did  they  see?     What  birds  did  they  find? 
Do  you  think  the  class  enjoyed  the  trip  ? 
Tell  what  you  see  in  the  pictures,  and  name  those  on  the 
first  page. 


FIELD  WORK 

Write  a  short  account  of  a  park  near  your  school  which  you  have  visited. 


HENKY'S    FIELD 


HENRY'S  FIELD: 
Elms  on  left  and 
in  background, 
Brook  in  centre, 
Slope  and  Divide 
on  right,  and 
Slope  on  left 


Near  View  of  Brook  and  Cascades 


2.    HENRY'S   FIELD 


One  day  Miss  Hale 
took  the  children  for  a 
short  walk  after  school. 
She  carried  her  camera, 
and  promised  to  take  some 
pictures.  Henry,  one  of 
the  class,  wished  to  show 
them  his  field  ;  so  he  led 
the  way  down  Main 
Street  toward  his  home. 
When  they  came  to  a 
place  where  the  street  ran 
along  the  side  of  a  hill, 


North  Side 

//° 

o 

o  V  o 

o 

O 

O     O 

O 

TRIES 

4> 

m 
w 
*-> 

■ 

1 
ilo 

SPEIHO 

\ 

o 

■ 

I 

SLOPE 

1      SLOPE 

DIVIDE 

1  o 

South   Side 
Map  of  Henry's  Field 


Henry  stopped  and  showed  them  a  large  field  bordered 
by  a  fine  row  of  elms,  which  shaded  the  street.  Beyond 
the  elms  was  Henry's  barn. 

"  You  all  know,"  said  Miss  Hale,  "that  this  open  space 
is  called  a  field.  Some  of  you  have  often  played  ball 
here.     This  field  is  a  part  of  the  surface  or  outside  of  the 

earth,  and  we  must  try  to 
learn  something  about 
it."  Then  she  asked  them 
to  think  of  some  differ- 
ences between  the  field 
and  the  park.  Here  are 
the  ones  Henry  gave  :  — 
"  The  grass  in  the  park 
was  cut  very  short,  and 
the  ground  was  rolled  to 
make  it  smooth.  In  this 
field  the  grass  is  not  cut, 
and  the  ground  is  uneven 
and  rough.     We  do  not 


HOME     GEOGRAPHY 


find  walks  laid  out  in  the  field,  and  there  are  not  so  many 

trees  and  shrubs  as  in  the  park.      The  trees  are   not 

trimmed,  and  no  flowers  are  planted  in  the  field." 

"  If  the  field  were  moist  or  marshy  land,"  said  Miss 

Hale,  "  and  level,  it  would  be  called  in  some  places  a 

meadow.      A  field  may 

,        ,        ,  ..  Henry's  Barn 

be    level,    or    it    may 

be  like  this  one,  with 
many  tips  and  downs 
in  it,  and  even  run  up 
on  the  side  of  a  hill. 
We  expect  to  find  grass 
in  a  meadow,  while  in 
a  field  we  may  also  find 
grass,  or,  in  its  place, 
crops  of  grain  or  pota- 
toes.     This    field    has 
grass  now  in  all  parts 
of    it.      The 
land     slopes 
so  much  that 
we    can    see 
nearly  every 
part     of      it 
from  this  one 
corner  where 
we      stand." 
Henry  said  it 
was  oblong  in 
shape.  "I see 
a  brook  flow- 
ing   through 
the    centre," 
said    John, 
"and    near 

the  fence  on  one  side  is  a  group  of  trees.  The 
cows  will  stand  under  them,  when  the  sun  is  hot,  to 
keep  cool."  Look  at  the  pictures  of  the  trees  and  the 
map  of  the  field. 

They  all  had  a  good  run  over  to  the  brook,  and  Miss 
Hale  followed  them.  They  found  it  in  the  lowest  part 
of  the  field,  and  the  land  sloped  down  to  it  on  each  side. 
Miss  Hale  said  a  low  place  between  higher  ones  was 
called  a  valley.  "Then,"  said  Mary,  "the  brook  runs 
through  a  valley."  "When  it  rains,"  said  Miss  Hale, 
"  the  water  flows  down  into  the  brook  from  both  sides, 
and  that  is  the  way  the  brook  is  fed.  See  how  it  moves 
along  between  its  grassy  sides  or  banks,  and  flows  around 
the  large  stones  and  over  the  small  ones.     In  some  places 


A  Meadow 


it  makes  little  pools  and  almost  stands  still.  It  runs 
faster  where  the  land  slopes  much,  and  slower  where  it 
is  more  nearly  level.  If  you  followed  it,  you  would  find 
it  joining  another  large  brook  in  the  field  yonder.  The 
bottom  of  the  stream  is  called  its  bed.     You  can  see  that 

the  brook  is 
constantly 
changing  its 
direction  or 
course,  now 
turning  to 
the  right, 
now  to  the 
left.  This  is 
because  it 
meets  some 
hard  thing 
like  a  stone 
in  its  path 
and  turns 
aside  to  get 
around  it,  as 
a  boy  might. 
When  a 
stream  flows 
through  flat 
land  it  turns 
in  a  way  to 
make  the  let- 
ter S.  In 
some  places 
the  bed  is 
soft  mud,  in 
others  gravel 
and  sand, 
with  a    \^H  ^y/     few  hard  stones." 

'l'lic  rliil-  N^^Bi  ^PyS      dren  found  a  pool 

of  water  some-  ^ *^  what    higher    up    than 

the    brook,         The  Falls  which    was    very   clear 

and    filled    a  little    basin    a    foot  or 

more  deep.  All  around  it  the  grass  was  green,  and  wild 
flowers  grew  near  by.  Miss  Hale  showed  them  that  the 
basin  could  not  hold  all  the  water.  "  Some  of  it  runs 
out,"  said  she.     "  Where  does  it  go  ?  " 

"  It  runs  down  to  the  brook,"  said  a  little  girl,  and 
they  all  saw  it  flowing.  Miss  Hale  then  told  them  that 
the  water  came  up  out  of  the  earth,  and  the  pool  was 
called  a  spring.  It  is  also  called  a  spring  when  the  water 
bubbles  up  out  of  the  ground  and  runs  away  without 


HENRY'S    FIELD 


making  a  pool.  "  The  cows  have  been  here  to  drink," 
Miss  Hale  said.  "  You  can  see  their  tracks  all  around. 
The  little  stream  flowing  from  the  pool  is  a  branch  of 
the  brook." 

Next  the  children  walked  to  a  place  where  the  water 
fell  down  over  some  large  stones,  making  what  is  called 
a  water-fall.  If  the  water  did  not  fall  so  straight  and  so 
suddenly,  but  instead  went  more  gradually  down  over  the 
stones,  it  would  make,  not  a  fall,  but  a  cascade.  All 
crossed  over  now  to  the  other  side  of  the  brook,  and 
walked  up  to  the  higher  part  of  the  field.  Here  they 
could  again  see  that  the  land  sloped  toward  the  brook 
from  both  sides,  so  that  the  rainwater  must  run  into  it. 
Miss  Hale  then  found  a  place  where  the  land  sloped  away 
from  the  brook, 
making  the  rain 
flow  into  another 
stream.  The  land 
or  ridge  separating 
two  streams  is  called 
a  water  -  parting  or 
divide. 

They  had  a  lesson 
on  the  trees  around 
them,  and  you 
should  have  seen 
the  sketches  they 
made! 

The  teacher 
pointed  out  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  a  tree 
—  its  roots  under 
the  ground,  the 
trunk      large      and 

straight,  the  bark  for  covering,  the  branches,  the  twigs 
or  little  branches,  and  then  the  leaves  which  once  were 
only  tiny  buds.  She  told  them  about  the  sap  which  in 
springtime  runs  up  through  little  pipes  or  tubes  under 
the  bark  out  to  the  smallest  leaf,  and  feeds  the  whole 
tree  through  the  spring  and  summer.  The  sap  runs 
back  again  to  the  roots  in  the  fall.  The  solid  part  of 
the  tree  under  the  bark  is  the  wood  which  makes  lumber. 
Standing  under  one  of  the  tall  elms  the  children  noticed 
that  the  large  branches  came  out  from  the  trunk  low 
down,  grew  upward,  and  formed  a  spreading  or  umbrella- 
like top,  the  boughs  drooping  over  in  graceful  curves. 
The  leaves  were  simple,  unequal-sided,  and  not  very 
large.  The  bark  was  rather  rough,  especially  on  the 
trunk.     The  elm  was  the  tallest  of  the  three  trees. 


\\i/  -';  ~i w- 

In  '^ 

m  .  Jt  i'    ^™       *rML. anmuK 

-    */*-,    ;'v    :"..    /«*£ 

I 

m 

... 

Elm  and  Maple   in   Summer 


The  oriole  likes  the  elm  tree  for  his  hanging  nest  be- 
cause the  branches  are  long  aud  slender  and  swing  in  the 
wind,  thus  protecting  his  home  from  enemies.  He  is 
very  gay  in  his  black  aud  yellow  feathers  and  may  be  seen 
darting  in  and  out  among  the  elm  leaves,  whistling 
gayly  all  the  time. 

As  the  class  drew  near  the  maple  tree,  they  noticed 
that  the  branches  grew  up  in  a  way  to  make  the  tree 
less  spreading  than  the  elm,  and  more  egg-shaped.  The 
small  end  of  the  egg  is  usually  uppermost.  The  direc- 
tion and  growth  of  the  branches  of  trees  may  easily  be 
seen  in  winter  when  the  leaves  have  fallen.  The  maple 
leaf  they  found  to  be  pointed  at  the  end  and  to  have 
several   lobes  and  sharp  notches.     The  bark  of  the  maple 

was  fairly  smooth. 

Nuts    are    the 

seeds    of    trees    or 

shrubs.     Mary  said 

the  seeds  of  the  oak 

were   called  acorns. 

John  told   how  the 

squirrels  like  acorns 

and  the  nuts  of  the 

chestnut  tree.   Seeds 

of    trees     are     not 

always  called  nuts. 

The    seeds   of   elms 

and    maples     have 

wings  to  make  them 

fly    about.     The 

maple    may    easily 

be  grown  from  the 

seed,  but  the  growth 

is  slow. 

The  robin  loves  the  maple  tree  and  very  often  builds 

his    nest   there,    safely  out   of  sight   among  the  thick 

leaves.      Early  every  morning  he  wakes   and   sings   a 

sweet,  happy  song. 

Miss  Hale  then  said,  "In  the  spring  maple  sugar  is 
made  from  the  sweet  sap  of  the  maple.  The  leaves  of  the 
red  maple  turn  to  bright  colors  in  the  autumn,  and  make 
the  scenery  in  many  parts  of  the  eastern  states  very 
beautiful.  Many  trees  like  those  we  see  in  this  park  shed 
their  leaves  in  the  fall. 

"Those  having  needle-like  leaves  which  keep  green 
all  the  year  are  called  evergreens.  The  commonest  of 
these  are  pines,  hemlocks,  firs,  and  cedars. 

"  There  are  in  some  parts  of  the  world  trees  several 
hundred  feet  high,  and  so  large  that  a  house  can  be  built 


Elm  and  Maple  in  Winter 


6 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


on  a  single  trunk  when  it  is  sawed  off.  There  are  trees 
whose  leaves  grow  only  at  the  top  of  the  trunk,  and 
each  of  these  leaves  is  large  enough  to  give  shade  to  a 
dozen  children. 

"You  will  be  told  about  trees  that  supply  clothing, 
medicine,  bread,  pudding,  milk,  and  soap.  We  have  many 
kinds  of  fruit  trees,  besides  all  the  different  plants  which 
furnish  us  food  and  clothing.  You  will  learn  more  about 
these  as  you  go  on  in  the  study. 

"Trees  and  plants,  like  animals,  need  good  food. 
This  food  is  found  in  rich  loam.  They  also  need  water, 
air,  sunshine,  and  heat.  Most  plants  and  trees  do  not 
grow  all  through  the  year.  They  do  their  work  in  spring 
and  summer,  and  rest  in  winter.  Such  trees  drop  their 
leaves  in  the  fall,  and  their  branches  are  bare  until  the 
warm  sun  makes  the  sap  run  up  from  the  roots  in  the 
spring.  Then  the  trees  begin  to  grow  again  and  put 
forth  leaves." 

So  the  children  studied  the  field,  which  is  a  part  of  the 
surface  of  the  earth,  and  learned  many  things  about  it. 
This  kind  of  study  is  called  Geography,  which  means  a 
description  of  the  surface  of  the  earth  as  the  home  of 
plants,  animals,  and  man. 


FIELD  WORK 

Answer  these  questions  about  another  field,  brook,  short 
street,  or  road  which  you  have  seen  :  — 

How  did  you  reach  the  place  ? 

What  did  you  see  there  ? 

What  can  you  tell  about  the  grass?  The  trees?  The 
stones  ?    The  animals  ?    The  birds  ?    The  people  ? 

What  was  around  the  field  ? 

Make  a  drawing  of  your  field,  street,  or  brook. 


3.    DIRECTION 

The  next  day  Miss  Hale  went  into  the  yard  before  nine 
o'clock,  and  called  her  geography  class  about  her.  She 
asked  them  to  lead  her  to  the  side  of  the  building  upon 
which  the  sun  was  shining  most  brightly.  When  they 
reached  that  side  they  pointed  toward  the  sun,  and  then 
away  from  the  sun. 

Then  the  teacher  asked  the  children  to  face  the  sun 
and  raise  their  arms  from  the  side,  and  point  with  each 
hand,  noticing  toward  what  object  in  the  yard  each 
hand  pointed.  The  side  of  the  schoolhouse  where  they 
stood   was  called  "  the  rising-sun  side."     They  noticed 


John's  Shadow  at  Nine  o'Clock 


The  Shadows  at  Noon  of  a  Tree  and  a  Boy  Taller  than  John 


John's  Shadow  at  Twelve  o'Clock 


LANGUAGE  LESSON 

Write  about  the  field,  and  use  these  words :  — 
After  school,  route,  row  of  trees,  field,  meadow,   surface, 
slope,  shape,  group  of  trees,  brook,  valley,  spring,  course  of  the 
brook,  another  slope,  water-parting,  game,  Henry's  barn. 
Study  the  pictures. 

Call  your  story  "  My  Trip  to  Henry's  Field." 
Tell  about  two  trees  growing  near  your  school. 
Copy  the  drawing  or  map  of  Henry's  field. 


the  direction  of  the  shadows  cast  by  the  trees  and  posts 
at  this  time.  John  stood  alone,  and  the  children  noticed 
that  his  shadow  was  in  a  line  with  the  shadow  of  the 
tree.  Miss  Hale  took  a  photograph  of  John  and  his 
shadow. 

Afterward,  in  the  schoolroom,  the  teacher  asked  each 
pupil  to  point  toward  the  rising  sun.  Then  she  said, 
"  The  direction  toward  the  rising  sun  is  always  called 
East."  * ■ 


Hot"  trut.   Jb»~fc  "fc/<«.  ix\  c* 


ytsar. 


DIKECTION 


Sun  casting  Shadow 
at  Noon 


The  pupils  who  lived 
in  that  direction  from 
the  schoolhouse  were 
asked  to  point  toward 
their  homes,  and  several 
did  so.  Miss  Hale  then 
wrote  East  on  the  side 
of  the  room  nearest  the 
rising  sun. 

At  recess  the  children 
noticed  that  the  sun 
was  higher  in  the  sky. 

A  little  before  twelve 
o'clock  .the    class   went 
out  into  the  yard  again, 
and    found    that    they 
could  not   see    the   sun 
very  well  from  the  east  side  of  the  building, 
where  they  were    in   the    morning,  so   they 
moved  to  the  side  where  the  sun  shone  most 
clearly  and  directly. 

Again  John  stood  where  the  sun  shone 
brightly,  and  the  children  noticed  the  change 
in  the  direction  of  his  shadow  and  that  of 
the  tree.     John's  shadow  was  a  little  shorter. 

All  the  pupils  pointed  in  the  direction 
that  the  shadow  pointed. 

"On  which  side  of  John,  with  regard  to 
the  sun,  is  his  shadow  ?  " 

"On  the  side  opposite  the  sun." 

"  Point  in  that  direction  and  remember  this : 

"  Tlie  direction  in  which  the  shadow  falls  at  noon  in  the 
northern  part  of  the  world  is  called  North.      Tlie  direc- 
tion   toward    the    sun    at 
noon  is  called  South." 

The  next  day,  at  noon, 
Miss  Hale  placed  an 
upright  stick  on  a  desk 
where  the  sun  shone. 
The  children  noticed  that 
the  shadow  it  cast  in  the 
room  pointed  north  and 
south.  The  direction  of 
the  shadow  —  north  and 
south — Miss  Hale  marked 
on  the  floor  with  chalk. 

At  the  close  of  school  in  the  afternoon  the  children 
were  asked  to  observe  through  which  window  the  sun  was 
shining,  and  they  pointed  from  their  seats  toward  the  sun. 


"  Tlie  direction  toward  the  setting  sun  is  called 
West,"  said  Miss  Hale. 

She  then  drew  a  line  at  right  angles  across  the 
chalk  line  on  the  floor,  and  as  the  children  directed 
she  wrote  the  words  East,  West,  North,  and  South 
on  the  lines. 

Mary  stood  on  the  chalk  cross,  facing  the  set- 
ting sun,  and  raised  her  arms  and  pointed.  As 
she  did  so  she  said,  "  My  right  arm  points  to 
the  north   and  my  left  to  the  south." 

Other  children  did  the  same. 

These  words,  East,  West,  North,  South,  were 
also  written  on  the  proper  sides  of  the  room. 

Then  Miss  Hale  asked  her  pupils  to  tell  how 


y 


The  Dipper  and  North  Star 


Class  pointing  toward  the  Setting  Sun 

to  find  these  directions  in  a 
strange  place  at  night.  They 
could  not  tell  her,  so  she  told 
them  to  ask  some  one  at  home 
to  show  them,  on  a  clear  night, 
the  group  of  stars  called  the 
"  Dipper,"  and  how  two  stars  in 
that  group,  called  the  "point- 
ers," always  point  toward  a 
bright  star  known  as  the 
"North  Star." 

"Let  us  remember,  if  we  face 
the  North  Star  at  night,  that  ice 
are  looking  toward  the  North." 

"How  can  we  tell  the  direc- 
tion when  neither  the  sun  nor 

the  stars  shine  ?  " 

"  By  the  use  of  this  instrument,"  replied  Miss  Hale, 

"in  which  the  needle   always   points  nearly  north  and 


HOME    GEOGEAPHY 


Pocket  Compass 


south ;  that  is,  in  about 
the  same  direction  as 
the  shadow  -  line  at 
noon.  This  little  in- 
strument is  called  a 
compass,  and  it  is  used 
on  all  ships  to  help 
the  sailors  find  the 
direction  in  which  to 
sail  the  ship.  In  the 
pocket  compass  the 
needle  is  over  the  card ; 
in  the  mariner's,  under 
it. 


"  Cliildren,  these  four  directions  and  the  directions  be- 
tween, as  North-ioest,  South-east,  etc.,  are  called  '  the 
points  of  the  compass.'  " 


Mariner's  Compass 
FIELD   WORK 
The  children  were  given  these  questions  to  answer:  — 

1.  On  which  side  of  your  house  does  the  sun  shine  in  the 
morning  before  breakfast  ? 

2.  Does  it  then  shine  into  your  room  ? 

3.  Into  what  room  does  it  shine  at  noon  ? 

4.  On  which  side  of  the  house  does  the  sun  shine  about  five 
o'clock? 

5.  Do  you  like  to  have  the  sun  shine  into  your  room  ?    Why  ? 

6.  If  you  stand  facing  east  and  raise  your  arms,  how  will 
they  point? 

4.     THE    SCHOOLHOUSE 

One  afternoon  Miss  Hale  said  to  the  children,  "  Let  us 
take  this  schoolhouse  as  a  model  building  and  study  it 
in  order  to  describe  it  exactly.  Each  one  will  write  a 
short  composition  about  it.  To  help  you  in  the  study  I 
will  put  upon  the  blackboard  these  guiding  words :  "  — 

1.  Place.  2.  Looks  on  the  outside.  3.  Material. 
4.  Plan  of  the  inside.     5.  Uses. 

In  a  few  days  the  compositions  were  handed  in,  and 
Mary  Scott's  was  considered  the  best.  Here  it  is  for 
you  to  read :  — 


OUR   SCHOOLHOUSE 
Mary  Scott 

Our  schoolhouse  is  on  a  hill  on  the  edge  of  a  great  city. 
It  stands  at  the  corner  of  Main  and  Cross  streets.  The 
electric  cars  run  by  the  door  every  few  minutes. 

My  father  says  the  style  of  the  schoolhouse  is  Colonial. 
It  is  made  of  pressed  bricks,  with  granite  and  marble 
trimmings.  It  is  two  stories  high  and  has  a  steep  roof 
covered  with  slate.  On  the  top  of  the  roof  is  a  large 
cupola,  which  can  be  seen  for  a  long  distance. 

The  yard  is  large,  and  most  of  it  is  behind  the  build- 
ing away  from  the  main  street.  There  is  one  elm  tree  in 
front  of  the  school  and  several  maples  in  other  parts  of 
the  yard. 

The  first  floor  is  divided  into  a  hall,  running  through 
the  building,  and  four  rooms,  one  on  each  corner.  Two 
iron  stairways  lead  to  the  four  rooms  on  the  second  floor. 
These  rooms  are  twenty-four  feet  wide  and  thirty-six  feet 
long.  All  the  rooms  are  heated  by  steam.  In  each  room 
there  are  forty-eight  desks  for  the  scholars  and  a  large 
desk  for  the  teacher. 

Beside  each  room  is  a  clothes-room  and  two  closets. 
Large  windows  give  us  plenty  of  light  even  on  a  dark 
afternoon.  There  are  blackboards  made  of  slate  on  every 
wall. 

Some  of  the  teachers  have  beautiful  plants  in  the  sunny 
windows.  My  teacher  has,  besides  her  plants,  many  pic- 
tures hanging  on  the  walls.  The  picture  I  like  the  best 
is  of  a  flock  of  sheep  under  some  trees.  The  motto  in 
our  room  is,   "Try,  try  again." 

Every  school  day  about  four  hundred  boys  and  girls 
go  to  our  school.  They  are  arranged  in  six  classes.  We 
are  taught  by  different  teachers  in  different  subjects. 
This  plan  we  all  like  because  we  learn  faster.    , 

LANGUAGE   LESSON 
Describe  your  own  schoolhouse,  by  answering   these   ques- 
tions :  — 

1.  AVhere  is  your  schoolhouse  situated? 

2.  How  many  trees  in  the  yard,  and  what  kind? 

3.  Is  the  yard  large  or  small  ? 

4.  Of  what  material  is  the  schoolhouse  built? 

5.  How  many  floors  are  there? 

6.  How  many  rooms  on  each  floor? 

7.  What  is  the  appearance  of  the  room  you  are  in  ? 

8.  Are  the  other  rooms  like  yours? 

9.  Do  you  have  an  assembly  room  ? 

10.  What  other  interesting  things  can  you  tell  ? 

11.  Why  do  you  like  your  schoolhouse? 

12.  How  could  it  be  made  better? 


THE     SCHOOLHOUSE 


5.   NEAR-BY   HILLS 

"  To-day,"  Miss  Hale  said,  "  let  us  visit  some  of  the 
hills  near  the  schoolhouse." 

The  class  went  first  to  the  nearest  hill  back  of  the 
school.  They  reached  this  elevation  by  going  up  Cross 
Street,  just  beyond  the  eastern  end  of  the  schoolhouse. 
The  teacher  called  their  attention  to  the  ascent  or  slope 
of  the  street  as  they  went  along;  in  some  places  the 
ground  ascended  more  rapidly  than  in  others.  In  one 
or  two  places  the  street  was  almost  level.     In  a  few 


The  Schoolhouse 

minutes  they  reached  the  top.  Here  they  found  a  street 
running  along  the  top  of  the  hill  at  right  angles  to  Cross 
Street.  It  seemed  to  be  exactly  on  the  ridge,  as  the  land 
descended  from  it  on  opposite  sides.  Standing  there, 
they  could  easily  see  which  slope  was  the  longer.  It 
was  the  side  farthest  from  the  schoolhouse. 

The  street  on  the  top  or  summit  of  this  hill  was  called 
Nichols  Street,  and  it  had  on  each  side  many  fine  residences 
and  ample  grounds.  Between  these  residences  the  class 
could  see  on  one  side  below  them  the  roof  of  the  school- 
house,  and  on  the  other  side  the  long  slope  which 
had  few  houses  upon  it,  the  bay,  and  wooded  heights 
beyond. 


"  Standing  on  this  street,  children,  you  can  easily  see 
how  some  of  the  water,  when  it  rains,  would  find  its 
way  down  the  short  slope  toward  the  schoolhouse ;  and 
all  the  water  falling  on  the  other  side  of  the  street  and 
back  of  those  houses  away  from  the  school,  or  on  the 
longer  side,  would  run  in  the  opposite  direction. 

"An  elevation  of  land  like  this  hill,  dividing  the  flow  of 
the  rain-ivater,  is  called  a  water-parting,  water-shed,  or 
divide.  How  many  remember  the  divide  in  Henry's 
field  ?     This  divide  is  much  higher." 

The  class  then  followed  Nichols  Street  toward  the 
south,  and  found  that  it  ran  into  a  low  valley  between 
the  first  hill  and  the  second  one  visited.  Miss  Hale 
showed  the  class  how  to  represent  the  valley  and  two 


One  of  the  Rooms 

hills  by  a  simple  outline  or  profile  drawing,  as  given 
on  page  11. 

Passing  across  the  valley,  the  class  came  to  the  lower 
part  or  base  of  the  second  hill,  called  Codnian  Hill.  As 
this  hill  had  fewer  houses  upon  it,  they  could  examine 
its  features  all  the  better.  It  was  much  harder  to  climb 
and  much  higher  than  the  first  hill.  They  approached  it 
from  its  longer  side  or  slope.  This  slope  is  shown  in 
the  picture  (page  11).  A  large,  level  place  was  found  on. 
the  highest  part  or  summit.  This  gave  them  a  very 
good  idea  of  an  elevated  plain  or  plateau. 

Some  of  the  class  had  a  dispute  about  the  height  of 
the  hill,  and  so  referred  it  to  their  teacher,  who  replied, 
"  According  to  the  state  map,  this  hill  is  about  120  feet 
high,  or  nearly  twice  the  height  of  the  first  hill." 

From  the  summit,  broad  views  could  be  seen  in  differ- 
ent directions.     The  finest  view  was  toward  the  south, 


10 


HOME     GEOGRAPHY 


parts  where  you  would  naturally  try  to  cross  the 
chain,  and  if  there  are  roads  over  those  hills,  they 
will  be  found  in  the  lower  parts  of  the  chain. 
Such  places  are  called  notches  or  i^asses. 

"The  tops  of  the  hills  in  the  chain  seem  to 
touch  the  sky,  and  to  be  in  the  shape  of  a  curve. 


Cross  Street:  up  Hill 

across  a  broad  valley  in  which  were  many  houses, 
rich  estates,  fine  roads,  many  trees,  and  a  long  lake. 

Beyond  the  beautiful  valley  rose,  against  the 
sky,  a  number  of  hills  one  after  the  other,  so  as  to 
make  a  chain  or  range  of  hills  or  mountains. 

"  That  series  or  chain  of  hills,  across  the  valley, 
is  about  four  times  as  high  as  this  hill,  and  yet  the  eleva- 
tions are  called  hills  only.     They  look  much  like  most 


Profile  of  the  First  Hill 

mountains.  You  will  notice  that  the  tops  of  the  hills 
are  not  sharp  or  pointed,  but  are  rounded,  as  are  most 
mountain  peaks.  You  may  draw  the  outline  of  the 
summit  of  the  chain,  or  its  profile.     (See  page  11.) 

"  Those  lower  places  between  some  of  the  hills  are  the 


Nichols  Street:  approaching  the  Valley 

"Point  with  your  finger  to  the  place  where  the  earth 
and  sky  seem  to  meet.  Then,  as  you  turn  round,  trace 
this  meeting  line  through  its  whole  length.  What  kind 
of  line  have  you  traced  ? 

"  The  line  where  the  earth  and  sky  seem  to  meet,  on  a 
plain  or  at  sea,  is  called  the  horizon.  Here  the  true 
horizon  is  shut  off  by  the  hills." 


Gentle  Slope 


View  from  Top  of  Hill 


NEAR-BY    HILLS 


11 


The  class  then  went  down  the  other 
side  of  the  hill,  and  found  it  to  be  very 
steep  and  to  lead  down  into  a  small  valley 
containing  a  pond  and  a  grove  of  trees. 

LANGUAGE  AND  FIELD   WORK 

Visit  a  valley,  a  hill,  or  any  elevation  not  far 
from  the  schoolhouse,  and  answer  these  and 
other  questions :  — 

1.  Where  is  the  hill?  In  what  part  of  the 
town  ?  2.   How  did  you  get  to  it  ? 

3.    Is  it  a  high  hill  ?      4.    Are  the  sides  steep  ? 

5.  Is  one  steeper  than  the  other  V 

6.  What  grows  on  the  sides?    On  top? 

7.  What  can  you  see  from  the  top? 

8.  Can  you  see  your  schoolhouse? 

9.  Can  you  see  your  home? 

10.  What  other  hills  are  not  far  away? 

11.  What  is  the  name  of  this  hill? 
Answer  similar  questions  about  a  valley. 
Make  a  drawing  of  the  hill  or  the  valley. 


Long  Slope 


MCHOLS   STREET 


SOMMIT  $&. 

* »5* 


Profile  of  the  Second  Hill 


Chain  of  Hills  seen  across  the  Valley 


Profile  of  the  Chain  of  Hills 


6.    A   TRIP   TO   ANOTHER   PARK 

The  next  Saturday  the  class  went  in  a  special  car  to 
the  large  City  Park  to  see  and  study  still  more  Land  and 
Water  Forms.  One  of  the  boys  had  a  pocket  compass, 
and  showed  how  north  could  be  found  at  any  time. 

1.  Land  Forms. — Near  the  entrance  to  the  park  they 
noticed  a  little  valley,  and  in  this  valley  an  irregular 


hollow  almost  circular  in  shape.  It  was  formed  like  a 
large  dish,  and  so  the  teacher  said :  "  This  hollow  is  a 
good  illustration  of  a  river  Basin,  which  is  the  area 
drained  by  a  river.  It,  however,  lacks  the  water  usually 
found  in  a  large  river  basin.  Imagine  a  little  brook 
in  it  and  the  picture  will  be  more  complete.  Most 
valleys  containing  rivers  are  longer  than  they  are  wide." 
The  next  picture  shows  one  side  of  the  large  valley. 


12 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


1.    PICTURE   STUDY 


The  Side  of  Hemlock  Hill :  One  Side  of  the  Valley 

Look  carefully  at  this  picture,  and  then  answer  these  questions  :  — 

1.  In  what  part  of  the  picture  do  you  see  the  most  trees? 

2.  AVhy  do  not  more  trees  grow  in  the  foreground  ? 

3.  Where  are  there  some  trees  like  these  near  your  school ? 

4.  Are  these  trees  evergreens  ? 

5.  What  can  you  learn  about  hemlock  trees  from  the  picture  ? 

6.  Are  the  pieces  of  stone  which  are  broken  off  sharp  and  pointed,  or  smooth  and  round? 

7.  Where  have  you  seen  a  hill  with  so  steep  a  slope  ? 

8.  Mention  some  differences  between  this  group  of  trees  and  any  group  near  your  home. 


A    TRIP    TO    ANOTHER    PARK 


13 


Entrance  to  the  Park,  or  the  Two  Valleys 


A  short  distance  from  the  basin  they  found  several 
small  valleys  leading  into  a  large  one,  and  then  they 
reached  the  place  where  two  valleys  came  together  like 


Winding  Valley 


the  two   parts  of  the  letter  V.     The  right-hand  valley 

contained  the  entrance  to  the  park. 

In  the  other  valley  was  a  large  field  so  level  and  soft 
and  damp  as  to  be  properly  called  a  meadow. 
One  corner  of  the  meadow  is  seen  in  the  lower 
left-hand  part  of  the  picture.  The  sides  of 
the  large  valley  were  very  steep  on  the  left 
and  much  less  so  on  the  right ;  and  yet  the 
side  that  was  less  steep  seemed  to  be  the 
higher.  The  valley  sloped  gently  toward 
them  as  they  walked  through  it. 

The  teacher  led  the  class  up  the  main 
valley,  and  they  discovered  that  it  was  not 
straight,  but  winding  in  its  course  and  varying 
in  width.  A  good  road  ran  through  it,  many 
kinds  of  trees  grew  on  its  sides,  and  a  brook 
flowed  beside  the  road. 

The  children  and  teacher  climbed  to  the 
top  of  one  side  of  the  valley.  This  top  was 
called  Hemlock  Hill.     From  this  point  they 


14 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


discovered  another  valley  away  to  the 
south,  and  in  the  distance  the  same  chain 
of  hills,  or  mountains,  that  was  seen  from 
Codman  Hill.  This  hill  was  covered  with 
evergreen  trees.  These  trees  were  hem- 
locks, and  gave  the  name  to  the  hill. 

Other  valleys  were  seen  between  the 
surrounding  hills,  and  their  teacher  told 
them  that  a  real  river  basin  included  many 
different  valleys  running  in  different  direc- 
tions and  having  many  different  slopes. 

2.  Land  and  Water  Forms.  —  In  another 
part  of  the  park  they  visited  a  large  body 
of  fresh  water.  They  could  see  across  it  to 
the  bridge  and  trees  on  the  other  side. 
Miss  Hale  told  the  children  that  she  had 
gone  entirely  around  this  body  of  water, 
and  that  the  part  they  could  not  see  looked 
very  much  like  the  portion  near  them. 

"It  is  a  Pond  or  a  body  of  fresh  icater 


A  Pond 

surrounded  by  land.  A  much  larger  body  of  icater  would 
be  called  a  Lake." 

Some  of  the  children  sat  upon  the  sloping  banks  and 
others  stood  on  the  edge  of  the  water ;  that  is,  upon  the 
shore,  which  is  where  the  land  and  water  meet. 

The  pupils  noticed  that  the  shore-line  was  neither 
straight  nor  curved  for  a  long  distance,  but  curved  for 
a  short  distance  and  then  straight ;  that  is,  irregxdar. 

In  one  place,  the  shore  curved  into  the  land 
and  formed  a  Bay,  which  is  a  portion  of  water  partly 
surrounded  by  land. 


Not  far  from  the  bay 
the  land  ran  out  into  the 
water,  and  beyond  this 
point  there  was  a  small 
piece  of  land  covered 
with  grass  and  trees, 
which  seemed  to  be  the 
home  of  ducks  and  nu- 
merous other  birds.  The 
children  wished  to  go 
to  it,  and  their  teacher 
asked  them  to  find  the 
way.  They  tried  to  do 
so,  and  finally,  after 
several  attempts,  con- 
cluded that  this  piece  of 
land  had  water  on  all 
sides  of  it  and  could  be 
reached  only  in  a  boat. 

"  A  piece  of  land,  like 
this,"   said  Miss    Hale, 
"  entirely  surrounded  by 
water,  is  called  an  Island. 
"  Now  look  again  at  the  piece  of  land  near  you.      Is 

the  water  all  around  it  ?  "     "  No." 

"A  portion   of  land  almost  surrounded  by  water  is 

called  a  Peninsida. 

"A  small,  pointed  part,  like  that  at  the  end  of  the 

peiunsula,  extending  out  into  the  water,  is  commonly  called 

a  Point  or  Cape. 

"  There  are  two  common  type  forms  we  have  not  seen 

to-day.    I  will  illustrate  them  on  this  muddy  part  of  the 


The  Top  of  Hemlock  Hill 


A  Peninsula,  a  Bay,  and  a  Cape 


A    TKIP    TO    ANOTHER    PARK 


15 


Miss  Hale  continued :  "  Imagine  the  rain  falling  all 
around  you,  and  what  would  happen  ?  Why,  many 
little  streams  would  be  formed  and  would  run  down  the 
sides  of  the  surrounding  hills  toward  the  lowest  parts  of 
the  valley.  A  stream  would  come  down  this  road,  and 
grow  larger  and  larger  as  it  advanced.  To  protect  the 
road  on  account  of  the  wearing  power  of  water  in  motion, 
the  stream  of  water  must  be  turned  off,  and  made  to 
flow  into  the  river.  Sooner  or  later  much  of  the  water 
from  the  clouds  would  find  its  way  into  the  little  river 
because,  as  you  perceive,  the  river  flows  through  the 
lowest  part  of  the  valley.  The  size  of  the  river  would 
thus  be  greatly  increased  by  the  rain.  I  was  here  a 
few  weeks  ago,  after  a  heavy  rain,  and  the  amount  of 
water  in  this  stream  was  much  greater  than  it  is  to- 


An  Island  in  the  Springtime 

shore.  You  can  see  such  forms  on  any  rainy 
day  if  you  keep  your  eyes  open.  I  now 
make  an  Isthmus.  It  is  a  narrow  strip  of 
land  joining  two  larger  bodies  of  land.  An 
isthmus  has  water  on  .two  sides.  (See 
page  40.) 

"  A  narrow  strip  of  ivater  joining  two  larger 
bodies  of  ivater  is  called  a  Strait.'  A  Strait 
has  land  on  both  sides."    (See  page  40.) 

3.   A  Little  River.  —  On  their  way  home 
they  stopped  to  study  the   big  brook  or  the 
little  river.     Miss  Hale  told  them  about  the 
Source,  or  the  beginning  of  the  stream  higher 
up  in  the  woods  beyond  the  limits  of   the 
park.      "  It  seems  to  start  from  a  little 
pool  or  spring  near  two  trees,  and  to 
follow  the  slope  of  the  land  down 
ward    toward   this    valley.        The 
little  brook  runs  out  of  the  woods, 
through  a  large  field  that  slopes 
only  a  little,  around  a  small  hill, 
across  a  road,  into  another  field, 
through  yonder  piece  of  woods, 
and    then  into  this   valley.      Its 
course   or    route   all    this   time   is 
downward,    following   the    slope   of 
the  land.      Several  smaller  brooks  or 
branches   and    little    springs   pour    their 
supply  of   water   into  this   stream,  gradually 
increasing  its  size.      These  brooks  unite  some- 
what in  the  manner  of   branches  upon  a  tree." 


The  Cascades 


The  Little  River  in  the  Winding  Valley 

day,  and  the  water  was  very  muddy. 

When  you   stand   as   now,  facing 

down  the  stream  toward  its  mouth, 

which   is   where   it  joins   another 

body  of  water,  the   left    bank  is 

on  your   left,  and  the  right  bank 

is  on  your  right  hand." 

Going  farther  down  the  river, 
they  began  to  study  it  more  care- 
fully. First,  the  children  noticed 
that  the  water  flowed  more  swiftly 
in  some  places  than  in  others,  and 
that  the  motion  depended  upon  the 
slope.  By  throwing  in  little  sticks  and 
watching  them,  they  discovered  that  the  sticks 
often  moved  faster  in  or  near  the  centre  of  the 


16 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


A  Waterfall 

stream,  or  where  the  water  was  deepest.   In  one  place 
the  little  river  bent  like  the  letter  Z. 

"  The  onward  movement  of  the  water  is  called  its 
current.  That  part  of  the  stream  which  moves  fastest 
is  sometimes  called  the  main  current." 

Secondly,  the  class  noticed  that  the  river  had  in  sev- 
eral places  worn  away  its  banks  so  as  to  make  deep  bays 
or  inlets.  These  had  in  time  grown  till  the  course  of  the 
stream  had  become  more  and  more  curving,  the  water  in 
some  cases  carrying  the  matter  from  one  bank  to  the 
opposite  bank  farther  down-stream.  A  little  river  in 
the  course  of  time  widens  and  deepens  the  valley  through 


which  it  flows,  carrying  the  soil  and  heavy  materials  farther 
down  toward  the  sea.  Thus  they  learned  again  about  the 
wearing  power  of  moving  water. 

Some  of  the  children  picked  up  stones  in  the  bed  or 
bottom  of  the  river,  and  found  them  rounded  and  very 
smooth.  The  teacher  picked  up  on  the  banks  at  the  foot 
of  a  big  cliff  stones  of  similar  size,  color,  and  formation, 
which  were  very  sharp  and  pointed. 
"  Why  is  there  this  difference  ?  " 

"  Because  the  water  has  turned  over  the  stones  in  its 
bed  and  knocked  them  against  one  another  till  they  have 

become      ^-«- — — -^^     rounded  and  smooth.     This 

work  and  that  of  carry- 
ing waste  are  largely 
done    when     the 
water     is     very 
high     in     the 
spring  of  the 
year." 

Several 

pretty      falls 

were    seen    at 

the  foot  of  the 

cliffs  where   the 

slope   was  greater. 

Beyond  the   meadow 

spoken  of  in  the  first  part 

_.    „     ,       .     ..    _,  of  the  lesson,  the  teacher 

The  Brook  under  the  Trees 

and  her  pupils  found  the 
Mouth  of  this  river,  where  its  waters  joined  another  river. 


Playing  Ball  in  the  Park 


THE    GREAT    RAIN    CIRCLE 


17 


The  Mouth  of  a  river  is  where  it  floics  into  the  ocean 
or  some  other  body  of  water. 

In  one  part  of  the  park  the  larger  boys  were  playing 
ball  and  having  a  pleasant  time.  Miss  Hale  and  her 
class  stopped  to  watch  them. 

FIELD   WORK 
Describe  your  own  park  in  reference  to  Land  and  Water 
Forms,  or  describe   some  fields  in  the  vicinity  of  your  home 
where  water  is  found. 

PICTURE   STUDY 
Observe  the  pictures  in  this  chapter,  and  describe  each  one 
by    asking    and    answering    questions    similar    to    those    on 
page  12. 


7.    AIR   IN   MOTION 

Wind  is  a  source  of  much  wonder  to  children,  but 
wind  is  simply  air  in  motion.  It  is  set  in  motion  by 
heat.  Light  a  kerosene  lamp  and  hold  a  feather  over 
the  chimney  ;  the  feather  moves,  showing  that  particles 
of  hot  air  are  moving  upward.  Turn  the  lamp  up  till 
it  smokes,  then  the  black  sooty  matter  may  be  seen  going 
upward,  borne  by  the  hot  air. 

The  fire  in  a  fireplace  shows  the  sparks,  tongues  of 
flame,  and  smoke  rolling  up  the  chimney.     The  hot  air 


Movement  of  Smoke  and  Hot  Air 


expands,  becomes  lighter,  and  is  forced  up  by  the  cold  air 
in  the  room  rushing  in  to  take  its  place.  From  every 
stove  that  burns  wood  or  coal,  from  every  bonfire  out 
of  doors,  smoke   may  be  seen  moving  upward.      Smoke 


often  ascends  to  a  great  height,  marking  on  its  way  the 
column  of  hot  air. 

Miss  Hale  held  a  thin  paper  bag  over  the  lamp  till 
it  was  filled  with  warm  air.  She  let  it  go  and  it  rose 
to  the  ceiling,  pushed  up  by  colder  air,  just  as  a  cork  is 
pushed  up  when  placed  under  water. 

The  sun  heats  the  earth  unequally,  and  by  so  doing 
heats  the  air  more  in  some  parts  than  in  others.  The 
heated  air  expands  and  becomes  lighter,  and  the  cold  air 
near  by  then  pushes  the  warm  expanded  air  upward  and 
takes  its  place.  This  heated  air  moves  from  the  warm 
parts,  pushed  away  by  the  in-coming  cold  air.  The  warm 
air  moves  from  the  warmer  parts  of  the  earth  toward 
the  colder  parts,  and  the  cold  air  moves  in  the  opposite 
direction.  Currents  of  air  are  thus  constantly  set  in 
motion.     These  movements  of  air  are  called  winds. 

LANGUAGE  LESSON 

1.  Tell  what  is  said  about  the  lamp ;  the  fireplace ;  the 
paper  bag. 

2.  Write  several  things  you  have  seen  a  gentle  wind  do ;  a 
very  strong  wind. 

3.  In  what  direction  does  the  wind  most  often  blow  where 
you  live  ? 


8.    THE   GREAT   RAIN   CIRCLE 

One  day,  at  the  close  of  school,  Miss  Hale  poured  some 
water  into  a  bottle  and  corked  it  up  tightly.  She  placed 
the  same  amount  of  water  in  a  plate  on  her  desk.  The 
children  saw  the  water  as  they  filed  past.  In  the 
morning  they  found  that  all  the  water  had  disappeared 
from  the  plate,  but  the  amount  of  water  in  the  bot- 
tle remained  the  same.  Miss  Hale  then  sprinkled 
water  from  the  bottle  upon  the  floor,  and  in  a  short 
time  it  had  disappeared. 

"The  reason  of  this,"  said  the  teacher,  "is  that  the 
water  in  the  plate  and  upon  the  floor  has  gone  into  the 
air  in  the  shape  of  invisible  moisture  which  is  called 
vapor,  but  the  water  in  the  bottle  could  not  reach  the 
air.  The  process  by  which  water  is  changed  into  vapor 
is  called  by  the  long  word  evaporation,  which  comes,  you 
see,  from  the  word  vapor. 

"  Evaporation  is  going  on  all  about  us.  Wrhen  clothes 
dry,  the  water  in  them  changes  to  vapor  and  disappears 
for  the  time  being  in  the  air.  Great  quantities  of 
vapor  are  constantly  entering  the  air  from  the  ponds, 
lakes,  rivers,  and  other  great  bodies  of  water,  especially 


18 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


from  the  ocean,  the  largest  body  of  water. 
If  water  is  heated,  it  evaporates  or  be- 
comes vapor  much  faster  than  if  it 
remains  cold.  The  greater  the  heat  the 
greater  the  evaporation ;  hence  the  warm 
portions  of  the  earth,  those  near  the 
equator,  produce  enormous  amounts  of 
vapor  which,  in  many  cases,  is  carried 
by  the  winds  over  the  land." 

The  teacher  one  day  brought  a  pitcher 
of  ice-water  into  the  room.  The  pupils 
soon  noticed  that  the  outside  of  the 
pitcher  was  covered  with 
moisture.  As  the  moisture 
could  not  come  through  the 
sides  of  the  pitcher,  the 
teacher  told  them,  it  must 
come  from  the  air.  The  cold- 
ness of  the  sides  of  the 
pitcher  chilled  the  vapor  in 
the  air  and  turned  it  into  the 
visible  drops  of  water  which 
are  seen  in  the  picture. 
This  process  is  called  by  the 
long  name  condensation.  The 
children  repeated  the  experiment  by  breathing  warm 
moist  air  upon  a  cold  mirror,  a  window-pane,  and  upon 
pieces  of  iron,  slate,  and  dark  marble.  The  same  thing 
takes  place,  their  teacher  told  them,  when  a  fog  strikes 
the  cold  trees  and  buildings,  and  water  drips  from  the 
branches  and  eaves. 

The  teacher  then  took  the  class  into  the  basement, 
and  the  janitor  filled  the  room  with  steam.  When  this 
hot,  moist  air  came  in  contact  with  the  very  cold  zinc 
air-box  or  pipe  from  outside,  the  vapor  was  condensed. 


Moisture  on  Pitcher 


Cold-air  Pipes 


Clouds  cooled  by  Mountain ;  Rain  caused ;  Sun  breaking 
through  Clouds 

This  condensed  vapor  showed  itself  in  large  drops  of 
water  on  the  zinc  cold-air  box  and  then  fell  off  upon 
the  floor.  The  children  thus  saw  a  little  shower  of 
rain. 

In  like  manner,  when  warm  currents  of  moist  air 
strike  cold  currents  of  air  or  a  cold  mountain-top,  the 
temperature  of  the  vapor  is  lowered,  the  particles  of 
moisture  come  nearer  together,  and  the  vapor  becomes 
visible  in  the  shape  of  clouds.  The  vapor  in  the  clouds 
is  more  and  more  condensed  until  rain  falls  from  them 


CLOUDS 


upon  the  earth  and  refreshes  it.  These  raindrops  fall, 
and  the  water  from  them  comes  together  in  little  rills 
which  form  streamlets,  —  tiny  streams, —  which  at  last 
unite  with  many  more  to  make  rivers.  The  rivers  flow 
into  the  ocean.  The  ocean  gives  up  some  of  its  water 
as  vapor.  This  vapor,  which  is  warm,  is  carried  away 
over  the  land  and  brought  in  contact  with  a  cold  moun- 
tain-top ;   clouds  are  formed,  and  rain  is  again  produced. 


THE    UMBRELLA    PARTY 


19 


This  circle  of  water  never  ceases  to  keep  in  motion.  As 
fast  as  the  rivers  bring  the  water  back  to  the  ocean,  the 
water  leaves  the  ocean  in  vapor  which  becomes 
rain  or  fresh  water.  Salt  is  left  in  the  ocean  and 
also  in  lakes  which  have  no  outlets. 

LANGUAGE   LESSON 

1.  Do  you  know  a  stream  that  flows  into  a  pond,  a 
lake,  or  another  river? 

2.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  brook  in  sum- 
mer and  in  winter? 

3.  Can  you  feel  moisture  in  the  air? 

4.  How  is  water  changed  when  it  is  heated? 

5.  Are  fogs  common  where  you  live? 

6.  When  do  clothes  dry  the  fastest?     Why? 

7.  Tell  what  good  the  rain  does.     What  harm. 

9.    THE    UMBRELLA   PARTY 

One  rainy  morning,  Miss  Hale  asked  the  children 
to  keep  on  their  rubbers,  cloaks,  and  hats,  for  they 
would  have  their  lesson  in  geography  out  of  doors. 
At  nine  o'clock  the  children  walked  out  into  the 
rain.  Some  of  them  were  photographed  before  they 
started. 

Pirst  she  asked  them  to  observe  the  water 
dripping  from  each  umbrella,  then  to  look  on  the 
outside  of  some  other 
umbrella  and  see  where 
it  was  the  wettest.  "  On 
the  edge,"  all  replied. 
The  teacher  then  held 
her  umbrella  upside  down 
and  let  the  water  fall 
upon  it  in  that  position. 
The  water  soon  collected 
at  the  bottom.  She  then 
asked  Mary  and  John  to 
place  their  umbrellas  so 
that  they  would  overlap 
her  own,  and  see  what 
would  take  place.  The 
water  which  now  dropped 
into  her  umbrella  was 
greatly  increased  because 
it  came  from  three  um- 
brellas instead  of  one, 
or   because    the    surface 


on  which  the  rain  fell  was  made  larger. 

In  the  yard  they  saw  the  water  collect  in  little  hollows 


or  basins.  "  At  first,  children,"  Miss  Hale  remarked, 
"  the  water  soaks  into  the  ground  directly,  but  afterward 

it  collects  in  these 
little  hollow  places 
just  as  it  did  inside 
the  umbrella." 

The  teacher  next 
took  her  class  to  a 
short,'  gently  slop- 
ing street  near  the 
school.  There  they 
saw  the  rain-water 
flowing  toward 
them,  forming  tiny 
streams  which  were 
winding  their  way 
down  the  slope  or 
into  small  pools, 
and  in  many  places 
uniting  to  form 
larger  streams.  The 
source  of  the  water 
was  the  clouds. 

P  i  n  a  1 1  y,  two 
larger  streams  on 
each  side  of  the 
street  were  formed; 
and,  within  two 
rods,  the  two  united 
into  one  stream  of 
water  about  six 
inches  wide.  Soon 
the  stream  turned 
suddenly  to  the 
right,  crossed  the 
earth  sidewalk,  and 
flowed  down  a  steep 
slope  into  an  empty 
lot. 

In  crossing  the 
sidewalk,  the  mov- 
ing water  had 
washed  away  a  good 
deal  of  earth  and 
worn  out  a  good- 
sized  channel,  show- 
ing    several     small 


A  Little  Stream  in  the  Street 


A  Part  of  the  Umbrella  Party 


stones,  over   which   the   muddy   water   dashed,    making 
pretty  cascades  and  falls.      In  the  vacant  lot,  the  water 


20 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


Cascades 


collected  in  a  large  pool.  "  T/ie  smaller  stream  flowing 
into  the  larger  is  called  a  branch  or  tributary,"  said  Miss 
Hale. 

Travelling  a  little  farther  up  the 
street,  the    class    reached    the 
highest    part,   or    the    water- 
parting.      (This    is   plainly  . 
shown  beyond  the  centre  of 
the  picture.)  ' 

Then    they    could    see 
from     under     their     um- 
brellas some  of  the  water 
gathering  and  running  down 
the  slope  of  the  street  which 
they  had  just  come  up.     The  rest 
of  the  water,  forming  a  second  stream, 
flowed    slowly   away   from    them,    in 
the  opposite  direction,  down  a  shorter 
and  steeper  slope  into  the  gutter  of  the  next  street. 

Leaving  the  first  street,  the  teacher  led  the  class  to  a 
sloping  street  farther  away.  They  noticed  how  wet  the 
ground  was  from  the  rain,  and  how  the  water  at  the  top 
of  the  street  soon  began  to  flow  toward  the  gutters  in 
very  little  streams.  It  did  so  because  the  gutter  was 
very  much  lower  than  the  middle  of  the  street.  As  the 
class  went  slowly 
down  the  street  they 


saw  new  tiny  streams 
sending  more  water 
into  the  gutter  from 
the  highest  part  of 
the  road-bed,  and 
also  now  and  then 
from  the  sidewalk. 
In  a  very  short  dis- 
tance the  gutter 
stream  became  sev- 
eral inches  in  width. 
The  water  in  the 
gutter  was  not  very 
clear,  and  Miss  Hale 
asked  them  to  look 
sharply  for  the  cause. 
With  eyes  wide  open, 
under  their  dripping 
umbrellas,  the  boys 
and  girls  examined 
every  part  of  the 
street  for  the  reason 


for  the  muddy  water.  When  they  came  to  a  place  in  the 
street  where  some  repairs  had  lately  been  made,  they 
noticed  that  the  water  from  this  part  was  decidedly  yel- 
low in  color,  like  the  new  earth.  George  asked,  "  Does 
the  water  get  its  color  and  muddy  appearance  from  the 
ground  ?  " 
"Yes,"  replied  his  teacher,  "water  carries  along 
ivilh  itself  more  or  less  earthy  matter  or  waste, 
and  other  substances,  too." 

Soon  the  pupils  came  where  the  water  had 
increased  in  the  gutter  so  much  that  it  made  a 
considerable  noise.      The   amount  was  swelled 


Water-parting  in  the  Street 


Water  cutting  a  Channel  in  the  Street 

still  more  when  a  stream  or  branch  entered  the 
gutter  stream  from  the  road-bed.  Looking  across 
to  the  other  side  of  the  street  they  saw  that  the 
water  there  was  stopped  in  its  flow  and  had 
formed  a  small  pool.  Then  it  changed  its  course 
and  flowed  downward  across  the  street,  cutting  a 
channel  in  the  road-bed  several  inches  deep  and 
fifteen  inches  wide,  according  to  Henry's  measure- 
ments. 

Much  earth  and  stone  had  been  carried  by  the 
water  down  the  hill  a  rod  or  more.  Some  of 
the  sand  had  been  left  on  the  sidewalk.  Some 
of  the  earth  was  also  scattered  along  the  gutter 
for  a  long  distance. 

As  the  slope  increased  the  stream  grew  wider 
and  deeper.  It  carried  along  twigs,  leaves,  and 
bits  of  tvood.  Some  of  these  were  piled  up  against 
the  stones  in  the  gutter,  forming  a  dam  and  keeping 
the  water  back  till  it  rose  high  enough  to  flow  around 
the  outside  of  the  dam. 


OBSERVATIONS    OF    THE    WEATHER 


21 


In  one  place  some  stones  had  been 
left  in  the  gutter,  and  the  water, 
swiftly  passing  between  them, 
made  a  little  example  of  a  gorge. 

In  another  place  the  water  rushed 
over  some  stones  embedded  in  the 
gutter  and  washed  aivay  the  soft  earth 
below,  thus  making  fine  falls.  The 
children  named  these  "  Hale  Falls." 

Where  the  street  was  fairly  level, 
the  water  spread  out  more  and  ran 
much  more  slowly. 

Not  far  from  the  falls  the  children 
reached  the  foot  of  the  slope  and 
found  the  water  spread  out  in  a 
V-shaped  pool.  Here  the  water 
hardly  moved.  John,  with  his  large 
rubber  boots,  kicked  away  the  little 
stones,  sticks,  and  leaves  forming 
the  dam,  and  the  water  moved 
off  rapidly.  The  children  were 
surprised   to   see  the  layer  of  soft 


' 

t 
Wr 

/A 

4§* 

■ 

Y 

1  Hill     h  M^ 

Water-made  Dams  of  Leaves  and  Sticks 


Mud  dropped  when 
Little 


mud  covering 
the  earth  where 
the  water  had 
stood. 

In  talking 
over  the  trip  in 
the  schoolroom 
the  children 
found  that  they 
had  learned 
these  facts :  — 

"  Water  air 
ivays  runs  down 
hill."  "It flows 
the  way  the  land 
slopes."  "  Water 
carries  aivay 
earth  or  ivaste, 
removes  sticks, 
and  sometimes 
stones." 

"  Water  some- 


Water  stood  in  a 
Pool 


times  cuts  channels  in  the  earth  and  hollows  out  rocks." 

"  Soft  mud   is  dropped  wherever  muddy  water  remains 
quiet." 


"Falls  are  formed  when  water 
runs  over  stones  from  a  higher  to  a 
lower  level." 

Out  of  doors  on  a  rainy  day  we 
can  see,  on  a  small  scale,  a  river, 
its  branches,  falls,  a  pool,  a  channel, 
a  gorge.  "We  can  also  observe  the 
power  of  water  in  wearing,  cutting, 
and  carrying. 

LANGUAGE  AND  FIELD  WORK 

Take  a  similar  walk  in  the  rain  and 
tell  what  you  saw. 

10.    OBSERVATIONS   OF   THE 
WEATHER 

"In  different  parts  of  the  year 
there  are  changes  from  day  to  day, 
due  to  the  direction  of  the  wind,  to 
heat  or  cold,  rain,  snow,  or  sun- 
shine. Tlie  condition  of  the  air  at 
any  one  time  in  respect  to  these  j>oints 
we  call  the  weather,  and  its  condition 
for  a  long  time  is  called  climate. 

"You  will  find  it  very  easy  and  pleasant,  children,  to 

observe  these 
changes  during  the 
year,  and  make  a 
record  of  them.  We 
can  do  so  with  the 
help  of  our  eyes 
and  the  use  of  a 
few  simple  instru- 
ments. 

"  One  of  these 
instruments  is  made 
up  of  a  glass  bulb 
and  tube  containing 
a  liquid  called  mer- 
cury, which  expands 
quickly  when  heat 
comes  near  it." 

Mary  brought  to 
her  teacher  from  the 
side  of  the  room 
this  instrument, 
called  everywhere  a 
Mary  with  the  Thermometer  "  thermometer." 


22 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


"  It  tells  us,"  said  Miss  Hale,  "  about  the  amount  of 
heat  or  cold  in  the  air,  in  water,  or  wherever  it  is  placed." 

In  the  air  it  showed  about  70°  of  heat.  Then  John 
placed  the  thermometer  in  some  ice-water,  and  the  tube 
of  mercury  went  down  below  40°. 

"  Please  remember  that  water  freezes  at  32°,  and 
that  it  is  so  marked  on  the  side  of  this  instrument." 


Each  pupil  also  kept  his  or  her  own  record  in  a  large 
blank-book. 

These  records  were  made  twice  a  day  while  school  was 
in  session.  Some  of  the  observations  made,  and  facts 
recorded  by  the  class,  were  the  following,  taken  from 
their  charts :  — 


Date 

Therm. 

at 
8:30  a.m. 

AND 

1:45  P.M. 

Direc- 
tion OF 
Wind 

Amount 

OF 
Wind 

Sky 

Rain 
or 

Snow 

Beginning 

and 

Ending  of 

Rain  or 

Snow 

Dew 

or 

Frost 

Amount 
OF 

Rain 
or 

Snow 

Length 

of 

Day 

Moon 

Remarks 

Sept.  15 
Sept.  16 
Sept.  17 
Sept.  18 
Sept.  19 

56° 
77° 
60° 
66° 
51° 
70° 
50° 
64° 
49° 
65° 

N.W. 

W. 
N.W. 
W. 
W. 

Gentle 
Gentle 
Moderate 
Gentle 
Gentle 

Clear 

Cloudy 

Clear 

Clear 

Cloudy, 
then 
Clear 

Fair 
Rain 

12 :  30  p.m. 
to  4 :  20 

Dew 

Frost 
Dew 

Consider- 
able 

12  h.  33  m. 
12  h.  30  m. 
12  h.  27  m. 
12  h.  24  m. 
12  h.  21  in. 

o 

Very  warm  at  noon. 

Showers    in    p.m. 
Cold  for  the  season. 
but  sun  very  bright. 

Clear  blight  sun. 

Moon  full  and  vary 
bright. 

Oct.  13 

60° 
69° 

W. 

Gentle 

Cloudy 

Little 
rain 

12 :  40  p.m. 
to  1 :  06  p.m. 

Frost 

Slight 

11  h.  14  m. 

2> 

Leaves  begin  to 
turn. 

Nov.  21 

60° 
65° 

s.w. 

Light 

Cloudy 

Shower 

10  A.M.  to 

10:20 

Slight 

9  h.  44  in. 

D 

Warm,   very   dark 
and  damp.  . 

Dec.  22 

20° 
21° 

West 

Moderate 

Cloudy 

9  h.  4  m. 

<C 

Damp  and  chilly. 

Jan.  31 

28° 
33° 

N.E. 

Gentle 

Cloudy 

Snow 

3  P.M. 

Jan.  31  to 
12  m.  Feb.  1 

18  inches 
snow 

10  h.  4  ni. 

o 

A  very  great  snow 
storm   stops  travel. 
No  school  Feb.  1. 

April  10 

43° 
49° 

N. 

Strong 

Cloudy 

Showers 

11:30 
12:40 

.25  inch 

18  h.  6  m. 

• 

June  6 

65° 
91° 

None 

Clear 

Fair 

15  h.  9  m. 

• 

Much   suffering 
from  the  great  heat. 

Weather  Chart :  Some  of  the  Observations  recorded  by  the  Class 


Lucy  then  put  the  thermometer  on  her  warm  arm,  and 
told  the  class  how  fast  the  mercury  rose  toward  90°. 

"  The  other  day  the  doctor  put  his  little  thermometer 
under  my  arm  and  said  that  it  was  98°." 

"  The  normal  heat  of  the  blood,"  said  Miss  Hale,  "  is 
about  98° ;  hence  that  is  marked  on  this  thermometer  as 
Blood  Heat." 

A  thermometer  placed  in  boiling  water  will  show  a 
temperature  of  212°. 

After  these  experiments  the  thermometer  was  hung  up 
on  the  outside  casing  of  a  north  window,  where  the  class 
could  see  it  from  the  yard  and  also  from  the  schoolroom, 
and  daily  observations  were  made  and  recorded  by  the 
children,  in  a  chart  upon  the  blackboard,  of  the  tempera- 
ture, the  direction  of  the  wind,  the  appearance  of  the  sky, 
whether  it  rained  or  snowed,  or  was  fair,  cloudy,  or 
sunny. 


OBSERVATIONAL   WORK 

Make  a  similar  weather  chart  and  record  the  weather  twice  a 
day.     Compare  the  facts  thus  noted. 


11.    THE    FOUR   SEASONS 

Autumn.  —  By  means  of  the  daily  observations  referred 
to  in  the  previous  lesson  the  class  learned  many  impor- 
tant facts.  They  noticed  the  position  of  the  sun  in  the 
morning,  at  noon,  and  at  sunset.  Most  of  them  marked 
carefully  the  first  and  last  position  by  two  points : 
(1)  where  they  stood  to  observe;  (2)  the  place  where 
the  sun  was  on  the  horizon. 

Their  next  observation  was,  "  the  lower  the  sun,  the 
longer  the  shadows."  They  saw  the  noon  shadow  grow- 
ing longer  from  September  to  December  as  the  sun 
became  lower  and  lower  in  the  sky,  or  as  it  went  farther 


THE    FOUR    SEASONS 


23 


and  farther  to  the 

south.  They  also 

observed  that  the 

point    of    rising 

and  setting  grad- 

u  a  1 1  y    moved 

farther  south,  and 

at  the  same  time 

the  days  became 

shorter. 

On    September 

21  the    sun   rose 

about  6  a.m.  and 

set  not  far  from 

6    p.m.,     making 

the    day    twelve 

hours  and  a  few 

minutes       i  n 

length.    In  Octo- 
ber the  days  were 

much  shorter,  and 

on  November  30 

the  time  between 

sunrise   and  sun- 
set had  decreased 

until  it  was  but  nine  hours  and  twenty  minutes. 

At  night   they   noticed   the   different    shapes  of   the 

moon  and  its  apparent  movement  from   east   to  west. 

The  class  also  learned 
that  the  mercury  in  the 
thermometer  usually  stood 
highest  at  noon. 

"  The  reason,"  said 
Miss  Hale,  "that  it  is 
warmer  from  ten  to  two  > 
nearly  every  day,  is  1 
because  at  that  time  the 
rays  of  the  sun  are  pour- 
ing down  upon  us  verti- 
cally, or  straight  down. 
"  Suppose  about  thirteen 
rays  fall  upon  a  line  one 
foot  long,  that  is,  from  A 
to  B,  when  the  rays  are 
vertical.  The  same  num- 
ber of  rays,  when  they  come  at  a  slant,  or  are  very  sloping, 

will  extend  from  C  to  D,  or  over  a  space  two  feet  in 

length ;  consequently  any  part  of  the  line  AB  will  receive 

twice  as  much  heat  as  an  equal  part  of  the  line  CD." 


B 


H 


I 


Diagram  showing  that  Rays  of  the 
Sun  are  spread  over  a  Greater 
Area  at  Sunrise  or  Sunset,  when 
they  fall  at  a  Slant,  than  at  Noon, 
when  they  come  Straight  Down 


Sunset f 


RAYS   OF 


THE    SUN 


A  Suburb  in  Winter 

"Then  why 
is  it  warmer 
at  two  than 
at  twelve  ?  " 
"Because 
there  is  a 
heaping  up  of 
heat,  and  it 
is  greatest 
about  two 
hours  after 
the  sun  is  the 
highest  and 
the  rays  are 
the  most 
direct. 

"As  the 
earth  turns 
round,  the 
place  which 
is  at  B  at  sun- 
rise reaches  D  at  noon,  and  F  at  sunset.  The  distances 
marked  by  the  lines  AB  and  EF  are  each  greater  than 
the  distance  shown  by  the  line  CD. 


Sunrise 


NIGHT 


Diagram  showing  that  the  Rays  of  the  Sun  pass 
through  less  Air  at  Noon  than  in  the  Morning  or 
at  Night 


24 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


2.    PICTURE   STUDY 


Falling  Leaves  —  Autumn 


Look  carefully  at  this  picture,  and  then  answer  these  questions:  — 


1.  What  time  of  the  year  does  this  picture  suggest? 

2.  By  what  signs  is  the  season  shown? 

3.  What  kind  of  trees  appear  in  the  picture? 

4.  Name  five  different  things  to  be  seen. 

5.  Name  as  many  more  as  you  can. 

6.  Are  there  any  houses  on  this  street?      Where? 

7.  Is  the  street  level  or  sloping? 

8.  Is  the  street  paved  or  unpaved? 

9.  Tell  something  about  the  age  of  the  trees. 

10.  AVhat  is  lacking  in  the  picture? 

11.  Do  you  think  that  this  street  is  in  a  city,  a  village,  or  the  country?    Why? 

12.  What  things  in  the  picture  are  the  work  of  man? 


THE    FOUR    SEASONS 


25 


"The  rays  of  the  sun  strike  through  the  air  in  a 
slanting  direction  at  sunrise  and  sunset,  and  so  pass 
through  more  air  than  at  noon,  when  they  go  straight 
through  the  air  at  its  least  thickness.  The  greater  the 
thickness  of  dusty  aud  smoky  air  passed  through  by  the 
rays,  the  less  heat  and  light  reach  the  earth.  This  is 
one  reason  why  it  is  warmest  and  brightest  in  the  middle 
of  the  day.  Another  reason  is,  that  the  same  number  of 
rays  which  fall  upon  a  small  area  at  noon  are  spread 
over  a  much  greater  area  at  sunrise  or  sunset,  when  they 
reach  the  earth  at  a  slant." 

This  reminded  the  class  how  much  man  owes  to  the  sun. 


Winter.  —  The  days  grew  shorter  and  shorter  till  about 
December  21,  when  the  shortest  day  of  the  year  was 
reached,  and  its  length  measured  only  nine  hours  and 
four  minutes. 

"  The  reason,"  explained  Miss  Hale,  "  that  it  is  so  much 
colder  in  winter  than  in  summer,  is  the  same  as  that 
given  for  the  greater  coolness  in  the  morning  and  even- 
ing. 

"  The  sun  is  farther  south  and  lower  in  the  sky  all  day, 
and  so  sends  its  rays  more  slopingly  upon  our  part  of  the 
earth  and  warms  it  less.  Then  the  day,  or  the  time  when 
the  sun  shines,  is  much  shorter  than  the  night,  and  our 


Winter  Sport :    Boys  and  Girls  Skating 


By  reading  their  notes  of  observation  as  a  review,  the 
class  learned  that  autumn  is  noted  for  (a)  the  coming 
of  the  frost,  (6)  the  turning  of  the  color  in  vegetation 
from  green  to  many  shades  of  red,  brown,  and  yellow, 
(c)  the  falling  of  the  leaves,  and  (d)  the  ripening  of  fruits 
and  vegetables. 

"During  autumn,"  said  Miss  Hale,  "the  farmer  har- 
vests his  crops  of  potatoes,  apples,  vegetables,  and  corn. 
In  the  South  cotton  is  picked.  (See  Lesson  37.)  He 
is  very  fortunate  if  he  succeeds  in  gathering  his  prod- 
ucts before  the  long  rains  come  and  injure  them. 
What  are  some  of  the  children's  pleasures  during  this 
season  ? "  "  Gathering  nuts,  picking  autumn  leaves, 
foot-ball." 


portion  of  the  earth  loses  more  heat  than  it  receives. 
The  coldest  days,  however,  come  later  than  the  time  of 
the  shortest  day.  January  was  this  year  our  coldest 
month,  as  it  generally  is. 

"With  this  increased  cold,"  said  the  teacher,  "there 
is,  instead  of  rain  and  fog,  a  new  element,  frozen  vapor 
or  snow.  We  learned  in  a  previous  lesson  that  water 
freezes  at  thirty-two  degrees,  hence  the  snow  generally 
comes  when  the  temperature  is  about  thirty-two  degrees 
or  perhaps  much  below.  Parts  of  the  earth  that  are 
always  warmer  than  this  never  have  any  snow." 

Direction  to  Teachers  :  Each  part  in  this  lesson  may  be 
taken  in  its  appropriate  season  instead  of  the  four  parts  being 
taken  at  one  time. 


26 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


Winter  Pastime  —  Boys  Coasting 

"  Snow  in  many  places  in  the  country  is  not  only  beau- 
tiful but  very  useful  for  travelling  and  sledding.  It 
forms  a  warm  covering  for  the  earth  and  protects  vegeta- 
tion and  keeps  the  dust  from  blowing.  But,  in  the  large 
cities,  snow  is  in  the  way  and  often  proves  a  hardship 
to  man  and  beast. 

"Cutting  ice  and  logging  in  the  North,  gathering  the 
oranges  and  other  fruits   in   the    South, 
are  kinds  of  business  carried  on  in  this 
season  of  the  year. 

"  Are  your  sports  the  same  in  winter  as 
in  autumn  ?  " 

"No.  The  low  temperature  gives  us 
new  pleasures  in  skating,  coasting,  snow- 
balling, and  sleigh-riding." 

Spring.  —  The  class  noticed  that  after 
February  the  increase  in  the  sunshiny 
part  of  the  twenty-four  hours  and  the 
greater  height  of  the  sun  in  the  sky 
diminished  the  cold  and  gradually  in- 
creased the  warmth.  With  longer  days 
came  higher  temperatures.  On  March  21, 
the  day  was  again  about  twelve  hours  in 
length.  By  May  1,  it  had  increased  to 
fourteen  hours. 

The  children  also  observed  that  snow 
came  less  frequently  and  rain  more  often. 
When  the  snow  fell,  it  usually  came  in 
larger  flakes  and  'was  more  quickly 
melted,  especially  in  the  middle  of  the 


day.  Several  times  the  melting  snow 
would  freeze  in  the  evening,  icicles  would 
form  upon  the  roofs,  and  little  rivers  of 
ice  would  form  on  the  streets  and  roads. 

"  All  this  melting  and  freezing  of  snow," 
remarked  their  teacher,  "  is  a  fair  illus- 
tration of  the  great  ice  rivers  and  their 
causes.  These  rivers  are  found  in  cold 
and  mountainous  countries.  They  are 
called  glaciers. 

•'  Icicles  are  usually  made  by  the  melt- 
ing of  snow  on  the  roof,  or  other  elevated 
place,  and  by  the  water  running  down  into 
air  cold  enough  (thirty-two  degrees)  to 
change  it  to  ice. 

"  Where  have  you  seen  icicles  most 
frequently  ? "  "  On  the  south  or  sunny 
side  of  the  house."  "  Because  it  is  warm 
enough  to  melt  the  snow  in  those  places 
where  the  sun's  rays  fall  more  vertically  and  for  a 
longer  time  each  day,  and  because  the  cold  north  or 
northwest  winds  do  not  strike  the  south  side  aud  thus 
drive  off  the  warm  air  as  fast  as  it  is  heated." 

One  boy  said  that  he  had  frequently  seen  the  cattle, 
sheep,  and  hens  get  together  in  the  sun  on  the  south 
side  of  the  barn. 


Spring  Pastime  —  Boys  playing  Marbles 


i    COlORTYPt    CO.,   N.  Y.   i>  C 


A    GREAT    CITY 


27 


"  When  it  is  cold,  on  which  side  of  a  wall,  north  or 
south,  do  boys  like  to  stand?" 

"The  south  side." 

"In  these  cases  the  barn  and  the  fence  turn  off  the 
cold  air  and  allow  the  air  near  the  protecting  wall  to 
become  gradually  warmed.  In  these  sheltered  and 
protected  spots,  the  snow  melts  and  the  grass  and  flowers 
spring  up   early.     But   the   best  illustrations  of   a  pro- 


Getting  in  the  Oats 

tecting  wall  are  trees,  hills,  and  mountains.  Southern 
Europe  and  Asia  are  thus  protected  by  chains  of  lofty 
mountains  from  the  icy  winds  of  the  north  and  become 
delightful  winter  resorts. 

"The  warmer  days  find  the  farmer  busy  with  his 
ploughing  and  planting.  The  boys  fill  their  pockets 
with  marbles  and  hunt  up  balls,  and  the  girls  bring 
out  jumping  ropes  and  hoops." 

Summer.  —  Longer  and  longer  grew  the  days  as 
recorded  on  the  weather  blanks.  June  21  was  the 
longest  day  — 15  hours,  17  minutes.  Then  the  noon 
shadow  was  the  shortest,  as  the  sun  was  the  highest 
in  the  sky  and  rose  farthest  north,  making  the  long- 
est path  in  the  sky  from  sunrise  to  sunset.  The 
class  observed  that  as  the  days  grew  longer  the 
nights  grew  shorter,  and  thus  the  sun  was  shining 
on  the  earth  and  warming  it  up  for  a  long  time 
each  day.  The  arch  the  sun  made  in  the  sky  was 
much  higher  than  the  one  made  in  December. 

"  The  heat  given  out  by  the  sun  during  these  long 
days,"  remarked  Miss  Hale,  "  is  much  greater  than 
what  is  lost  during  the  short  nights,  and  so  it 
accumulates  or  heaps  up,  and  in  July  and  August 


we  have  our  hot  season,  after  the  very  longest  day  in 
June.  What  is  the  effect  of  the  heat  and  rain  upon 
the  vegetation?" 

"  They  make  the  grass,  grain,  and  leaves  grow,  the  flowers 
bloom,  the  apples  and  nuts  become  larger  and  larger." 
"What  month  is  called  the  month  of  roses?" 
"  June." 
"  What  else  have  you  noticed  about  summer?  " 

"  Showers,  and  thunder  and  lightning  are 
common." 

"  Rainbows  are  seen  after  the  showers." 
"  The  heat  is  sometimes  so  great  as  to  be 
dangerous  to  man  and  animals." 
"  Then  thin  clothing  is  comfortable." 
"  What  kind  of  work  is  done  in  summer 
and  not  in  other  seasons  ?  " 

"  Gathering  hay,  wheat,  and  oats." 
"  What  summer  sports  are  enjoyed?" 
"Lawn-tennis,"  replied  one  child. 
"Golf,"    "base-ball,"  "bathing,"  "swim- 
ming," "  boating,"  "  sailing,"  added  others. 

LANGUAGE  LESSON 

1.  Why  do  you  like  winter? 

2.  Which  season  seems  best  for  games? 

3.  Why  do  people  of  the  cities  go  away  in  summer? 

4.  Where  did  you  go  last  summer? 

5.  Tell  about  going  in  bathing. 

6.  What  kind  of  fruit  do  you  like  best,  and  why  ? 

7.  Have   you  ever   been  out  berrying  or  gathering  nuts? 

8.  Tell  about  your  skating,  or  a  sleigh-ride. 

9.  What  is  your  favorite  game,  and  why  ? 

12.    A   GREAT   CITY 

Some  of  the  boys  and  girls  were  taken  by  their  teacher 
one  day  to  visit  a  large  city  near  which  they  lived.    They 


A  Street  in  the  Suburbs 


28 


-  HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


took  the  trolley  car  early  in  the  morning,  for  they  meant 
to  spend  all  the  time  they  could  in  sight-seeing.     How 

they  hur- 
ried along! 
They  soon 
passed 
open  fields 
where  cows 
and  horses 
were  quiet- 
ly grazing, 
and  here 
and  there 
a  strip  of 
woodland. 


Steam  Roller 

Now  they  were 
on  a  bridge 
crossing  the 
river,  and  again 
high  up  over  a 
marsh. 

In  going  from 
the  suburb  to 
the  city,  they 
saw  in  one  place 
workmen  mak- 
ing a  roadbed, 
and  they  learned 
that  the  modern 
road  is  made  by 
first  placing 
large  stones  at 
the  bottom  and 
pressing  these  down  by  means  of  a  steam  roller,  which 
passes  over  them  many  times ;  then  another  layer  of 
broken  stones,  smaller  in  size,  is  laid  over  the  first 
layer  and  pressed  down.  These  layers  are  made  thicker 
in  the  middle  of  the  road  in  order  to  round  up  the 
bed  and  cause  the  rain-water  to  flow  readily  into  the 
gutter.  The  different  layers  are  composed  of  smaller 
and  smaller  sized  stones,  and  last  of  all  a  layer  of  gravel 
or  crushed  stone  is  placed  on  top  and  carefully  rolled 
down.  Roads  made  in  this  way  cost  about  $3000  per 
mile.  They  are  called  "  macadamized  "  roads,  after  their 
inventor,  Mr.  Macadam,  a  Scotchman. 

Farther  on  the  road  changed  to  the  paved  street,  with 


brick  or  artificial  stone  sidewalks.  The  part  of  the 
street  used  by  carriages  was  filled  in  with  blocks  of 
stone,  wood,  or  asphalt.  The  teacher  told  her  class 
that  different  cities  used  different  materials,  being  in- 
fluenced more  or  less  by  the  climate  and  cost.  Boston 
likes  the  granite  blocks.  In  Chicago,  Philadelphia, 
Washington,  and  Buffalo,  many  of  the  wide  streets  are 
covered  with  asphalt. 

The  streets  became  more  and  more  crowded,  the  houses 
nearer  and  nearer  together.  At  last  rows  of  brick  houses 
all  alike  began  to  appear,  then  long  streets  lined  with 
buildings.  In  the  roadways  were  many  trolley  cars, 
heavy  teams,  and  more  and  more  people  moving  about 
on  the  pavements.     They  were  in  the  big  city. 

The  people  came  into  the  city  by  the  steam  railroads 

and  by  the  ele- 
vated road,  as 
well  as  by  elec- 
tric surface  cars. 
Their  trolley 
car  reached  the 
end  of  its  route 
near  the  centre 
of  the  city.  The 
teacher  took  her 
pupils  first  to 
see  the  City 
Hall.  This  was 
a  magnificent 
building  where 
all  the  business 
of  the  city  was 
transacted.     In 


Repairing  the  Street 


it  were 
many  finely 
furnished 
offices ;  for 
here  the 
Mayor,  the 
City  Treas- 
urer, and 
other  offi- 
cials had 
their  quar- 
ters, and 
here    the 


Where  the  Stones  are  Crushed 


A    GREAT    CITY 


29 


city  council  met  every  week  for  business.    They 
walked  through  '  some   of  the   marble  corridors 
and  up  the  elegant  staircases,  visiting  the  hand- 
some  rooms   and   halls.     An    elevator    carried 
them   to   the   top   of  the   great  tower,  from 
which  they  looked  out  over  acres  and  acres  of 
house-tops,  tree-tops,   chimneys,   towers,   and 
church  spires,  and  saw  hills  and  rivers  in  the 
distance. 

But  they  could  not  spend  more  time  here ; 
and  as  the  Post  Office  was  close 
by,  they  walked  to  it,  noticing 
on  their  way  that  the  city  was 
laid  out  in  squares  or  "  blocks," 
as  they  are  called.  The  side- 
walks were  of  brick  or  artificial 
stone,  and  very  hard  they 
seemed,  compared  with  the 
gravel  and  plank  walks  of  the 
village.  They  saw  one  large 
store  after  another  on  the 
streets  through  which  they 
passed.     Some  of  the  buildings 


A  City  Hall 


Elevated  Railroad 

were  so  tall  it  made  their  heads  and  necks  ache  to  try  to 
count  the  stories  in  them. 

One  of  these  "  sky-scrapers  "  was  being  built,  its  great 
steel  frame  rising  to  a  dizzy  height  above  them.  Their 
teacher  showed  them  how  it  was  all  bolted  together,  and 
they  were  much  interested  in  the  great  numbers  of  work- 
men busy  on  different  parts  of  the  structure.  In  putting 
up  these  tall  buildings,  the  frame  is  first  erected.  The 
floors  are  made  to  rest  on  the  frame,  and  the  outer  stone 


or  brick  walls  are  fastened  to  it,  and  so  kept  in  place. 
Before  it  is  covered  the  frame  looks  somewhat  like  a 
steel  bridge,  standing  upright  on  one  end.  Usually 
it  contains  from  ten  to  twenty  stories. 

The  children  were  delighted  to  go  inside  a  finished 
"sky-scraper,"  and  ride  to  the  highest  floor  in  the  eleva- 
tor. It  was  a  considerable  journey.  If  it  were  not  for 
the  elevator  such  buildings 
would  not  be  erected.  Some  of 
them  have  through  the  day  as 
many  as  five  thousand  people 
in  them.  But  for  the  lack  of 
room  in  the  centre  of  towns, 
and  the  high  price  of  land  there, 
"  sky-scrapers  "  would  probably 
never  have  been  thought  of. 

Once  more  on  the  street,  the 
children  were  soon  busily  look- 
ing at  the  beautiful  store  win- 
dows and  the  stream  of  people 
shopping.  So  far  they  had 
seen  only  the  business  centre  of 
the  city,  and  yet  there  were 
several  large 
old  churches 
here  too,  with 
ancient  burial 
grounds  that 
seemed  out 
of  place  in 
all  the  hurry 
and  bustle. 
Now  the 
Post  Office 
came  in  sight. 
It  was  a  fine 
stone  build- 
ing, occupy- 
ing a  large 
part  of  a 
square.  The 
centre  of  it 
was  a  large, 
well  -  lighted 
room  open- 
ing on  wide 
corridors   by 


Building  a  Sky-scraper 

means  of  small  windows.     At  some  windows  clerks  were 
placed  to   weigh   letters   and  packages  and   tell   what 


30 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


postage  they  re- 
quired; at  others, 
stamps  were  sold. 

Two  hoys  in 
the  group  bought 
postal  cards,  ad- 
dressed them  at 
a  desk  which  they 
found  ready  with 
ink  and  pens,  and 
each  wrote  a  mes- 
sage to  a  friend. 
Then  they 
dropped  them 
into  a  slot  placed 
there  for  letters 
and  postal  cards, 
from  which  they 
fell  into  a  box 
and  were  put  into 
a  mail  bag  and 
sent  to  the  proper 
place.  Next  they 
spent  a  few  min- 
utes     in    the 

money-order  room,  where  clerks  were  busy  paying  out 
and  sending  away  money-orders. 

Fire-bells  were  heard,  and  the  children  found  on  going 
to  the  door  that  an  engine  house  was  across  the  way. 
Such  houses  are  placed  in  all  portions  of  cities  so  that 
fires  may  be  quickly  stopped.  Everything  is  ready  in 
them  for  an  instant  start  when  an  alarm  is  given. 

In  Germany  firemen  wait  to  put  on  uniforms  before 
answering  a  call.  Not  so  in  America,  where  horses  are 
always  ready  to  rush  into  their  harnesses  and  the  men 
to  put  on  waterproof  suits  and  hats  and  leave  almost  on 
the  minute  of  the  alarm  for  the  scene  of  the  fire.  The 
shining  engines,  the  bright  red  ladders,  the  well-kept, 
prancing  horses,  the  rushing  hose  wagons,  and  the  jan- 
gling bells  interested  the  boys  and  girls  for  some  time. 
The  fire  was  far  away,  and  when  the  noise  and  excite- 
ment were  over  they  were  all  ready  for  luncheon.  This 
they  were  to  have  in  the  largest  department  store  in 
town. 

In  a  few  moments  they  reached  the  place  and  were 
taken  in  the  elevators  to  the  upper  floor.  Here  was  a 
large  room,  furnished  with  small  tables,  neatly  set,  and 
many  lunch  counters.  Waiters  in  white  aprons  were 
going  rapidly  to  and  fro  with  trays  full  of  dishes.     The 


A  finished  Sky-scraper 


children  were 
soon  seated  at 
the  table,  and 
how  good  the 
luncheon  tasted ! 
When  they 
were  rested  and 
ready  to  go,  they 
wished  to  see  all 
they  could  in  the 
big  store.  As  it 
occupied  the 
greater  part  of  a 
block,  and  was 
several  stories 
high,  they  could 
visit  only  a  small 
portion  of  it. 
They  wished  to 
find  the  book  de- 
partment, and  in 
going  saw  a  cloth- 
ing department, 
a  store  in  itself. 


A  Busy  Scene  near  the  Post  Office 


A    GREAT    CITY 


31 


Mary  and  Alice  had  money  to  buy  books.  For  fifteen 
cents  each  bought  a  well-known  story  book.  The  sales- 
man made  out  a  slip  of  paper  for  each  sale,  telling  what 
book  was  bought,  its  price,  and  how  much  money  was 
given  him  for  it.  He  then  put  book,  money,  and  slip  into 
a  box  and  sent  them  to  the  room  where  change  was  made. 
As  the  books  were  to  be  sent  home,  he  next  wrote  the 
name  and  address  of  each  little  girl ;  soon  the  box  came 
back  and  in  it  the  change  and  the  slips,  showing  that 
the  books  were  paid  for.  When  these  were  handed  to 
Mary  and  Alice,  the  books  were  given  to  a  little  boy  who 
took  them  to  a  counter  near  by  to  be  wrapped  up. 

As  the  children  wished  to  know  all  about  the  journey 
of  the  little  books  through  the  store,  they  followed  the  boy 
and  saw  them  neatly 


done  up  in  brown 
paper  with  the  names 
and  addresses  of  the 
girls  on  the  outside. 
Next  they  went  with 
another  boy  to  the 
basement,  where  he 
put  the  books  on  a 
long  table  in  a  big 
room,  with  hundreds 
of  other  packages.  A 
man  behind  the  table 
was  sorting  the  bun- 
dles, throwing  them 
into  different  pens 
according  to  the  di- 
rections on  them. 

Now  came  the 
driver  of  a  delivery 
wagon,  who  placed  them  on  his  wagon  ready  to  carry 
them  to  their  owners.  This  part  of  the  store  was  like 
a  large  express  office.  Think  how  many  people  handled 
the  books  before  they  reached  the  homes  of  Mary  and 
Alice. 

As  the  class  left  the  basement  they  saw  long  counters 
full  of  kitchen  goods  and  other  household  ware,  stoves 
and  heaters,  trunks  and  bags. 

But  they  had  not  yet  seen  all  the  sights  upstairs. 
They  wished  to  see  the  crockery,  the  ladies'  and  children's 
suits,  the  toys.  On  one  whole  floor  they  found  nothing 
but  furniture  and  carpets  for  sale.  There  were  sixty 
departments,  or  sixty  stores,  all  under  one  roof,  besides 
comfortable  waiting  rooms,  dining  rooms,  and  a  writing 
room.     The  teacher  told  them  about  a  store  she  had  vis- 


interior  of  a  Department  Store :  One  of  the  Departments 


ited  which  had  a  nursery  where  mothers  could  leave  their 
children  and  have  them  cared  for  while  they  shopped. 

An  army  of  workers  are  employed  in  a  great  house  like 
this.  Every  department  has  its  buyer.  The  floor-walkers 
direct  sales  and  see  that  those  employed  attend  to  busi- 
ness. There  are  hundreds  of  salesmen  and  women,  boys 
and  girls  to  carry  bundles  and  money,  men  and  women 
to  wrap  goods,  to  attend  to  their  delivery,  and  to  make 
change.  One  man  spends  his  time  in  directing  the  deco- 
rations of  the  windows  and  the  interior  of  the  store,  in 
order  to  display  goods  and  attract  customers.  Frequent 
entertainments  are  provided  to  draw  people  to  the  great 
store.  At  this  time  there  was  a  collection  of  fine  pictures 
which  the  children  enjoyed. 

The  little  sight- 
seers were  now  tired, 
so  they  rode  in  the 
street  cars  to  the 
market,  which  they 
were  eager  to  visit. 
It  was  in  a  long,  nar- 
row building,  the  first 
floor  of  which  was 
divided  into  separate 
avenues  opening  into 
each  other.  Along 
each  avenue  were 
stalls  for  butchers 
and  provision  dealers 
where,  every  mar- 
ket day,  they  stood 
in  their  white  cotton 
clothes  to  sell  their 
goods.  In  one  part  of 
the  market,  garden  vegetables  were  for  sale  ;  in  another, 
meats  and  poultry ;  in  another,  game  and  fish,  and  in 
another,  butter,  cheese,  and  eggs.  Some  stalls  were  full 
of  plants  and  flowers.  All  these  good  things  that  they 
saw  made  the  children  hungry. 

In  the  early  morning  the  place  swarms  with  provision 
dealers,  who  come  to  buy  for  their  stores  in  various  parts 
of  town.  Later,  men,  women,  and  children  come  to  buy 
food  for  the  day  or  several  days.  Here  they  find  the 
freshest  and  best,  and  here  prices  are  lower  than  else- 
where. One  man  bought  a  barrel  of  apples  and  ordered 
it  carried  to  his  home.  Another  bought  chickens  and 
put  them  in  his  bag.  Women  with  large  baskets 
bought  meat  and  vegetables,  and  carried  them  home  on 
the  car.     At  one  end  of  the  market  was  a  grocery  store, 


32 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


where  tea,  rice,  coffee,  sugar,  and  such  things  were  for 
sale. 

They  learned  there,  and  afterwards  from  their  teacher, 
that  oranges  are  brought  to  the  market  from  California, 
Jamaica,  and  Florida.  Lemons  come  principally  from 
California;  bananas,  from  the  West  Indies.  Meat  is  sent 
chiefly  from  the  great  slaughter-houses  in  Chicago.  Most 
of  the  fish  is  caught  along  the  Atlantic  shore  and  espe- 
cially on  the  Newfoundland  Banks.  Eggs  come  in  from 
country  towns  and  the  Middle  West;  green  vegetables  and 
2>otatoes  from  suburban  farms.  In  winter  these  vegetables 
are  brought  from  the  South,  and  from  hot-houses  near  the 
cities. 

Hire  comes  from  the  Southern  states.  Flour  comes 
principally  from  Minneapolis  in  the  Northwest.     Salt  is 


A  Busy  Scene  at  the  Market 

sent  from  the  western  part  of  New  York  state,  and  from 
Michigan. 

Spices,  such  as  cloves,  ginger,  and  allspice,  come  from 
the  hot  countries  on  the  other  side  of  the  world  called 
the  "  East  Indies."  Tea  is  shipped  to  this  country  from 
China,  Formosa,  and  Japan  in  Asia. 

Coffee  comes  from  Brazil,  far  away  to  the  south,  Central 
America,  Mexico,  and  Java,  a  big  island  halfway  round 
the  earth  from  the  United  States. 

Now  it  was  time  for  teacher  and  pupils  to  return  to 
their  homes.  They  went  back  by  the  steam  cars  from 
the  Union  Station.  It  was  full  of  people  going  and 
coming.  Some  were  hurrying  along  carrying  heavy 
bags ,  fearing  they  should  lose  a  train.  Men  in  uniform 
were  busy  announcing  trains  and  directing  strangers,  and 
porters  rushed  about  with  hands  full  of  baggage. 


It  had  been  a  full  day  for  the  little  party  of  boys  and 
girls.  They  had  seen  and  learned  much  in  their  visit  to 
the  city,  and  especially  had  they  learned  that  we  are  all 
greatly  dependent  upon  others  for  a  regular  supply  of 
food  and  clothing.  Thousands  of  men  and  women  are 
toiling  near  home  and  far  away  to  furnish  us  with  sugar, 
tea,  coffee,  flour,  meat,  shoes,  coats,  and  dresses. 

LANGUAGE  LESSON 
Write  on  one  or  more  of  these  subjects  :  — 

1.  A  trip  to  your  own  city,  or  the  one  nearest  you. 

2.  Street  cars  of  the  city. 

3.  Your  city  water-works. 

4.  Street  lighting. 

5.  Important  buildings :  City  Hall,  Court  House,  churches. 

6.  City  parks  and  squares. 

7.  Main  streets. 

8.  Important  kinds  of  business  in 
your  city. 

13.    SOIL 

Kinds  and  their  Qualities.  —  Miss 
Hale  asked  two  of  the  boys  to  dig 
a  hole  in  the  yard  for  a  post,  and 
to  bring  her,  in  pails,  the  material 
thus  obtained.  They  did  so,  and 
each  pupil  received  for  study  two 
kinds  of  earth. 

First  they  examined  the  kind  of 
earth  under  the  grass,  and  found  it 
to  be  dark  brown  in  color,  and  when 
moistened,  a  little  sticky.  When 
rubbed  on  a  piece  of  glass  some 
particles  scratched  the  glass.  Several  pupils  found 
in  their  portion  little  pieces  of  leaves,  twigs,  and  roots, 
evidently  the  remains  of  plants.  There  was  less  of  the 
remains  of  plants  than  of  the  other  matter. 

The  teacher  put  some  of  the  earth  in  a  bottle  and  filled 
the  latter  with  water.  After  shaking  the  bottle  the 
water  became  muddy,  but  soon  part  of  the  material  set- 
tled at  the  bottom.  Other  parts  were  much  slower  in 
settling,  showing  that  the  earth  was  composed  of  various 
kinds  of  matter.    Earthy  matter  is  called  soil. 

A  pail  was  half  filled  with  this  dark  earth,  and  water 
was  poured  upon  it.  The  water  readily  ran  through  to 
the  bottom  of  the  pail.  The  teacher  then  showed  some 
very  dark  soil  from  a  bog,  made  up  largely  of  dead 
leaves  and  the  like.  This  kind  of  soil  held  water 
too  well   for  plants  to  flourish  in  it.     Good  soil  has 


THE    SOIL 


33 


a  considerable  amount  of  sand  in  it,  and  water  does  not 
stand  on  it. 

"Such  soil  as  this  dark  earth,"  said  Miss  Hale,  "is 
commonly  called  loam."  In  the  yard  the  boys  found  it 
to  be  about  six  inches  deep,  but  on  the  prairies  of  the 
West  it  is  often  over  two 
feet  deep,  and  much  darker 
in  color. 

The  soil  under  the  loam 
was  next  studied.  In  it 
they  found  few  evidences 
of  plant  remains,  but  peb- 
bles of  various  shapes, 
some  broken  in  pieces; 
very  small,  sharp,  and  shin- 
ing particles,  and  some 
pieces  that  were  soft  and 
sticky. 

When  water  was  poured 
upon  it  the  water  went 
through  to  the  bottom,  as 
in  the  case  of  the  loam. 
This  kind  of  earth 
known  as  gravel. 

Arthur  brought  to 
teacher  from  his 
home  a  pailful  of 
another  kind  of  soil, 
consisting  of  small, 
bright,  shiny,  sharp 
grains,  all  about  the 
same  size.  The 
children  found  that 
these  grains  would 
scratch  glass  read- 
ily, which  showed 
that  they  were  very 
hard.  When  placed 
in  a  bottle  of  water, 
the  grains  quickly 
fell  to  the  bottom 
after  shaking,  show- 
ing that  they  were 
heavy.  Water  which 


A  Pile  of  Loam  in  a  Street 


A  Sand  Bank  from  which  Sand  is  being  removed 


run  through  it  as  in  the  case  of  the  others.  The  children 
wet  some  of  it  and  found  it  to  be  soft,  greasy,  and  sticky. 
When  placed  in  the  fire  it  turned  a  red  color.  When 
placed  in  water  and  shaken,  this  soil  mixed  readily  with 
the  water,  but  it  was  hours  before  it  sank  to  the  bottom 

and  left  the  water  clear. 
This  showed  that  it  was 
lighter  than  the  sand. 

"  This  soil  is  called  clay, 
certain  kinds  of  which  are 
used  in  making  bricks  and 
porcelain." 

Sources    of     the    Soil. — 
From  what  source  does  the 
soil    come?     Not    a    very 
easy  question    to    answer. 
The  teacher  gave  the  chil- 
dren pieces  of  broken  slate 
and    sandstone,  and  asked 
them  to  rub  the  pieces  to- 
gether and  let  the  results 
fall  on  paper.     They  did  so 
and  were  surprised  to  find 
that   they    thus    produced 
very  small  pieces  of  stone, 
and  even  dust  which 
looked  like  the  soil 
dug   from   the  hole 
in  the  yard. 

Not  long  after- 
ward the  class 
visited  a  great  mass 
of  rock  forming  a 
high  cliff,  and  at  the 
base  they  found  a 
great  amount  of 
broken,  sharp-edged 
rock,  gravel,  and 
soil,  containing  the 
same  material  as  the 
cliff. 

The  earthworms 
take  the  soil  into 
their  bodies,    grind 


was  poured  upon  this  material  soaked  through  it  rapidly. 
Most  of  the  children  knew  the  right  name  for  this  soil, 
which  was  sand. 

Then  a  fourth  kind  of  soil  was  shown  by  the  teacher, 
and  when  she  poured  water  upon  it,  the  water  did  not 


the  coarser  pieces  together  until  they  become  very  fine,  and 
then  the  worms  raise  this  fine  earth  to  the  surface.  By 
moving  about  in  the  earth  they  keep  the  mass  light  and 
full  of  openings  for  the  water  and  the  roots  of  plants. 
Ants  help  in  the  work  also. 


34 


HOME    GEOGEAPHY 


Trees  growing  between  Rocks 


These  experi- 
ments and  obser- 
vations helped 
the  class  tounder- 
stand  Miss  Hale 
when  she  said, 
"All  four  kinds 
of  soil,  —  loam, 
gravel,  sand,  and 
clay, — have  been 
made  by  nature 
from  stone  by 
rubbing  together; 
by  the  action  of 
moving  water, 
which  grinds 
stones  against 
one  another;  by 
frost,  by  water 
freezing  in  the 
cracks  of  the 
stones  and  then 
breaking  them 
apart,  or  breaking  off  little  pieces;  by. the  action  of  air 
and  the  weather.  Trees  and  other  plants  sometimes 
grow  between  rocks  and  split  them  open. 

"The  damper  the  air  and  the  greater  the  changes  of 
heat  and  cold,  the  faster  the  rock  crumbles  to  pieces. 
Some  rocks  are  acted  upon  much  faster  than  others.  The 
softer  the  rock  the  more  rapid  the  wearing  away. 

"A  rock  formed  of  little  pieces  of  crystal,  thin 
scales,  and  broken  pieces  thrown  together  in  a  confused 
mass,  is  called  granite,  and  is  very  hard.  It  is  fire-formed 
and  does  not  waste  away  rapidly. 

"But  the  pieces  of  sandstone  you  just  rubbed  together 
are  made  up  of  small  grains,  every  one  worn  and  rounded 
as  if  rolled  in  water.  It  is,  you  see,  a  much  softer  rock, 
and  consequently  it  crumbles  very  readily. 

"  Even  softer  than  sandstone  is  chalk,  which  when 
rubbed  on  the  blackboard  leaves  always  a  good  broad 
mark.  This  kind  of  stone  is  made  largely  of  very  small 
shells  and  bits  of  broken  shell,  and  it  was  doubtless 
formed  at  the  bottom  of  the  sea  in  which  once  lived 
the  little  shell-creatures. 

"  Coal  is  a  kind  of  rock  formed  by  nature  out  of  leaves 
and  other  vegetable  matter,  under  great  depth  and  press- 
ure of  water. 

"  By  earthquakes  and  uplifts  and  folding,  the  common 
rocks  have  been   changed  from  their  buried  positions 


A    TRIP    TO    THE    SEASIDE 


36 


Good  Soil  for  Corn  and  Other  Vegetation 

beneath  the  water,  and  raised  so  as  to  form  the  dry- 
land, hills,  and  mountains,  on  which  animals  and  man 
can  live." 

Uses  of  the  Soil.  —  The  next  day  the  children  planted 
some  seeds  in  the  four  kinds  of  soil  and  in  a  mixture 
of  clay  and  sand.  They  afterward  learned  that  the  seeds 
planted  in  the  loam  grew  best.  Those  planted  in  the 
mixture  of  sand  and  clay  grew  very  well ;  but  those  put  in 
gravel,  clay,  or  sand  alone  did  not  grow  well  at  all. 

Miss  Hale  explained  the  reasons :  "  The  loam  allows 
the  water  to  go  to  every  part,  and  plants  need  water.  It 
also  has  in  it  a  large  quantity 
of  plant  -  food,  from  decayed 
vegetation  and  other  sources, 
to  nourish  the  new  plants. 

"  Sand  alone  allows  the 
water  to  pass  through  so 
rapidly  that  the  food  supply 
is  quickly  worked  down  into 
the  sub-soil,  out  of  reach 
of  the  plants ;  but  the  roots 
of  plants  can  readily  find 
their  way  through  the  sand 
in  search  of  this  food. 
Sand  keeps  the  warmth  from 
the  sun  better  even  than 
loam,  so  that  some  plants, 
like    the    water-melon,    grow 

very  well  on  sandy  soil.  Nearly  all  soils  that  are  good 
for  plants  have  more  or  less  sand  in  them. 

"  Clay,  on  the  other  hand,  holds  the  water  on  its  upper 
surface  and  is  so  hard  that  'the  tiny  roots  of  plants  can- 
not easily  penetrate  it.     When,  sand  is  mixed  with  clay 


the  water  moves  through  it  easily  and  the 
two,  mixed  together  with  plant-food,  make  a 
good  soil. 

"The  fields  in  different  parts  of  the 
country  contain  soil  of  many  varieties.  The 
better  the  mixture  of  sand,  clay,  and  loam, 
the  better  for  most  kinds  of  vegetable  growth  ; 
but  different  kinds  of  plants  require  different 
kinds  of  soil.  He  is  a  wise  farmer  who  learns 
what  crops  are  best  for  his  particular  farm. 

"  What  a  dreary  world  this  would  be  if  the 
rocks  had  not  crumbled  to  pieces  in  the  past 
and  if  they  were  not  doing  so  now.  If  there 
were  no  soil  there  could  be  no  vegetation,  and 
consequently  no  animal  or  human  life.  The 
whole  world  would  be  as  dead  as  the  moon. 
These  thoughts  may  help  us  to  have  greater  respect  for 
the  dust  upon  which  we  tread  so  carelessly." 

FIELD  WORK 
Collect  different  kinds  of  earth  from  a  garden,  and  try  to 
learn  what  kind  of  soil  you  have  around  your  house. 

14.    A   TRIP  TO   THE   SEASIDE 

Miss  Hale  went  with  her  geography  class  to  the  sea- 
side on  a  pleasant  school  day  in  September.  The  class 
gathered  together  on  a  long  wharf  in  the  lower  part  of 


The  Wharf  from  which  the  Steamer  started 


the  city.  Here  they  saw  boxes  and  barrels  of  provisions 
and  fruit  all  ready  to  be  carried  to  places  along  the  coast 
where  people  live  in  the  hot  summer.  As  the  class  waited 
on  the  wharf  for  their  boat,  they  saw  ferryboats,  steam 
tugs,  and  coal  barges  moving  about  in  the  harbor.    A  large 


36 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


steamer,  not  far  away,  made  careful  preparation  for  a  trip 
to  Europe.  Two  tugs  assisted  this  "  ocean  greyhound  " 
out  into  the  channel  and  down  the  harbor.  There  was  a 
crowd  of  people  on  board  the  steamer. 


The  Long  Beach.  —  The  principal  attraction  of  the  day 
to  the  children  was  the  long  beach.  Upon  reaching  it, 
Miss  Hale  gave  the  class  a  long  recess,  and  they  broke  up 
into  groups  and  ran  and  chased  one  another  over  the  sand 


Houses  built  upon  Drumlins 


n 


Profile  of  the  Drumlins 


As  the  boat  on  which  the  class  were  taking  their  ride 
•went  down  the  harbor,  they  passed  large  schooners  and 
yachts  at  anchor  ;  they  also  passed  forts  and  lighthouses 
on  islands,  and  summer  residences  among  the  trees  and 
green  grass  on  the  shore. 


The  Long  Beach,  with  Drumlins  at  the  Left  and  Right  in  the  Distance 

In  one  place  Miss  Hale  called  their  attention  to  the 
outline  of  the  land  against  the  sky,  as  seen  from  the 
steamer,  showing  the  piled-up  sand  and  gravel  hills  or 
drumlins.  The  sky-line  here  represented  three  drumlins 
with  straight  spaces  between. 


and  pebbles.  How  attractive  and  delightful  it  all  was ! 
Some  of  the  boys  took  off  their  shoes  and  stockings  and 
waded  into  the  water.  Then  several  of  the  girls  imitated 
the  boys,  and  taking  hold  of  hands  ran  into  the  sea  and 
splashed  and  kicked  about  to  their  hearts'  delight. 

At  a  given  signal 
they  all   gathered 
around  Miss  Hale, 
who,    during     the 
recess,    had    been 
busy    taking    pic- 
tures    with      her 
camera.  She  called 
their  attention  first 
to    the    glint    and 
gleam  of  the  water 
as  reflected  in  the 
bright      sunshine, 
"  which,"  she  said, 
"in  addition  to  its 
restless  movement, 
makes  the  ocean  so 
charming  to  every 
one."     "  Has  the  water  come  in  farther  on  the  beach  or 
gone  out  since  we  arrived  ? "      Most  of    the  children 
thought  it  had  "  gone  out."      "  That  is  true,"  she  said, 
"  and  those  who  noticed  it  have  observed  most  carefully. 
It  is  slowly  receding,  or  moving  out." 


A    TRIP    TO    THE    SEASIDE 


37 


The  Tide.  —  Miss  Hale  explained  that    "  the   rise  and 
fall  of  the  water,  called  the  tide,  equals  about  eight  feet  in 


Low  Tide 

this  vicinity.  'In 
some  places  along 
the  coast  it  is 
greater,  in  some 
less.  High  tide 
comes  twice  in  the 
twenty-four  hours. 
Each  time  it  is 
about  one  hour 
later  than  the  day 
before." 

The  three  pic- 
tures in  this  les- 
son, called  "Low 
T  i  d  e,"  "Half 
Tide,"  and  "  High  Tide,"  will  give 
you  a  good  idea  of  the  tide  and  its 
effect  upon  the  scenery  along  the  coast. 
The  three  pictures  are  three  different 
views  of  the  same  place.  If  you  look 
closely  you  will  see  that  the  remark- 
able difference  in  the  scenery  in  these 
pictures  is  simply  the  result  of  the 
difference  in  the  height  of  the  water. 

Notice  how  high  out  of  water  the 
rock  in  the  foreground  stands  at  low 
tide;  how  much  of  it  is  hidden  at 
half  tide  ;  and  that  merely  the  top  of 
it  can  be  seen  at  high  tide.  Notice 
also   that    you  can    see  more    of  the 


pier  at  the  left  of  the  picture  at  half  tide  than  at  high 
tide,  and  that  you  can  see  more  of  it  still  at  low  tide. 
The  same  comparison  may  be  made 
by  observing  the  forked  post  to  which 
the  boat  at  the  left  is  moored. 

After  high  tide  little  pools  of  water 
are  often  left  standing  in  hollows  in 
the  rocks  and  in  spaces  between  them. 
In  these  places  delicate  sea  weeds  and 
beautiful  sea  animals  may  frequently 
be  seen  and  studied. 

The  cause  of  the  tides  is  the  attrac- 
tion of  the  moon  for  the  water.  The 
study  of  the  exact  way  in  which  this 
works  will  come  in  a  later  year  of 
your  geography  course. 

When  the  children  had  first  noticed 
that  the  water  was 
receding,  or  that 
the  "  tide  was  going 
out,"  Miss  Hale  had 
placed  a  stone  at 
the  edge  of  the 
water  so  that  the 
class  might  observe 
the  movement.  The 
stone  was  soon  left 
high  and  dry,  and 
the  water  retreated 
from  it  steadily  as 
long  as  they  were 
there  to  watch  it. 


Half  Tide 


High  Tide,  about  Six  Hours  later  than  Low  Tide 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


Surf.  — 
"All  day 
long,"  said 
Miss  Hale, 
"  the  water  is 
in  constant 
motion  as  you 
have  seen  it 
to-day.  The 
principal  mo- 
tion is  a  roll- 
ing in  and 
breaking  on 
the   shore, 

called  the  surf.  The  tide,  with  the  surf  movement,  wears 
away  the  coast  and  makes  it  smoother,  grinds  and  breaks 
the  rocks  into  pebbles  and  sand,  and  rounds  and  smooths 
the  pebbles." 

The  children  were  told  to  notice  the  beach.     It  was 
not  alike  in  all  parts  and  would  not  be  represented  in 
outline  by  a  smooth,  even  line  from  A  to  B  gently  sloping 
seaward  thus :  — 
A 


Water  dashing  against  the  Rocks,  or  Surf 


but  by  a  Hue  like  this 
l 


Lace-like  Fringe  made  by  the  Waves 

smooth,  rough,  round,  and  flat;  also  crabs,  clams,  star- 
fishes, shells,  and  seaweed. 

Bathing.  —  While  the  children  were  gathering  their 
specimens,  they  saw  many  persons,  old  and  young,  go 
down  in  bathing  suits  to  play  and  swim  in  the  cold 
water.  Groups  of  children  formed  a  ring  and  danced 
and  splashed  about,  laughing  and  shouting. 


At  1  was  a  wide  band  of  very  dry  sand ; 
at  2  was  often  seen  a  band  of  rounded 
stones  or  salt  water ;  at  3  was  a  barrier  of 
sand  thrown  up  in  some  storm.  At  4  was 
the  smooth,  hard,  wet,  sloping  sand.  At 
5  was  the  surf  when  the  tide  was  out.  At 
high  tide  the  water  came  up  to  1. 

Several  children  showed  Miss  Hale  the 
lace-like  fringe  marked  upon  the  wet  sand 
in  a  small,  white  line  by  the  waves. 

The  children  now  began  to  gather  speci- 
mens from  the  beach  and,  after  showing 
them  to  Mifcs  Hale,  put  them  in  their  paper 
bags.  In  a  short  time  they  collected  all 
they  could  carry,  —  pebbles  in  large  quan- 
tities,  pebbles    of    all    colors    and    sizes, 


Pupils  showing  Specimens  to  their  Teacher 


A    TRIP    TO    THE    SEASIDE 


39 


The  Rocks.  — 

It  was  now  time 
for  luncheon, 
and  the  teacher 
led  the  class 
from  the  sandy 
beach  to  the 
high  rocks 
farther  south. 
Here  comfort- 
able seats  were 
found,  and  the 
luncheon  was 
greatly  enjoyed 
by  hungry  boys 
and  girls.  Fresh 
water  was  ob- 
tained from  the 
spring  among 
the  rocks. 

From     the 
rocks,     various 


Rocks  where  the  Children  ate  their  Luncheon 


the  great  land 
forms,  and  the 
whole  earth 
must  be  shaped 
like  a  ball  or 
an  orange. 

It  was  a  good 
day  to  be  at  the 
shore,  for  the 
summer  drill  of 
the  war-ships 
was  in  progress. 
War-ships  have 
to  drill  as  well 
as  soldiers. 
Early  in  the 
afternoon  a  pro- 
cession of  these 
vessels  moved 
by  in  a  single 
column  and 
passed     out    to 


Children  watching  the  Battle-ships  disappear:  a  Proof  that  the  Earth  is  Round 


points  along  the  coast  were  seen.  Two  pretty  islands 
were  not  far  away  to  the  left.  Capes  and  projections  ran 
out  into  the  sea. 

Surface  of  the  Ocean.  —  The  horizon  line  was  seen  bet- 
ter here  and  more  like  a  curve  than  before.  Following  it 
partly  around,  it  was  easy  to  believe  that  the  surface  of 
the  ocean  is  spherical  in  form,  and  if  the  ocean,  then 


sea.  At  last  nothing  could  be  seen  of  the  one  in  the 
lead  but  its  smoke  on  the  horizon.  The  smoke-stack 
of  the  next  one  was  in  sight,  but  not  the  ship  itself. 
The  hull  of  the  third  could  be  seen,  in  part,  and  still 
more  of  the  hull  of  the  fourth.  Only  the  ships  in  the 
rear  and  nearest  to  the  children  were  seen  as  a  whole. 
They  asked  Miss  Hale  why  this  was  so. 


40 


HOME    GEOGRAPHY 


"  When  we  look  at  the  horizon  it  seems  curved,  sug- 
gesting that  the  surface  of  the  water  may  be  spherical. 
If  that  be  true,  then  the  steamer  farthest  away  would 
probably  be  mostly  below  the  range  of  the  eye,  because 
we  can  see  in  straight  lines  only.  I  can  illustrate  what 
I  mean  by  a  drawing  thus :  — 


"  The  curved  line  CD  represents  the  spherical  surface 
of  the  water ;  if  we  place  the  eye  at  A,  then  AB  will 
represent  the  line  of  vision.  The  disappearance  of  ships 
as  they  sail  away  past  the  point  shown  by  the  arrow  at 
E,  which  is  the  horizon,  is  a  good  proof  of  the  round- 
ness of  the  earth." 


In  one  place  the  beach  consisted  of  small,  round  peb- 
bles ;  in  another  there  were  great  boulders,  which  could  be 
seen  very  plainly  at  low  tide. 

In  other  places  they  saw  rounded  hills  or  druTnOas,  of 
sand  and  gravel,  and  climbed  upon  them.  Some  of  these 
were  broken  off  on  the  sea  side  by  the  furious  action  of 
the  ever  breaking  water. 

One  island  was  near  enough  to  the  shore  to  form  be- 
tween it  and  the  main  land  a  strait.  A  strait  is  a  nar- 
row passage  of  water  connecting  two  large  bodies  of  water. 

In  another  place  the  shore  was  connected  with  a  small 
piece  of  land  by  a  long,  narrow  strip  of  land  forming  an 
isthmus.  An  isthmus  is  a  narrow  neck  of  land  connecting 
tivo  larger  bodies  of  land. 

This  was  a  day  rich  in  varied  experiences,  and  the 
class  went  home  tired,  but  with  a  better  idea  of  coast 
lines,  of  the  shore,  beach,  and  surf.  Standing  by  a  pond 
or  lake,  they  had  learned,  one  may  see  a  shore,  a  beach, 
movements  of  the  water  called  waves,  an  island,  isthmus, 
strait,  pebbles,  and  weeds. 


LANGUAGE  LESSON 

1.  Write  a  story  about  a  wreck. 

2.  Describe  the  shore. 

3.  Describe  the  beach. 

4.  If  you  have  been  to  other  beaches, 
or  have  read  about  them,  tell  what  you 
know  about  them. 

5.  Tell  about  the  movement^  of  the 
salt  water  called  the  surf. 

6.  Give  a  reason  for  believing  that  the 
earth  is  round. 


A  Strait 

Coast  Line.  —  The  children  were 
greatly  interested  in  the  afternoon  in 
studying  the  shore,  or  coast  line,  and  in 
learning  the  variety  of  forms,  shapes,  and 
appearances  it  presented.  First  they  saw 
the  smooth  beach  and  the  simple,  gentle 
curve ;  then,  near  by,  the  hard,  broken, 
and  pointed  rocks  on  which  they  ate 
their  luncheon.  Did  the  sand  and  peb- 
bles come  from  the  rocks  ?  WThy  should 
the  pebbles  be  smooth,  instead  of  sharp  like  the  rocks  ? 

The  low,  smooth,  sandy  beach,  they  learned,  was  like 
much  of  the  Atlantic  coast,  the  high  rocky  part  being 
similar  to  that  found  in  so  many  places  along  the  New 
England  coast. 


An  Isthmus 

7.  Tell  why  we  enjoy  surf-bathing. 

8.  Tell  how  a  large  ocean  steamer  is  often  taken  down  the 
harbor. 

9.  Describe  a  wharf  and  tell  what  may  be  seen  on  it. 
10.   Describe  an  isthmus  and  a  strait. 


The  Presidential  Range 


GEOGRAPHY    THROUGH    TYPE    FORMS 

PART  II 


15.  A  MOUNTAIN  — MOUNT  WASHINGTON 

Miss  Hale  said  that  -Nellie  might  tell  the  class  about 
her  trip  to  Mount  Washington.  This  is  what  Nellie 
said :  — 

White  Mountains.  —  "  Last  summer  I  visited  the  White 
Mountains  in  New  Hampshire.  (See  map,  page  107.)  In 
going  there  we  went  first  over  a  level  part  of  the  coun- 
try, then  through  several  valleys,  around  high  hills,  and 
across  several  rivers.  As  we  advanced  farther  from  the 
coast  and  the  cities,  the  land  became  more  and  more 
like  pasture-land  and  less  used  for  crops.  The  hills 
slowly  changed  to  mountains.  The  cars  seemed  to  be 
going  up  grade  and  to  move  much  more  slowly.  At 
last  we  passed  between  high  mountains  which  stood 
near  each  other,  leaving  room  for  river  and  road  only. 
This  narrow  place  was  called  'Crawford  Notch.' 

"  We  reached  the  large  hotel  in  the  afternoon.  From 
the  windows  of  our  room  we  could  see  the  long  line  of 
mountains  called  the  '  Presidential  Range.'  This  name 
is  given  to  them  because  several  of  the  peaks  are  named 
after  presidents  of  the  United  States.  Mount  Washing- 
ton is  in  the  centre  of  this  range,  and  it  is  the  highest 
of  them  all  —  the  highest  peak  in  New  England. 

"  At  sunset  the  mountains  reflected  the  pink  rays  of 
the  setting  sun. 

"  The  next  day  was  clear,  and  the  great  mountain  was 
without  a  cloud.     We  rode  several  miles  from  the  hotel 


to  the  base  of  the  mountain.  From  the  car  we  saw 
deep  forests,  one  lovely  fall  of  water,  and  several  small 
streams,  and  caught  now  and  then  a  view  of  the  great 


Crawford  Notch 


41 


42 


TYPE    FORMS 


peaks,  which  grew  grander  and  more  and  more  distinct 
as  we  approached. 

The  Ascent.  —  "  We  changed  cars  near  the  foot  or  base 
of  Mount  Washington.  As  we  had  plenty  of  time  before 
the    next   train 


started,  we 
looked  about. 
The  view  of  the 
range  here  is 
very  fine.  At  a 
distance  it 
seems  like  a 
wall  of  granite 
rising  against 
the  horizon. 
Nearer,  it  ap- 
pears sharp  on 
the  top,  very 
steep,  and  partly 
covered  with 
forests.  There 
are  deep  valleys 
on  its  sides 
called  ravines. 

"Do  not  think 
that  the  side 
of  Mount  Wash- 
ington  is 
straight  and 
smooth,  like  the 
sloping  roof  of 
a  house.  It  is 
cut  up  into  ter- 
races, knobs, 
deep  ravines, 
and  gullies.  In 
many  places  it 
is  covered  with 
coarse  dirt  and 
boulders.  The 
distance  from 
the  base  to  the 
top  is  about 
three  miles,  over 
which  a  cog  rail- 
road runs. 
There  is  only 
one  car,  which 
an    engine 


View  from  the  Base  of  Mount  Washington 


pushes  from  behind.  At  first  we  could  see  nothing  on 
account  of  the  evergreen  trees  that  cover  the  base  of  the 
mountain. 

"  In  steep  places  the  car  inclined  so  much  that  we  felt 

we     should    be 


The  Cog  Railroad 


dropped  out. 
Every  quarter 
of  a  mile,  how- 
ever, there  came 
a  level  space. 

Mountain  Veg- 
etation. —  "  One 
of  the  first  signs 
that  we  were  a 
great     distance 
up  was  the  fact 
that    the    trees 
were      smaller. 
About     two- 
thirds    of     the 
way  up,  scarcely 
any  trees  were 
to  be  seen.  Soon 
there  were  only 
low      bushes, 
coarse    grasses, 
and  mosses.    In 
one    place    we 
passed  on  a  long 
trestle  over  a  val- 
ley.    The  track  is 
here  so   steep  that 
it  is  called   'Jacob's 
Ladder.'    We  greatly  en- 
joyed the  views  as  we  went 

up.     They  became  grander 
Engine  on  Jacob's  Ladder  ,  .         ,         . 

and  grander,  the  higher  we 

climbed.      I  never  saw  so  much  of   the   earth  at 

once  as  I  did  from  Mount  Washington. 

"  We  found  ourselves  by  and  by  on  a  level  with 

many  of  the  peaks.     I  saw  the  earth  below  as  if 

it    were   a  map  —  mountain    ranges  with  valleys 

between,  villages  nestling  among   the   hills,  lakes 

here  and   there,  green   fields   and  winding  rivers, 

roads  that  at  this  height  seemed  paths  — all  spread 

out  on  what  seemed  a  flat  surface.      I  could   see 

the   Ammonoosuc  Valley  stretching  away  west  to 

the  Green  Mountains  in  Vermont.      To  the  right 

was  the  summit  of  Mount  Washington,  and  below 


A    MOUNTAIN  — MOUNT    WASHINGTON 


43 


Mount  Monroe  from  the  Ammonoosuc  Valley 


it  a  great 
yawn  i  n  g 
gulf.  The 
buildings  on 
top  were 
now  very 
distinct. 
Farther 
away  were 
the  peaks  of 
Jefferson 
and  Adams, 
with  their 
heads  al- 
most in  the 
clouds. 

"  It  was 
as  if  we 
were  climb- 
ing a  lad- 
der to  the 
top  of  the 
mountain. 
The  higher 

we  went,    the   broader    the  view,   for   the    day 
was  very  clear.     The  horizon  sank  farther  and 
farther  below  us  and  made  a  more  and  more 
perfect  circle.     Looking  at  it,  I  could  easily 
believe  that  the  earth  was  round. 

The  Summit.  —  "At  the  summit  we  all 
stepped  out.  Nothing  could  be  seen  on  the 
mountain-top  except  stones  and  small  boul- 
ders piled  up  in  great  confusion.  There 
was  no  gravel,  and  not  loam  enough  to  fill 
a  flower-pot.  It  is  much  colder  there 
than  at  the  foot  of  the  mountain,  and  snow 
remains  a  long  time. 

"Mamma    says   that   mountain-tops    are 
often  broad  and  level,  —  not  pointed,  as  we 
think.     On  that  of  Mount  Washington  there 
is  plenty  of  room  for  a  number  of  buildings. 
From  the  observatory   we   had   a  magnificent 
view  of  a  wilderness  of  peaks.     Eastward,  we 
could  see  the  Atlantic,  and  in  other  directions  for 
many  miles  into  other  states  and  Canada.     There  is 
an  electric  light  on  the  summit  which  is  visible  one 
hundred   miles  away. 

Sometimes  the  temperature  is  mild  and  springlike  on 
the  mountain  ;  but  it  is  more  apt  to  be  cold  and  windy. 


Small  buildings  are  chained  down  to  keep  them  from 
being  blown  away.  While  we  were  up  there  it  blew 
harder  and  harder,  and  grew  so  cold  that  we  needed 
all  our  wraps.  How  glad  we  were  to  go  into  the  hotel 
with  its  warm  rooms  and  a  good  dinner  waiting  for 
us !  It  was  strange  to  find  this  comfortable  place 
up  among  the  rocks  and  peaks." 

Miss  Hale  thanked  Nellie  for  her  interesting  talk, 
and  asked  her  to  show  the  children  the  pictures  she 
had  taken  of  the  White  Mountains.  Then  Miss  Hale 
said :  — 

Walking  Down.  —  "  When  I  visited  Mount  Washing- 
ton, my  friends  and  I  walked  back  from  the  summit 
to  our  hotel  so  as  to  see  more  of  the  mountain.  We 
started  on  the  southern  path,  going  down  a  steep 
ledge  which  brought  us  to  Mount  Monroe.  Here-  we 
had  a  fine  view  of  Mount  Washington,  and  could 
realize  its  height.  Not  far  away  lay  the  Lakes  of  the 
Clouds,  five  thousand  feet  above  the  sea.  Here  and 
there  we  saw  a  waterfall.  Once 
we  walked  some  distance 
along  a  narrow,  nearly 
level  ridge,  where  the 
views  were  very 
beautiful.  We 
could  look  off 
just  as  if  we 
were  standing 
on  the  ridge- 
pole of  a 
house.  Soon 
we  had  to 
climb  up 
again  in 
order  to  find 
a  good  way 
down  the 
mountain. 
This  often  oc- 
curs in  moun- 
tain climbing. 
"  Great  drops 
of  rain  began  to 
fall  as  we  reached 
the  woods  on  Mount 
Clinton,  two-thirds  of 
the  way  down.  A  shower 
was  upon  us.  Lightning 
flashed,    thunder    rolled, 


44 


TYPE    FORMS 


echoed,  and  reechoed  among  the  peaks ;  tall  trees  bent 
before  the  blast.  Before  we  reached  the  nearest  hotel 
we  were  all  wet  through,  but  mountain  climbers  must 
expect  this,  and  no  one  complained.  It  had  been  a 
wonderful  day,  and  we  had  learned  much  about  a 
mountain. 

Mountain  Systems.  — "  In  this  region  you  see  many 
mountain  chains,  hundreds  of  peaks,  valleys,  moun- 
tain streams,  and  waterfalls,  and  here  and  there  a  small 
lake.  All  these  have  been  named.  It  would  take  a  life- 
time to  explore  them  all,  for  they  extend  thirty  miles 
from  east  to  west,  and  forty-five  miles  from  north  to 
south.  Such  a  collection  of  ranges,  chains,  peaks,  and 
valleys  we  call  a  mountain  system  —  but  this  is  a  very 
small  system. 

'<>On  the  map  of  New  Hampshire,  page  107,  see  how 
few  lines  are  used  to  represent  this  system,  well-known 
and  visited  every  summer  by  many  people.  Notice  how 
little  space  is  given  on  the  map  of  the  United  States, 
page  99,  to  the  White  Mountains,  compared  with  that 
occupied  by  the  ranges  of  mountains  running  along  the 
Atlantic  coast.  This  last  is  the  great  Appalachian 
Mountain  System,  and  this,  you  will  see  by  the  map,  is 
small,  compared  with  the  system  along  the  Pacific  Ocean, 
on  the  other  side  of  the  country." 

LANGUAGE  LESSON 

Give  an  account  of  your  ascent  of  some  hill  or  mountain, 
or  tell  what  you  can  of  the  trips  just  described. 

Write  about  Mount  Washington  as  if  you  had  been  there, 
using  the  pictures  given  in  the  lesson. 

1.  What  is  a  mountain  system? 

2.  How  does  the  land  appear  when  you  approach  a 
mountain  ? 

3.  Is  a  mountain  a  divide  ? 

4.  Of  what  use  are  mountains  ? 


16.   A  RIVER  — THE   HUDSON 

Mountains  are  very  frequently  the  home  or  source  of 
rivers,  and  so  we  turn  now  to  a  river  which  has  its  be- 
ginning among  the  great  hills.  In  New  York  State  is 
found  an  interesting  river  called  the  Hudson  (see  map 
on  this  page).  Many  people  know  it  and  love  its  beauties. 
Let  me  tell  you  about  a  trip  which  a  party  of  friends 
once  took  from  its  source  to  its  mouth. 

Source.  —  One  day  they  found  themselves  by  a  lake  on 
a  high  mountain  side,  far  from  the  haunts  of  men.  Their 
guide  told  them  that  the  little  lake  was  called  the  "  Tear 


of  the 
Clouds,"  be- 
cause  its 
blue  waters 
seem  to 
drop  from 
the  clouds. 
The  Indians 
called  the 
mountain 
"  Cleaver  of 
the  Sky," 
because  it  is 
so  high  and 
sharp.  It  is 
now  known 
as  Mount 
Marcy.  It 
was  named 
after  a  noted 
New  York 
statesman. 
The  little 
lake  is  four 
thousand 
feet  above 
the  river's 
mouth,  and 
is  the  source 
of  the  noble 
Hudson 
River. 

The  party 
made  its 
way  around 
this  lake, 
and  in  doing 
so,  found  a 
little  brook 
flowing  into 
it — a  brook 
so  small 
that  they 
could  easily 
step  across 
it.  On  the 
other  side 
of  the  lake 
was  the  out- 


Lake 

Mt.  Marcy     Tear  of  the 
AWAiitAV&a         Cloud* 


Staten  Island 


The  Hudson  River,  from  its  Source  to  its  Mouth 


A    RIVER  — THE    HUDSON 


45 


let,  a  stream  which  they  followed  a  little  way,  noticing 
rapid  movements  over  the  rocks. 

.Not   far  away  from    the   lake   were  Tear 

other  streams.    One  of  these  cut  deep 
channels  through  the  solid  rock 
where   the  slope  was  steep 
enough  to  cause  a  rapid 
current ;     another  was 
so  wide  that  the  party 
had  to  cross  it  on   a 
log. 

Some  time  was  spent 
on  the  upper  course  of 
the  Hudson.  Farther 
down  they  came  again  to 
the  little  brook  from  the  "  Tear 
of  the  Clouds  " 
and  found  that 
it  flowed  into 
"Opalescent 
River,"  so  called 
because  its 
colors  are  in 
many  places 
like  those  of  an 
opal.  This  river 
u  nites  wi  th 
streams  flowing 
from  other 
lakes,  and  forms 
the  north  branch 
of  the  Hudson. 
Some  of  these 
lakes  are  sur- 
rounded by  deep 
forests  in  which 
are  many  kinds 
of  wild  animals, 
as  squirrels, 
wolves,  foxes, 
deer,  and  black 
bears. 

Tributaries 
and  Falls.  —  A 
few  days  later 
these  friends 
were  travelling 
over  the  Blue 
Mountain   re- 


Opalescent  River 


its      gion,  —  a  land  of  lakes  and  brooks,  —  and  then  on  toward 
the  southeast,  crossing  stream  after  stream  which  united 
of  the  Clouds  to  swell  the  volume  of  the  Hudson   in 

its  middle  course.    The  last  five  miles 
of  this  trip  were  through  a  nar- 
row valley  beside  the  Hud- 
son,   where    they    could 
frequently      see      the 
waters   dashing    over 
the    rocks    in   rapids 
and  cascades. 
Near    the    railroad 
station  at  North  Creek, 
the  river  began  its  work 
of    carrying    logs    to    the 
mills  below.      (See   cut,   page 
46.)     In    one 
place  it  rushed 
through  a  long, 
narrow   defile. 
Several      miles 
below  this,  it  re- 
ceived  a    large 
tributary    from 
the     east,     and 
fifteen    miles 
farther       down 
another     and 
larger    branch 
came    in    from 
the  west.  These 
additions   bring 
so  much  water 
that  the  Hudson 
becomes  a  strong  and  powerful  stream, 
and  the  logs  are   carried  rapidly  down 
to   the    saw-mills   which     are    situated 
wherever  falls  are  found. 

One  of  the  most  beautiful  of  these  falls 
is  Glens  Falls.  It  is  well  worth  while  to 
stand  on  the  bridge  below  these  falls  and 
watch  the  water  dashing  and  foaming, 
shooting  and  lashing,  roaring  and  splash- 
ing, over  the  ledges  of  rock  where  once 
swarthy  Indians  came  to  hunt  and  fish. 
Glens  Falls  marks  the  dividing  point 
between  the  rough  and  wild  portion  of 
the  river  and  the  peaceful  scenery  below. 
The  general  direction  or  course  of  the 


46 


TYPE    FORMS 


North  Creek:   near  the  Railroad 

Hudson  is  from  north  to  south.  Before  reaching  Glens 
Falls,  where  it  descends  seventy  feet  over  black  limestone 
rock,  it  flows  a  short  distance  due  east.  A  few  miles 
below  the  falls  it  turns  abruptly  toward  the  south  again. 

By  and  by  our  friends  could  see  from  the  car  windows 
a  great  river  leaping  over  a  ledge  of  rocks  and  falling 
down  in  a  wide,  white  sheet  of  water.  It  was  the  mighty 
Mohawk,  coming  from  the  west,  and  bringing  to  the 
Hudson  enough  water  to  double  its  volume. 

Cities.  —  Two  large  cities  were  soon  reached,  Troy  on 
the  left  or  eastern  bank,  and  Albany  on  the  right 
or  western  bank.  As  these  cities 
are  built  on  small  hills,  they  can 
readily  be  seen  across  the  river. 
Albany  is  the  larger  of  the  two 
cities,  and  contains  an  elegant  and 
costly  statehouse,  or  State  Capitol. 
The  banks  of  the  river  here  are 
very  abrupt,  and  some  of  the 
streets  in  the  city  are  very  steep. 
This  city  has  grown  rapidly  since 
the  Erie  Canal  was  finished.  Sev- 
eral railroads  centre  here  and  some 
cross  the  river  by  an  iron  bridge. 

The  lower  course,  which  is  the 
navigable  part  of  the  river,  begins 
at  Troy.  Here  the  travellers 
secured  seats  in  the  bow  of  a  large 
steamer  from  which  they  could  see 
both  sides  of  the  river.  They 
noticed,   as    they    glided    swiftly 


along,  that  the  banks  of 
the  river  were  at  first 
well-wooded  and  almost 
in  their  natural  state.  The 
scenery  here  was  not  in- 
teresting. Now  and  then 
they  passed  some  height 
where  sheep  or  cattle 
were  grazing,  or  sighted  a 
village  among  the  trees. 

Scenery.  — When  they 
had  gone  about  thirty 
miles  they  began  to  see 
hills  of  considerable  size, 
and  then,  on  the  right, 
mountains.  These,  how- 
ever, were  often  concealed 
from  view  by  the  banks 
of  the  river  or  the  foot-hills.  Fine  residences  and 
summer  houses  became  more  numerous.  Cliffs,  points, 
and  wooded  heights  were  passed,  one  after  the  other.  On 
the  eastern  side  they  saw  a  large,  deep  bay  in  which 
Fulton  built  the  Clermont,  the  first  practical  steamboat. 

The  constantly  changing  width  of  the  river  adds  very 
much  to  its  beauty.  About  halfway  to  New  York,  at 
Poughkeepsie,  the  river  is  wider  than  usual,  and  here  the 
boat  glided  under  a  fine  iron  railroad  bridge.  Below  the 
bridge  the  river  became  narrower  and  the  banks  much 
higher.      Upon  one  of  the  steep  banks   stood  a  city  of 


Glens  Falls:    Water  falling  over  Limestone 


A    RIVER  — THE    HUDSON 


47 


some  size  called  Newburgh.  In  the  Revolutionary  War 
Washington  once  had  his  headquarters  in  this  city. 
The  stone  house  is  still  standing. 

The  Highlands.  — 
Below  Newburgh 
the  most  picturesque 
part  of  the  river, 
called  the  Highlands 
of  the  Hudson,  was 
reached.  Here  the 
river  cuts  across  a 
great  natural  barrier 
and  forces  its  way 
onward  toward  the 
sea.  As  the  steamer 
approached  the  en- 
trance to  the  High- 
lands, it  seemed  as 
if  it  were  going 
through  a  gate  into 
some  beautiful  place 
beyond.  This  open- 
ing or  gate  is  between 
Mount  Breakneck  on 
the  east,  and  on  the 
west  the  bold,  stern 
peak,  called  by  the 
poet  Willis  "  Storm 
King." 

Idlewild,  a  bit  of 
charming  country, 
rich  in  hills  and 
dales,  where  Willis 
lived,  is  seen  on  the 
left.  You  can  tell 
something  of  the  ap- 
pearance of  these 
mountains  from 
their  well  -  chosen 
names.  Storm  King 
is  fifteen  hundred 
feet  high  and  is 
clothed    with    trees 

to  its  summit.      As  Storm  King 

the    river   tears   its 

way  along  between  these  great  barriers,  it  is  only  about 
half  its  previous  width,  and  its  current,  of  course,  is  far 
more  powerful. 

West  Point.  —  Still  farther  down,  Cro'  Nest  signals  to 


Iron  Railroad  Bridge  at  Poughkeepsie 


a  peak  opposite,  and  both  look  down  upon  West  Point  at 
their  feet.  Few  places  have  more  really  beautiful  sur- 
roundings than  West  Point,  where  our  army  officers  are 

educated.  The  view 
from  Fort  Putnam, 
above  the  Military 
Academy,  out 
toward  Newburgh, 
can  hardly  be 
matched  for  variety 
and  loveliness. 

The  party  are  now 
among  historic 
scenes.  A  little 
below  West  Point, 
but  on  the  opposite 
side,  is  the  place 
where  Benedict 
Arnold,  the  traitor, 
escaped  to  the  Brit- 
ish vessel  Vulture, 
when  his  treason 
became  known. 

For  nearly  twenty 
miles  the  party 
sailed  on  through 
bodies  of  water  al- 
most enclosed  by 
overhanging  peaks. 
In  one  place  the 
river  forms  a  beauti- 
ful crescent  in  pass- 
ing around  a  lofty 
peak  known  as  An- 
thony's Nose.  You 
will  think  there 
must  be  some  resem- 
blance in  this  moun- 
tain to  a  human 
nose ;  but  this  is 
not  true. 

Two    Revolution- 
ary forts  were  built 
opposite  this  peak, 
because  the  river  is 
very  narrow  here,  and  the   position  was   favorable   for 
preventing  the  enemy  from  coming  farther  upstream. 

In  a  short  time  the  steamer  glided  through  the  southern 
gateway  to  the  lovely  Highlands,  and  sailed  into  a  wide  bay. 


48 


TYPE    FORMS 


Farther  down,  the  river  widens  out  into  a  still  larger 
bay  called  the  "  Tappan  Zee."  Here  are  seen  the  white 
wallsof  thepris- 
i  oners'  palace, 
the  well-known 
Sing-Sing  prison 
of  New  York 
state.  Sing-Sing 
in  the  Indian 
language  means 
"stone  upon 
stone." 

On  the  same 
side  of  the  bay, 
but  farther 
south,  are 
Irving's  home, 
"Sunnyside," 


The  Hudson  from  West  Point 


The  Palisades.  —  More  and  more  the  party  realized,  as 
they  advanced  in  the  trip,  that  the  river  was  increasing 

in  size  and  im- 
portance. The 
eastern  shore 
for  many  miles 
is  an  extended 
suburb  of  New 
York  City.  The 
western  shore  is 
a  frowning  wall 
of  trap  rock, 
known  as  the 
Palisades,  ris- 
ing from  two  to 
five  hundred 
feet  above  the 
river.     Seen 


Tugboat  with  a  Tow  of  Canal  Boats 


and  the  places  he 
speaks  of  in  his  writ- 
ings —  Sleepy  Hol- 
low, Tarrytown,  and 
Ivvington. 

The  farther  south 
the  vessel  steamed, 
the  more  numerous 
became  the  sailing- 
craft  on  the  river. 
She  met  and  passed 
canal-boats  in 
bunches,  hurried  on 
by  powerful,  noisy 
tugs;  and  schooners, 
steamers,  and  every 
variety  of  yachts  lent  life  to  the  scene,  and  made  the 
surface  of  the  noble  river  seem  a  busy  highway. 


One  of  our  War-ships  on  the  Hudson  near  Grant's  Tomb 


from  a  distance,  it 
looks  like  a  real  stone 
wall,  gradually  de- 
creasing in  height  as 
it  approaches  the 
south  ;  but  in  the 
nearer  view  it  is  seen 
to  be  much  broken  up 
by  valleys  and  small 
peaks. 

The  great  increase 
in  the  river  travel 
showed  that  a  great 
city  was  near.  Soon 
a  part  of  New  York 
City  appeared  on  the 
left.  Then  came  Riverside  Park,  with  its  stately  monu- 
ment to  General  Grant.    In  a  short  time  the  boat  steamed 


A    RIVER  — THE    HUDSON 


49 


The  Palisades  and  Yachts 


LANGUAGE  LESSON 
Write  some  account  of  a  river  or  brook  in  or  near 
your  town  or  city. 

17.    A  TYPICAL  VALLEY 

Miss  Hale  one  day  told  the  class  about  taking 
Henry  to  spend  a  few  weeks  with  her  on  a  farm 
in  a  valley.  They  had  a  horse  and  carriage  and 
drove  about  where  they  pleased. 

Flood  Plain.  —  In  their  drives  they  found  that,  like 
most  other  valleys,  this  one  lay  among  the  foot-hills 
of  a  mountain  range  and  was  part  of  a  larger  val- 
ley. Through  it  flowed  a  river,  and  in  the  lower 
part  of   it   a    large    village    spread    out   over   the 


along  between  lower  New 
York  and  Jersey  City. 
This  part  of  the  Hudson 
is  sometimes  called  the 
North  River.  Near  the 
landing  pier  the  Statue 
of  Liberty  came  into  sight 
in  the  distance,  and 
towards  it  stretched  the 
great  harbor,  full  of  life. 

New  York  Harbor.  —The 
harbor  is  formed  by  the 
union  of  the  East  River, 
which  is  on  the  opposite 
side  of  Manhattan  Island 
from  the  Hudson,  and  the 
North  River.  Although 
the  Atlantic  Ocean  is  sev- 
eral miles  away  through 
the  Narrows,  or  entrance 
from  the  lower  bay,  the 

mouth  of  the  Hudson  may  be  considered  as  being  in  New 
York  Bay.  Before  landing,  the  travellers  saw  in  the  har- 
bor every  variety  of  craft,  —  ferry-boats  loaded  with 
many  passengers  ;  hundreds  of  tugs,  moving  ships  of  all 
sizes  or  towing  long  floats  filled  with  freight  cars ;  yachts 
of  great  beauty  and  value ;  schooners,  large  and  small ; 
steamers  and  ships  from  all  parts  of  the  world. 

The  little  party  of  friends  had  come  from  the  wild 
woods,  the  quiet  lakes,  the  sparkling  brooks,  the  green 
banks,  and  quiet  summer  homes,  to  the  mouth  of  a 
great  river  and  to  one  of  the  busiest  seaports  in  the 
world,  —  Greater  New  York,  the  second  city  in  size  and 
importance  on  the  globe. 


New  York  Harbor 

flood  plain.  A  flood  plain  is  formed  by  a  river  in  time 
of  overflow,  when  the  mud  and  silt  brought  down  from 
the  hills  are  left  along  the  banks  in  the  shape  of  flat, 
level  land.  These  floods  usually  occur  in  the  spring- 
time, when  the  melting  snows  and  the  heavy  rains  in- 
crease the  volume  of  the  rivers.  Flood  plains  are  also 
formed  in  lakes,  and  whenever  muddy  water  begins  to 
move  slowly.  Notice  in  the  first  picture  how  much  the 
river  looks  like  a  lake.  In  his  drives,  Henry  learned 
that  this  flood  plain  was  nearly  encircled  by  high 
hills,  green  with  trees,  shrubs,  and  grass ;  and  from 
the  hill  tops  he  saw  many  beautiful  views.  As  a  flood 
plain  has  rich  soil,   there  were  fine  farms  in  this  part 


50 


TYPE    FOE  MS 


The  River  in  the  Valley 

of  the  valley.  Trees  grew  along  the  banks  of  the 
river. 

In  the  large  village  were  some  factories,  and  it  was  the 
centre  of  trade  for  the  towns  around  it.  Every  summer  the 
railroad  brought  many  visitors  to  it  from  the  great  cities. 

Water  Power.  —  One  day  Miss  Hale  and  Henry  took 
a  drive  through  the  middle  part  of  the  valley.  Eor  the 
first  five  miles  the  road  ran  over  a  nearly  level  plain, 
with  glimpses  now  and  then  of  the  river.  Under  great 
elms  they  drove,  past  thriving  farms  with  large  houses 
and  barns.      Suddenly  the  valley  grew  narrower,  the 


slopes  became  steeper,  and  the  valley  bed 
inclined  more  and  more,  making  falls  and 
rapids    in    the   river   and   so  giving  the 
town  water-power.      Soon  they   found    a 
woollen-mill  near  the  river  bank.     Beyond 
the  mill,  the  valley  grew  still  narrower, 
turned  to  the  left,  and  then  divided  into 
two  valleys  as  you  see  on  the  map.     Each 
valley  had  its  river.     Another  village  soon 
came  in  sight,  with  a  street  full  of  stores, 
a  post-office,  a  hotel,  two  churches,  a  hand- 
some town  hall,  a  large  high  school,  and 
many  fine  residences.     (See  cut  of  village 
on  page  102.) 
The  valley  was  too  narrow  for  the  number  of  people, 
and    many    houses   were  built    high   up  on    the    steep 
slopes.      Two   chances    for    water-power,   one    in    each 
branch  valley,  had  helped  to  build  up  the  village.     The 
valley  to  the  left  was  the  one  in  which  Henry  and  Miss 
Hale  were  staying  with  Parmer  Brown,  and  the  house 
soon  came  into  sight. 


Farmer  Brown's  Home 

As  Henry  went  about  among  the  people  he  noticed 
that  the  farmers  and  their  children  were  good  workers. 
They  liked  to  work,  and  were  not  ashamed  of  it.  The 
children  enjoyed  going  to  school.  They  could  use  their 
eyes ;  and  if  they  did  not  talk  as  fast  as  a  city  boy,  they 
were  stronger  in  body  and  good  thinkers,  with  much  am- 
bition to  be  somebody  and  do  something.  They  liked 
Henry  and  he  asked  some  of  them  to  come  to  see  him 
in  his  city  home,  and  promised  to  show  them  many 
interesting  sights. 


Map  of  the  Valley 


A    TYPICAL    VALLEY 


51 


Farmer  Brown's  Barn 


The  farm  lay  on  both  sides  of  the  river.  The  farmer 
kept  ten  head  of  cattle  and  two  horses  in  his  comfortable 
barn.  How  Henry  enjoyed  the  barn  and  the  animals 
in  it !  He  was  up  early  to  see  the  men  milk,  and  after- 
wards he  drove  the  cows  to  pasture  beside  the  river. 
At  night  he  brought  them  home  again  to  be  milked.  He 
took   his  little   cup   to   the  barnyard,  and  had  it  filled 


1 

si  ft 

^ 

>S   ' 

V    1f&: 

Sji*r  i  iii  mi      BMB 

21 

>■§»-  - 

Bridge  over  a  Brook 

hoe  corn,  pull  weeds,  pick  berries,  and  shell  beans.  He 
could  tell  peas,  beans,  onions,  and  potatoes  growing  in 
the  garden,  and  he  knew  a  barley-field  from  one  of  oats. 

In  roaming  about,  Henry  noticed  that  about  every  half 
mile  a  little  brook  came  down  from  the  hillside,  and 
crossed  the  road  to  join  the  main  river.  In  one  place  he 
built  a  dam  in  a  brook  and  put  in  a  water- 
wheel.  In  some  brooks  he  found  little 
falls.  People  often  crossed  these  brooks 
over  wooden  bridges. 

Valley  Farms.  —  The  pastures  for  the 
cows  extended  in  many  cases  up  the  sides 
of  the  foot-hills.  Miss  Hale  showed  him 
several  foot-hills  which  had  been  rounded 
off  and  smoothed  down  by  ice  and  water 
as  if  shaped  by  some  giant's  tool.  Henry 
could  see  small  farms  off  on  the  hills.  It 
is  much  easier  to  work  on  a  valley  farm  like 


Farmer  Brown  Mowing 

again  and  again  with  milk.    On  hot  days  he 
often  saw  the  cows  under  a  large  tree. 

Next  to  driving  the  cows,  Henry  liked 
to  feed  the  chickens  in  the  yard  of  the 
hennery,  where  about  a  thousand  roosters, 
hens,  and  chickens  were  kept.  An  in- 
cubator was  used  for  hatching  the  chickens. 
Henry  followed  the  men  to  the  hay-field 
and  saw  the  hay  mown,  spread  out  to  dry, 
and  carried  to  the  barn  for  the  cattle. 
Many  a  good  ride  he  had  high  up  on  the 
load !     Before  he  went  home  he  learned  to 


Cows  in  Pasture  under  a  large  Maple  Tree 


52 


TYPE    FORMS 


An  Extensive  View  over  the  Valley  toward  the  Mountains 


Farmer  Brown's 
than  on  a  hillside 
farm. 

Henry  noticed 
that  the  farmers, 
on  their  business 
trips,  followed  the 
valleys  and  kept 
near  the  river, 
where  the  roads 
were  more  nearly 
level  and  distances 
shorter.  He  much 
preferred  to  go 
across  the  valleys 
and  over  the  hills ; 
for  there  he  saw 
many  beautiful 
views  and  passed 
fine  summer  homes 
among  the  shady 
trees  not  far  from 
the  road.  Some- 
times these  roads 
ran  over  steep  hills. 
Miss  Hale  showed 
the  children,  on  the 
map,  one  of 
Henry's-  favorite 
drives.  She  marked 


A  Steep  Hill  Road 


it  from  A  to  B 
(see  map,  page  50). 
There  were  few 
ponds  and  no 
lakes  in  the  val- 
ley, and  Miss 
Hale  explained 
to  him  that  the 
rivers  had  drained 
off  the  water  by 
wearing  away  all 
the  barriers, 
which  showed 
that  a  long  time 
had  passed  since 
the  rivers  began 
their  work. 

Valleys  of  the 
World. — There  are 
thousands  of  such  valleys  in  the 
world,  none  of  them  shown  on  the 
maps  of  the  geographies  because 
there  is  not  room.  When  you  see 
lines  on  maps  showing  mountains, 
remember  that  there  are  many 
valleys  among  and  near  them. 

LANGUAGE   AND   FIELD  LESSONS 

Describe  Henry's  valley,  using  the 
pictures  for  help. 

Visit  a  valley  near  your  home  and 
write  about  it,  or  write  about  one  you 
have  visited. 


The  Mountains  that  enclose  the  Valley 


A    PRAIRIE 


53 


18.    A  PRAIRIE 

A  Letter  fkom  Miss  Hale's  Sistee 

Out  West,  November  17. 

My  dear  Sister,  —  I  have  been  travelling  for  some 
time  in  the  Central  West,  and  now  know  much  about  the 


were  greatly  feared  by  the  early  settlers.   Whole  families 
sometimes  perished  in  this  dreadful  way. 

The  grass  upon  these  plains  is  often  as  high  as  a 
man's  head.  The  buffaloes  formerly  fed  upon  it,  but  they 
have  disappeared,  and  on  the  large  grazing  farms  may  be 
seen  thousands  of  cattle  fattening  for  the  market. 


Harvesting  Wheat  on  a  Flat  Prairie 

great  plains  or  prairies  so  common  there.  Per- 
haps you  and  your  friends  would  like  to  know 
what  I  have  learned. 

The  word  "  prairie  "  means  "  meadow-land,"  and 
was  given  to  the  fertile,  treeless  plains  by  the 
early  French  explorers.  These  extensive  plains 
are  found  west  and  southwest  of  the  Great  Lakes 
in  the  upper  and  lower  Mississippi  Valley. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  prairies,  the  "flat 
prairies  "  and  the  "  rolling  prairies."  The  former 
are  very  level,  and  often  as  smooth  and  even  as  a 
floor  or  the  surface  of  a  lake.  Not  a  tree  is  to  be 
seen  on  them  except 
along  the  water  courses 
or  in  little  groups  where 
the  soil  happens  to  be 
very  moist.  In  such 
places  clumps  of  trees 
sometimes  seem  like 
islands  in  the  ocean. 

There  are  few  trees 
because  the  soil  is  so 
hard  and  fine,  and  be- 
cause the  Indians  used 
to  set  fire  to  the  dry 
grass  in  the  autumn,  and 
thus  destroyed  the 
young  trees.  These  fires 


A  Lagoon  on  a  Prairie,  supplied  by  an  Artesian  Well 


Trees  beside  a  River  on  a 
Prairie 

The  prairies  are  fairly 
well  supplied  with  mois- 
ture. The  rivers  and 
small  streams  are  slow, 
sluggish,  and  muddy, 
often  without  the  defi- 
nite banks  of  the  New 
York  streams.  In  South 
Dakota  I  noticed  that 
the  farmers  had  bored 
many  very  deep  artesian 
wells,  from  which  they 
had  a  supply  of  water. 


54 


TYPE    FOKMS 


The  prairies  are  considered  beautiful  by  many  of  the 
Western  people  on  account  of  their  gentle  outlines  and 
misty  distances.  The  sky  is  very  blue,  the  sun  very 
bright,  the  flowers  large  and  brilliant,  and  the  horizon 
seems  far,  far  away.     The  feeling  of  "  having  plenty  of 


rolling  prairies  are  very  attractive,   when  settled,  and 
remind  me  of  certain  parts  of  the  East. 

Illinois  is  still  called  the  "  Prairie  State " ;  prairies 
are,  however,  found  in  several  other  states.  In  Illinois 
most  of  the  "  meadow-lands  "  are  now  made  into  valuable 

farms. 

Uncle  John 


Cattle  on  a  Rolling  Prairie 


room  to  breathe  in"  is  one  of  the  strong  attractions  of 
the  prairies.  When  I  ride  over  them,  I  am  much  im- 
pressed by  the  vastness  and  sameness  of  things. 

In  Wisconsin  I  saw  the  "  rolling  prairies,"  so  called 
because  the  land  rises  and  falls  with  much  regularity, 


Bloomington. 
He  has  set  out 
near  his  house 
a  large  grove 
of  trees,  con- 
sisting of  ma- 
ples, walnuts, 
oaks,  and  hick- 
ories, to  shelter 
his  home  from 
the  cold  winds. 
Uncle  John  says  it  was  very  hard  to  plough  the  prairies 
for  the  first  time,  not  on  account  of  the  stones,  for  there 
were  none,  but  because  the  sod  was  so  matted  together 
with  roots,  tough  and  hard*to  break  or  turn.  He  has  usu- 
ally needed,  for  the  first  ploughing,  several  yoke  of  oxen 


lives  on 
a    farm 


such 
near 


A  Header  drawn  by  Twenty  Horses 


somewhat  like  the  waves  of  the  sea.  The  crests  of  the 
land  waves  are  sometimes  ten  miles  apart.  From  the 
top  of  one  of  these  ridges  one  can  see  very  plainly  over 
to  the  next  ridge.  Between  the  ridges  will  be  found  de- 
pressions or  valleys  through  which  streams  flow.     The 


on  one  plough.  In  carrying  on  his  farm  he  uses  all  kinds 
of  machines,  drawn  by  horses  or  moved  by  steam,  such 
as  gang-ploughs,  corn-planters,  grain-sowers,  mowing- 
machines,  rakes,  tedders  or  turners,  reapers,  harvesters, 
headers,  and  threshing-machines. 


A    BIT    OF    COAST 


55 


Machinery  can  be  used  on  these  prairies  to  a  greater 
extent  than  on  the  hill  farms  of  Massachusetts,  because 
the  prairies  are  level  and  the  soil  fine  and  free  from 
stones. 

If  you  look  upon  a  large  state  map  of  this  part  of  the 
country,  you  will  notice   that   townships  are  all  of  the 


Threshing  Wheat  by  Steam 

same  shape  and  size,  just  as 
they  are  in  northern  Maine. 
The  whole  country  con- 
stantly reminds  the  visitor 
of  a  great  chess-board. 

In  riding  over  a  western 
prairie  country,  instead  of 
a  happy  variety  of  scenery, 
one  usually  sees  fields  of 
grass  and  grain  which  look 
exactly  alike,  small  and  very 
plain  houses,  a  few  trees, 
and  a  few  barns.  Now  and 
then  there  is  a  grain  eleva- 
tor for  the  storing  of  wheat 
and  oats,  or  a  large  wind- 
mill that  is  used  to  pump 
the  water  for  the  house 
and  stock  or  to  grind  the 
corn. 

The  roads  in  this  country 
all  run  in  straight  lines,  fol- 
lowing   the   parallels    and 

meridians.  The  farmers  build  their  wire  fences  in  straight 
lines,  and  sow  their  wheat  and  turnips  in  parallels.  Bail- 
roads  usually  run  in  straight  lines,  and  curves  seem 
banished  from  the  sight  except  on  the  horizon. 

I  am  so  tired  of  straight  lines  that  I  am  coming  home 


Government  Map :  the  Coast  from  Portsmouth  to  York 


next  spring  to  enjoy  once  more  the  loveliness  and  irregu- 
larity of  things  on  the  Atlantic  Coast. 

Your  sister,  Maby. 

LANGUAGE    LESSON 
Write  a  letter  to  Mary  Hale  and  tell  her  about  the  plains, 
hills,  mountains,  or  valleys  near  your  home. 

19.     A   BIT   OF   COAST 

Turn  to  the  map  of  the  New 
England  or  Eastern  States  on 
page  107,  and  find  the  two  towns 
of  Portsmouth  in  New  Hampshire, 
and  York  a  little  farther  east  in 
Maine.  The  distance  between 
them,  you  see,  on  the  map,  is  about 
one-fourth  of  an  inch.  The  little 
coast-line  looks  like  this :  — 

but  this  fourth  of  an  /{^_» 
inch  stands  for  a  dis- 
tance of  twelve  miles.  That 
same  coast-line,  enlarged 
many  times  as  on  a  govern- 
ment map,  looks  like  the 
enlarged  map  on  this  page. 

How  much  more  the  second 
map  tells  you  than  the  first; 
because  it  is  on  a  larger 
scale,  more  facts  or  details 
can  be  put  in.  You  see  now 
where  the  bays,  the  inlets, 
the  peninsulas,  the  capes,  the 
rivers,  the  towns,  are  situ- 
ated ;  but  there  are  hundreds 
of  other  things  you  do  not 
know  about. 

Npt  long  ago  I  visited  this 
bit  of  coast,  and  I  will  tell 
you  what  I  found  there  that 
a  map,  however  large,  can- 
not tell.  On  this  pleasant 
trip  I  took  many  pictures. 
I  will  show  them  to  you, 
and  they  may  help  you  to 
understand  what  that  small  bit  of  coast-line  on  your 
map  means. 

A  Tidal  River.  —  One  hot  July  day  I  stood  on  Seavey 
Island,  where  the  Spanish  prisoners  were  kept  during 
the  war  in   Cuba.      From   it   I   could   see   Portsmouth, 


56 


TYPE    FORMS 


and  I  took 
the  picture 
of  the  city 
which  ,  you 
see  on  this 
page.  Ports- 
mouth is 
near   the 


Looking  toward  Portsmouth 


down  this 
tidal  river 
with  me. 
Thecurrent 
helps  us  and 
we  move 
rapidly. 
Crossing  a 
strait,  we 
there  is  a  fine 
see    several 


Coast  and  Islands  at  Low  Tide 

mouth  of  a  tidal  river.     The  cur- 
rent of  this  river  is  very  swift 
and  strong,  flowing  in  at  one 
time  of  the'  day  and  out  at 
another,  as  the  tide  rises  or 
falls.    These  periods  are  about 
six  hours  in  length.     (See  Les- 
son   14.)      The    current   is  very 
strong    in    the  narrow   channel,    be- 
tween the  point  and  the   mainland.      It  is 
almost  impossible  for  a  man  to  row  a  boat 
there  against  the  current. 

Navy-yard.  —  This  river,  called  the 
Piscataqua,  separates  the  two  states. 
After  crossing  it,  an  island  in  Maine  is 
reached,  just  above  Seavey,  on  which  is  a 
large  navy-yard.  Here  ships  are  repaired 
and  naval  boats  are  made,  as  well  as 
rapid-fire  guns  and  naval  stores  in  general. 
Here  I  went  on  board  a  ship  taken  by 
our  forces  in  the  Spanish  war.  She  was 
being  repaired.  In  the  dry-dock  was  a 
large  tugboat,  all  ready  to  be  launched. 

Next  in  the  river  comes  the  island, 
Seavey,  on  which  we  are  supposed  now  to 
stand.  It  is  shown  on  the  government 
map     Now  jump  into  my  rowboat  and  go 


land    on   a   little   island   from    which 

view  of    Seavey    Island.     Northward   we 

small   islands,   and,  on  the  mainland,  many  handsome 

summer  cottages  among  the  trees. 

Irregular  Coast.  —  Again  we  enter  the  boat  and  pass 
along  among  the  islands.  Farther  on  we  see  a  very 
irregular  shore,  full  of  bays,  inlets,  projecting  points, 
and  stony  beaches.  One  of  these  points  is  called  Kittery 
Point,  and  upon  it  there  are  some  fine  residences. 

When    the  tide  is  low,   the   shores   have   a  different 
appearance.     The  small  islands  seem  larger,  and  the  sea- 
weed and  the  fringe  of   rounded  rocks 
are  to  be  seen  everywhere.      The 
seaweed  is  very  slippery  to 
walk  over.  It  forms  a  good 
cushion    to    prevent    the 
water  from  breaking  the 
rocks      to      pieces      too 
rapidly. 
We  row  past  the  seaweed- 
fringed  shore,  around  another 
sharp  point,  and  then,  in  a  short 
time,  spy  a  little  cove  into  which  we 
Seaweed-fringed  Shore         steer  the  boat  and  land.     We  find  here 


A  Little  Cove  and  Piscataqua  River 


A    BIT    OF    COAST 


57 


a  break  in  the  rocky  shore,  and  a  beautiful  opening  lead- 
ing up  to  grassy  seats  from  which  we  can  see  the  great 
island  of  New  Castle  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  river. 
A  Summer  Resort.  —  This  is  a  very  fashionable  summer 
resort,  and   has   one   of  the  finest  hotels  on  the  coast. 


A  Pebbly  Beach 

Leaving  the  boat  in  the  cove,  we  walk  a  short  distance 
and  come  to  a  pebbly  beach  where  the  water  is  turning 
the  stones  over.  This  makes  them  more  nearly  round  and 
smoother,  thereby  increasing  the  sand  under  the  water. 

A  few  rods  be- 
yond this  beach 
is  a  small  penin- 
sula upon  which 
stands  a  large 
hotel  whose  am- 
ple piazzas  com- 
mand a  fine  view 
of  the  harbor  and 
mouth  of  this 
river.  Here  naval 
officers  and  their 
families  are  often 
seen  in  the  sum- 
mer months. 

The  Harbor.  — 
A  small  corner 
of  the  harbor 
touches  the  hotel  bathing  beach,  and  then  the  coast  rises 
to  some  height.  On  this  elevation  is  an  old  blockhouse, 
well  preserved,  and  around  it  the  unfinished  walls  of  a 
new  fort.  From  this  point  there  is  a  splendid  view  in 
all  directions.     Below  and  near  this  fort  is  the  harbor, 


crowded  with  boats  of  all  kinds ;  then  the  mouth  of  the 
Piscataqua  River,  and  on  the  opposite  shore  another  fort 
with  its  guns  in  position. 

Portsmouth    harbor    is    a    waiting-place  for   vessels. 
New  boats  may  be  seen  almost  every  morning,  for  they 
come  in  here  for  business,  for  pleasure,  or  to  wait 
for  better  weather. 

Along  the  Shore.  — We  have  talked  about  only 
two  of  the  twelve  miles,  and  we  have  omitted  much 
more  than  we  have  mentioned.  The  next  seven 
miles  along  the  shore  are  much  less  interesting, 
for  the  coast  is  rather  low  and  flat;  so  we  will  do 
well  to  leave  our  boat  in  the  cove  and  take  a  ride 
on  the  electric  cars.  We  board  the  cars  near  the 
hotel  and  soon  pass  a  little  country  schoolhouse 
behind  the  fort.  School  is  kept  here  during  two 
short  terms  in  the  year. 

An  opening  on  the  left  shows  an  arm  of  a  creek, 
or  long  inland  bay.  This  is  salt  water,  and  here 
the  tide  rises  and  falls  regularly.  Beautiful  green 
grass  and  wooded  slopes  surround  the  bay.  Houses 
are  seen  among  the  trees  on  the  shore.  A  point 
of  land  juts  sharply  out  into  the  water. 

Village  and  Beach. — We  pass  through  a  long,  strag- 
gling village,  by  the  post  office  and  church,  and  then 
out  into  the  country  by  a  large,  wooded  island  on  the 


Old  Blockhouse  and  New  Fort:  a  Small  Part  of  Portsmouth  Harbor 


right.  On  by  country  farmhouses,  up  hill  and  down 
we  go,  with  glimpses  of  ocean  away  to  the  right.  By 
and  by  the  car  approaches  the  coast  and  crosses  wide 
salt  marshes  over  long  bridges  supported  by  logs  driven 
into    the   earth.     Through   cool,  refreshing  woods   and 


58 


TYPE    FORMS 


along  the  dusty  road, 
by  country  church  and 
store,  by  well  laid-out 
golf  grounds,  it  goes, 
till  it  reaches  another 
village  on  a  promontory 
and  ridge  near  a  wide, 
salt  river.  Here  we 
pass  many  fine  man- 
sions, handsome  hotels, 
and  cottages.  Most  of 
these  buildings  com- 
mand a  view  of  the 
ocean. 


The  Long  Beach,  York 


Dover  Cliff 

From  the  ridge  on  which  stands  the 
pretty  town  of  York  Harbor,  a  short  run, 
down  grade,  carries  us  to  a  long  beach 
where  the  breakers  never  cease  their  on- 
coming and  musical  roar. 

Over  this  beach  for  three  miles  we  spin, 
watching  the  people  in  bathing  or  playing 
on  the  sand.  Far  out  at  sea  rises  the 
stately  form  of  the  lighthouse  on  Boon 
Island.  At  the  farther  end  of  the  long 
beach  we  leave  the  car  and  climb  Dover 
Cliff,  the  better  to  watch  the  surf  and 
enjoy  the  cool  breeze. 

The  Lighthouse.  —  A  pleasant  walk 
through  a  pasture  where  sleek,  fat  cows 


graze,  and  we  come 
near  a  complete  light- 
house plant  on  a  small 
island  at  the  end  of  a 
high  peninsula.  The 
peninsula  is  called  Cape 
Neddick,  and  the  island, 
Nubble  Island.  When 
it  is  foggy,  the  fog-horn 
is  blown  to  warn  ships 
off  the  rocks  and  shore. 
Against  the  end  of  this 
cape  the  waves  dash 
constantly.  This  ac- 
tion of  the  water  for 
centuries  has  worn  the  rocks  smooth. 

Beyond  the  cape,  between  two  rocky 
points,  is  the  entrance  to  York  Harbor. 

The  cape  and  the  opposite  shore  are 
covered  with  summer  cottages  and  large 
hotels.  Thousands  of  people  come  here  in 
the  hot  months  from  the  crowded  city  to 
bathe  and  enjoy  the  cooling  breezes  from  the 
Atlantic  Ocean.  At  high  tide  hundreds  go  in 
bathing,  and  the  beach  is  a  lively  place. 

What  the  Map  means. — In  this  lesson  you 
have  seen  a  few  pictures  taken  in  the  course 
of  a  five-mile  walk.  Have  these  given  you 
any  idea  of  the  meaning  of  a  little  curve 
in  an  ordinary  map?  Then  try  to  think 
how  much  is  left  untold  in  the  twelve 
miles.  You  never  will  realize  all  that  it 
means  until  you  walk  leisurely  or  ride  in 
the  steamer  from  Portsmouth  to  York. 


Entrance  to  York  Harbor 


A    BIT    OF    COAST 


59 


3.    PICTURE   STUDY 


Nubble  Island  Lighthouse,  York,  Maine 


1.  What  is  the  principal  object  in  the  picture? 

2.  What  different  forms  of  land  can  be  seen? 

3.  Is  it  high  or  low  tide?      How  can  you  tell? 

4.  Is  there  much  movement  of  the  water?    Why? 

5.  Tell  about  the  different  objects  seen  on  the  island. 

6.  Of  what  use  are  lighthouses? 

7.  Is  there  a  strait  in  this  picture?      Where? 

8.  How  could  a  person  on  the  mainland  reach  the  lighthouse? 

9.  Was  the  wind  blowing  when  the  photograph  was  taken  ?      How  do  you  know  ? 

10.  Why  was  a  house  built  beside  the  lighthouse? 

11.  What  small  building  in  the  picture  do  you  think  is  the  boat-house?    Why? 

12.  If  the  boat-house  were  at  the  water's  edge,  what  would  happen  to  it  in  time  of  storm? 

13.  A  lighthouse  is  often  placed  on  a  rock  several  miles  from  land.     Would  you  rather 

live  in  such  a  lighthouse  or  in  the  one  shown  in  this  picture?    Why? 


60 


TYPE    FORMS 


20.    A   COLD   COUNTRY 

To-day  we  will  learn  about  the  country  where  Sigloo 
and  his  sister  Toodla  live,  far  away  to  the  north. 
Although  this  country  is  called  Greenland  (see  map, 
facing  page  88),  it  is  a  very  cold  place.     Instead  of  four 


ik 


Stone  Igloos  on  the  Bleak  Coast  of  Greenland 

seasons,  as  in  our  part  of  North  America,  they  have  only 
two  seasons  —  a  long  winter  of  over  ten  months  and  a 
short  summer  of   less  than   two  months,  or   "the  long 
night"  and  "  the  long  day."     During  nearly 
four  months  the  sun  never  sets,  and  for 
about  the  same  time  he  never  rises  to  glad- 
den the  hearts  of  Sigloo  and  Toodla. 

Climate.  —  In  the  short  summer  it  is  about 
as  warm  as  in  early  spring  in  the  northern 
states,  but  by  the  last  of  August  ice  begins 
to  form,  and  in  September  the  thermometer 
falls  below  zero  and  stays  below,  month 
after  month. 

Sigloo  likes  the  cold  weather  if  the  wind 
does  not  blow  too  hard,  for  it  is  manly 
and  brave  to  endure  the  cold  without  cry- 
ing, even  if  it  is  40°  below  zero.  We 
think  it  very  cold  at  zero.  Sigloo  much 
prefers  the  severe  cold  to  the  fogs  and 
rain  of  summer  or  the  terrible  hurricanes  of  early  winter. 

So  cold  a  country  is  very  bleak  and  barren  most  of 
the  year.  Frowning  cliffs  and  rocky  capes  are  common 
on  the  western  side,  and  snow  and  ice  in  the  interior. 


By  the  middle  of  October  everything  is  frozen  up. 
The  birds  have  departed,  the  sun  has  gone  below  the 
horizon,  and  the  dreaded  night  has  begun.  Snow  and 
ice,  ice  and  snow,  are  seen  on  every  side.  It  is  now  cold 
enough  to  form  fifteen  inches  of  ice  in  twelve  hours. 
Even  the  salt  water  of  the  ocean  is  frozen  many  feet 
thick.  The  salt-water  ice  is  constantly  moving  about 
and  breaking  up  and  being  thrown  by  the  waves  upon 
the  land,  where  it  is  piled  up  in  great  heaps.  Many  of 
the  single  pieces  are  very  large. 

Ice  from  the  sea-water  is  not  fit  to  use  as  a  drink,  so 
when  Sigloo  is  thirsty  he  melts  snow  or  ice  from  a 
glacier,  which  is  a  frozen  river. 

The  moisture  from  the  open  sea  is  driven  over  Green- 
land and  falls  in  terrible  snow-storms  which  sometimes 
last  several  days.  Three  feet  of  snow  often  falls  at  one 
time.  As  the  sun  does  not  fully  melt  each  winter's 
snow,  it  collects  in  great  quantities.  By  and  by  it  is 
warmer,  and  the  sun's  rays  partly  melt  the  snow  and 
change  it  into  ice,  forming  over  the  interior  a  great  ice- 
cap many  feet  in  thickness. 

Icebergs.  —  The  great  weight  of  snow  and  ice  presses 
this  mass  slowly  into  and  through  the  valleys  and  down 
to  the  sea.  When  it  reaches  the  shore,  it  is  sometimes 
thick  and  high  enough  to  form  a  great  wall  of  ice  miles 
in  length. 

This  great  shaft  of  ice  is  pushed  onward,  by  its  enor- 
mous weight,  out  into  the  water.  Suddenly,  with  a  roar 
louder  than  thunder,  a  huge  mass  is  broken  off  from  the 


A  Large  Iceberg 

main  body  and  tossed  about  in  the  sea,  throwing  up 
waves  high  enough'  to  sink  the  largest  ships.  This  huge 
mass  of  ice  thus  broken  off  is  called  an  iceberg,  which 
means  an  ice  mountain. 


A    COLD    COUNTRY 


61 


Sigloo  several  times  saw  the  "  birth  "  or  the  making  of 
an  iceberg,  and  it  always  filled  him  with  awe  and  dread. 
The  largest  one  was  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  above  the 
water  as  it  floated.  Seven-eighths  of  it  must  have  been 
under  the  water,  as  you  can  prove  by  floating  some  ice  in 
water ;  therefore,  this  monster  must  have  been  more  than 
a  thousand  feet  in  height.  While  Sigloo  was  admiring 
its  grandeur,  the  wind  and  the  currents  slowly  moved  it 
out  of  the  harbor  toward  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

One  summer  day  Sigloo  and  his  sister  were  standing 
on  a  cliff,  looking  upon  the  water  in  the  bay,  which  was 
dotted  all  over  with  great  icebergs  sailing  majestically 
by.  Suddenly  a  loud  report  caused  them  to  jump,  and 
soon  they  saw  a  big  berg  break  in  two.  One  part  then 
broke  into  twenty  or  more,  and  fell  with  a  shower  of 
smaller  pieces  into  the  water.  In  a  short  time  the  re- 
maining part 
turned  over  in 
the  water,  pro- 
ducing a  terrible 
commotion  and 
se  nding  the 
foam  flying  in 
all  directions. 

The  Long 
Night.  —  During 
part  of  the  long 
night,  the  moon 
shines,  and  Sig- 
loo and  his  sis- 
ter go  out  mak- 
ing calls.  When 
there    is    no 


Sigloo  and  his  Eskimo  Dog  Team 


to  try  his  strength  in  tests  of  pulling,  wrestling,  and 
boxing.  He  practises  throwing  the  lance  and  shooting 
with  the  bow  and  arrow.  But  he  is  very  anxious  to 
learn  his  father's  business,  which  is  hunting. 

Dogs.  — To  prepare  him  for  this  his  father  gives  him 
charge  of  the  dogs.  He  has  to  feed  them  every  other 
day  upon  walrus  skin,  scraps,  bones,  and  sometimes  dried 
fish.  When  feeding,  they  are  quiet  for  fear  of  losing  a 
part  of  their  meal.  Eskimo  or  Greenland  dogs  are  like 
wolves,  and  they  are  usually  quarrelling  and  always  very 
hungry.  They  are  greatly  improved  in  temper  by  kind- 
ness and  good  feeding.  They  have  sharply  pointed  noses 
and  rather  long  hair.  They  are  so  strong  and  hardy  that 
they  can  withstand  the  terrible  cold,  and  are  to  the  Eski- 
mos what  the  camel  is  to  the  Arab  in  the  desert. 

Sigloo   helps  his    father   in   harnessing   them   to  the 

sledge.  The 
harness  is  fas- 
tened to  the 
sledge  by  a 
single  trace. 
This  branches 
into  smaller 
traces,  to  which 
the  dogs  are  at- 
tached. The 
leader  has  the 
longest  trace. 
This  dog  is  the 
one  that  can 
whip  all  the 
others  and  make 
them  fear  him. 


moon,  the  stars  are  very  bright.  All  of  a  sudden,  per- 
haps, a  bright  band  of  white  light  shoots  across  the 
skies.  This  one  is  soon  followed  by  bands  of  red,  blue, 
and  yellow,  streaming  upward  and  forming  arches  in  the 
zenith.  Then  the  colors  change,  the  forms  remaining 
the  same.  Blue  and  orange  mingle,  and  violet  darts  its 
way  through  the  bands  of  yellow. 

All  these  rainbow  colors  are  reflected  from  the  snow 
and  icebergs,  and  glow  on  the  surface  of  the  water  and 
the  mountain  tops.  But  children  of  the  North  have  little 
imagination  and,  I  fear,  do  not  care  very  much  for  the 
Aurora,  or  Northern  Lights. 

Plays. —  Sigloo  sometimes  plays  shinny  or  hockey  with 
the  other  boys,  using  a  walrus  rib  for  his  stick  and  a 
flipper  joint  for  the  hurley.  He  plays  "pin  and  cup- 
ball,"  reindeer  hunting,  and  bear  hunting.     He  also  likes 


The  driver  guides  them  by  his  voice  and  long-lashed 
whip.  When  drawing  the  sledge,  they  will  suddenly 
turn  away  from  the  path  of  duty  to  fight  a  strange  dog 
or  to  follow  a  chance  bear. 

One  day  Sigloo  wished  to  try  his  team  of  seven  dogs  on 
a  longer  drive  than  usual.  The  dogs  behaved  very  well 
at  first,  but  when  Sigloo  wished  to  turn  them  in  a  differ- 
ent direction,  which  happened  to  be  against  the  wind, 
the  dogs  did  not  like  the  idea  and  refused  to  go  that  way 
unless  he  used  the  whip  constantly.  Sigloo  became  tired 
of  swinging  the  heavy  lash  and  let  it  drag  behind.  The 
dogs  soon  found  this  out,  slowly  turned  round  the  other 
way,  and  dashed  off  like  a  parcel  of  schoolboys  just  out 
from  their  studies.  Sigloo  then  drove  them  among  the 
snow-drifts  and  hummocks  of  ice,  jumjjed  off  the  sledge, 
turned  it  over,  and  made  the  runners  stick  into  the  snow. 


62 


TYPE    FORMS 


Moonlight  View  showing  Kayak,  or  Eskimo  Boat 

In  this  way  he  stopped  the  dogs  and  then  punished  them 
for  being  so  disobedient.  After  this  they  behaved  very 
well  and  went  where  he  directed  them.  Every  set  of  dogs 
has  a  leader  or  ruler.  Sigloo's  leader  is  a 
powerful  dog,  which  he  calls  Kassuk, 
meaning  black.  Another  of  his  dogs 
is  named  Oosiook. 

Boats.  — Sigloois  very  anxious 
to  learn  to  paddle  his  father's 
boat,  called  a  kayak.    This  is 
a  very  long  and  narrow  boat, 
made  of  light  wood,  and  it 
takes  much  skill  to  manage 
it.      The    covering    is    of 
tanned  sealskin,  sewn  to- 
gether with  sinew  thread. 
The  length  is  about  eigh- 
teen feet,  and  the  depth  nine 
inches,  the  top  being  covered 
like  the  bottom.     The  hunter 
sits  in   a    round  hole  in   the 
centre,  and  laces  the  lower  edge 
of  his  water-tight  jacket  over  the 
hole,  thus  fastening  himself  in  and 
keeping  the  water  out. 

A  large  open  boat,  called  the  umiak,  or 
woman's  boat,  is  used  by  the  Eskimo  women 
when  they  go  fishing.     The  men  use  the 
same  boat  when  they  go  a  long  distance  to 


hunt  the  walrus  or  polar  bear,  or  when  the  people 
move  from  place  to  place  in  summer.  This  boat 
can  carry  at  one  time  half  a  dozen  persons.  The 
shape  and  general  appearance  of  the  boat  is  shown 
in  the  picture. 

Hunting.  —  In  our  spring  the  seals  appear,  and 
Sigloo  for  the  first  time  goes  out  with  his  father  to 
hunt  them.  The  seals  come  up  through  the  ice  to 
breathe,  and  beside  each  breathing-hole  a  man  sits 
and  patiently  waits  in  the  cold.      When  the  seal 


Umiak,  or  Woman's  Boat 


A  Walrus 

appears,   a  lance  is  thrust  into  his 

body  and  he   is  captured.      As    a 

reward  for  his  patience,  his  father 

gives  Sigloo  some  bits  of  the 

raw  meat,  which  taste  better 

to  Sigloo  than  the  best  candy 

does  to  you. 

In  the  early  and  late 
winter,  Sigloo  and  his 
father  go  in  their  boats 
to  hunt  a  very  large 
animal,  the  walrus.  These 
creatures  bask  in  the  sun 
on  some  great  piece  of  ice, 
enjoying  the  warmth  of  the 
bright  rays.  They  go  in 
packs,  and  usually  several  are 
seen  at  once. 
They  are  huge  in  size  and  awk- 
ward and  ugly  in  looks.  The  two 
great  tusks  and  long  whiskers  make 
them  hideous.  Their  great  strength  makes 
them,  when  enraged  by  human  beings, 
fierce  and  terrible  foes. 


A    COLD    COUNTRY 


63 


When  the  monsters  go  to  sleep  on  the  ice,  the  two 
hunters  approach  noiselessly  in  the  boat,  keeping  them- 
selves concealed  from  view  behind  the  ice.  Getting  as 
near  as  possible  in  this  way, 
they  may  get  out  of  the 
kayak  and  creep  still  nearer 
on  the  ice.  If  they  fail  to 
get  near  enough,  they  sit 
down  on  the  edge  of  the  ice 
and  imitate  the  cry  of  the 
animal,  calling,  "  huk  !  huk  ! 
huk  ! "  This  will  usually 
bring  several  walruses  up 
out  of  the  water  near  the 
ice.  The  father  throws  the 
harpoon,  and  Sigloo  fastens 
the  rope  around  an  iron  stake 


In  the  early  summer  Sigloo  goes  out  hunting  all  alone; 
he  goes  to  catch  birds  in  a  net.  The  little  auks  come 
from  the  south  in  great  numbers  when  it  grows  warmer. 

They  feed  and  breed  about 
the  high  cliffs,  and  Sigloo 
climbs  halfway  up  one  of  the 
cliffs,  where  he  is  surrounded 
by  hundreds  of  them.  With 
their  black  backs  and  white 
breasts  they  make  a  pretty 
picture.  Sigloo  lies  down 
and  watches  them  as  they 
sweep  past,  gradually  draw- 
ing nearer  and  nearer  to  him. 
Suddenly  he  throws  up  his 
net  and  half  a  dozen  birds 
fly  straight  into  it.  Moving 
his  hands  very  rapidly,  he 
catches  them  before  they 
have  a  chance  to  get  away. 
In  a  short  time  he  catches  more,  without  moving 
from  his  place.  Then  he  searches  for  the  eggs, 
which  make  good  eating. 

Home.  —  Sigloo  was  born  in  a  very  queer  house 
made  of  stone  and  banked  around  with  turf.  We 
would  call  it  a  cave  or  a  hut.  It  is  less  than  ten 
feet  in  diameter,  and  just  high  enough  for  his 
parents  to  stand  in.  It  has  one  opening  for  a  little 
light;  a  wide,  raised  bench  covered  with  furs  serves 
for  a  chair  in  the  daytime  and  a  bed  at  night. 
There  is  little  "  elbow  room  "  in  such  a  house.  The 
strangest  thing  about  the    house  is   the  entrance, 


Polar  Bear 


An  Eskimo  House,  or  Igloo 

driven  into  the  ice.  At  every  chance  they  take  up 
the  slack  in  the  line,  and  finally  bring  the  creature 
near  enough  to  finish  the  killing  with  the  lance. 
As  a  walrus  weighs  some  six  hundred  pounds, 
plenty  of  meat  and  blubber  for  themselves  and  the 
dogs  is  obtained  from  one  animal.  Sometimes  a 
herd  will  show  fight  in  defending  a  dying  com- 
panion, and  then  the  Eskimos  are  obliged  to  flee 
for  their  lives. 

The  hardest  and  most  dangerous  animal  to  attack 
is  the  white  polar  bear.  Several  experienced  hunt- 
ers and  a  large  number  of  dogs  form  a  hunting 
party,  and  together  they  frequently  succeed,  after 
several  dogs  have  been  killed  and  some  of  the  men 
wounded,  in  killing  a  bear. 


A  Stone  Igloo,  showing  the  Long  Entrance 


64 


TYPE    FOKMS 


which  is  a  long  stone  passageway,  fifteen  feet  long,  and 
just  large  enough  for  one  person  to  crawl  through  at  one 
time.  This  is  made  long  and  small  to  keep  out  the  cold. 
The  interior  of  the  hut  is  lined  with  sealskin,  and  a  lamp 
hangs  near  the  entrance. 

Sigloo  calls  this  home  an  igloo.  His  father  does  not 
own  it,  even  though  he  made  it.  It  belongs  to  those  who 
occupy  it  for  a  season.  His 
father  does  not  own  any 
land.  It  belongs  to  every- 
body. People  here  move 
from  place  to  place  very 
frequently,  going  like  the 
Indians  to  places  where  the 
game  is  most  plentiful. 

When  off  for  a  long  hunt 
in  winter,  Sigloo  helps  his 
father  and  mother  build  an 
igloo  out  of  the  hard  dry 
snow,  cut  in  blocks.  The 
blocks  are  each  about  three 
feet  long  and  over  a  foot 
wide.  The  snow  igloo  is 
made  in  about  the  same 
shape  as  the  stone  ones. 
Snow  is  shovelled  over  the 
snow  hut  to  give  more  pro- 
tection from  the  cold.  The 
bed  is  made  of  snow  covered 
with  plenty  of  furs.  These 
houses  keep  out  the  cold 
winds  and  yet  are  well 
ventilated. 

Toodla  helps  her  mother 
melt  snow  and  cook  the 
soup  over  the  little  lamp. 
The  lamp  is  a  shallow  dish 

filled  with  oil,  having  wicks  made  of  dry  moss  placed 
around  the  edge.     Much  of  the  food  is  eaten  raw. 

Toodla  is  learning  to  help  her  mother  sew,  with  a  bone 
needle  and  thread  made  of  a  sinew.  Nothing  would 
please  her  better  for  a  Christmas  present  than  a  real 
steel  needle.  Her  mother  is  very  skilful  in  making 
garments  out  of  furs.  Father,  mother,  and  children  all 
dress  very  much  alike.  They  use  fur  because  it  will 
keep  out  the  cold  so  well. 

When  Sigloo  was  a  baby,  he  wore  clothes  made  of  fawn 
reindeer  skins,  soft  as  a  piece  of  kid.  His  mother  car- 
ried him  about  on  her  back  in  the  folds  of  her  hood. 


Eskimos  and  Government  Storehouse,  South  Greenland 


Dress.  —  Sigloo  wears  a  shirt,  trousers  reaching  to  the 
knee,  and  a  coat,  all  made  of  bearskin.  His  leggings  are 
fur  and  his  shoes  bearskin,  often  with  the  natural  sole  of 
the  bear  still  attached.  He  usually  goes  bareheaded  and 
lets  his  hair  grow  for  protection.  Still,  if  it  is  extremely 
cold,  he  can  draw  the  fur  hood  of  his  coat  up  over  his 
head.  His  mittens  are  sealskin.  Reindeer  skin  is  some- 
times worn  in  place  of  bear- 
skin. 

His  sister  has  a  coat  of 
sealskin  with  a  pointed 
hood,  a  shirt  of  birdskin, 
with  the  feathers  worn  next 
the  body,  trousers  made  of 
foxskin,  boots  of  sealskin, 
and  stockings  of  deerskin. 
In  her  trimmings  of  white 
fur  she  looks  very  winsome. 
Sigloo  and  his  people  are 
called  Eskimos,  and  they 
belong  to  the  yellow  race. 

Appearance.  —  Sigloo  is 
short  and  plump  like  his 
father.  He  has  a  heavy 
jaw,  large  cheek-bones,  a 
narrow  forehead,  small 
black  eyes,  a  flat  nose,  thin 
lips,  and  white  teeth.  So 
has  his  sister  Toodla. 

Summer.  —  A  pleasant 
change  comes  after  the  ten 
long  winter  months.  In 
June  comes  the  Arctic 
spring  or  early  summer, 
when  the  sun's  warm  rays 
melt  the  snow  and  ice,  and 
the  water,  released  from  its 
long  imprisonment,  flows  everywhere  with  a  musical 
sound.  Then  Sigloo  and  Toodla  see  the  willow  steins 
starting,  the  flowers  budding,  the  birds  coming  back, 
snipes  seeking  the  pools,  little  auks  on  the  cliffs,  and  the 
seals  basking  once  more  in  the  warm  sun.  By  June  21, 
summer  is  in  full  blast ;  the  grass  is  green  upon  the  hill- 
sides ;  the  cry  of  birds  and  the  hum  of  insects  take  the 
place  of  the  terrible  silence  of  the  long  winter. 

LANGUAGE  LESSON 

Write  about  the  cold  country  under  the  heads:  Sigloo  and 
Toodla,  climate,  icebergs,  Northern  Lights,  plays,  dogs,  boat, 
hunting,  home,  summer,  appearance,  and  dress. 


A    HOT    COUNTRY— CUBA 


65 


21.     A  HOT  COUNTRY  — CUBA 

Myra  and  Tom  left  New  York  in  the  middle  of  winter 
by  a  fast  steamer  for  the  West  Indies.  They  wore  heavy 
clothing  and  needed  heavy  wraps  when  they  sailed,  but 
in  a  few  days  all  was  changed.  The  farther  south  they 
went  the  warmer  it  became.  The  north  wind  became  less 
sharp  and  soon  ceased  to  blow.  Winter  clothes  were 
so  uncomfortable  that  their  mother  opened  the  trunks 
and  took  out  summer  things  to  put  on.  Parasols  and 
fans  seemed  necessities.  No  one  felt  like  moving  about. 
All  lounged  on  the  deck  and  kept  out  of  the  sun. 

The  Ba- 
hamas. — 
The  vessel 
stopped 
first  at  Nas- 
sau, a  town 
on  an  isl- 
and of  the 
n  orthern 
group  of  the 
West  In- 
dies called 
the  Baha- 
mas. The 
children 
noticed  a 
great  differ- 
en  ce  be- 
tween the 
trees  here 
and  those 
in  their  own 
land.  Palms 
and  banana 

trees  waved  their  leaves  in  the  breeze,  instead  of  the 
oaks,  maples,  and  pines  they  knew  so  well.  A  palm  is  a 
tree  without  branches  and  limbs ;  it  is  simply  a  long, 
straight  trunk  with  huge  leaves  growing  in  a  bunch  from 
the  top. 

Myra  and  her  brother  admired  the  clearness  of  the 
water  in  Nassau  harbor.  This  clearness  was  partly  due  to 
the  white,  sandy  bottom.  They  could  easily  see  pebbles, 
shells,  fishes,  crabs,  sponges,  and  branches  of  coral  on  the 
harbor  bed.  They  leaned  on  the  rail  and  looked  down 
into  the  water.  Its  surface  was,  at  times,  like  sea-green 
crystal. 

Just  before   they  reached  the  wharf,  scores  of  little 


k; 

.,  .  5PL, 

«.       4 

£&&k*m>>. 

2p 

•  i^k^ 

£ 

*H* 

tl?  *^TEm  <  fa  y^rQiL     i  t 

$f§rf!q:r  y  * . 

P^S^T1 

i 

- ■  L      - : 

It 

■■'4 
■         -         r 

negro  boys  in  small  boats  came  out  toward  the  ship, 
ready  to  dive  for  coppers.  The  passengers  threw  the 
coins  into  the  water,  and  the  boys  jumped  in  after  them, 
often  catching  them  before  they  touched  bottom.  They 
had  to  hunt  for  Tom's,  and  they  looked  like  large  black 
spiders  crawling  about  in  the  water. 

Sea  Gardens.  —  In  another  part  of  the  harbor,  the  chil- 
dren saw  the  sea-gardens  from  a  boat.  Each  of  them  had 
a  long  box  with  a  glass  in  the  bottom.  This  they  held 
over  the  side  of  the  boat,  with  the  glass  just  under  the 
water.  Through  this  water-telescope  the  delicately 
tinted  sea-flowers,  pale  pink,  brown,  or  buff,  could  easily 

be  seen, 
and  also 
purple  and 
scarlet  sea- 
anemones, 
branches  of 
beautiful 
coral,  and 
many  water- 
plants  of 
rich  color. 
Purple  sea- 
fans  waved 
to  and  fro 
among  the 
forests  of 
sponges. 
But  more 
interesting 
than  all 
these  were 
the  differ- 
ent kinds  of 
fish,  as  gor- 
geous in  color  as  the  humming-birds  which  they  saw. 

When  they  left  New  York,  the  roads  were  white  with 
snow  and  ice,  and  here  they  were  white  also,  but  with 
the  coral,  which  is  found  everywhere  and  broken  up  for 
road-beds.  The  coral  stone  is  also  used  for  walls  and 
buildings,  so  the  streets  are  a  dazzling  white,  relieved 
only  by  the  bright  green  of  the  shrubs  and  trees. 

In  the  Tropics.  —  After  a  few  hours'  sail  farther  south, 
the  vessel  reached  the  Tropic  of  Cancer,  of  which  the 
little  travellers  had  read  in  the  geographies.  "It  is  the 
northern  limit  of  the  torrid  zone,"  explained  Myra.  Tom 
asked  her  to  show  him  the  line  marking  the  place,  but 
she  knew  that  it  was  found  only  on  maps  and  charts. 


Cuban  Country  Home  —  Palms  and  other  Tropical  Vegetation 


66 


TYPE    FORMS 


The  Prado,  a  Plaza  or  Square,  Havana 


Havana.  —  They  soon 
landed  in  the  city  of  Ha- 
vana, the  "Key  to  the 
New  World,"  as  it  was 
often  called  when  most 
of  the  travelling  by  water 
was  done  in  sailing  vessels. 
It  is  on  the  northern  side 
of  Cuba,  the  largest  island 
of  the  group  called 
"  Greater  Antilles."  The 
shore  was  covered  with 
tropical  trees.  At  once 
the  ship  was  surrounded 
by  native  Cubans,  scantily 
dressed  on  account  of  the 
great  heat.  After  land- 
ing, the  children  passed  through  the  Prado, 
one  of  the  principal  squares. 

Climate.  —  For  several  months  Tom  and 
Myra  stayed  in  this  hot  country,  and  they 
learned  much  about  it.  As  Havana  is  near 
the  Equator,  clays  and  nights  are  nearly  the 
same  in  length  all  the  year  round.  It  is  a 
land  of  constant  summer.  The  children  found 
January  about  as  warm  as  June  at  home,  and 
January  is  the  coolest  month  in  Cuba.  If  the 
wind  blows  from  the  north,  the  thermometer 
may  go  down  to  50°.  The  people  then  speak 
of  it  as  "  very  cold."  They  have  only  two 
seasons,  the  wet  and  the  dry,  corresponding 
to  our  winter  and  summer.     The  dry  season 


A  Street  Scene,  Havana 


Cuban  Homes  and  an  Ox  Cart 


lasts  from  October  to  May,  and  the 
wet  from  May  to  October.  "  Just 
think,  how  odd  it  would  be  not  to 
have  any  winter,"  said  Tom  to 
Myra  one  day.  "  Marguerita  never 
saw  any  snow,  and  none  of  the  chil- 
dren here  skate  or  coast!"  Mar- 
guerita was  a  little  Cuban  girl  living 
near. 

Buildings.  —  Many  of  the  Cuban 
buildings  are  stately  in  style,  with 
tall  columns  in  front.  They  are 
built  of  a  stone  made  of  small  shells, 
and  are  covered  with  plaster.  They 
are  then  painted  in  light  colors, 
yellow  andj^vhite  being  favorites. 
With  their  red-tiled  roofs  they  look 
very  pretty  among  the 
green  trees.  Many  of 
the  houses  have  only 
one  story,  but  one  story 
in  Cuba  is  often  as  high 
as  two  in  the  United 
States.  Usually  they 
•  are  built  around  a  court. 
'In  Marguerita' s  house, 
the  court  was  sur- 
rounded with  pillars 
and  filled  with  orange 
trees.  The  windows  in 
Havana  are  often  cov- 
ered with  a  large  iron 
grating  in  the  old 
Spanish  style. 

Many 
Spaniards 
live  in  Ha- 
vana, and 
one  must  go 
outside  to 
see  true 
Cuban  life. 
The  chil- 
dren were 
surprised  to- 
see  so  many 
blacks  in 
the  streets. 
There     are 


A    HOT    COUNTRY- CUBA 


67 


Cuban  Boys 


more  black 
people 
than  white 
in  most  of 
the  West 
Indies.  In 
some  of  the 
islands 
there  are 
forty  times 
as  many 
blacks; 
but  in 
Cuba  there 
are  only 
twice  as 
many. 

The  Cu- 
b  a  n  s.  — 
The  white 
Cubans  are 


Thrifty  foreigners,  Tom  noticed,  cultivated  all  these 
things  and  made  money ;  but  the  natives  seemed  unable 
to  do  this.  Trees  and  other  plants  growing  at  their  doors 
provided  food  and  cooling  drinks  for  the  taking.  These 
also  furnished  dishes,  pails,  ropes,  wire,  shingles,  and 
beds.     Why  should  they  work  ? 

The  Rainy  Season.  —  The  children  were  in  Cuba  when 
the  rainy  season  began.  Almost  every  day  it  rained 
heavily.  Often  there  was  a  thunder-shower.  In  some 
places  it  usually  rains  at  night.  If  it  does  not  rain, 
there  is  a  heavy  dew,  and  trees  are  dripping  wet  in  the 
morning.  On  account  of  the  drenching  showers  and 
dews  and  the  great  heat  of  the  sun,  trees  and  plants 
grow  very  rapidly  and  to  a  great  size.  Forests  often 
extend  to  the  mountain  tops.  In  places  where  there  are 
heavy  rains,  as  in  Cuba,  Oregon,  and  India,  thick  forests 
of  large  trees  are  always  found. 

Trees.  —  Tom  had  a  walk  one  day  in  a  forest.  It  was 
so  thick  as  to  shut  out  the  light  of  the  noonday  sun. 
The  trees  seemed  to  be  pushing  each  other  aside  to 
reach  the  light;   and  sometimes  he  found  the  branches 


descendants  of  the  Spanish,  but  they  have 
grown  to  be  different  from  the  parent  race. 
Like  little  Marguerita,  they  are  of  dark 
complexion  with  large,  beautiful,  black 
eyes  and  straight,  black  hair.  The  men  of 
the  better  classes  are  small  in  size,  but  well 
bred  and  well  educated.  Some  of  the 
poorer  people  are  large  and  finely  built. 
The  women  are  charming  in  looks  and 
manners.  All  classes  are  kind  and  polite. 
The  climate  has  made  them  easy-going, 
even  lazy.  Nature  has  done  so  much  for 
man  in  the  hot  countries  that  he  does  not 
need  to  work. 

Tom  thought  it  much  easier  for  a  man 
to  live  here  than  in  his  own  country.  He 
remembered  how  hard  the  farmer  worked 
in  the  North  to  raise  fruits,  vegetables,  and 
grains,  while  here  delicious  fruits,  like 
oranges,  grape-fruit,  bananas,  pineapples, 
and  cocoanuts,  grew  almost  wild  in  great 
abundance.  The  people  obtained  bread 
from  the  bread-fruit  tree,  a  custard-like 
fruit  from  the  custard-apple  tree,  jelly 
from  the  fruit  of  the  guava,  and  a  sort  of 
apple  from  the  mango.  Yams,  a  kind  of  sweet  potato 
grew  and  yielded  large  crops  with  little  care. 


WmMmk 

~,**»^.    ^ 

md 

h  i 

\      Wt^fcSt, 

Mill  f\i\\\  I,-.-,-  :'  «< 

£jfc4yj 

i 

I  '~*F> 

I I  p  f 

qjm 

* 

k  ' 

f 

'*\:--^''f',' 

H^«pL  W^ 

■  '   I 

yf- 1 ' 

Bananas  as  they  grow,  pointing  Upward 

of  one  tree  clasping  those  of  another,  "  as  if  to  squeeze 
the  life  out  of  them,"  as  one  traveller  has  said.     Vines 


68 


TYPE    FOKMS 


grew  closely  over  the  tree-trunks  and  trailed  from  the 
branches.  Over  all  was  a  thick  roof  of  tangled  leaves 
and  vines  which  kept  out  the  sun,  making  a  dim  twi- 
light in  day- 
time and  pitch 
darkness  at 
night. 

Many  of  the 
trees  he  saw 
were  unknown 
in  the  North. 
Among  these 
were  the  limes, 
the  ceiba,  silk 
cotton,  lignum 
vita?,  and  cas- 
tor-oil trees. 
There  were 
also  many  log- 
wood, ebony, 
and  mahogany 
trees.  The 
blossoms  he 
saw  were  on 
trees  or  tall 
bushes,    like 

the  magnolia  and  the  scarlet  cordia 
which  bears  clusters  of  warlike,  red 
flowers.  It  surprised  Tom  to  hear  that 
there  was  so  much  mahogany  that  it  was 
used  for  railroad  ties.  The  most  note- 
worthy tree  of  the  hot  countries  is  the 
palm,  of  which  Tom  saw  more  than  a  dozen 
kinds.  There  was  great  variety  of  color 
on  their  large  leaves  —  bright  green,  amber, 
yellow,  burnt  sienna. 

Palms.  —  Cocoanut  palms  were  seen 
everywhere,  waving  their  long,  graceful 
leaves  in  the  air.  This  tree  has  blossoms 
upon  it  every  month  in  the  year;  hence 
on  the  same  tree  will  be  found  nuts  in 
different  stages  of  growth.  The  young 
nuts  contain  delicious,  cool,  and  strength- 
ening milk,  like  water  in  appearance.  As 
the  nut  grows  older  the  milk  thickens  and 
becomes  jellied.  It  is  then  eaten  in  place 
of  our  custard.  When  the  nut  becomes 
quite  ripe,  some  of  the  milk  hardens  into 
solid  white  meat,  which  is  the  condition 


Cocoanut  Palms 


of  the  nuts  when  brought  to  the  northern  markets.  The 
size  of  the  bunches  differs,  but  sometimes  they 
contain  as  many  as  twenty  nuts.  Ten  cocoanut 
trees  are  sometimes  given  to  a  girl  by 
her  parents  when  she  marries,  as  a  hand- 
some gift.  From  so  many  trees  much  may 
be  obtained  that  is  needed  to  support  a 
home  —  food,  a  delicious  drink,  valuable 
oil  for  burning,  brooms,  brushes,  matting, 
and  ropes.  These  trees  are  also  useful 
for  their  grateful  shade.  When  the  cocoa- 
nuts  are  broken  up,  the  product  is  called 
copra,  and  it  is  exported  for  use  in  making 
soap  and  candles. 

Myra  thought  the  royal  palm  more 
lovely  than  the  cocoanut  palm.  It  is  often 
seen  in  Cuba,  and  it  is  a  miracle  of  beauty 
and  usefulness.  This  is  what  she  wrote 
in  her  note-book  about  it:  "The  great, 
bright  leaves  at  the  top  resemble  a  cluster 
of  plumes  and  give  it  its  name.  The  trunk 
is  straight  and  very  tall.  The  people  obtain 
boards    from   the    trunk   to    make    their 

houses  and 
canoes.  The 
bud  furnishes 
apleasantkind 
of  food.  The 
stem  of  the 
leaf  may  be 
made  into  a 
plate,  a  water- 
bucket,  or  a 
wash-basin.  It 
is  also  often 
used  for  a  ket- 
tle in  which  to 
cook  the  break- 
fast of  meats 
and  yams.  The 
water  in  the 
wood  prevents 
it  from  burn- 
ing when  up- 
on the  fire, 
and  supplies 
enough  salt  to 
season  the 
food." 


Royal  Palms 


A    HOT    COUNTRY- CUBA 


Birds.  —  Humming-birds  were  everywhere.  There  were 
several  kinds,  and  all  were  rich  in  color ;  but  green  was 
the  hue  most  often  seen.  The  largest  are  about  five 
inches      long. 


They  look  like 
the  topaz, 
sometimes 
like  an  emer- 
ald or  a  ruby. 
They  should 
be  seen  hover- 
ing over  a 
flower,  or 
pressing  them- 
selves upon  a 
dead  branch, 
under  the  full 
blaze  of  a  trop- 
ical sun,  in 
order  to  have 

,,     •  ,      •  Humming-bird 

their  coloring  B 

show  off  well.     One  of  the   smaller 
ones   is  called   "  crazy-crazy,"  be- 
cause he  darts  here  and  there,  up 
and  down,  round  and  round,  seem- 
ingly without   purpose.     So  bril- 
liant is  the  color   and  dainty  the 
build  of  the  humming-bird,  that  it 
is  often  called  the  "  gem  of  the  feathered 
kingdom." 

In  the  woods  the  children  saw  great 
green  parrots  and  glossy  brown  "  trem- 
blers."' The  latter  bird  feeds  upon 
white  berries.  Every  few  seconds 
he  stops  to  shake  his  wings,  jerk 
his  tail,  take  a  jump,  a  skip,  and 
then  twitch  his  head  and  wings. 

The  "mountain  whistler"  is  a 
bird  found  in  quiet  places.  He 
utters  a  note  clearer  than  a  flute. 
He  is  small,  and,  strange  to  say, 
he  is  clad  in  sober  drab. 

The  "  sunset  bird  "  is  so  called 


Sugar.  —  Much  money  has  been  made  in  Cuba,  as  in 
other  hot  countries,  by  the  raising  of  sugar-cane  and 
the  making  of  sugar.  Not  far  from  Havana,  in  the 
lovely  Yumuri  Valley,  was  a  very  fine  sugar  plantation 
which  Tom  and  Myra  visited.  It  surprised  them  to 
learn  that  the  tall  green  canes-  in  the  fields  were  raised 
from  slips,  and  that  it  took  them  six  months  to  ripen. 
When  ripe  they  are  pale  green  in  color,  and  men  cut 
them  down  with  large  knives.  Children  strip  off  the 
leaves,  and  women  ths  the  canes  into  bundles  ready  to  be 
loaded  upon  ox-teams  or  cars  and  carried  to  the  distant 
mill. 

One  of  their  most  interesting  trips  was  to  a  sugar-mill. 
Here  they   saw   the  canes   pressed   between  great  iron 
rollers,  and  the  juice  squeezed  out.     It  was  boiled  at  once 
so  that  it  should  not  sour  and  be  spoiled.     They  followed 
the  steps  of  sugar-making  till  they  came  to  the  last  one, 
when  it  was  formed  into  crystals.     In  this  state  it  was 
called  "  raw  sugar,"  and  the  part  which  did  not  crystal- 
lize  was  called  "molasses."     It  usually  takes 
ten  pounds  of  cane  to  make  a  pound  of 
sugar.      Raw   sugar   is   taken   to   a 
refinery   to   be  changed  to   white 
sugar  ready  for  our  use. 

Farms.  —  Cuba  is  full  of  large 
farms  —  "plantations,"    as    they 
are  called.    Tom  and  Myra  visited 
several  of  them.    On  land  somewhat 
elevated,  where  dampness  and  warmth 
were  just   right,  they   found  large   coffee 
Home  of  a  Sugar  Planter  plantations.      Fruits  were  raised  in  great 

quantities    in    some    places   and  sent    to 


The  Kind  of  House  used  by  a  Family  working  on  a  Sugar  Plantation 


because,  half  an  hour  before  sunset,  he  utters  a  very 
mournful  note  which  sounds  like  the  word  for  "  sunset  " 
in  the  language  of  the  island.  Hence  the  natives  speak 
of  "hearing  the  sunset."  Before  sunrise  this  same 
bird  repeats  these  wonderful  notes.  He  is  a  good  clock, 
much  relied  on  by  the  people  who  live  in  the  woods. 


northern  markets.  Nearly  all  kinds  of  spices  were 
cultivated.  Allspice,  however,  they  did  not  see,  as  it  is 
grown  in  Jamaica  only.  On  all  plantations  the  black  or 
the  colored,  by  which  we  mean  mixed  races,  were  em- 
ployed as  laborers.  They  can  best  endure  work  in  the 
broiling  sun. 


70 


TYPE    FORMS 


One  day 
the  children 
started  for 
the  western 
part  of  Cuba 
where  the 
best  tobacco 
is  raised. 
They  there 
learned  how 
the  seed  is 


A  Farm  House 


sown     in 
beds   and 

the  plants  transplanted  when 
only  a  few  inches  high.  When 
full-grown  they  are  six  or  eight 
feet  high,  with  large,  beautiful 
leaves.  As  the  breeze  passed  over 
the  field,  there  was  a  distinct 
smell  of  tobacco  in  the  air.  From 
December  to  May  is  the  time  for 
gathering  the  leaves  and  drying 
them  in  sheds.  Although  blacks 
do  the  plantation  work,  white 
labor  is  employed  in  the  manu- 
facture of  cigars. 

22.    A  TEMPERATE  COUNTRY 
—  THE  UNITED  STATES 

Antonio's  home  was  in  the  hot 
country  of  Cuba.  He  came  to 
the  United  States  to  go  to  school. 
At  first  he  was  very  homesick. 
He  arrived  in  the  United  States 
in  the   summer  and  found  the  Nesro  Plantati»n 

weather  much  like  that  which  he  had  known  in  his 
own  home.  The  heat  was  hard  to  bear.  People  felt 
idle  and  languid,  and  did  little  work  in  the  middle  of 
the  day.  The  schools  were  closed.  Many  people  had 
left  the  cities  for  cooler  places  among  the  mountains  or 
at  the  seashore.  Antonio  learned  that  the  rich  often  have 
two  homes,  one  in  the*  city,  which  they  use  during  the 
winter,  and  one  in  which  they  pass  the  hot  season.  Thin 
clothing  was  worn  in  the  heated  months,  as  in  Cuba ; 
more  fruits  and  cereals  were  eaten,  and  less  meat. 
People  lived  much  out  of  doors,  and  their  habits  were  like 
those  of  the  people  in  the  hot  country. 

Vegetation.  —  How  different  the  vegetation  was  from 
that  of  Cuba !    Instead  of  palm,  orange,  and  banana  trees, 


he  saw  hard  woods  like  the  oaks,  maples,  chest- 
nuts, and  beeches;  and  soft  woods,  such  as  the 
evergreens — pines  and  firs.     Some  of  the  northern 
trees,  like  the  apple,  pear,  and  peach,  had  blos- 
somed  in  the   spring,   and    were    bearing   fruit. 
Pears  ripened  first,  then  peaches,  and  finally,  in 
September  and  October,  apples  were  ready  to  pick. 
In  Cuba,  Antonio  had  always  seen  the  cocoanut- 
palm  and  other  fruit  trees  ripening  their  fruits  all 
through  the  year  instead  of  in  one  season  only,  as 
here.       Vegetation     grew     very 
rapidly  there,  and  here  the  trees 
were   years    in     reaching    their 
growth. 

Seasons  and  Climate.  —  The 
three  months  of  summer  were 
at  last  nearly  over.  It  surprised 
the  little  boy  much  to  learn  that 
in  the  autumn  all  the  leaves, 
except  those  of  the  evergreens, 
would  fall  off,  and  leave  the 
trees  and  bushes  nearly  bare. 
In  his  home,  vegetation  was 
green  the  year  round.  Grapes 
now  grew  ripe  in  this  cool  coun- 
try. There  were  often  chilly 
nights  and  bright,  cool  days. 
There  were  fewer  hours  of  day- 
light now,  and  the  nights  were 
longer.  The  frosts  opened  the 
chestnut  burs  and  ripened  the 
nuts. 

Autumn  Leaves.  —  Then  the 
leaves  began  to  turn.  In  October 
his  uncle  took  him  into  the  moun- 
tains to  see  the  gorgeous  woods.  There  were  whole 
mountain-roadsides  full  of  brilliant  red  and  yellow  trees 
in  every  shade  and  tint,  set  off  by  the  dark  leaves  of  the 
evergreens  !  He  had  never  seen  such  a  sight.  A  little 
later  the  leaves  began  to  fall,  and  it  seemed  to  Antonio 
that  the  trees  must  be  dying.  This  cool  season  lasted 
about  three  months. 

Then  the  cold  winds  began  to  blow,  and  fires  were 
built  in  the  furnaces  to  keep  the  houses  warm.  The 
days  grew  shorter  and  the  nights  longer.  One  morning 
when  Antonio  woke,  there  was  snow  on  the  ground. 
Trees,  bushes,  and  fences  were  covered  with  it.  He  saw 
snow  for  the  first  time  in  his  life.  He  had  a  sled  and 
went  out  to  coast,  bundled  up  as  never  before.     One  cold 


Workers,  Cuba 


A    TEMPERATE    COUNTRY 


71 


from  the  Hudson  River  and  the  lakes  in  its 
vicinity.  Philadelphia  gets  ice  from  the 
upper  part  of  the  Delaware  and  from  the 
Kennebec  River  in  Maine;  Chicago,  from 
Lake  Superior  and  from  lakes  in  Illinois. 
Ice  is  exported  from  the  temperate  country 
to  the  hot  country. 

When  the  freezing  weather  has  made 
the  ice  thick  enough,  ice-harvesting  begins. 
The  ice  is  cut  up  by  men  with  large  iron 
handsaws  into  blocks,  which  float,  and  a 
gang  of  men  tow  them  toward  the  shore, 
where  they  are  carried  up  an  incline  to  the 
inside  of  the  ice-house. 

The  ice-house  is  built  of  wood,  with  double 
walls,  the  space  between  being  filled  in  with 
sawdust.     Ice  is  usually  packed  in  sawdust, 


Winter,  showing  Foliage  on  Pines  and  Other  Evergreens 

night,  several  inches  of  ice  froze  on  the  pond,  and  he  had 
his  first  lesson  in  skating.  Now  and  then  through  the 
winter  there  was  a  great  storm  with  a  snowfall  of  a  foot 
or  more.  If  the  wind  blew,  the  snow  drifted  or  piled  up 
in  certain  places.  His  brother  in  Cuba  had  never  seen 
any  of  these  things. 

Ice-cutting.  —  Usually  the  temperature  drops  below 
zero  for  a  day  or  two.  Antonio  was  greatly  interested 
in  ice-cutting.  Ice  is  harvested  in  winter,  often  in 
February; 
always  as 
soon  as  the 
ice  is  nine 
or  more 
inches  in 
thickness 
in  the 
lakes  and 
the  rivers. 
Ice  is  cut 
in  ponds 
or  lakes, 
or  in  riv- 
ers near 
cities  and 
villages. 
New  York 
gets  much 
of   its  ice 


Cutting  Ice  into  Blocks 


Blocks  of  Ice  entering  Ice-house 

the  blocks  standing  on  end.  The  houses  are  three  or 
four  stories  high,  without  windows.  As  soon  as  one  story 
is  filled,  the  doors  are  tightly  closed.  From  these  great, 
barn-like  structures  the  ice  is  carried  in  cars  to  the  cities, 
and  then  to  the  houses  and  stores  in  ice-wagons. 

Seasons.  —  Antonio  noticed  how  glad  the  boys  and 
girls  were  to  welcome  the  departure  of  winter  and  hail 
the  coming  of  spring.  He  found  that  the  vegetation  was 
not  dead,  the  snow  disappeared  slowly  in  the  spring,  the 
grass  grew  green,  the  buds  swelled,  the  flowers  opened, 
the  birds  returned.  In  this  cooler,  busier  part  of  the 
world  Antonio  found  four  seasons,  spring  and  autumn 
being  as  long  and  important  as  summer  and  winter. 


72 


TYPE    FORMS 


Wild  Animals.  —  He  was  greatly  interested  in  the  ani- 
mals and  visited  collections  of  them,  and  also  read  many 
books  about  them.  He  learned  that  the  wild  animals  are 
not  generally  so  savage  as  those  in  the  other  belts.  The 
noted  wild  animals 
of  the  United  States 
are  the  bear,  deer, 
wolf,  fox,  and  beaver. 
In  place  of  the  white 
bear  of  the  cold 
country,  the  temper- 
atecountry  has  black 
and  brown  bears. 
Black  bears  are 
found  in  almost  all 
parts  where  the 
country  is  not  thickly 
settled.  They  live 
upon  both  animal 
and  vegetable  food, 
and  like  green  corn 
and  honey.  They 
have  rather  long 
legs,  and  long  feet 
ending  in  five  claws 
each.  Their  hair  is 
long,  soft,  and  woolly.  They  can 
climb  trees,  using  their  paws  like 
hands.  They  often  climb  a  tree  to 
get  the  honey  out  of  the  hollow  part 
of  it. 

Black  bears  are  often  tamed  by 
taking  them  when  young  and  rearing 
them  as  if  they  were  dogs.  Tame 
bears  often  like  to  play  with  children. 
A  bear  on  board  a  ship  once  played 
with  a  little  girl  and  carried  her  up 
the  rigging  to  the  maintop,  where  he 
tried  to  continue  his  romp.  The 
captain  finally  persuaded  Bruin  to 
come  down  with  the  child  to  get  his 
fill  of  sugar.  The  girl  was  saved, 
and  the.  bear  was  caged  for  the  rest 
of  the  voyage.  Black  bears  rarely  attack  a  human  being 
except  in  self-defence.  Brown  bears  are  found  in  Alaska. 
The  Kadiak  bear,  found  on  the  island  of  Kadiak,  Alaska, 
is  the  largest  bear  in  the  world.  He  has  a  broad,  square 
head  and  long,  coarse  hair. 

The  grizzly  bear  is  probably  the  strongest  and  most 


Grizzly  Bear 


savage  animal  in  the  world,  and  much  more  worthy  to  be 
called  the  "king  of  beasts"  than  the  lion.  He  is  the 
picture  of  great  strength  in  a  short,  compact  body.  He 
sometimes  weighs  twelve  hundred  pounds,  and  can  kill 
and  carry  off  a  buffalo  or  an  ox, 
much  larger  animals  than  himself. 
His  claws  are  very  long  and  sharp 
like  a  chisel.  He  prefers  flesh, 
but  can  live  on  roots  and  fruit. 

Although  he  cannot  climb  a  tree 
like  his  black  brother,  he  is  a 
dangerous  animal  to  attack,  even 
with  modern  rifles,  for  he  will  live 
and  fight  a  long  time  after  several 
bullets  have  passed  through  his 
heart. 

Another  interesting  animal  found 

in  many  parts  of  the  United  States 

is   the   deer,  of    which   there  are 

many   kinds.      This   animal,   like 

the  cow,  feeds  on  grass  and  tender 

buds,  chews  its  cud,  and  has  divided 

hoofs ;    but   unlike   the  cow,  it  is 

very  graceful  and  can  run  at  great 

speed.      All    kinds  of  deer  go  in 

herds,      are       very 

timid,  and  often  feed 

at  night  to  keep  out 

of    sight    of    man. 

They  take  to  water 

easily  and  are  good 

swimmers. 

The  common 
American  or  Vir- 
ginia deer  is  at  home 
in  this  temperate 
country,  and  it  is 
found  in  almost 
every  state,  like  the 
black  bear.  This 
deer  is  large  and 
strong- limbed,  and 
has  heavy  antlers 
which  look  like  horns.  Horns  are  hollow  and  are  never 
shed;  we  see  them  on  goats  and  cattle.  Antlers  are  solid 
and  are  shed  every  year.  They  usually  have  several 
branches.  They  are  worn  by  the  male  members  of  the 
deer  family.  The  prongs  on  an  antler  are  no  index  of 
the  wearer's  age. 


Young  Deer 


A    TEMPERATE    COUNTRY 


73 


This  deer  lives  in  thick  brush  and  timber, 
and  keeps  away  from  the  sight  of  man. 
The  males  lose  their  antlers  in  the  spring. 
The  new  antlers  grow  very  rapidly,  and  at 
first  are  soft,  tender,  and  covered  with  hair. 
This  hairy  covering  is  rubbed  off  against 
trees  and  bushes.  When  they  shed  their 
horns,  the  males  retire  from  female  deer 
society  as  if  quite  ashamed  of  their  appear- 
ance. The  Indians  tell  a  story  of  a  deer 
boasting  that  he  could  run  faster  than  his 
friend  the  antelope.  He  foolishly  said,  "  If 
I  do  not  beat  you,  I  will  give  up  my  horns." 


A  Herd  of  Elk 

Mountains,  where  there  is  a  herd  of  thirty  thousand. 
Both  its  flesh  and  skin  are  highly  prized.  Its  branching 
antlers  held  high  up,  and  its  bright  and  shining  fur  coat, 
give  it  very  properly  the  name  of  the  "  King  of  deer." 
It  is  shy  and  makes  a  harsh,  braying  noise.  It  lives  in 
small  families  of  six  or  seven.  Elk  have  been  trained  to 
go  in  harness  like  horses. 


A  Cow  Moose 


The  race  came  off  on  the 
plain,  and  the  antelope  easily 
won.  From  that  day  to  this 
the  deer  loses  his  horns 
every  year. 

In  the  northern  part  of 
the  temperate  country  are 
found  moose  and  caribou, 
the  largest  kind  of  deer. 

The  elk  is  next  to  the 
moose  in  size.  It  was  once 
found  in  many  parts  of  the 
United  States,  but  it  is  now 
largely  confined  to  the  Yel- 
lowstone Park,  in  the  Rocky 


A  Tree  gnawed  down  by  Beavers 


A  Beaver 

Beaver.  —  The  beaver  is  one 
of  the  most  remarkable  ani- 
mals in  this  country.  He  is 
about  the  size  of  an  ordinary 
dog  and  his  usual  color  is 
reddish  brown.  He  is  very 
timid  and  rarely  goes  about 
in  the  daytime.  His  front 
teeth  are  sharp  and  shaped 
like  a  chisel.  With  them  he 
can  easily  cut  down  a  large 
tree.      His  principal   food  is 


74 


TYPE    FORMS 


the  bark  of  trees,  and  he  cuts  down  and  stores  away 
tree-trunks  for  winter  use.  A  tree  cut  down  by  beavers 
is  shown  in  the  picture  oil  page  73. 

Though  the  beaver  moves  about  awkwardly  on  land, 
he  can  live  almost  entirely  in  the  water.  He  swims 
with  his  hind  feet,  which  are  webbed  like  the  feet  of  a 
goose,  holding  his  fore  feet  motionless  and  close  to  his 
body.  He  builds  his  lodge,  or  house,  in  the  water,  for 
protection,  and  dives  under  water  to  reach  the  entrance 
hole,  which  he  purposely  digs  deep  down  in  the  stream. 
When  the  body  of  water  beside  which  he  lives  is  not 
deep  enough,  he  builds  a  dam  of  trunks  and  branches 
of  trees  to  increase 


its  size. 

No  other  gnawer 
has  a  tail  like  the 
beaver's.  It  is  broad 
and  flat,  and  covered 
with  scales.  He 
uses  it  in  swimming 
and  building,  and, 
by  striking  the  water 
with  it,  he  can  give 
an  alarm  which  may 
be  heard  for  half  a 
mile.  This  interest- 
ing animal  has  been 
so  much  hunted  for 
its  fur  that  only  a 
few  specimens  are 
now  seen  in  the 
United  States. 

Learn  all  that  you 
can  about  the  other  wild  animals  of  this  country. 

People.  —  The  people  of  this  temperate  country  are  very 
different  from  those  of  Antonio's  hot  land.  They  become 
used  to  all  kinds  of  weather,  to  sudden  and  frequent 
changes  from  hot  to  cold  and  from  cold  to  warmer.  The 
hot  season  is  not  so  long  as  to  make  them  listless  or  lazy. 
The  cold  season  is  not  so  severe  as  to  cause  them  to 
think  only  of  preserving  their  lives;  hence  they  are 
generally  strong  and  active  like  the  wild  animals.  They 
are  full  of  business  enterprise;  they  are  thinkers  and 
doers. 

Here  are  found  the  highest  type  of  men  and  women. 
They  are  well  educated.     Their  boys  and  girls  go  to  fine 


City  Scene  in  a  Temperate  Country:  Hay  market  Square,  Chicago 


schools,  in  schoolhouses  which  are  usually  well  built, 
and  sometimes  elegantly  furnished.  The  Americans  are 
readers  and  workers.  Many  of  them  have,  by  their  en- 
terprise and  industry,  acquired  great  wealth.  A  large 
number  live  in  comfortable  homes,  and  many  in  palaces 
such  as  are  found  at  Lenox  and  Newport,  and  in  all  the 
great  cities.  Most  Americans  dress  neatly  and  have 
enough  to  eat.  They  ride  comfortably  in  electric  cars, 
cabs,  automobiles,  steam-cars,  or  ships.  Hundreds  of  rich 
people  have  their  private  coaches,  steam  yachts,  and  even 
steam-cars.  No  other  country  has  so  many  railroads, 
telephone,  and  telegraph  lines  as  the  United  States. 

Industries.  —  As 
we  shall  see  later, 
the  people  of  this 
temperate  country 
run  mills  and  make 
all  kinds  of  cloth, 
tools,  machines,  fur- 
niture, and  steel 
products.  They  dig 
in  the  mines  and  take 
out  of  the  earth  great 
quantities  of  coal, 
iron,  copper,  silver, 
gold,  and  many 
other  minerals.  The 
farmers  of  the  West 
raise  great  crops  of 
wheat,  corn,  and 
other  grains.  They 
raise,  also,  immense 
herds  of  cattle, 
sheep,  and  horses.  In  the  South  large  crops  of  cotton 
and  tobacco  are  grown.  All  kinds  of  fruits  are  raised 
in  the  warmer  parts.  They  transport  these  things  from 
place  to  place  by  means  of  their  railroads  and  ships. 
How  different  these  people  are  from  the  inactive  persons 
in  the  cold  and  the  hot  countries  mentioned !  They  are 
highly  civilized. 

LANGUAGE  LESSON 

1.  Write  about  the  work  going  on  near  your  home  in  the 
different  seasons  of  the  year. 

2.  Make  a  list  of  the  animals  you  see  frequently,  and  tell 
about  some  of  them. 


THE 
EARTH 

AS    A 
WHOLE 


S3SV 

1   S      Wi'"-*^i  \ 

m 

^C l 

^wH 

m.  V 

■IT  X^H 

^ 

J^H 

GEOGRAPHY   BY  REPRESENTATION  AND   DESCRIPTION 


PART   III 


23.    THE    EARTH  AND    ITS    MOTIONS 


ONE  day  the  teacher  made  some  soap-bubbles  float  in 
the  air,  to  the  delight  of  the  children.  She  then 
threw  up  in  the  air,  with  a  little  twist,  a  large  rub- 
ber ball  upon  which  had  been  drawn  a  number  of 
circles   in   bright  colors.      When  the   ball   was   in   the 


1 

Li  mm£k 

■ 

mmpm 

The  Ball  in  the  Air 


air,  the  children  could  plainly  see  it  turn  round  as 
well  as  move  up  and  down,  thus  showing  two  motions 
at  once.  Arthur  spun  his  top  on  the  floor  to  show 
how  it  turns  round  and  sometimes  moves  along  at  the 
same  time. 

"You  saw,  children,  the  soap-bubbles  floating  lightly 
in  the  air.     In  a  similar  way  the  earth,  with  the  air 


Earth  turning  on  Axis 

around  it,  floats  in  space.     Arthur's  top  turns  round  or 
spins,  and  moves  forward  at  the  same  time. 

"It  turns  on  an  imaginary  line  passing  through  its 
centre.  This  line  is  called  its  axis.  (See  page  77.)  The 
rubber  ball  I  threw  up  in  the  air  gave  a  very  good  idea 
of  the  earth  floating  and  turning  in  space.  It  turned 
round  an  axis  passing  through  it,  as  shown  in  the  cut 
above. 


75 


76 


THE    EARTH    AS    A    WHOLE 


"  You  can  show  the  same  at  home  by  marking  an  apple, 
orange,  or  ball,  and  tossing  any  one  of  them  in  the  air. 
You  must  give  them  a  little  twist,  when  you  toss  them 
up,  if  you  wish  to  show  two  motions. 

"  If  John  will  now  stand  up  in  the  middle  of  the  room 
to  represent  the  sun,  Mary  will  carry  this  ball  around  the 
room,  keeping  the  same  part  of  it  pointed  toward  the 
North  Star,  and  turning  it  slowly  as  it  turned  in  the  air. 
The  class  can  thus 
see  the  two  motions 
of  the  earth  very 
well  illustrated. 

"  You  can  think 
of  the  great  round 
or  spherical  world 
as  a  big  round  ship 
moving  swiftly  in 
space  around  the 
sun.  This  earth-ship 
turns  around  every 
twenty -four  hours, 
bringing  one  part  of 
the  earth  into  sun- 
light for  a  part  of 
every  day,  and  then 
whirling  it  away 
into  darkness  for 
the  rest  of  the  time. 
This  spinning  or 
turning  motion  of  the 
earth  causes  day  and 
night. 

"The  earth  goes 
around  the  sun  in  a 
year,  and  this  motion 
around  the  sun  is  one 
cause  of  our  changes 
of  seasons,  and  of  the 
changes  in  the  length 
of  day  and  night. 

"  The  earth-ship  is  composed  of  three  parts :  the  solid 
crust,  which  is  mostly  stone  ;  the  liquid  portion  known  to 
you  all  as  ivater  ;  and  beyond  the  first  two  and  covering 
them,  a  third  part,  the  gas  or  air." 

24.     SHAPE   OF  THE   EARTH 

"Sailors,  on  entering  port,  can  see  land  from  the  mast- 
head before  they  do  from  the  deck.   When  we  were  at  the 


The  New 
From  a  photograph  taken  through  a 


seashore,  we  noticed  the   gradual  disappearance  of  the 

ships  below  the  horizon. 

"  If  these  ships  should  sail  on  and  on,  they  would  in 

time  go  around  the  earth  and  return  to  the  shore  where 

we  saw  them. 

"  The  fact  that  men  have   travelled  around  the  earth 

and  have  come  back  to  the  same  place  from  which  they 

started,  is  one  of   the   best  proofs  that  the  earth  has  a 

curved  surface  like 
or,  ball.  For  how 
could  they  do  this, 
if  the  world  were 
shaped  like  a  cube  ? 
"  You  have  all 
seen  the  new  moon, 
and  you  remember 
that  the  paler  part 
looked  like  a  glass 
sphere  or  globe. 

"A  photograph  of 
it  shows  the  round- 
ness very  com- 
pletely. Now,  if 
you  were  standing 
on  the  moon,  look- 
ing toward  the 
earth,  the  earth 
would  have  much 
the  same  appearance 
as  the  new  moon 
seen  by  us,  except 
that  it  would  seem 
much  larger. 

"None  of  us  can 
ever  stand  upon  the 
moon  and  look  at 
the  earth,  so  the 
next  best  way  to  get 
an  idea  of  how  the 
earth  must  look  in 


Moon 
telescope  at  the  Lick  Observatory 


space  is  to  study  a  good  photograph  of  the  moon." 

25.     STUDY   OF   A   GLOBE    REPRESENTING  THE 
WHOLE    EARTH 

"  Because  the  earth  is  a  large  sphere,  it  is  best  repre- 
sented by  a  ball  called  a  globe.  This  ball  shows  the 
shape  of  the  earth,  and  the  position  of  places  and  their 
direction  from  each  other.     The  raised  globe  differs  from 


STUDY  OF  A  GLOBE  REPRESENTING  THE  WHOLE  EARTH 


77 


those  on  your  desks 
because  it  shows,  be- 
sides these  things,  the 
highlands  and  low- 
lands of  the  earth's 
surface. 

"  A  globe  also  shows 
the  turning  motion  of 
the    earth.      A     top 
seems  to  spin  around 
a  line  which  we  im- 
agine to  run  through 
the  top  from  end  to 
end.     The  position  of 
this  imagined  line  is 
shown   by  the  white 
line     AB    drawn    in 
the  top  on  this  page. 
This  line  passes  through  the  centre,  and  is  called  the  axis 
of  the  top,  because  the  top  seems  to  turn  upon  it. 
I  f      "  Remember  that   this   axis  is  an  ynaginary 
>  »  line,  not  a  real  one. 

"  If  I  spin  an  orauge  round  and  round,  every 
part  of  it  turns  round  an  imaginary  line.  This 
line  is  the  axis  of  the  orange.  Pass  a  wire 
through  the  orange  from  end  to  end,  and  you 
can  see  the  position  of  that  line  or  axis. 

"  In  like  manner,  the  axis  of  the  earth  is  an 
imaginary  line  round  which  the  earth  turns  or 
spins.  A  ToP  with  Axis 


A  Raised  Globe  (The  Jones  Model  of  the 
Earth) :  looking  toward  the  North  Pole 


One  end  of  the  axis  is  at  the  place  on  the  earth's  surface 
nearest  the  North  Star  and  is  called  the  North  Pole. 
The  opposite  end  of  the  axis,  or  the  place  farthest  from 


Equator  and  Poles 


"  In  a  globe  which  represents  the  earth,  the  wire  round 
which  it  turns  is  its  axis,  and  represents  the  axis  of  the 


Orange  with  Wire  Axis 

earth ;  but,  remember,  the  earth  has  no  wire  upon  which 
to  turn,  any  more  than  the  top  or  orange  really  has. 
"The  ends  of  the  axis  of  the  earth  are  called  jx>les. 


this  star,  is  called  the  South  Pole.    These  poles  are  in  the 
very  cold  parts  of  the  earth ;  hence  we  say,  '  as  cold  as 
the  poles,'  or  'as  cold  as  Greenland,'  a  country 
near  the  North  Pole. 

"  The  distance  through  the  centre  of  the  earth 
from  one  side  to  the  other  is  its  diameter.  The 
greatest  distance  around  the  earth  is  called  its 
circumference.  (See  diagram  on  page  81.)  Show 
with  the  globe  as  many  diameters  and  circum- 
ferences as  you  can. 

"  Now,  children,  please  notice  that  around  each 
of  your  globes  a  line  is  drawn,  halfway  between 
the  poles,  dividing  the  surface  into  two  equal 
This  line,   therefore,   is   called    the   equator  or 


parts. 

equally  dividing  line.     We  talk  as  if  such  a  line  were 


Equator  and  Parallels 

really  drawn  on  the  earth  ;  but  there  is  no  such  line,  any 
more  than  there  is  a  fence  or  wall  between  one  ward  and 
another  in  a  city,  or  between  one  town  and  another. 


78 


THE    EAETH    AS    A    WHOLE 


"This  great  circle,  the  equator,  passes  through  the 
hottest  parts  of  the  earth;  hence  we  often  say,  'as  hot 
as  it  is  at  the  equator.' 

"  Now  look  on  your  globes  and  find  other  lines  drawn 
parallel  to  the  equator,  so  as  to  divide  the  surface  of  the 
globe  or  earth  unequally.  Such  are  called  parallels. 
They  show  very  clearly  the  directions  east  and  west,  and 
also  how  far  places  are  from  the  equator.  The  most  im- 
portant parallels,  those  which  are  frequently  mentioned, 
are  the  polar  circles  and  the  tropics.  Notice  what  they 
bound. 

"  Lines  are  also  drawn  on  your  globes,  you  see,  through 
the  poles  and  crossing  the  equator  at  right  angles.  These 
are  the  circumferences  of  great  circles  like  the  equator, 
and  divide  the  surface  of  the  earth  into  equal  parts. 
They  run  exactly  north  and  south.  As  eveiy  place  on 
each  half  of  these  circles  has  its  mid-day  at  the  same 


Equator  and  Meridians 

time,  these  lines  are  called  mid-day  lines,  or  meridians. 
Any  number  of  parallels  or  meridians  may  be  drawn  on 
a  globe.  Count  the  number  that  you  find  on  your  globes. 
The  north  and  south  line  we  drew  on  the  floor  is  part  of  a 
meridian,  and,  if  extended  far  enough,  it  would  go  through 
the  poles  of  the  earth." 

DRAWING  LESSON 

1.  Copy  a  top.    Show  its  axis. 

2.  Draw  an  orange  with  a  wire  running  through  it. 

3.  Draw  a  globe  and  mark  on  it  the  poles,  equator,  parallels, 
and  meridians. 


26.    THE  VICINITY  OF  THE  SCHOOLHOUSE 

Near  the  school  is  a  long,  wide,  straight  street 
called  Dickens  Avenue.  The  schoolhouse  stands  on  a 
curving  street  called  Main  Street.     This  is  the  principal 


street  in  that  part  of  the  town,  and  it  extends  southwest 
from  one  end  of  the  avenue.  When  a  heavy  line,  three 
inches  long,  is  drawn  to  represent  the  straight  avenue, 
and  a  curving  line  to  stand  for  Main  Street,  the  two  lines 
remind  one  of  a  whip. 


DICKENS  AVENUE 

\  \%  \ 

0            \s_\       - 

----%  \ 

HENm  F1EID  J 

f5~~ 

-** — '    m  w& 

Map  of  Streets  near  the  Schoolhouse 

The  letter  S,  placed  about  halfway  along  the  lash  of 
the  whip,  shows  where  the  schoolhouse  stands.  It  is  sit- 
uated between  two  short  streets.  One  of  these  is  Cross 
Street,  spoken  of  in  Lesson  5. 

Other  short  streets,  crossing  the  long  streets,  are  shown 
by  lines  on  the  map.  The  map  also  shows  the  distance 
and  direction  of  Henry's  field  from  the  schoolhouse.  This 
distance  on  the  map  is  one  inch,  and,  as  every  inch 
stands  for  a  mile,  the  distance  is  one  mile.  The  map 
also  shows  where  other  points  of  interest  are  located. 

In  several  places  short,  curved  lines  are  drawn  to 
stand  for  hills  and  slight  elevations.  One  of  these  is 
Codman  Hill,  mentioned  in  Lesson  5. 

A  map  is  made  up  of  lines  and  marks  which  stand  for 
certain  features  on  the  sxirface  of  the  earth,  such  as  streets, 
roads,  railroads,  places,  rivers,  valleys,  mountains,  and 
boundaries. 

LANGUAGE   LESSON 

Answer  these  questions :  — 

1.  On  what  street  do  you  live? 

2.  For  whom  or  what  was  your  street  named? 

3.  What  hills,  valleys,  or  fields  are  near  your  schoolhouse  ? 

4.  What  are  the  names  of  the  two  main  streets  near  your 
home  ? 

5.  What  large  buildings  are  on  them  ? 

6.  What  churches  are  near  your  school  ? 

7.  What  manufacturing  is  carried  on  within  two  miles  of 
the  school  ? 

8.  AVhat  object  is  about  a  mile  from  your  school? 

9.  How  far  from  the  school  do  you  live  ? 

DRAWING  LESSON 
Draw  a  map  of  some  of  the  principal  streets  near  the  school. 


MAKING    MAPS 


79 


27.     MAKING   MAPS 

The  pupils  measured  the  tops  of  their  desks  and  found 
them  to  be  about  two  feet  long  and  one  foot  wide. 
With  rulers  and  pencils  they  drew  a  plan  of  the  top  of 


A  Schoolroom 

the  desk,  making  one  inch  in  length  stand  for  one  foot 
in  length  on  the  desk,  or  one  square  inch  for  one  square 
foot.     See  Fig.  1. 

Next  they  drew 
another  plan  and 
made  one  inch  stand 
for  two  feet,  as  in 
Fig.  2.  After  finish- 
ing this,  they  made 


I 


Figure  i 

another  plan  in  which  one  inch  repre- 
sented   one-half    of    a    foot,    as    in 
Figure  2  Yig.  3. 

They  next  measured  the  schoolroom  and  found  it  to 
be   about   thirty   feet  long   and   twenty-four  feet  wide. 


2222222222 

2222222222 
oooooooooo 

22222222°° 
oooooooooo 

2°°°°°_°_2°° 

I   I I   I 

o       I 


They  de- 
cided that, 
in  their  first 
plan,  twelve 
feet  should 
be  repre- 
sented by 
one  inch. 
See  Fig.  4. 

After  this 
plan     was 
finished, 
lgure  4  the     school 

building  was  measured.  It  was  found  to  be  about 
seventy-two  feet  long  and  sixty  wide.  The  halls  were 
nearly  twelve  feet  wide,  so  the  boys  used  a  scale  of 
twenty-four  feet  to  an  inch.  They  put  the  desks  in  only 
one  room ;   the  outer  doors  were  shown  by  lines  indicat- 


rf.1 

N 

— 

oooooooooo 
oooooooooo 
oooooooooo 
oooooooooo 

oooooooooo 

oooooooooo 

1 

• 

1 

■ 

1 

i 

1 

! 

1 

Figure  5 


Figure  3 


ing  the  steps ;  the  teachers'  room  was  shown 
opposite  one  of  the  entrances.     See  Fig.  5. 

Other  plans  were  drawn  on  different  scales. 
A  picture  of  a  schoolroom  in  the  same  build- 
ing is  shown  on  this  page.  It  is  the  room  in 
which  the  desks  are  shown  in  Fig.  5. 

In  this  way  the  children  learned  that  as 
the  scale  changed,  the  size  of  their  plans 
changed,  but  the  shape  remained  the  same. 

The  school  yard  was  next  paced  off  by  the 
two  bo3rs.  It  was  shaped  like  a  rectangle,  and 
was  about  350  feet  by  300  feet. 


80 


THE    EARTH    AS    A    WHOLE 


Enlarging  their  scale 
again  and  allowing  100  feet 
to  stand  for  one  inch,  the 
class  made  the  plan  for  the 
yard  shown  in  Fig.  6.  In 
the  first  and  last  figure  the 
arrow  shows  the  points  of 
the  compass. 

One  Saturday  Henry  and 
his  friend  paced  the  field 
mentioned  in  the  first  les- 
son, and  they  found  that 
the  scale  used  for  that  map 
or  plan  was  400  feet  to  an 
inch.  See  map  on  page  3. 
But  even  this  scale  is  not 
large  enough  for  most 
maps. 


A  Schoolyard 


If  the  scale  is  known,  it  is 
very  easy  to  find  the  dis- 
tance from  one  place  to 
another  on  a  map,  by  find- 
ing the  number  of  inches  or 
the  distance  by  the  scale. 
How  far  is  it,  then,  from 
Chicago  to  San  Francisco 
as  shown  on  the  map  of 
North  America  ?  Find 
other  distances  in  North 
America.  How  far  is  it 
from  New  York  to  Chicago  ? 
From  Washington  to  New 
Orleans  ?  From  Phila- 
delphia to  St.  Louis?  From 
New  York  to  Havana? 
From  Boston  to  Montreal  ? 


28.    THE  READING  OF  MAPS 

In  making  plans  of  the  schoolroom  and  school- 
yard, the  children  used  certain  lines  to  represent 
the  sides  of  the  room,  different  parts  of  the  build- 
ing, etc.  In  making  a  map  of  the  field  and  the 
vicinity  of  the  school,  straight  lines  were  used  to 
show  the  edge  of  the  field  and  streets ;  curved  lines 
to  indicate  the  brook,  spring,  trees,  etc.  In  these 
plans  and  maps  every  line  stood  for  something.  This 
is  true  of  all  maps.  Color  and  shading  are  also 
used,  and  each  has  its  meaning. 

If  a  map  is  placed  on  a  desk,  so  the  top  of  the 
map  is  toward  the  north,  you  will  at  once  discover 
that  the  bottom  is  toward  the  south,  the  right-hand 
side  toward  the  east,  and  the  left-hand  side  toward 
the  west.     If  the  same  map  is  hung  on  the  north 


Figure  6 

In  nearly  all  maps  found  in  books,  the  scale  is  a  certain 
number  of  miles  to  an  inch.  North  America  is  drawn 
opposite  page  88,  and  the  scale  is  640  miles  to  an  inch. 
In  the  map  of  the  United  States,  the  scale  is  325  miles 
to  an  inch;  in  the  map  of  Asia,  the  scale  is  much 
smaller,  or  800  miles  to  one  inch. 

The  shape  of  the  map  in  all  these  cases  is  exactly  the 
same.  We  learn  that  as  the  scale  of  the  map  grows 
larger,  the  area  represented  upon  the  map  grows  smaller. 
As  the  scale  grows  larger,  a  smaller  tract  of  land  is  in- 
cluded in  the  same  space.  This  is  illustrated  by  the  four 
maps  of  Chicago  and  its  vicinity.     See  page  128. 


Map  on  Desk 


THE    SIZE    OF    THE    EARTH 


81 


side  of  the  schoolroom,  the  right-hand  side  is  still  toward 
the  east,  etc. 

In  all  maps  this  arrangement  of  direction  is  under- 
stood unless  an  arrow  is  given  to  show  direction ;  the 
arrow  generally  points  toward  the  north.  In  the  field, 
the  little  brook  flowed  toward  the  south ;  hence,  on  the 
map  it  was  drawn  as  flowing  toward  the  bottom  of  the 
paper  or  map.  (See  page  3.)  If  a  river  flows  eastward, 
how  should  it  be  drawn  on  the  map  ? 

All  maps  are  drawn  upon  a  certain  scale,  like  those  of 
the  school  and  neighborhood ;  hence,  by  means  of  the 
scale,  so  many  miles  to  the  inch,  distances  can  be  very 
accurately  shown.     (See  scales  on  maps  in  this  book.) 

As  the  best  globe  is  the  raised  globe,  so  the  best 
maps  to  show  the  surface  are  raised,  or  relief  maps.  An 
album  of  such  maps  is  very  helpful,  but  it  is  too  large 
for  convenience,  and  the  cost  is  very  great. 

Shading  has  been  used,  therefore,  to  represent  eleva- 
tions. (See  map,  opposite  page  89.)  Colors  show  the  sur- 
face even  better  than  shading.  Each  color  shows  a  certain 
height.  Shades  of  the  same  color  in  maps  of  the  states 
and  small  sections  are  used  by  the  United  States  govern- 
ment to  show  elevations.  These  are  often  called  physical 
maps,  because  they  show  the  surface  or  physical  features. 
(A  relief  map  is  shown  opposite  page  89.) 

Political  maps  do  not  make  the  surface  elevations  very 
plain,  but  they  show  the  position  and  the  extent  of 
countries  under  one  government,  or  political  divisions; 
and  hence  are  called  political  maps.  They  also  show 
direction,  rivers,  bodies  of  water,  mountains,  cities,  etc. 
The  map  opposite  page  88  is  a  political  map.  On  such  a 
map  what  do  the  heavily  shaded  lines  indicate  ? 

The  dotted  or  broken  lines  ?  Waving  broken  lines  ? 
Curving  black  lines  ? 

How  is  the  direction  of  a  river  shown  on  a  map  ? 

29.    THE   SIZE   OF  THE   EARTH      ' 

Many  of  the  children  had  the  small  globes.  They 
found  the  distance  through  these  globes,  or  the  diameter, 
to  be  eight  inches.  The  earth  is  so  large  that  the  dis- 
tance through  its  centre,  or  its  diameter,  is  about  eight 
thousand  miles.  You  see  that  one  inch  on  the  diameter 
of  the  small  globe  stands  for  one  thousand  miles  of  the 
earth's  diameter. 

The  distance  around  the  earth,  called  its  circumference, 
is  more  than  three  times  as  great  as  the  diameter,  or 
nearly  twenty-five  thousand  miles. 

Twenty-five   thousand  miles  is  a   very  long  distance. 


ejaCUMFEREjW 


Diameter  and  Circumference 

Some  of  you  can  walk  twenty-five  miles  in  a  day.  In 
order  to  walk  around  the  earth  you  would  have  to  walk 
for  one  thousand  days,  or  two  and  three-fourths  years. 
It  would  take  a  fast  express  train  more  than  a  month  to 
do  this  if  it  travelled  day  and  night  without  stopping. 
Yet  the  earth  is  a  mere  speck,  compared  with  the  sun. 


Relative  Size  of  the  Earth  and  Sun 

The  relative  size  of  the  earth  and  sun  can  be  partly 
understood  by  a  comparison  of  their  diameters  and  cir- 
cumferences. In  the  diagram  above,  if  a  little  speck  like 
E  represents  the  size  of  the  earth,  eight  thousand  miles 
in  diameter,  then  the  sun  would  be  shown  by  the  big 
circle,  which  is  eight  hundred  and  sixty  thousand  miles 
in  diameter.  In  other  words,  it  would  take  a  million 
earths  to  make  one  sun. 


82 


THE    EARTH    AS    A    WHOLE 


30.     SURFACE   OF   THE   EARTH 

The  class,  in  their  travels  and  observations  about 
home,  found  the  surface  of  the  earth  composed  of  land 
and  water.  All  travellers  have  found  it  the  same.  The 
water  surface  is  found  to  be  nearly  three  times  as  much 
as  the  land  surface. 


Eor  convenience,  the  earth  is  usually  divided  into  two 
parts  or  half-spheres  called  hemispheres.  These  are  often 
made  to  show  the  land  masses. 

Thus  divided  and  represented,  we  call  the  parts  the 
Western  and  Eastern  hemispheres.  Draw  a  chalk  line 
on  your  globe  to  show  Eastern  and  Western  hemispheres. 


North  Pole 


HEMISPHERES. 


SURFACE    OF    THE    EARTH 


83 


The  division  is  sometimes  made  to  show  the  poles  as 
centres,  in  this  way  :  — 


Northern 


NORTHERN  AND  SOUTHERN  HEMISPHERES 


Southern 

and  the  two  parts  are  called  Northern  and  Southern 
hemispheres.  Draw  a  circle  around  your  globe  to  show 
these  hemispheres. 

The  water  surface  is  level,  and  it  is  taken  as  a  con- 
venient point  from  which  to  measure.  When  we  say  a 
hill  is  one  thousand  feet  high,  we  mean  that  the  top  of 
the  hill  is  one  thousand  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 


In  one  hemisphere  may  be  shown  most  of  the  land  and 
in  the  other  most  of  the  water,  in  this  way  :  — 


Land 


LAND  AND  WATER  HEMISPHERES 


0 


Water 

These  are  called  Land  and  Water  hemispheres,  and 
may  be  traced  on  a  globe  in  the  same  way  as  the  Northern 
and  Southern  hemispheres. 

When  attention  is  called  to  the  land,  and  not  to  the 
water  in  the  Eastern  Hemisphere,  the  term  Eastern  Con- 
tinent should  be  used.  The  land  in  the  Western  Hemi- 
sphere is  called  the  Western  Continent,  or  the  Americas. 


84 


THE    EARTH    AS    A    WHOLE 


m 


North  America 

RELATIVE  SIZE 


If  the  land  in  the  con-  *•  Australia 

tinents  is  subdivided,  six 
Grand  Divisions  are 
made,  as  follows  :  — 

The  Western  Con- 
tinent has  two,  North 
and  South  America.  The 
Eastern  Continent  is 
much  larger,  and  the 
land  is  divided,  first, 
into  three  parts.  The 
largest  part  on  the  north 
is  called  Eurasia.  This 
is  subdivided  into  Europe 
and  Asia.  "  Eurasia  "  is 
formed  from  these  two 
names.  The  part  south 
of  Europe  is  always 
called  Africa,  and  the 
sixth  and. smallest  grand 
division  is  the  great 
island  of  Australia. 

In  North  America,  the 
grand  division  in  which 
we  live,  are  found  wide  prairies,  large  and  beautiful  lakes, 
the  finest  canyons,  and  the  most  magnificent  falls  in  the 
world.  It  is  noted  for  its  great  and  prosperous  republic,  the 
United  States.    This  republic  is  famous  for  its  free  schools. 

In  South  America,  we  find  the  largest  river  on  the 
globe.  There  are  also  many  volcanoes  of  great  height, 
and  long  ranges  of  snow-capped  mountains.  The  forests 
and  pampas  are  very  extensive  and  their  products  of 
great  value.     The  pampas  are  great  treeless  plains. 

Europe  is  small  in  size,  but  it  is  the  home  of  many 
nations.  Many  of  its  people  are  wealthy  and  cultivated. 
Europe  is  visited  by  travellers  from  other  lands  who  go 
there  to  enjoy  its  lovely  lakes,  beautiful  mountains,  treas- 
ures of  art,  and  many  interesting  towns  and  cities. 

Africa  is  noted  for  its  great  desert,  its  intense  heat, 
and  the  many  savage  tribes  that  live  there.  It  has  an 
inland  elevated  plain  and  several  wonderful  rivers.  Until 
recent  years  little  was  known  of  the  interior  of  this  grand 
division,  and  it  has  been  called  the  "  Dark  Continent." 

Australia  is  large,  as  an  island,  and  small,  as  a  grand 
division.     It  has  many  strange  animals. 

Asia  is  celebrated  for  its  great  size,  being  equal  to  both 
North  and  South  America  together.  Its  mountains  are 
the  loftiest  in  the  world,  and  its  millions  of  inhabitants 
are  more  than  half  of  all  the  people  in  the  world. 


2.  Europe 


3.  South  America 


<*    ^ 


5.   Africa  6.   Asia 

OF  GRAND  DIVISIONS  DRAWN  ON  SAME  SCALE 

The  size  of  the  grand  divisions  differs  very  much.  If 
they  were  drawn  upon  the  same  scale  and  arranged  in 
order  from  smallest  to  largest,  in  squares  of  the  same 
size,  they  would  appear  as  in  the  diagram  above. 

Using  this  diagram,  compare  the  size  of  Europe  with 
that  of  North  America ;  with  that  of  Asia.  Note  how 
much  space  in  the  squares  is  left  uncovered  by  the  small 
grand  divisions,  and  how  little  by  the  large  ones. 

World  Slopes.  —  "  Though  the  water  surface  is  level," 
said  Miss  Hale,  "  we  have  found  that  the  land  surface 
has  many  slopes  of  different  degrees  of  steepness  and  a 
very  small  amount  of  dead  level.  The  land  in  the  two  con- 
tinents has  a  striking  likeness  in  slopes  and  elevations." 


Profile  of  a  Grand  Division  like  North  America 

Usually  the  surface  of  a  grand  division  is  divided 
into  five  parts,  as  follows  :  (1)  A  short,  steep  slope  ;  then 
(2)  a  long,  gentle  slope ;  (3)  a  high  elevation  on  one  side, 
and  (4)  a  lower  elevation  on  the  opposite  side  ;  and  finally 
(5)  a  wide,  central  valley  or  plain  between  the  elevations. 
In  this  central  valley  or  plain  are  generally  found  some 
of  the  prairies,  selvas,  deserts,  and  plateaus  of  the  world. 
(See  profile  above.) 


BELTS  AND  ZONES  OF  HEAT  AND  COLD 


86 


Still  more  wonderful  is  the  fact  that  the  short,  steep 
slopes  of  the  world,  with  their  short,  smajl  rivers,  lie 
next  to  and  drain  into  the  largest  body  of  salt  water,  the 
Pacific;  while  the  long  slopes,  with  their  long  rivers, 
drain  into  the  smaller  bodies  of  water. 

Water.  —  The  water  of  the  earth  is  found  in  two  con- 
ditions, fresh  and  salt.  The  fresh  water  is  much  less  in 
amount  than  the  salt,  and  is  found  in  the  rivers  and 
lakes ;  the  salt  water  is  found  in  great  bodies  called 
seas   and  oceans. 

There   are  five   oceans,  each    noted  for   some   special 
things.     The   names   of   these   oceans  are  given  on  the 
maps  of  the  hemi- 
spheres.     Find 
and  place  them. 

The  Pacific  is 
the  largest  of  all 
the  oceans.  In  it 
are  found  islands 
built  by  the  coral 
animal.  Its 
waters  are  gener- 
ally very  calm, 
which  fact  has 
given  it  its  name. 

The  Atlantic, 
which  is  next  in 
size,  is  noted  for 
its  wonderful  cur- 
rents,    beautiful 

islands,  and  the  many  ships  which  sail  over  it.  It  was 
across  this  ocean  that  Columbus  sailed  to  discover  the 
continent  upon  which  we  live. 

The  Antarctic  Ocean  is  the  most  mysterious,  because  it 
has  been  so  little  explored.  We  know  that  it  has  great 
fields  of  ice,  but  there  seems  to  be  very  little  land. 

Of  the  Arctic  we  know  more.  It  is  famous  for  the 
coldness  of  its  climate,  and  its  miles  and  miles  of  ice  and 
snow.  On  its  shores  live  a  strange  little  people  called 
Eskimos.  The  brilliant  Northern  Lights  are  seen  in  the 
Arctic  skies. 

The  Indian  Ocean  is  a  warm  ocean  noted  for  its  terrible 
storms  and  its  strong  winds,  which  blow  part  of  the  year 
from  one  direction  and  part  from  the  opposite  direction. 
Divers  go  down  into  this  ocean  after  the  finest  pearls. 

31.    BELTS   OR   ZONES  OF  HEAT   AND   COLD 

The  children  have  already  learned  that  the  heat  is 
much  greater  at  noon  than  late  in  the  afternoon,  in  sum- 


mer than  in  winter,  because  more  rays  reach  the  earth 
when  they  fall  upon  it  vertically  than  when  they  strike 
the  earth  at  a  slant.  For  the  same  reason  different 
parts  of  the  earth  are  heated  differently  at  the  same 
time. 

The  parts  near  the  ends  of  the  axis,  called  the  North 
Pole  and  the  South  Pole,  receive  the  smallest  amount  of 
heat.  Halfway  between  these  cold  sections  is  a  wide 
section  which  is  very  hot,  because  every  day  the  sun  is 
nearly  overhead. 

As  these  parts  go  all  the  way  around  the  earth  they  are 
called  belts.     The  belts  which  people  wore  many  years 


The  Position  of  the  Earth  in  reference  to  the  Sun  in  June :  The  Rays  of  the  Sun  (shown  by  the  White  Lines) 
heat  the  Earth  differently  in  Different  Parts  and  differently  at  Different  Seasons 

ago  were  called  "  zones,"  so  the  word  zones  is  used  for 
these  belts  of  temperature. 

Between  the  hot  and  cold  belts  are  two  parts  where 
the  winters  are  cold  and  the  summers  hot ;  where  the 
people  have  frequent  changes  in  heat  and  cold ;  and  where 
there  are  the  four  seasons,  spring,  summer,  autumn,  and 
winter.  As  the  heat  here,  and  the  cold  also,  is  moderate, 
these  belts  are  well  called  the  "  Temperate  Belts." 

One  of  them  is  north  of  the  hot  belt,  or  Torrid  Zone,  and 
one  is  south ;  so  they  are  named  the  North  Temperate  Belt 
and  the  South  Temperate  Belt  or  Zone.  How  many  belts 
are  there  in  all  ?    Find  each  one  on  the  Zone  Belt  Sphere. 

Cold  Belts.  —  The  sections  near  the  poles  are  some- 
times called  the  Polar  Regions,  or  North  and  South  Frigid 
Zones.  There  is  no  season  like  our  summer  in  these  belts. 
It  is  so  cold  there  that  no  trees,  few  shrubs,  only  a  little 
grass,  and  a  few  flowers  are  seen.  Moss  is  very  com- 
mon. Land  animals  are  not  very  numerous,  but  birds  and 
creatures  like  the  seal  and  walrus  are  abundant. 


86 


THE    EARTH    AS    A    WHOLE 


Only  a  few  people  live  in  the  cold  belts.  In  the  lesson 
called  "  A  Cold  Country,"  you  have  read  about  the  ani- 
mals, people,  and  plants  that  can  live  in  the  terrible  cold 
of  the  Frigid  Belts. 

The  Hot  Belt.  —  The  hot  belt  or  zoiie  is  found  on  each 
side  of  a  line  passing  around  the  earth  from  east  to  west, 


which  to  live,  and  there  will  be  found,  especially  in  the 
North  Temperate  Zone,  the  most  land  and  the  most  peo- 
ple. Man  seems  to  be  best  suited  to  a  moderate  amount 
of  heat  and  cold,  frequent  change  of  weather,  and  the 
food  which  naturally  grows  in  this  region. 

The  different  grains,  including  rice,  potatoes,  vegeta- 
bles, temperate-zone  fruits,  and  the  cattle 
which  are  fed  upon  grass,  hay,  and  corn, 
furnish  the  most  wholesome  and  nourishing 
kinds  of  food  for  man.  Hence  in  the  tem- 
perate belt  man  is  the  noblest,  the  best 
educated,  and  most  prosperous. 

Life  Belts. — Again,  children,  we  may 
divide  the  surface  of  the  earth  into  life  belts, 
arranged  in  order,  beginning  at  the  North 
Pole. 

There  is  first,  all  around  the  pole,  a  belt 
with  little  variety  of  vegetation  or  animal  life, 
as  you  learned  in  reading  about  Greenland. 
Then  comes  a  belt  of  forests  in  which  live 
the  fur-bearing  animals,  found  only  in  cold 
countries. 


The  Zone  Belts:  Winter 

equally  distant  from  each  pole.  This  line 
is  shown  on  page  82,  and  it  is  called  the 
equator,  because  it  is  equally  distant  from 
the  poles. 

The  heat  is  so  great  in  this  part  of  the 
earth  that  there  is  no  winter  at  all.  White 
people  do  not  like  to  live  under  the  burning 
rays  of  the  sun.  Black  people  live  in  this 
hot  belt  because  they  can  better  endure  the 
fierce  heat  of  the  sun.  This  part  is  often 
called  the  tropics  or  the  Torrid  Zone. 

Though  not  many  white  men  live  in  the 
hot  belt,  they  constantly  go  there  to  get 
valuable  articles.  They  bring  to  the  North, 
from  the  hot  South,  bananas,  oranges,  lemons, 
cocoanuts,  spices,  coffee,  raw  rubber,  raw 
cotton,  pearls,  and  diamonds. 

More  interesting  things  are  told  of  such  lands  in  the 
lessons  on  Cuba,  India,  and  Africa. 

The  Temperate  Belts.  —  The  temperate  belts  or  zones  are 
noted  for  their  frequent  changes  of  weather,  changes  in 
the  length  of  day  and  night,  and  for  the  regular  return 
of  the  seasons.     A  hot  or  a  cold  spell  does  not  last  long. 

The  temperate  belt  is  much  the  more  desirable  part  in 


The  Zone  Belts:  Summer 

South  of  this  belt,  in  the  North  Temperate  Zone,  is  a 
warmer  belt  in  which  the  different  grains  flourish.  It  is 
often  called  the  food  belt.  In  this  belt  live  a  large  part 
of  the  people  on  the  earth,  and  with  them  the  domestic 
animals,  and  such  wild  animals  as  the  bear  and  deer. 
Like  all  these  belts,  this  one  extends  all  the  way  around 
the  earth. 


BELTS    OR    ZONES    OF    HEAT    AND    COLD 


87 


%.^fav* 

i^f 

EnF-                           '^^1 

Bk  , 

#*^ipy  EpS^        ^tu 

fo 

v«bFto            - — ,^&.     ■ 

1 

^fl  ImihiZSw 

1 

11 

T 

MPW3 

^     iff           V(V\ 

ilLu«L»l*=!* 

H*tS^*  .^^'■■"•W 

.^iJLE:( 

■ 

Tr 

^ 

?'~^*l 

9  •  P 

,..--.  -— .- 

■ 

.,-.;'        H 

* 

M*  ■J 

,-""  •■.;■■.; '-,  ._/..''  -■•■"'  -■■-.";  ■'.-     ''.-■■    -V-     ""j>£ 

Scene  in  the  Sub-tropical  Belt :  Jamaica 


Farther  south  is  a  much  warmer  belt,  in  which  grow 
sugar,  cotton,  coffee,  and  fruits,  and  where  people  of  dark 
hue  live.  As  the  climate  is  almost  tropical,  it  is  called 
the  sub-tropical  belt. 

Then  comes  the  hot  or  tropical  belt,  near  the  equator, 
in  which  the  great  heat  and  moisture  make  vegetation 
grow  rapidly  and  to  great  size.  The  wild  animals  are 
large  and  fierce,  and  include  the  elephant,  lion,  tiger, 
hippopotamus,  and  others  described  later  in  this  book. 
Tropical  vegetation  grows  very  rapidly  and  looks  very 
different  from  that  of  the  temperate  belt.  It  includes 
palms,  bananas,  breadfruit,  pineapples,  spices,  rubber 
trees,  cacao,  and  trees  valuable  for  dyestuffs  and  cabinet 
woods.     Negroes  like  the  hot  belt. 

These  belts  are  found  also  in  the  Southern  Hemi- 
sphere, but  they  are  less  important,  because  there  is  less 
land  there  than  in  the  Northern  Hemisphere. 


REVIEW 

Those  of  you   who   live   in  the   temperate   belt   can  easily 
answer  the  following  questions :  — 

1.  When  are  the  days  and  nights  of  the  same  length? 

2.  Of  what  benefit  is  the  snow  ? 

3.  In  what  part  of  the  year  does  it  rain  most  frequently  ? 

4.  Is  it  warmer  in  August  than  in  June  V     Why  ? 

5.  Is  it  cooler  on  the  top  of   a  hill  than  at   the  bottom  ? 
Why? 

6.  What  fruits  grow  best  near  your  home  ?     Why  ? 

7.  When  is  the  hay  crop  harvested  ?     Why  ? 

8.  Why  do  people  go  to  the  seaside  in  summer? 

9.  Why  do  children  have  different  games  in  different  sea- 
sons? 

10.  AVhat  one  article  of  food  is  eaten  where  you  live  more 
than  any  other  ?    Why  ? 

11.  Why  do  people  go   south   in   winter  instead   of   going 
in  summer? 


88 


THE    EARTH    AS    A    WHOLE 


4.    PICTURE   STUDY 


^^^^yMm 

■— j**«* 

Hifl^H 

^.^  l_; 

^Mmm 

-arrta 

:'.  i^*Wai 

|l*       V«ins 

MlH^H 

Harbor  of  St.  Johns,  Newfoundland 

1.  What  is  a  harbor?    Find  this  harbor  on  the  map. 

2.  How  is  this  harbor  shut  in  from  the  ocean? 

3.  Why  are  not  the  mountains  covered  with  vegetation  ? 

4.  How  many  large  ships  can  you  count  in  the  harbor? 

5.  What  kind  of  vessels  are  they  ? 

6.  Write  an  account  of  an  imaginary  trip  on  one  of  the  ships. 


NORTH  AMERICA 


INTERESTING  FACTS  ABOUT  NORTH  AMERICA 

In  Alaska  the  mails  are  hauled  by  reindeer,  which  travel  over 
the  snow  faster  than  dogs. 

*J\.      In  June  Dawson  has  the  midnight  sun.     Photographs  can  be 
<  *    taken  in  the  middle  of  the  night. 

Some  parts  of  Alaska  are  well  suited  to  agriculture  and  cattle- 
raising. 

One  of  the  great  industries  of  Canada  is  lumbering.  The  heavy 
logs  are  easily  drawn  over  the  snow  during  the  winter  months. 
Fur  gathering  and  fishing  are  two  other  great  industries. 

Montreal  and  Toronto  are  two  wide-awake  cities  in  Canada. 
Quebec  is  a  most  interesting,  quaint,  historic  place. 

Newfoundland  is  a  favorite  land  for  hunting.  St.  Johns  has  a 
landlocked  harbor. 

The  temperature  and  climate  in  Mexico  vary  as  the  elevation 
varies.  The  lowest  part,  near  the  coast,  is  called  the  hot  country. 
The  next  part,  from  one  to  four  thousand  feet  high,  is  called  the 
temperate  region.  The  third  part,  over  five  thousand  feet  high,  is 
called  the  cold  country.  The  vegetation  differs  in  the  three  parts. 
Indian  corn  forms  the  chief  food  of  the  people  in  Mexico. 

The  mountain  forests  of  Santo  Domingo  contain  many  furniture 
and  dye  woods. 

Jamaica  raises  and  ships  to  the  North  large  quantities  of 
bananas. 


MAP  QUESTIONS   ON   NORTH  AMERICA 

1.  Why  are  different  colors  used  on  the  map  ? 

2.  How  are  the  elevations  shown  1 

3.  How  can  you  tell  in  what  direction  the  rivers  flow  ? 

4.  How  many  inches  is  it  on  the  map  from  New  York  to  New 
Orleans  ?    How  many  miles,  then  ? 

5.  In  what  direction  do  most  of  the  rivers  of  North  America 
flow? 

6.  Point  out  a  river  system  and  name  it. 

7.  Name  four  large  branches  of  the  Mississippi  River. 

8.  In  what  kind  of  places  do  rivers  rise,  according  to  this  map  ? 

9.  In  what  cases  do  rivers  form  boundaries  ? 

10.  Where  are  there  a  great  many  islands  ? 

11.  Write  in  order  the  names  of  the  large  rivers. 

12.  Where  do  you  find  a  broad  valley  ?    A  narrow  one  ? 

13.  In  what  directions  do  most  of  the  peninsulas  point  ? 

14.  Name  foil^ar^e  p^iinsulas^yj^,^ ' 

15.  What  part  of  North  America  is  in  the  hot  belt  ?  In  the  cold 
belt? 

16.  To  what  country  does  Alaska  belong  ? 

17.  What  cities  are  near  the  40th  parallel  ? 

18.  Write,  in  order  of  location,  the  names  of  five  other  cities. 


North 
America. 

Scale  of  Statute  Miles. 


640  MILES  TO    ONE    INCH. 

Capitals  of  Countries  thus  : .® 

THE   M.-N.  WORKS,    BUFFALO,    N.Y. 


100°       Longitude        West  90°      from         Greenwich  80° 


V 


:/S. 


«  s 


^0 


%ih 


:  'K 


s ;;      ...  St 


>«x 


Relief  Map  of  North  America. 


Describe  the  location  and  relative  position  of  the  mountain  ranges. 

Find  the  principal  river  valleys  and  compare  their  area. 

Compare  the  Atlantic  and  Pacific  coast  lines. 

Locate  the  plains  and  plateaus  of  this  map  on  the  political  map  of  North  America. 


NEW  YORK  HARBOR  AND  CITY  HALL 
PARK:  City  Hall  at  Left  and  Large  News- 
paper Buildings  at  Right  of  Lower  Picture 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 
PART  rv 


IN  NORTH  AMERICA 


32.     NEW   YORK   CITY 


We  will  begin  our  journeys  with  a  visit  to  the  largest 
city  in  the  Western  Hemisphere,  "  Greater  New  York," 
as  it  is  now  sometimes  called. 


By  looking  at  the  two  maps  of  the  Middle  Atlantic 
states,  on  page  117,  and  of  Xew  York  and  its  vicinity, 
on  page  90,  you  will  at  once  see  some  reasons  why  this 
city  has  grown  so  rapidly  and  even  made  itself  the 
second  city  in  size  in  the  whole  world. 


89 


90 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


In  the  first  place,  you  notice  that  it  has  a  large,  well- 
protected  harbor.  The  outer  harbor,  called  the  Lower 
Bay,  is  protected  from  the  fury  of  the  ocean  by  an  arm 
of  land  or  cape  called  Sandy  Hook.  Then  the  inner 
harbor,  called  the  Upper  Day,  is  shut  in  by  two  large 
islands  which  almost  touch  each  other.  You  may  tell 
the  names  of  the  islands. 

In  the  next 
place,  most  of  the 
city  is  built  on  a 
long,  narrow  isl- 
and, between  two 
rivers.  An  im- 
mense amount  of 
water  surface,  in 
which  many  ves- 
sels can  ride  in 
perfect  safety,  is 
thus  afforded  and 
there  is  plenty 
of  room  for 
wharves. 

In  addition  to 
all  this,  the  city 
is  connected  by 
water  with  Long 
Island  Sound, 
away  to  the  east, 
and  with  the 
Hudson  River  to 
the  north.  It  is 
also  well  situated 
for  trade  with 
Europe,  because 
it  is  so  near  to 
that  grand  divi- 
sion, and  lies 
between  it  and 
the  grain-growing 

West.  It  is  closely  connected  by  rail  with  Albany,  the 
capital,  and  with  Troy,  Syracuse,  Rochester,  and  Buffalo, 
all  in  the  State  of  New  York. 

New  York,  like  London,  Chicago,  and  some  other  cities, 
has  grown  by  joining  to  itself  other  places.  The  largest 
city  added  was  Brooklyn,  a  city  across  the  East  River. 

Streets.  —  If  you  went  to  New  York,  you  would  be 
greatly  interested  in  the  streets  and  street  life.  As  you 
see  by  the  fine  cross  lines  on  the  map  on  this  page,  most 
of  the  streets  run  across  the  narrow  strip  of  land  and 


Map  of  New  York  and  its  Vicinity :   City  of  New  York  shown  by  Heavy  Dotted  Line 


the  others  up  and  down,  crossing  one  another  usually  at 
right  angles.  The  long  streets  are  called  avenues,  and 
most  of  the  short  streets,  above  the  lower  third  of  the 
city,  are  numbered. 

Let  us  go  through  a  part  of  the  avenue  called  Broad- 
way. This  street  is  not  so  wide  as  some  of  the  avenues 
parallel  to  it,  but  it  is  one  of  the  best-known  streets 

in  the  world.  It 
is  about  six  miles 
long,  and  there 
are  few  streets 
where  more  busi- 
ness is  done  in 
a  day.  It  begins 
at  the  Battery,  a 
small  park  look- 
ing out  upon  the 
shipping  and  the 
harbor. 

The  name 
"  Battery  "  comes 
from  the  fact  that 
years  ago  a  small 
fort  stood  there  to 
guard  the  city. 
Grass  and  trees 
grow  there  now, 
and  I  always  see 
people  there 
watching  the  busy 
crowds.  There, 
too,  they  can  see 
the  various  boats 
ever  passing  by, 
and  gaze  upon  the 
soft  sunsets  over 
the  Jersey  hills. 
Leaving  this 
pleasant  green 
oasis,  we  will  walk  up  Broadway  and  plunge  into  the 
hurrying  crowd.  On  both  sides  of  the  street  are  great 
business  blocks  and  busy  people  within.  This  is  the 
general  condition  of  the  street  for  many  a  mile. 

Not  far  from  the  Battery  we  come  to  a  large  church 
with  a  very  high  and  handsome  spire.  It  is  called 
Trinity  Church,  and  it  has  stood  here  for  years,  peaceful 
and  calm  amid  much  noise  and  confusion.  The  view 
from  this  lofty  church  spire  was  once  one  of  the  great 
sights    in  New  York;    now   there   are  many   buildings 


NEW    YORK    CITY 


91 


higher  than  the  top  of  the 
spire. 

One  of  the  very  high 
buildings  stands  nearly 
opposite  this  church.  It 
has  many  tall  companions 
in  this  part  of  the  city. 

One  of  the  side  streets, 
the  one  almost  opposite 
Trinity,  is  Wall  Street. 
There  is  nothing  attractive 
or  peculiar  in  the  appear- 
ance of  this  street,  but  it 
is  known  all  over  the  world 
as  one  of  the  places  where 
great  exchanges  of  money 
are  carried  on.  It  is,  in 
fact,  the  "money  throne" 
of  the  new  world.  For- 
tunes are  made  and  lost 
here  every  day  in  buying 
and  selling  stocks. 

Walking  along   Broad- 
way again  we  soon  come 
to  a  small  opening  on  the 
right  which  may  properly 
be    called    the    business 
centre  of  the  city,  although 
far  from  the  geo- 
graphical   centre. 
In  this  little  square 
is  City  Hall,  the 
headquarters      of 
the  New  York  City 
government     (see 
picture    on    page 
89).    By  it  surges 
all    day    long   an 
ever       moving 
throng     of     busy 
men  and  women. 
All  around  are  tall 
buildings     where 
great   newspapers 
are  published ;  the 
post  office  and  im- 
mense office  buildings  are  also  there.     City  Hall,  in  con- 
trast, is  a  low  building  and  noticeable  on  that  account. 

There   is   another   reason   why   this   is   a  busy   spot. 


Busy  Scene  on  Broadway 


Not  far  away  to  the  east  is 
the  great  suspension  bridge 
over  the  East  River,  the 
famed  Brooklyn  Bridge, 
and  to  the  west  are  the 
New  Jersey  ferries,  all 
landing  thousands  of  peo- 
ple every  few  minutes  dur- 
ing the  busiest  parts  of  the 
day.  The  rush  in  and 
about  this  little  square 
early  in  the  forenoon  and 
between  four  and  six  at 
night  is  a  sight  worth  see- 
ing. There  is  no  centre 
in  the  world  more  crowded. 
One  has  to  be  very  alert 
not  to  be  run  over.  At 
these  hours  the  newsboys 
are  everywhere  —  even 
girls  and  women  sell 
papers  in  New  York. 

Contrast  the  hurry,  rush, 
and  strain  of  this  busy 
place  with  the  peace  and 
quiet  of  some  country 
village. 

Step  inside  any  one  of 


^Ij^Z  -\3$*;  Tf^ 


-  rV/X' 


Brooklyn  Bridge  over  the  East  River 


these  high  buildings,  and  notice  the  nervous  look  on  the 
men's  faces  as  they  rush  for  the  express  elevators  and 
are  shot  up  to  the  twentieth  story. 


92 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Cross  Streets.  —  If  we  still  go  on  up  Broadway  we  soon 
find  ourselves  among  the  wholesale  dry-goods  houses  and 
railway  offices.  I 
always  find  the 
side  and  cross 
streets  about  as 
interesting  as  the 
main  avenues. 

In  these  side 
streets  you  now 
and  then  meet  a 
beggar  or  an 
organ-grinder. 
You  see  many 
children  at  work, 
and,  wherever 
men  are  numer- 
ous,     bootblacks 


find  employment. 
Down  town  some 
of  the  side  streets 
are  short  and  end 
at  Broadway,  not 
cros  sing  the 
island. 

Let  us  now  visit  a  typical 
cross  street  and  notice  its 
changes.  It  very  likely  begins 
at  a  ferry  on  the  East  River 
where  the  sea-gulls  move  in 
airy  flight  over  the  salt  water. 
The  "truck"  wagons  may  be 
coming  on  the  ferry  from  Long 
Island.  Or  there  may  be 
wharves,  and  ships,  and  people 
loading  and  unloading  from 
them.  Then  comes  a  warehouse 
and  a  small  factory.  Here  is 
a  crowded  tenement  district 
where  families  live  close  to- 
gether ;  but  nothing  would 
entice  them  to  move  into  the 
country  for  fear  of  loneliness. 
The  streets  here  are  full  of 
children,  each  one  with  a  good 
pair  of  lungs. 

As  each  avenue  is  crossed 
the  rents  become  higher  and 
the  shoeless  children  fewer  in 
numbers.      The  tenements  are 


Young  Workers  :   Bootblacks 


soon  succeeded  by  flats,  which  in  turn  become  apartments. 
By  and  by  we  reach  Madison  Square  and  look  down  a 
busy  cross  street.  Then  we  go  to  Fifth 
Avenue.  What  a  change !  We  have 
come  to  the  homes  of  wealth.  The 
interiors  of  the  costly  houses  here,  if 
we  could  only  see  them,  would  show 
refinement  and  luxury,  many  servants, 
and  all  that  is  supposed  to  go  with 
"style." 

We  now  pursue  our  way  along  the 
cross    street   to    Sixth   Avenue.      Here 
brick  takes  the  place  of  brown  stone 
fronts,  and  the  sign  "  boarders  "  appears 
in  the  windows.    Beyond  these  are  more 
apartments,  more  residences,  and  many 
more    boarding-houses.      As    we   cross 
other    avenues   we   come    to  factories, 
then  to  railroads,  and  soon  to  wharves 
reaching  far  out  into  the  Hudson  River. 
Business  increases  on  the  cross  streets 
till  the  climax  is  reached  near  Broad- 
way, in  the  great  "  sky-scrapers,"  where 
Mrs.  Janitor  sits 
sewing  in  the  sun 
on  the  high  roof, 
while     the    chil- 
dren   run    about 
and  play.    There 
is  no  danger  of 
falling     off,     be- 
cause every  roof 
is  well  walled  in. 
These    cross 
streets,    as    well 
as    the    avenues, 
are     kept    clean 
by    an    army  of 
men,    dressed    in 
white,  who  sweep 
up   the  dirt   and 
carry  it  away  in 
little  hand-carts. 
It    takes    an 
army    of     letter- 
carriers    to    take 
out  and  bring  in 
the    mail    in    so 
large    a   city   as 
Looking  Down  a  Busy  Cross  Street  from  Madison  Square  New  York. 


NEW    YORK    CITY 


93 


Shopping.  — New 
York  is  noted  for  its 
shops  and  is  the  shop- 
per's paradise.  Not 
only  is  a  part  of  Broad- 
way devoted  to  the 
retail  trade,  but  it 
overflows  along  the 
cross  streets,  such  as 
Fourteenth  and  Twen- 
ty-third streets. 

In  the  poorer  parts 
of  the  city,  vegetables, 
bread,  and  other  mer- 
chandise are  sold  from 
carts  —  even  such  arti- 
cles as  ribbons,  hand- 
kerchiefs, artificial 
flowers,  dolls,  etc.  In 
other  streets,  stands 
put  up  on  the  side- 
walks and  gutters  are 
shops  for  the  people. 


The  Letter  Carrier 


A  Street  Merchant  selling  Vegetables 

The  shopping  district  now  extends  up  the  lower  part 
of  Fifth  Avenue,  where  it  invades  the  old  houses  and 
makes  them  into  show  rooms  for  tailor-made  dresses, 
bonnets,  and  costumes,  all  sold  at  perhaps  treble  the 
price  asked  on  the  side  streets. 

Fifth  Avenue,  in  the  morning,  is  enjoyed  by  the  rich 


Selling  Bread 

and  fashionable.  They  then  crowd  the  street  and  the 
sidewalks.  They  walk,  or  ride  in  carriages,  hansoms, 
and  automobiles  with  their  liveried  servants,  as  in 
Europe.  People  constantly  pass  and  bow ;  the  perfume 
of  violets  fills  the  air.  There  are  young  girls  with  bright 
faces  and  sparkling  eyes,  full  of  gayety  and  charm.  If 
they  are  out  shopping,  they  do  not  have  to  think  about 
the  cost  of  what  they  buy. 

Where  Fifth  Avenue  crosses  Broadway,  at  Madison 
Square,  is  a  very  busy  centre,  typical  of  New  York.  Be- 
sides the  endless  stream  of  shoppers,  you  see  here  actors, 
artists,  authors,  little  girls  on  their  way  to  Huyler's  for 
a  soda,  detectives,  sandwich  men,  and  pickpockets,  —  the 
best  and  the  worst  people  in  the  city  hurrying  past,  while 


A  Hansom  Cab 


the  drivers  of  automobiles  and  hansom  cabs  are  waiting 
around  the  corner  for  customers. 


94 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Tenement  Districts.  —  Let  us  visit  the  crowded  homes 
of  some  people  who  live  on  the  "  East  Side,"  down  town, 
in  New  York.  We  will  call  first  upon  Carmen,  near 
Mott  Street.  You  can  find  her  by  going  through  a 
tumble-down  tenement  house  full  of  bad  smells  and 
slovenly  people.  Across  the  foul  and  slippery  yard, 
down  three  steps,  is  a  shed-like  structure,  half  under- 
ground, in  which  Carmen,  her  four  brothers,  and  her  father 
and  mother  sleep,  and  which  they  call  "home."  The 
three  big  family  beds  nearly  fill  the  room.  Between  the 
beds  the  mud  floor  may  be  seen.  The  walls  are  black 
with  smoke  and  age. 

The  mother  makes  some 
effort  toward  neatness,  for 
the  beds  are  carefully  made 
up  with  old  quilts  and 
pieces  of  carpet  for  cover- 
ings. A  bit  of  oil-cloth  is 
on  the  floor.  Carmen's 
father  and  her  two  older 
brothers  work  on  the  dump. 
When  Carmen  is  not  in 
school,  she  is  out  picking 
wood  or  selling  newspapers. 
She  often  brings  home  a 
heavy  load  of  wood. 

Carmen  and  her  brothers 
are  very  poorly  clothed  and 
fed ;  but  they  all  have 
sunny  tempers  and  laugh- 
ing, happy  ways.  They 
like  to  go  to  school  and 
always  behave  well  there, 
learning  English. 

We  have  time  for  one  more  visit,  and  we  will  call 
upon  Joseph,  near  Ludlow  Street.  He  lives  on  the  top 
floor  of  a  large  building  crowded  with  children  and 
adults.  His  father  is  a  tailor  and  hires  two  rooms.  One 
of  them  he  keeps  for  his  family  and  he  lets  the  smaller 
room,  eight  feet  square,  to  another  tailor  and  his  wife. 
They  divide  this  room  into  two  by  hanging  up  a  shawl, 
and  sublet  the  other  half  to  a  third  tailor  and  his  wife 
and  child. 

There  is  only  one  bed  in  Joseph's  room,  or  home,  and 
in  it  sleep  his  parents,  sister,  and  two  brothers.  There 
is  no  room  for  Joseph,  and  he,  poor  boy,  has  to  sleep  in 
his  ragged  clothes  on  the  floor. 

Joseph  goes  to  school  fourteen  weeks  in  the  year  and 
learns  very  rapidly.     When  not  in  school,  he  sells  shoe- 


Carmen  and  Joseph  selling  Newspapers 


They  are  very  proud  to  be 


strings  or  newspapers.  One  brother  blacks  shoes  and 
the  other  sells  matches,  as  so  many  poor  children  do  in 
London.  Sometimes  Joseph  carries  bundles  of  clothes 
from  one  shop  or  home  to  another  shop.  Joseph  and  his 
brothers  have  little  time  to  play.  They  are  too  busy 
even  to  laugh  like  real,  natural  children. 

Once  Joseph's  sister,  Jette,  went  out  to  look  for  her 
father  and  lost  her  way.  She  was  picked  up  by  the 
police,  but  could  not  tell  where  she  lived,  so  she  was  sent 
to  an  asylum  where  she  was  given  another  name.  It 
was  two  years  before  she  was  found  and  restored  to  her 

family.  During  all  this 
time  her  empty  chair  stood 
beside  her  father's  at  each 
meal,  showing  his  love 
for  his  little  girl.  Great 
was  the  joy  when  she 
finally  came  back  to  her 
home. 

A  great  deal  is  now  being 
done  in  New  York  for  the 
children  of  the  slums. 
Many  crowded  buildings 
have  been  taken  down  and 
parks  laid  out,  or  better 
buildings  put  up  in  their 
place.  Playgrounds  have 
been  made,  with  swings, 
poles,  bars,  and  sand-boxes. 
Sometimes  these  play- 
grounds are  on  piers  on  the 
river  front,  and  bands  of 
music  entertain  the  poor  people  on  summer  evenings. 
Five  thousand  children  often  enjoy  one  of  these  grounds 
in  a  single  day.  Every  summer  thousands  of  these 
children  are  taken  out  into  the  country  for  a  week  of 
enjoyment.  Vacation  schools  and  nurseries  are  opened. 
There  are  also  many  industrial  schools  where  trades, 
sewing,  and  cooking  are  taught.  Charity  also  supports 
boys'  clubs,  in  which  the  boys  play  games,  read  good 
books  and  magazines,  take  lessons  in  military  drill,  car- 
penter work,  and  the  setting  up  of  type  and  printing. 


33.     NEW   YORK   CITY  (Concluded) 

High  Buildings.  —  The  prevailing  building  material  in 
this  city  is  brick.  There  are  acres  of  brick  blocks,  four 
and  five  stories  high,  used  as  residences.    Much  of  the 


NEW    YORK    CITY 


95 


for  co>ss  is  car- 
two  ri.  T  in  such 
large  lgs,  ex- 
^oum  n  Broad- 
way id  other 
stret  s  down, 
town  where 
business  is 
centred.  There 
land  increases 
in  value ;  the 
city  cannot 
grow  sidewise 
because  of  the 
water,  so  lately 
it  has  been 
growing  sky- 
ward by  the 
building  of 
"sky-scrap- 
ers." Where 
Fifth  Avenue 
crosses  Broad- 
way stands  one 
of  these  high 
buildings, 
called  the 
"Flat-Iron 
Building,"  be- 
cause its  plan 
is  like  a  flat- 
iron.    Some  of 


A  "Sky-Scraper"  :  The  Flat-iron  Building 


the  "  sky-scrapers  "  are  about  three  hundred  feet 
high.     They  look  like  dry-goods  boxes  stand- 
ing on  end.     They  are  really  great  towers. 
The  success  of   the  elevator  has  made 
them  possible.     If  we  take  the  express 
elevator  and  go  to  the  top  of   one  of 
these  buildings,  we  shall  find  that  the 
weather-bureau  man  has  his  eyrie  in 
the  top  story. 

Going  on  up  Broadway,  we  come  by 
and  by  to  one  of  the  city's  great  parks. 

Parks.  —  Central  Park  is  well  named,  as 
it  is  situated  near  the  former  centre  of  the  city. 
It  was  once  a  tract  of  swamp  and  rock,  and  its  change 
into  a  beautiful  park  showed  great  skill  on  the  part 
of  those  who  planned  and  carried  out  the  scheme.  Central 
Park  was  one  of   the  first   five   parks  in  this  country, 


and  it  was  begun  in  1858.  It  cost  over 
$15,000,000.  It  is  one  of  the  many  large 
parks  found  in  or  near  most  of  our  large 
cities.  It  contains  four  hundred  acres  of 
groves,  shrubbery,  and  grassy  glades,  and 
forty-three  acres  of  ponds.  Beservoirs, 
which  supply  part  of  the  city  with  water, 
are  in  the  park,  and  cover  one  hundred  and 
fifty  acres  of  land.  Four  concealed  roads 
cross  the  park  for  driving  and  heavy 
teaming.  The  southern  part  of  the  park 
has  been  laid  out 
in  drives  and 
walks,  and  there 
is  also  the  large 
mall  lined  with 
lamps  and  statu- 
ary of  great  and 
noted  men.  Here 
you  see  Shake- 
speare, Scott,  the 
Indian  Hunter, 
and  other  statues. 
There  are  many 
fountains  and 
lakes  in  this  sec- 
tion. The  Egyp- 
tian obelisk, 
which  was 
brought  over  from 
Egypt,  is  the 
only  one  in 

this  country.  The  Khedive  of 
Egypt  gave  it  to  the  United 
tates,  and  Mr.  Vander- 
bilt,  of  New  York,  paid 
the  expenses  of  mov- 
ing it.  It  is  all  in 
one  piece,  and  was 
cut  long  before  the 
birth  of  Christ.  It  is 
often  calledCleopatra's 
Needle.  The  northern 
part  of  the  pavk  has  much 
greater  natural  beauty  and  the 
lake  is  very  picturesque.  There 
is  much  driving  and  horseback 
riding,  as  well  as  walking  on  the  mall  on  pleasant  after- 
noons.    In  the  winter  the  lake  is  used  for  skating. 


Egyptian  Obelisk 


A  Road  in  the  Park 


96 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


A  Buffalo 


Riverside  Drive 

There  are  several  museums 
in  this  park  to  which  children 
and  adults  go  for  instruction 
and  amusement.  In  the  Mu- 
seum of  Natural  History  may 
be  seen  one  of  the  largest  and 
best  collections  of  American 
woods  and  photographs  of 
trees  to  be  found  in  the  coun- 
try. In  the  same  building 
there  is  a  good  collection  of 
stuffed  birds  and  animals,  in- 
sects, shells,  and  minerals. 

On  the  other  side  of  the 
park  stands  the  Art  Museum, 
well  filled  with  pictures  and 
other  art  treasures. 

Riverside  Drive.  —  Directly  west  of  Central 
Park  is  a  long,  narrow  park  stretching  up  and 
down  the  east  side  of  the  Hudson  River.  The 
river  bank  is  high,  and  on  top  of  it  a  retaining 
wall  has  been  built,  and  roads  and  paths  have 
been  laid  out  among  the  trees.  Seats  are  placed 
here  and  there,  shrubs  have  been  set  out,  and 
everything  has  been  done  to  make  an  artist's 
paradise. 

Grant's  tomb  is  at  the  northern  end  of  this 
narrow  park.  From  it,  and  throughout  the 
whole  length  of  the  park,  fine  views  of  the  river 
and  the  Palisades  opposite  are  constantly  en- 
joyed. This  park  is  a  favorite  place  for  bicycle  riders. 
Along  one  edge  of  the  park  is  a  row  of  elegant  estates, 
the  homes  of  rich  New  Yorkers.  Morningside  Park  is 
the  name  given  to  the  upper  and  wider  end  of  this 
pleasure  space. 

Zoological  Park. —In  the  northern  part  of  New  York 
City,  in  the  "Bronx,"  a  section  named  after  a  small 


stream  flowing  into  East  River,  is  a  series  of  parka  and 
nected  by  wide  parkways.  One  of  these  is  Bronx  do  in 
situated  on  both  sides  of  the  Bronx  River.  It  coiothes 
several  large  lakes,  ridges,  gentle  slopes,  valleys,  .<l  hi* 
oaks  and  beeches,  and  forest  plants.  Although  ivme 
distance  away  from  the  centre  of  the  city,  it  can  be 
easily  reached  by  steam  or  electric  lines.  I  went  there 
not  long  ago  with  a  friend,  and  these  are  some  of  the 
many  interesting  things  we  saw :  — 

Buffalo.  —  We   went    in    at 
the    southeast    entrance    and 
first  came  to  the  buffalo  range. 
In   this    great  field  we  saw 
about    twenty    specimens    of 
these     interesting     creatures, 
which  once  roamed  in  droves 
over  the  western  prairies.    At 
the  time  we  were  there,  Cleve- 
land, the  shaggy  old  patriarch 
of  the  herd,  was  quietly  eat- 
ing  hay  like    a    patient   ox. 
There  are  sheds  and  barns  for 
these    animals,     as    well    as 
groves  of  trees  and  plenty  of 
feeding  room.      They  love  to 
walk  about 
and    will 
dash  across 
their     pas- 
ture on  the 
slightest 
excuse. 

In  the 
amount  of 
space  given 
to  the  ani- 
mals, no 
other  zoo- 
logical gar- 
den in  the 
world  can 
equal     this 


Deer  in  Captivity 


one.  Wild  animals  are  shown,  as  far  as  possible,  in  the 
condition  in  which  they  are  found  in  nature. 

Deer. — Next  to  the  buffalo  range  are  the  pastures 
for  the  antelope  and  deer  families.  The  antelopes  do 
not  shed  their  horns  every  year.  They  are  like  our 
domestic  cattle  in  this  respect. 

The  antelopes  have  with  them  several  prairie  dogs 


NEW    YOKK    CITY 


97 


for  companions.  A  wild,  grassy  valley,  lying  between 
two  ridges,  is  given  to  the  elk.  These  animals  are  very 
large  and  resemble  the  moose.  In  one  part  of  their 
grounds  is  a  large  pond  where  they  delight  to  bathe 
in  warm  weather.  The  stretch  of  woods 
gives  them  a  chance  to  escape  the  hot 
sun.  The  elk  look  their  best  in  the 
autumn  against  the  bright  foliage  of  the 
trees. 

Beyond  the  elk  pastures  are  the  deer 
ranges.  First  we  saw  the  moose,  then 
the  caribou,  and  then  various  kinds  of 
deer.  Here  all  these  animals  roam  with 
almost  the  same  freedom  as  in  their  forest 
homes.  Sometimes  you  will  see  one  leap 
high  over  the  back  of  another  in  its 
haste  to  reach  the  other  side  as  quickly 
as  possible.  The  mule-deer  buck,  called 
"Montana  Billy,"  now  and  then  crosses 
the  hollow  in  his  range  in  a  series  of 
wonderful  stiff-legged  jumps  by  which  he 
flies  over  the  ground.  He  looks  then 
as  if  rebounding  from  a  rubber  cushion. 


Mule-deer  Buck 

The   ranges   are   all   fenced   in   with   strong  steel  wire 
which  is  nearly  invisible. 

Birds. — Xear  the  home  of  the  deer  is  that  of  the  large 
birds.     They  have  a  chance  to  fly  and  move  about,  being 


placed  in  a  great  flying  cage  one  hundred  and  fifty 
feet  long  and  over  fifty  feet  high,  in  which  are  growing 
trees,  large  pools  of  water,  saplings,  and  shrubs.  The 
trees  offer   shelter  and  resting-places  for  bird  life,  and 

the  water  is  greatly 
enjoyed  by  the 
water  -  birds.  In 
this  cage  we  saw 
herons,  egrets, 
ibises,  eagles,  and 
other  large  birds. 
The  condor  was  in 
a  separate  cage. 
The  ducks,  geese, 
and  flamingoes 
were  having  a  good 
time  in  the  shrub- 
bery and  on  the 
lake. 

The  wolves  and 
foxes  held  an  after- 
noon reception  in 
their  wire  homes 
on  the  sides  of  a 

rocky  ledge.     The 

Bear  climbing  a  Tree  •  •  -,c     j. -, 

6  prairie    wolf     did 

not  like  his  dinner  of  beef  and  refused  to  eat,  doubtless 
longing  for  a  feast  of  fresh  spring  lamb. 

Bears.  —  In  another  part  of  the  park  we  found  the 
.dens  of  the  bears.  They  were  built  against  the  base  of  a 
high  granite  cliff.  Mr.  Bear  was  at  home  and  was  ever 
on  the  move.  He  raced  up  the  rocks ;  he  climbed  the 
trees  and  slid  down  to  the  ground ;  he  took  a  bath  for 
variety,  and  growled  at  his  visitors.  Mr.  Bear  was  from 
the  island  of  Kadiak  in  Alaska,  and  he  closely  re- 
sembled his  grizzly  brother,  but  he  did  not  look  quite  so 
fierce. 

The  two  white  Polar  bears  had  very  elegant  quarters 
with  many  Arctic  luxuries.  They  bathed  in  ice-cold 
water,  and  had  their  house  well  shaded  from  the  sun, 
and  a  very  moist  and  cool  cave  in  the  rocks  to  retreat 
to  when  it  became  too  warm  outside. 

Some  children,  perhaps,  would  have  enjoyed  the  great 
snake  house,  which  was  full  of  these  crawling  creatures; 
but  we  were  glad  to  get  out,  because  it  was  so  hot  there, 
and  to  leave  the  hideous  python,  the  deadly  cobra,  and 
the. ugly  alligator  to  each  other's  company.  We  hiked 
much  better  the  frisky  squirrels  from  different  parts 
of  the  world. 


98 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


MAP   QUESTIONS   ON   THE   UNITED   STATES 

1.  Write  out  in  order  the  names  of  the  states  touching  the 
Atlantic  Ocean  ;  of  those  bordering  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

2.  What  states,  named  in  order,  touch  the  Mississippi  River 
on  the  east  ?    On  the  west  ? 

3.  What  eight  states  touch  the  Great  Lakes  ? 

4.  What  states  are  Rocky  Mountain  states  ? 
6.   What  states  border  the  Pacific  Ocean  ? 

6.  What  country  is  north  of  the  United  States  ?    South  of  it  ? 

7.  Where  are  the  two  great  mountain  ranges  ? 

8.  Name  in  order  the  important  branches  of  the  Mississippi 
River. 

9.  What  is  the  highest  mountain  in  Alaska  ? 

10.  What  large  river  is  in  Alaska  ? 

11.  To  what  country  does  Porto  Rico  belong  ? 

12.  In  what  direction  from  New  York  City  is  Cuba  ? 

13.  Locate  New  York,  Philadelphia,  Washington,  Baltimore, 
Milwaukee,  Chicago,  Buffalo,  St.  Louis,  Minneapolis,  New  Or- 
leans, and  San  Francisco.  / 

34.   "MADE   IN  NEW   ENGLAND"1 

Along  the  northern  part  of  the  Atlantic  coast  is  a 
.cluster  of  six  states  somewhat  separated  from  the  rest  of 
the  country.  Hours  might  be  spent  in  telling  of  visits  to 
many  charming  summer  resorts  among  the  hills  and 
mountains  of  the  interior,  or  down  beside  the  sea,  where 
thousands  of  people  go  in  July  and  August. 


cultivate,  because  it  is  so  full  of  stones.  For  this  reason 
the  people,  who  are  great  workers,  as  they  increase  in 
numbers  find  it  profitable  and  necessary  to  make  things 
for  themselves  and  others. 

They  have  developed  great  talent  in  this  direction. 
To  help  them,  nature  sends  many  small  streams  down  the 
steep  slopes  of  the  hills  and  mountains,  and  some  large 
ones,  which  furnish  the  power  needed  for  turning  the 
wheels  of  industry  in  factories  and  shops.  Coal  can  be 
brought  cheaply  in  ships  to  places  near  the  coast.  It  is 
used  in  many  of  these  towns  instead  of  water-power,  or 
in  addition  to  water-power. 


^HflBRv  ii it  f*HMH| 

y.--//    'j^BB^^.     TWIT' 

^fc^~>—          ^^••a 

.  '^»?fe^      j 

A  New  England  Manufacturing  Village 

New  England  Manufacturing.  —  Perhaps  you  have  heard 
that  New  England  has  a  very  poor  soil  —  a  soil  hard  to 

1  Teachers  should  require  the  pupils  to  trace  all  the  journeys  on  the 
maps. 


State  Capitol  and  Grounds,  Hartford,  Conn. 

If  we  leave  New  York  City  by  rail,  we 
soon  enter  Connecticut,  the  "  Land  of  Steady 
Habits  "  and  "  Yankee  notions  "  ;  the  land 
of  Eli  Whitney,  who  invented  the  cotton- 
gin;  of  Samuel  Colt,  who  made  the  first 
revolver;  and  of  Charles  Goodyear,  who 
discovered  how  to  make  rubber.  So  many 
things  for  our  comfort  and  pleasure  are 
made  in  this  and  the  other  New  England 
states  that  it  would  be  difficult  to  mention 
them  all. 

Busy  Bridgeport,  which  we  soon  reach, 
is  one  great  hive  of  workers,  turning  out 
from  its  rows  of  mills  sewing-machines, 
rifles,  cutlery,  carpets,  and  organs. 
There  is  no  time  to  stop  at  the  "  City  of  Elms,"  New 
Haven,  the  largest  city  in  the  state,  where  the  most 
valuable  production  is  Yale  College  boys ;  we  must  rush 
on  to  Meriden,  noted  all  over  the  country  for  its  plated 
silverware. 


100 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Whenever  I  go  through  this  state  in  the  autumn  or 
early  spring,  I  always  see  from  the  car  windows,  immedi- 
ately after  sunset,  hundreds  of  shops  lighted  by  electri- 
city, in  which  busy  bauds  are  turning  out  all  kinds  of 
"  Yankee  notions."  Clocks,  watches,  bicycles,  locks,  fire- 
arms, sewing-machines,  rubber  goods,  hats,  pianos,  fish- 
hooks, pins,  buttons,  and  needles  and  thread  with  which 
to  sew  the  buttons  on,  come  from  these  factories. 

New  England  Villages.  —  New  England  villages  have 
certain  features  in  common.  There  is  usually  a  central 
square  or  green,  shaded  by  stately  elms,  a  tall-spired 
church,  and  attractive  wooden  houses  surrounded  by 
gardens  and  flower-beds,  the  happy  homes  of  well-to-do, 
contented  people. 

Above  Meriden  we  come  to  Hartford,  the  capital  city. 
A  capital  city  is  not  always  the  largest  city  in  the  state, 


around  a  square,  making  a  pleasant  stretch  of  lawn, 
shaded  by  rows  of  trees. 

Water  Power. —  Going  farther  up  the  valley,  we  come 
to  the  wonderful  Hadley  falls  and  rapids,  in  which  the 
river  descends  about  sixty  feet  within  a  mile,  furnishing 
the  greatest  water-power  in  New  England.  A  steep 
descent  is  necessary  to  furnish  water-power.  Wherever 
a  river  descends  rapidly  by  means  of  falls  and  cascades, 
the  water  at  the  falls  or  just  above  can  be  held  back  by 
a  dam.  A  part  of  the  water  may  then  be  made  to  run 
through  a  canal,  or  artificial  channel  beside  the  river,  on 
a  very  gentle  slope.  In  this  way,  in  a  short  distance 
below  the  falls,  the  canal  becomes  much  higher  than  the 
river. 

Between  the  canal  and  river,  mills  may  be  built. 
The  water  flows  from  the  canal  down  into  the  river 
through  the  turbine  wheels  of  the  mills,  which  are  placed 
as  near  the  level  of  the  river  as  possible.  In  its  fall,  by 
its  great  pressure,  it  turns  the  large  wheel  which  is  con- 
nected with  all  the  little  wheels  and  makes  them  revolve 
also.     Thus  the  water  helps  to  make  the  cloth. 

Paper  Making.  —  By  a  system  of  canals,  the  water  is 
used  to  give  needed  power  to  a  long  line  of  paper-mills. 
Paper  of  all  qualities  and  sizes  is  turned  out  in  Holyoke. 

A  ride  of  about  two  hours  eastward  brings  us  to  another 


Hadley  Falls 

but  it  is  the  seat  of  government,  where  the  governor 
has  his  office  and  the  legislature  meets  to  make  laws. 
As  we  enter  Hartford  we  see  factories  and  machine- 
shops,  and  at  last  the  beautiful  white  capitol,  admi- 
rably placed  in  a  picturesque,  green  park  in  the  heart 
of  the  city.  Here,  too,  we  come  to  the  Connecticut 
River,  which  we  follow  as  we  go  northward  to 
Springfield,  Massachusetts. 

The  valley  of  the  Connecticut  River  is  rich  in 
good  farming  land  on  account  of  the  silt  brought 
down  from  the  uplands  by  the  river  and  its  branches. 
The  river  furnishes  a  considerable  water-power  and 
combines  excellent  farming  with  prosperous  manufac- 
turing. 

Between  New  Haven  and  Springfield  we  see  profitable 
farms  with  good  farm  buildings,  and  large  and  small 
factories  full  of  busy  mechanics.  In  Springfield  the 
national  government  has  its  armory  and  arsenal  of  which 
Longfellow  sang.  Here  are  made  the  magazine-rifles  for 
our  soldiers.  This  great  factory  is  upon  a  hill  some  dis- 
tance back  from  the  river.     The  chief  buildings  stand 


J  J 

J  J 

flV  BV 

^•l 

i    i 

3   Z 

1 
i 

**           •  -  *           ^   ' 

A  Paper  Mill,  Holyoke,  Mass. 

busy  city,  surrounded  by  a  ring  of  hills  from  all  of  which 
fine  views  are  obtained.  Here  skilled  hands  toil  all  the 
day  through  upon  iron  and  wood,  shaping  them  into 
articles  of  great  value.  In  this  city  of  Worcester  stands 
the  largest  wire-mill  in  the  world.  From  it  thousands 
of  miles  of  wire  are  yearly  sent  away  to  the  four  points 
of  the  compass. 


"MADE    IN    NEW    ENGLAND" 


101 


Mills  of  the  Blackstone  Valley.  —  From  Worcester  I 
went  down  the  Blackstone  Valley  through  a  stretch  of 
mills  many  miles  in  length  ; 
for  the  river  in  this  valley 
descends  in  its  brief  course 
some  five  hundred  feet  and 
thus  furnishes  large  water- 
power  privileges.  Once  this 
little  river  must  have  been 
exceedingly  lovely  as  it 
wound  about  among  the 
enclosing  hills ;  but  now  it 
is  made  to  work,  and  the 
country  along  its  course  has 
become  a  section  of  dams 
and  canals  lined  with  brick 
mills.  As  soon  as  the  water 
turns  one  set  of  wheels,"  it  is  driven 
to  work  to  turn  another  set, 
and  so  on  for  twenty  miles. 

Most  of  these  mills  are 
in    one    corner    of    the 
smallest    state    in    the 
Union,    Rhode    Island. 
In  one  of  the  cities,  Paw- 
tucket,     the     river     goes 
around   in   great  bends,  and 
the  canals  lead  the  water  from 
frequent    dams    to     the    water- 
wheels  that  turn  the  mills,  thus 
enabling   thirty  thousand  people 
to    make    cotton    and    woollen    cloth. 
Farther    down    the   stream    are 
great  thread-mills  that  turn 
out    spools  of   thread   by 
the  basketful,  more  than 
enough   to  sew  all  the 
cloth  made  in  this  busy 
city. 

Just      beyond      Paw- 
tucket     is     the    beautiful 
capital  of  Rhode  Island,  Provi- 
dence,    with      its     villa-capped 
hills.     The  handsome  new  state 
capitol    at    Providence    is    well 
worth   seeing.      This,   too,   is   a 

busy  city,  where  the  people  make  silverware,  worsted 
goods,  screws,  and  files.  Some  of  the  mills  in  which 
these  goods  are  made  are  the  largest  in  the  world. 


View  in  Providence,  showing  Capitol  in  the  Distance 


The  Pawtucket  Falls,  which  supply  Water-power 
for  the  Lowell  Mills 


River  and  Canal  Side  by  Side :  Canal  at  Left, 
River  at  the  Right 


Cotton  Manufacturing. — A  delightful' fid'e' from  Provi- 
dence by  steamer  through  Narragansett  Bay  brings  us 

to  Fall  River,  where  there 
are  good  cotton-mills,  all 
run  by  steam-power  because 
coal  is  so  cheap  there. 

Not  far  away,  in  Massa- 
chusetts, is  New  Bedford, 
once  the  "whale  oil  city." 
Now  there  are  so  few 
whales  to  catch  that  she 
has  built  cotton-mills,  and 
makes  such  good  sheeting 
that  people  are  willing  to 
pay  a  high  price  for  it. 

Lowell,  in  the   northern 

part   of    Massachusetts,   is 

another   great   cotton-cloth   making 

centre.     It  is  one  of  the  oldest 

of  these  manufacturing 

cities.        At    Pawtucket 

Falls  and  the  cascades 

just  above  the  city,  the 

great    working    river 

Merrimac  descends  over 

forty  feet,  thus  furnishing 

immense  water-power.    From 

the   falls  a  long  canal  has  been 

built  to  make  use  of  the  power. 

It  carries  a  large  supply  of  water 

through    the    city.       There    are 

gates  at  the  beginning  of  this   canal 

to  regulate  the  amount  of  water. 

In    some     places    one    can 

stand    and    see    at    one 

glance    both    the   quiet 

flow    of  water   in   the 

canal  and  the  dashing, 

rushing  river  thirty  feet 

below.      A  solid  granite 

wall   separates  the  natural 

and  the  artificial  rivers.    The 

mills  stand  between  the  canal  and 

the  river,  each  one  taking  a  certain 

amount  of  water  from  the  canal 

supply.     Each  mill  stands  on  a 

level  with  the  canal  and  far  above  the  river.    As  the  water 

descends  from  the  canal  to  the  river,  it  turns  the  great 

turbine  wheels,  and  these  turn  the  machinery  in  the  mills. 


102 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


The  Concord  River  joins  the  Merriinac  at  Lowell. 
It,  too,  furnishes  some  water-power.  The  union  of 
the  two  rivers  may  be  seen  from  a  bridge  over  the 
Concord  on  one  of  the  principal  streets  of  Lowell. 
One  of  the  mills  has  lately  put  up  a  large  building 
upon  piles  over  the  Concord  River. 

Sometimes  the  water  in  these  rivers  is  low  in  summer, 
and  then  coal  is  employed  to  furnish  additional  power. 
Most  of  the  mills  have  tall  chimneys. 

The  water  in  the  Merrimac  River  does  duty  over  and 
over  again.  In  Manchester,  New  Hampshire,  before  it 
reaches  Lowell,  it  furnishes  an  immense  amount  of  power 
and  moves  the  spindles  and  looms  in  several  great  mills. 


The  Boarding-bouses  of  the 
Paper  Workers,  Holyoke 

And  so  it  does  in  Law- 
rence, some  twelve  miles 
below  Lowell.  The 
largest  cotton-mill  in  the 
world  is  at  Manchester. 

In  all  these  cities,  many 
of  those  who  work  in  the 
mills  live  in  large  boarding- 
houses  owned  by  the  cor- 
porations; that  is,  by  the 
companies  owning  mills. 


Leaving  the  Cotton  Mills  in  Lowell  at  the  Noon  Hour 

Usually  these  corporation  houses  are  built  of  brick 
and  furnished  with  few  comforts.  The  price  of  board 
in  them  is  very  low. 


'      1    1  /"* 

^■Sfc^ 

lEiiM 

A  Common  Type  of  Village  Street  in  New  England 


The  Waltham  Watch  Factory 

In   Lowell,  many  of   the   people  who   now   work    in 
the  mills  are  Greeks,  Armenians,  and  Italians.      Just 

at  noon  the  bells  ring 
and  the  workers  come 
out  of  the  mills  for  their 
midday  meal.  They  re- 
turn to  work  at  one 
o'clock. 

Watches.  —  Several 
hours  may  be  spent  in 
Waltham,  Massachu- 
setts, where  we  find  one 
of  the  greatest  factories 
in  this  country  for  mak- 
ing watches.  Many 
wonderful     machines    are 


"MADE    IN    NEW    ENGLAND" 


103 


used  there  instead  of  hand  labor.     On  account  of  this, 

a  good  silver  watch  may  now  be  bought  for  a  few  dollars. 

One  of  these  low-priced  watches  has  about  fifty-four 


.  Shoe  Factories,  Lynn 

parts  in  it,  and  the  higher 
priced  ones  three  times  as 
many ;  but  each  of  the 
fifty-four  parts  must  be 
made  with  the  greatest  care 
and  accuracy.  It  takes 
thousands  of  persons  to 
make  these  parts,  to  look 
after  the  machines,  and  to 
finish  and  put  together  the 
different  parts  after  they 
are  made. 

Very  little  of  the  cost 
of  a  watch  is  due  to  the 
material.  Most  of  the  ex- 
pense is  in  the  hours  of  work  necessary  to  make 
it.  In  Waltham  the  men  and  women  are  paid 
good  wages  and  they  work  in  well-lighted,  clean, 
pleasant  rooms.  The  factories  are  surrounded  by 
well-kept  lawns  and  parks.  The  city  is  on  the 
Charles  River. 

Shoes.  —  Travelling  south  from  the  Merrimac 
River  one  passes  through  the  great  shoe-making 
city  of  Lynn.  The  many  shoe  factories  are  scat- 
tered about  the  town.  On  the  main  streets  are 
the  offices  of  the  shoe  merchants.  The  humble 
homes  of  the  men  and  women  who  work  in  the 
factories  are  seen  covering  the  plain  and  stretch- 
ing over  the   near-by   hills.     From   these   homes 


Pleasant  Homes  near  the  Shoeshops.  Lynn 


hasten  well-dressed  children,  even  on  raihj  afternoons, 
to  school.  There  they  not  only  learn  to  study,  but  at 
the  time  of  my  visit  they  had  united  in  a  grand  effort 
to  gather  and  destroy  the  brown-tail  moth,  and  thus 
preserve  the  trees  of  the  city.  Thousands  of  the 
nests  of  this  pest  were  thus  destroyed  by  the  school 
children.  Their  parents  turn  out  each  year  millions 
of  pairs  of  women's  shoes,  or  one-fourth  of  all  the 
shoes  made  in  this  country.  Men's  shoes  are  made 
in  similar  quantities  in  the  city  of  Brockton,  Massa- 
chusetts. 

Much  of  the  work  on  the  shoes  is  done  by 
machinery.  Some  of  the  machines  can  do  as  much 
work  as  twenty  men  can  do  by  hand  in  the  same 
time.  One  man  with  his  machine  can  sew  on  six 
hundred  pairs  of  soles  in  a  day.  These  shoes  are 
marketed  in  Boston,  making  that  city  the  largest 
shoe  market  in  the  country. 

Books.  —  One  of  the  great  industries  of  New  Eng- 
land is  the  making  of 
books.  Many  noted  authors 
of  books  have  lived  in  New 
England.  In  most  cases  the 
plates  for  the  books  are 
made  in  one  place,  the 
leaves  are  printed  in  a 
second  place,  and  then  the 
leaves  are  folded  and  bound 
in  a  third  place.  But  in 
Norwood,  Massachusetts, 
there  is  a  very  large  estab- 
lishment where  all  the  pro- 
cesses are  carried  on  under 
one  roof.     This  geography 


Printing  Schoolbooks  at  the  Norwood  Press 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


The  Steel  Battle-ship  "New  Jersey"  being 
built  at  the  Fore  River  Works 

was  made  there.     In  one  end  of 
the   building   the   type   is  set 
up  and  the  plates  cast ;   the 
leaves  are  printed  by  large 
machines  in  the  central  part 
of    a    very   long  building ; 
and   at  the  farther  end  the 
cover  is   made,   and    placed 
upon  the  book.      Hundreds  of 
machines  and  thousands  of  work- 
men are  thus  employed  in  making 
carloads  of  books  for  schools,  libraries, 
and  homes. 

Ship-building.  —  New  England  is 
once  more  becoming  noted  for  its  ship- 
building. Wooden  and  iron  ships  are  built  on  the  Maine 
coast,  as  at  Bath.  The  fastest  yachts  are  designed  and 
launched  in  Bristol,  Rhode  Island. 

One  of  the  largest  and  most  interesting  plants  is  at 
Quincy,  Massachusetts,  on  Fore  River.     Not  only  great 


The  Frame  under  which 
Large  Ships  are  built 


steel,  many-masted  schooners,  but  torpedo- 
boats,  cruisers,  and  battle-ships  are  built  there. 
The  pictures  on  this  page  show  two  battle- 
ships building,  the  Rhode  Island  and  the  New 
Jersey.  The  heavy  parts  of  the  ships  are  car- 
ried by  an  overhead  electric  crane  to  the  places 
where  they  are  needed.  Near  by  are  forging 
and  machine  shops  of  great  size.  More  than 
two  thousand  men  are  employed  in  this  ship- 
yard. 

Boston.  —  And  so  we  come,  last  of  all,  to 
Boston,  where  all  these  things  "made  in  New 
England  "  may  be  bought,  and  from  which  city 
they  are  sent  to  various  parts  of  the  world.  The 
buying,  selling,  sending  away,  and  receiving  of 
so  many  articles  has  built  up  business  and 
caused  Boston  to  grow  until  it  has  become 
the  largest  city  in  the  New  England 
states.  Boston's  good  harbor  and 
many  railroads  have  helped  to 
make  her  the  second  city  of 
the  Union  in  commerce.  It 
would  take  two  Bostons  to 
make  one  Philadelphia  in 
population,  and  several  more 
to  make  a  New  York. 
Boston  is  proud  of  her  history 
and  historic  places.  The  Old 
South  Church,  where  Warren  and 
Adams  spoke  for  independence,  is  care- 
fully preserved  in  a  busy  part  of  the  city. 


Side  View  of  Frame,  showing  Side  of  Battle-ship 


In  the  Leather  District,  Boston:  a  Load  of  Leather 


"MADE    IN    NEW    ENGLAND" 


105 


The  Old  State  House  and  Faneuil  Hall  still  tell 
Boston  children  of  the  great  deeds  of  patriotic  fathers. 
Bunker  Hill  Monument  looks 
down  upon  the  city  in  solemn 
grandeur  from  the  famous  bat- 
tle-field in  Charlestown.  Boston 
is  very  proud  of  her  Common, 
because  it  stands  for  much  his- 
tory and  because  it  is  near  the 
business  part  of  the  city,  and 
therefore  may  be  enjoyed  by 
many  people. 

She  is  also  proud  of  her  costly 
and  elegant  Public  Library. 
The  grand  staircase  in  this 
building  is  one  of  the  finest  in 
the  world.  This  library  and  all 
its  branches  have  an  immense 
circulation  of  books.  In  the 
main  building  there  is  not  only 
a  great  reading  room  for  adults, 
but  a  very  large  one  for  chil- 
dren. The  rooms  are  decorated 
with  paintings  by  some  of  the 
greatest  modern  artists. 

The  city  is  proud  of  her  op- 
portunities for  learning.  She 
has  an  excellent  system  of  com- 


A  Busy  Scene  at  Faneuil  Hall 


mon  schools,  from  the  kindergarten  to  the  high  school. 

Some  of  the  recent  grammar  and  high  school  buildings 

are  palatial  in  size  and  finish, 
and  almost  extravagant  in  cost. 
Boston  was  one  of  the  first 
cities  to  furnish  children  with 
single  desks  and  separate  seats. 
She  has  more  high  school  build- 
ings and  pupils  than  any  other 
city  of  the  same  size,  and  a 
larger  proportion  of  children 
take  the  high  school  courses 
than  in  any  other  city  in  the 
country. 

Boston  youth  have  access  to 
such  first-class  institutions  as 
Harvard  University  and  the 
Massachusetts  Institute  of 
Technology.  They  can  go  to 
many  free  lectures  and  literary 
and  musical  entertainments. 

The  city  is  noted  for,  but 
not  very  proud  of,  her  narrow, 
crooked  streets.  The  great  fire, 
years  ago,  enabled  her  to  im- 
prove and  widen  many  streets, 
but  the  trouble  from  crowd- 
ing   grew     worse    and    worse 


r  A, 

1 

<• 

**»»<** 

_ 

Grand  Stairway  in  the  Library,  Boston 


Charlestown  and  Bunker  Hill  Monument 


106 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


till  it  filially  became  so  bad  that  she  was 
obliged  to  build  a  great  subway  in  which  to 
run  some  of  her  street-cars  underground,  and 
to  give  more  room  for  speed  on  the  surface 
tracks. 

This  subway  passes  under  the  Common, 
under  several  busy  streets,  through  the  heart 
of  the  city  to  the  great  North  Station.  It 
is  used  for  surface  and  elevated  electric  cars, 
and  is  so  well  built  and  so  well  ventilated 
and  lighted  that  it  is  not  at  all  disagree- 
able to  ride  through  it.  The  waiting  rooms 
are  underground  too;  they  are  reached  by 
stairs  from  the  street  and  are  large  enough  to 
contain  many  people. 


Some  of  the  Subway  Entrances  on  the  Common 
SUMMARY 

Connecticut  —  the  land  of  the  inventor. 

Connecticut  Valley  —  water-power  and  farming. 

Worcester  —  wire  workers. 

Blackstone  Valley  —  many  mills. 

Lowell  —  cotton  mills.     Waltham  —  watches. 

Lynn  and  Brockton  —  shoes. 

Boston  —  largest  city  in  the  New  England  states. 

MAP   QUESTIONS   ON   THE  NEW  ENGLAND   STATES 

1.  Which  is  the  largest  state  ?    The  smallest  ? 

2.  What  state  does  not  touch  the  ocean  ? 

3.  Find  a  range  of  mountains. 

4.  Are  they  near  the  coast  ? 

5.  Which  state  lias  a  very  irregular  coast  line  ? 

6.  In  what  direction  do  most  of  the  rivers  flow  ? 

7.  Into  what  ocean  do  most  of  them  flow  ? 


In  the  Subway  under  Boston  Common 

8.  In  what  direction,  then,  does  the  land  slope  ? 

9.  AVhat  city  has  over  500,000  people  in  it  ? 

10.  In  what  state  is  Portland  ?  Manchester  ? 
Montpelier  ?  Worcester  ?  Lawrence  ?  Somerville  ? 
Providence  ?   Hartford  ?     Cambridge  ? 

11.  Name  in  order  the  large  rivers,  beginning  with 
the  Penobscot  River. 

12.  Make  up  questions  about  the  cities,  bays, 
people,  and  occupations. 


35.    MAINE  AND  JERSEY  COASTS 

Maine  Coast.  —  You  have  had  your  atten- 
tion called  to  some  peculiarities  of  the  sea- 
shore in  Lesson  14.  A  small  part  of  the 
Maine  coast  has  been  described  in  Lesson  19. 
Here  the  coast  was  shown  on  the  map  in  your  book  by 
a  short  curved  line,  but  when  we  visited  it,  we  found  it 
irregular,  with  many  river  mouths,  bays,  points,  and 
good  harbors. 

Our  country  is  so  large  that  it  has  a  vast  amount  of 
coast-line.  Some  of  it  is  like  that  in  the  chapter  called 
"A  Bit  of  Coast."  Some  of  it  is  far  more  varied  and 
beautiful  than  that,  and  much  of  it  is  less  interesting 
and  less  helpful  for  commerce. 

A  Rugged  Shore.  —  We  shall  now  learn  about  the  high,, 
rocky,  irregular  coast  at  the  north,  and  compare  it  with 
the  low,  flat,  and  more  regular  shore  farther  south.  (See 
map  of  North  America,  facing  page  88.) 

Good  harbors  abound  along  an  irregular  coast  like  that 
common   to   the   New   England    states.       The    coast   of 


Maine  is  a  good  example  of  this. 


108 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Such  a  coast  is  the  result  of  the  land's  sinking  and 
leaving  the  tops  of  the  hills  above  water,  as  islands, 
heights,  and  capes.     The  old  river  courses  and  valleys 


rose  behind  us,  one  tier  above  another,  on  different  hills, 
great  trees  and  here  and  there  a  church  spire  filling  in 
the  spaces  between. 

Casco  Bay.  —  "  My  first  surprise  was  to  learn  how  many 
more  islands  Casco  Hay  has  than  are  shown  on  the  map. 
My  brother  said  that  many  city  people  spend  the  hot 
months  of  July  and  August  on  these  islands.  Much  of 
the  coast  beyond  Casco  Bay  is  made  up  of  low  hills  which 
rise  steeply  out  of  the  water  twenty  or  thirty  feet.  .Far- 
ther back  from  the  water  the  land  slopes  gradually. 

"Most  of  these  hills  are  thickly  wooded  with  small 
pine  and  spruce  trees  that  often  grow  all  the  way  down 
to  the  ragged  rocks  forming   the  shore-line.      In  some 


A  Drowned  Valley,  Maine  Coast 

then  make  the  deep  water  channels  and 
harbors.  The  deep  bays,  like  Penobscot 
Bay,  are  really  drowned  valleys ;  that  is, 
valleys  in  which  rivers  once  ran,  but  which 
have  been  lowered  with  other  parts  of 
the  coast  and  filled  up  to  sea  level  by  the 
waters  of  the  ocean  which  have  flowed  into 
them.  It  is  quite  impossible  in  such 
cases  to  tell  where  the  river  ends  and  the 
bay  begins. 

My  young  friend  Albert  once  went  on 
a  yacht  from  Portland,  a  large  city  in 
Maine,  to  Bar  Harbor,  a  beautiful  seaside 
resort,  and  he  has  told  me  about  his  trip  :  — 

"I  remember,"  said  Albert,  "that  it  was 
a  charming  sail  down  the  harbor  of  Port- 


Portland  Light 

land.  Our  yacht  was  followed  by  several  others,  and  we 
met  sail-boats,  rowboats,  yachts,  dories,  and  steamers 
coming  in.     We  passed  a  lighthouse  and  a  fort. 

"  As  we  moved  away  from  Portland  a  mass  of  houses 


A  Typical  Bit  of  the  Tree-covered,  Rocky  Coast  of  Maine 

places  the  scenery  becomes  bolder  and  the  hills  higher. 
Many  different  shades  of  green  are  seen.  Inland,  high 
hills  and  even  mountains  appear. 

"  On  this  trip  we  saw  many  islands,  capes,  and  penin- 
sulas; a  lighthouse  here,  a  beacon  there,  and  then  a 
stretch  of  open  sea.  Frequently  large  rocks  came  into 
view,  covered  with  seals  —  large  and  small,  black  and 
white.  One  splash  as  the  steamer  drew  near,  and  the 
rock  was  bare. 

"  In  a  few  places  passed  in  the  first  part  of  the  trip, 
the  shore  sloped  off  gradually,  and  when  the  tide  went 
out,  it  left  a  wide,  sandy  beach,  very  good  for  bathing. 
Nearly  always,  however,  it  was  so  steep  that  the  beach 
at  low  tide  was  narrow.     Most  of  the  shore  east  of  the 


MAINE    AND    JERSEY    COASTS 


109 


Kennebec  River  was  rocky  and  covered  with  trees,  mak- 
ing excellent  landing-places  for  boats,  but  affording  few 
chances  for  bathing.    Marsh  land  was  seen  now  and  then, 


Penobscot  Bay,  Maine 


but  it  was  not  ex- 
tensive, being  rarely 
more  than  a  few 
miles  in  length. 
Lighthouses  were 
frequently  seen 
along  this  coast. 

Penobscot  Bay. — 
"I  enjoyed  greatly 
the  sail  in  and 
around  Penobscot 
Bay.  It  seemed 
from  the  yacht  more 
like  a  long,  wide 
river  than  a  bay, 
because  the  islands 

form  an  almost  continuous  chain  of  bordering 
land.  The  wooded  hills  rose  here  in  noble 
curves  from  coves  and  rocky  points.  In  one 
part  of  the  bay  there  was  a  clear  expanse  of 
water;  in  another  part  it  was  dotted  with 
islands,  large  and  small,  grassy  and  rock-bound. 
X)n  some  of  these  islands  were  lighthouses. 

"The  third  day  was  still  more  interesting. 
We  steamed  among  thousands  of  islands,  often 
very  near  the  coast.  My  brother  pointed  out 
many  of  these  islands  and  told  me  their  queer 
names.  There  was  Little  Deer  Island,  Butter 
Island,  Eagle  Island,  Calf  and  Swan  Islands.  From 
the  map  of  the  coast  he  read  the  names  Burnt,  Green, 
Black,   Spoon,    Seal   Rock,  Wooden   Ball,   Little   Duck, 


Lighthouse  in  Penobscot  Bay,  Maine 


Brown    Cow,    Junk   of   Pork,    Sheep,    Porcupine,    and 
Squirrel  Islands." 

"  Did  he  tell  you  why  they  had  such  strange  names  ?  " 
some  one  asked. 

"Yes,  because  the  sailors  noticed  a  resemblance  in 
shape  to  the  animals  or  objects  whose  names  they  bear, 
or  because  these  things  were  found  on  them. 

"As  we  went  farther  and  farther  east,  the  shore  be- 
came higher  and  steeper.  We  saw  more  frequently  crags 
and  rocky  ledges,  and  less  often  fields  of  corn  and  grass. 
As  we  approached  the  large  island  called  Mount  Desert, 
the  mountains  grew  higher  and  seemed  to  come  nearer 
the  water.  The  coast  there  was  very  bold  and  steep. 
Just  before  reaching  Bar  Harbor,  Green  Mountain  loomed 
up  far  above  us,  seeming  to  rise  out  of  the  ocean." 

New  Jersey  Coast. — In  sharp  contrast  with  this  steep, 
rocky  shore,  the  teacher  told  the  class  about  a  long,  flat 
stretch  of  coast  farther  south  —  shown  on  the  map  of 

North  America. 

"The  land  there," 
she  said,  "  slopes 
very  gently  up  from 
the  water,  rising  not 
over  sixty  feet  for  a 
long  distance  along 
the  shore.  The 
higher  land  is  very 
far  back  from  the 
shore,  instead  of  near 
the  water  as  in  Maine. 
"  The  ocean  here 
and  farther  south 
beats  against  a  low, 


.-***£- 


-%A 


View  of  Bar  Harbor,  Maine 


sandy  bar  which  in  most  places  is  separated  from  the 
mainland  by  bays,  channels,  sounds,  and  salt  marshes. 
This  sandy  shore  is  divided  by  inlets  and  rivers  into 


110 


JOURNEY    GEOGEAPHY 


A  Sandy  Beach  on  the  New 
Jersey  Shore 

islands  and  long,  narrow- 
peninsulas  running  par- 
allel with  the  mainland. 
These  sandy  stretches 
are  called  beaches.  . 

"  The  beaches  are 
composed  of  hard,  white 
sand,  which  has  been 
scooped  out  into  hollows 
in  some  places  and  piled 
up  in  dunes,  or  small 
rounded  hills,  in  other 
sections. 

"  In  summer-time  people  go  from  hot  cities 
to  the  beaches,  where  there  are  good  places 
for    bathing    and    enjoying    the    cool 
breezes  from  the  ocean.     Many  sum- 
mer resorts  have  grown  up  along  the 
New  Jersey  shore,  most  of  them  on 
the  low,  sandy  bar  already  men- 
tioned. 

"  Behind  the  beaches  are  stretches 
of  salt  marsh  covered  with  salt  grass 
T,he  tide  is  constantly  flowing  in   and  out 
through  these 


A  Sand  Dune  and  Pine  Trees 


Island,  Salt  Marsh,  and  Inlet 


marshes  or  flats.  They  are  not  easily 
crossed,  even  at  low  tide,  because  they  are 
cut  up  by  tidal  streams  too  wide  to  jump 
over. 

Low  and  Level  Land.  —  "Much  of  this 
marsh  land  is  so  low  and  so  well  soaked 
with  salt  water  as  to  be  worthless;  but 
where  the  land  lies  a  little  higher,  abundant 
crops  of  hay  are  cut  every  summer  and 
cattle  find  good  pasture. 

"The  soil  along  the 
shore  being  more  pr  less 
sandy,  pine  trees  abound. 
Sand  cedars  are  often  ob- 
served showing  twisted 
branches,  the  effect  of 
strong  winds. 

"  The  inlets  and  bays 
of  this  coast  are  full  of 
various    kinds    of    fish, 
oysters,  clams,  and  lob- 
sters.     Good  fishing  is 
enjoyed      by      visitors. 
Weakfish  are  caught  in 
summer  and  also  sheeps- 
head,  both  excellent  fish 
to    eat.      In    the    fall 
striped     bass     are 
caught ;  in  win- 
ter, flounders. 
The     abun- 
dance of  fish 
and    crabs 
brings    gulls 
and    ducks, 
geese,  snipe,  and 
crows,  to  feed  on  this 
shore.      It  is  a  great   place 
for  fishermen  and  sportsmen. 
Crows  often  go  to  these  shores 
to  find   food   in    the    winter-time.      They  are 
sometimes  seen  opening  clams,  taking  them 
up  several  feet  in  the  air,  and  letting  them 
fall  to  break  open  the  shell. 
"  As'  one  travels  southward  the  long,  nar- 
row  barriers   become   wider    and    form   larger 
islands,  upon  which  grows  the  valuable    sea-island 
cotton  used  in  making  thread.     These  islands  are  found 
along  the  entire  coast,  as  far  south  as  Florida." 


A  Bleak  Coast  and  Sand  Cedars 


A    SOUTHERN    TRIP 


111 


36.    A   SOUTHERN   TRIP 

How  much  we  would  enjoy,  this   cool   morning,  a 
trip  to  the  "  Land  of  the  Palmetto  and  the  Pine." 

Philadelphia.  —  On  our  way  from  New  York,  we  would 
first  come  to  Philadelphia,  a  city  in  the  state  of  Penn- 
sylvania, and  so  important  that  we  must  stop  there 
and  see  some  of  its  points  of  interest.      Like  Pittsburg 
in  the  same  great  state,  it  is  situated  at  the  union  of 
two   rivers.     These  two  rivers,  the  Delaware  and  the 
Schuylkill,  flow  into  the  northern  end  of  a  long  bay; 
so    Philadelphia    is    at 
ter   and  is  a    sea   port, 
city   stretches  out  over 
territory,  and  has  very 
streets  because  the  peo- 
to  live  in  houses,  each 
by   itself.      The  streets 
ten  ten  miles  long,  and 
them  cross  one  another 


The  City  Hall 

angles.  Philadelphia  contains  many 
factories  and  carries  on  a  large  com- 
merce, so  it  is  a  busy  city.  It  has 
several  fine  railroad  stations,  the 
largest  and  most  costly  city  hall  in 
this  country,  and  several  noted  his- 
toric buildings  which  are  carefully 
preserved  by  the  people.  The  most 
celebrated  of  these  buildings  is  In- 
dependence Hall,  in  which  the  Dec- 
laration of  Independence  was  made 
and  signed. 


Cramp's  Shipyard :  Launch  of  a  War-ship 


112 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


In  this  city  are  four  striking 
things  to  see.  (a)  The  United 
States  has  always  had  here  its 
most  important  mint.  A  mint 
is  a  building  in  which  the  coins 
used  as  money  are  made. 

(b)  On  the  banks  of  the  Dela- 
ware River,  a  little  above  the 
city,  is  one  of  the  largest  and 
most  celebrated  shipyards  in 
the  world,  owned  by  the  Cramps. 
Here  thousands  of  men  are 
working  from  morning  till 
night  on  great  iron  and  steel 
vessels.  They  also  build  war- 
ships here  for  our  government 
and  other  nations.  These  are 
powerful,  floating  forts,  like  the 
Indiana  and  the  Texas. 

(c)  Phila- 
delphia has 
more  homes 
in  propor- 
tion to  the 
number  of 
people  than 
any  other 
city,  so  it  is 
called  the 
City  of 
Homes.  The 
people  do 
not  live  in 
flats,  one 
fa  m  i  1  y 
above  an- 
other, nor 
in      family 

hotels  and  tenementrhouses  as  much  as  is  usual  in  cities. 
Most  often  the  houses  are  side  by  side  in  long  brick 
blocks,  all  just  alike  on  the  outside.  The  blocks  are 
from  two  to  four  stories  high,  and  most  of  the  houses 
have  modern  improvements,  such  as  a  furnace,  a  bath- 
room, hot  and  cold  water.  Many  of  the  houses  have 
piazzas  where  the  families  sit  in  the  warm  weather. 

(d)  Fairmount  Park  is,  as  its  name  indicates,  beautiful 
to  look  upon,  and  the  pride  of  the  city.  This  pleasure 
ground  contains  three  thousand  acres  of  woodland  and 
cultivated   stretches.     It  is  noted   for  its  picturesque 


Homes  of  the  Workers,  Philadelphia 


Washington  Monument,  Baltimore 


walks  and  lovely  drives,  and  is 
one  of  the  largest  parks  in  the 
world. 

Baltimore.  —  A  ride  of  three 
hours  from  Philadelphia  brings 
us  to  Baltimore,  and  here  the 
sights  and  sounds  are  those  of 
the  South.  Baltimore  is  an 
agreeable  city,  the  largest  in  the 
state  of  Maryland.  Its  beauti- 
ful surroundings,  particularly 
Druid  Hill  Park,  afford  pleasant 
walks  and  drives  to  the  dwellers 
in  the  city  proper.  The  city 
is  famous  for  the  Johns  Hopkins 
University  and  Hospital,  for  its 
museums  and  monuments,  and 
for  the  wealth  and  culture  of  its 
citizens.  The  monuments  in 
Baltimore  are  so  numerous  and  so  good  that  it  is  often 
called  the  Monumental  City.  Before  going  away  we 
should  see  the  Washington  Monument,  the  Battle 
Monument,  some  of  the  fine  residential  streets,  and  the 
Peabody  Institute. 

A  visit  to  the  water  front  is  well  worth  while.  Here 
we  see  sailing  craft  of  every  sort,  and  this  reminds  us 
that  Baltimore  owed  its  original  importance  and  much 
of  its  later  prosperity  to  its  position  as  a  seaport.  The 
streets  down  town  are  filled  with  the  noise  and  bustle 
of  an  important  commercial  city.  Such  signs  of  progress 
as  the  new  court  house,  the  Woman's  College,  and  the 
handsome  Mt.  Royal  railroad  station  favorably  impress 
the  visitor. 


Peabody  Institute,  Baltimore 


A    SOUTHERN    TRIP 


113 


- 

■  - — ^^   t+ 

\fj    ' 

*^"  "*£^i 

k 

A*          § 

Vermont  Avenue  and  Thomas  Circle 


Looking  toward  the  Washington  Navy  Yard  from  the  Capitol 


Washington.  — 
The  next  interesting 
city  to  which  we 
should  come  on  our 
trip  is  Washington, 
the  capital  of  the 
nation.  This  city  is 
considered  the  most 
charming  place  in 
this  country,  and 
one  of  the  most  beau- 
tiful cities  in  the 
world.  Several 
causes  have  united 
to  build  up  so  hand- 
some a  city  on  the 
banks  of  the  Po- 
tomac. 

In  the  first  place,  the  land  here  is  not  flat,  as  it  is 
about  many  ci,ties  in  America,  but  there  are  many  gently 
sloping  hills,  with  pretty  valleys  between. 
George  "Washington  made  no  mis 
take  when  he  picked  out  this 
spot  for  the  capital.  In 
the  next  place,  the  city 
has  been  laid  out  by 
men  who  knew  their 
business,  in  broad 
streets  and  still  broader 
avenues.  These  avenues 
and  streets  lead  from  a  com- 
centre.         Wherever 


mon    centre.         Wnerever    they 
cross,    squares,   circles,   and    parks    are 
made.      These  avenues  are  named  after 
the  different  states.     Where  Massachu- 


The  National  Capitol  at  Washington 


Congressional  Library 


setts  and  Vermont 
avenues  cross  is 
Thomas  Circle. 

In  the  third  place, 
the  city  contains  the 
spacious,  costly,  ele- 
gant, and  imposing 
government  build- 
ings. These  are  not 
all  built  around  one 
central  square,  but 
are  scattered  about 
the  city,  so  that  each 
building  has  proper 
surroundings,  and 
space  to  set  it  off 
well. 

The  Capitol, 
where  Congress  meets,  is  well  situated  on  one  of  the  ele- 
vations, and  can  be  seen  for  many  miles.  It  is  considered 
the  most  imposing  building  in  the  country. 
From  the  Capitol,  broad,  well-cul- 
tivated grounds  spread  out 
towards  the  lofty,  white 
Washington  Monument 
and  the  White  House, 
where  the  President 
lives.  The  White  House 
and  the  Capitol  are  con- 
nected more  directly  by  a 
fine,  wide  street  called  Penn- 
si/lmnia  Avenue.  Near  the  Capitol 
is  the  new  Congressional  Library,  which 
cost  six  millions  of  dollars  and  contains  the 
largest  collection  of  books  in  this  country. 


114 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Public  Square,  Richmond,  Virginia 

Richmond.  —  It  is  a  ride 
of  but  four  hours  from 
Washington  to  Richmond. 
When  visiting  this  city,  I 
go  first  to  the  public 
square,  a  part  of  which 
is  shown  in  the  picture 
above.  Here  the  tame 
gray  squirrels  will  come  to 
eat  from  your  hand,  and 
climb  on  your  shoulder. 
They  have  their  nests  in 
boxes  up  in  the  trees. 

Richmond  is  a  most 
progressive  city,  full  of 
life  and  enterprise.  It  is 
a  growing  place,  and  many 
new  streets  have  recently 
been  added.  The  James 
River  winds  about  it,  and, 
like  Rome,  it  is  situated 
on  seven  hills.  From  one 
of  these  hills  is  a  fine 
view  of  the  falls  in  the 
river;  from  another,  a 
never-to-be-forgotten  view  of  the  river  and  the  city. 

The  great  state  of  Virginia  once  raised  large 
quantities  of  tobacco,  which,  in  its  early  history, 
was  used  for  money.  Tobacco,  you  know,  is  the 
leaf  of  a  plant,  and  it  looks  very  beautiful  and 
innocent  when  growing.  So  much  tobacco  is  still 
handled  in  Richmond  that  the  well-known  odor  of 


the  plant  is  very  plain  in  certain  streets.  But  this 
plant  greatly  exhausts  the  soil,  and  now  the  state 
raises  less  tobacco  than  formerly,  and  more  peanuts 
and  sweet  potatoes.  The  peanut  plant,  after  blossom- 
ing, runs  along  the  ground,  and  the  pods  are  forced 
down  into  the  soil.  The  seeds  thus  covered  ripen 
about  the  time  of  the  first  frost. 

Rice  Fields.  —  Farther  south  are  the  rice  fields. 
These  are  level  pieces  of  ground,  situated  near  a  river, 
where  plenty  of  water  may  be  let  in  and  the  fields 
flooded  by  large  irrigation  canals  when  it  is  needed ; 
for  the  rice  sprouts  and  ripens  in  the  water.  Rice  is 
a  kind  of  grain,  and  it  grows  on  a  stalk  like  wheat. 
It  is  cured  and  threshed  somewhat  as  wheat  is,  and 
then  the  hulls  are  taken  off  by  machinery.  More 
people  live  on  rice  than  on  any  other  kind  of  food. 


Sheaves  of  Rice 


Harvesting  Rice 
The  rice  plant  needs  so 
much  water  and  heat  that  it 
cannot  be  grown  anywhere  in 
this  country  except  in  the  low 
lands  of  the  South.  When 
you  are  learning  about  foreign 
countries,  you  will  find  that 
rice  is  the  great  grain  crop  of 
Asia,  where  it  forms  the  main 
food  of  millions  of  people.  It 
grows  best  in  such  a  hot,  damp 
climate  as  that  of  the  Philip- 
pine Islands. 


Irrigation  Canal  for  flooding  Rice  Fields 


A    SOUTHERN    TRIP 


115 


The  Cabbage  Palmetto 


Southern 
Trees.  — All 

through  the 
lower  South, 
we  see  from 
the  car  win- 
dows a  ra- 
ther strange 
looking  tree, 
a  kind  of 
palm,  called 
the  cabbage 
pa  Imetto. 
The  trunk 
is  about 
twenty  feet 
high,  very 
strai  ght, 
and  with- 
ou  t  any 
branches. 

At  the  top  grow  many  long,  narrow,  fan-shaped  leaves, 
from  five  to  eight  feet  long.  The  Georgia  or  hard  pine 
is  a  more  useful  tree  than  the  palmetto.  This,  too,  is 
seen  all  through  this  section.  This  southern  pine,  sawed 
into  boards,  is  used  in  most  schoolhouses  for  the  floor, 
and  in  most  buildings  in  the  country  for  the  large  beams 
and  timbers.  It  is  highly  valued  for  building  purposes 
in  all  parts  of  the  United  States.  From  it,  also,  are 
obtained  turpentine,  pitch,  and  tar. 

Not  quite  so  use- 
ful, but  more  beauti- 
ful, is  the  long  moss, 
so  called,  seen  all 
through  the  Gulf 
states.  It  hangs  in 
great  streamers  from 
the  branches  of  trees, 
especially  where 
there  are  swamps 
and  much  dampness. 
The  moss  makes  the 
trees  look  very  old 
and  hoary.  It  is 
well  called  long 
moss,  for  it  often 
hangs  down  from 
the  limbs  some 
twenty  feet;   as    it 


swings  and  sways  in  the  breeze,  it  is  graceful  and 
beautiful. 

The  farther  south  we  proceed,  the  warmer  it 
grows,  till  we  reach  the  southern  part  of  Florida, 
which  is  the  extreme  southern  part  of  the  United 
States,  and  very  near  the  hot  belt.  Here  the 
winters  are  very  mild,  and  oranges  and  pineapples 
grow   in  abundance.      Orange    trees    reach    their 


The  Hard  Pine  Groves  of  Georgia 


Long  Moss  on  the  Trees 

prime  for  bearing 
when  they  are  about 
twenty  years  old. 
The  fruit  ripens  all 
the  way  from  De- 
cember to  March. 
Sometimes  one  tree 
has  on  it  one  thou- 
sand oranges.  The 
crop  is  a  very  prof- 
itable one  when  the 
frost  does  not  de- 
stroy the  trees. 

The  oranges  that 
we  buy  to  eat  come 
from  Florida  and 
California. 


116 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Pineapples  grow  in  many  parts 
of  Florida,  but  a  large  quantity  of 
those  for  the  market  are  now 
grown  on  islands  south  of  Florida. 
This  well-known  fruit  is  borne  on 
a  low  plant,  not  over  three  feet 
in  height,  which  has  several  long, 
narrow,  stiff,  sharp-pointed  leaves. 
These  leaves  are  much  like  those 
left  on  the  crown  of  the  fruit  when 
it  is  brought  to  market.  If  this 
crown  were  thrust  into  the  ground, 
it  would  bear  fruit  in  due  time; 
but  the  plant  is  usually  grown 
from  slips.  Each  plant  bears  a 
single  fruit,  and  then  dies.  The 
pineapple  is  ready  to  be  harvested 


A  Field  of  Pineapples 

in  April.  The  men  who  gather  the  fruit  have  to  protect 
themselves  from  the  leaves  by  wearing  cowhide  boots, 
canvas  trousers,  and  leather  gloves.  They  wear  mos- 
quito-netting on  their  heads  to  protect  themselves  from 
the  mosquitoes,  which  rise  in  great  clouds  from  the  pine- 
apple plants.  When  the  pineapple  ripens  in  the  field,  it 
is  as  yellow  as  an  orange,  and  fully  as  sweet.  It  melts 
in  the  mouth,  and  is  wholly  unlike  the  hard,  sour  pine- 


Typical  Home  of  Negroes  in  the  South 

apple  known  in  the  North.  The  people  who  raise  the 
pineapple,  and  do  most  of  the  hard  outdoor  work  in  the 
South,  are  the  negroes.  As  they  can  work  in  the  hot 
sun  with  little  trouble,  the  negroes  raise  the  cotton,  the 
rice,  and  the  fruit. 

Summary.  —  Philadelphia  is  noted  for  its  costly  City 
Hall,  its  historic  Independence  Hall,  its  United  States 
Mint,  its  many  pleasant  homes,  and  its  fine  park. 

Baltimore  is  a  busy  commercial  city,  and  a  seaport. 

Washington,  the  capital  of  the  nation,  is  one  of  the 
finest  cities  in  the  world. 

Virginia  raises  tobacco  and  peanuts. 

Rice  is  grown  on  low  land  which  can  be  flooded. 

Florida  grows  oranges  and  pineapples. 

MAP   QUESTIONS   ON    THE  MIDDLE  ATLANTIC   STATES 

1.  Name  in  order  the  states  on  this  map. 

2.  Find  the  largest  and  the  smallest  state. 

3.  Name  in  order  five  large  rivers. 

4.  Name  in  order  four  lakes. 

5.  Name  in  order  three  bays. 

6.  Through  which  bay  does  the  most  shipping  move  ? 

7.  Name  in  order,  beginning  on  the  north,  the  important  moun- 
tain ranges. 

8.  Can  you  find  four  mountain  ranges  running  parallel  to  one 
another  ? 

9.  What  two  rivers  form  the  Ohio  ? 

10.  What  long  canal  passes  through  New  York  State  ? 

11.  What  bodies  of  water  does  it  connect  ? 

12.  Locate  New  York  City,  Jersey  City,  Philadelphia,  Pitts- 
burg, Dover,   Richmond,  and  Charleston. 


118 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


37.   DOWN  THE  MISSISSIPPI  RIVER 

Children,  I  wish  to  take  you  now  for  a  trip  on 
the  Mississippi,  a  river  many  times  larger  than  the 
Hudson.  We  will  go  down  one  of  its  branches,  the 
Ohio,  which  itself  is  three  times  as  long  as  the  Hudson. 

Ohio  River.  —  The  Ohio  River  is  formed  by  the 
union  of  two  other  rivers,  the  names  of  which  you 
can  find  on  the  map.  At  the  point  where  they 
unite  to  form  the  Ohio  the  great  city  of  Pittsburg 
has  grown  up. 

Pittsburg. — This  city  is  a  very  busy  point,  and 
the  river  there  is  well  filled  with  boats  of  all 
kinds.  Our  steamer  has  plenty  of  company.  There 
are  coal  barges  and  coal  vessels,  boats  carrying 
iron,  steel,  glass,  and  petroleum.  So  much  coal 
passes  down  the  river  that  it  has  been  called  "a  coal 
chute."  Pittsburg  is  the  centre  of  the  iron  and  steel 
industry  in  this  country.  The  flames  from  the  iron 
furnaces  and  coke  ovens  light  up  the  scene  at  night, 
and  by  day  heavy  smoke  hangs  over  the  city.  It  is  a 
remarkable  sight. 


River  Front,  Cincinnati 

We  are  going  through  a  rich  valley  and  along  the  edge 
of  the  great  corn  belt.  Corn  grows  abundantly  on  both 
sides  of  the  river,  but  the  states  north  of  the  river  are 
noted  for  the  large  amount  raised  every  year.  So  are 
those  states  farther  west  in  about   the  same    latitude. 


Pittsburg 


Cincinnati. — We  pass  many  large  cities.  One  of  them 
is  Cincinnati.  This  city  is  situated  on  the  right  bank  of 
the  Ohio.  It  is  built  on  two  terraces  and  is  surrounded 
by  a  ring  of  hills.  The  view  from  the  higher  and  better 
parts  of  the  city  is  very  fine.  There  is  a  beautiful  park  on 
these  heights.  A  great  many  Germans  live  in  Cincinnati, 
and  their  part  of  the  city  is  called  "  Over  the  Rhine." 


This  corn  crop  is  worth  more  than  all  the  gold,  silver, 
and  lead  which  we  take  out  of  the  earth  in  a  year,  and  it 
is  twice  as  valuable  as  the  wheat  crop.  This  great  crop 
of  corn  is  fed  to  chickens,  cattle,  and  especially  to  hogs  ; 
for  pork  sells  better  than  corn. 

Mississippi  River.  —  In  the  course  of  time  we  reach  the 
main  stream,  the  mighty  Mississippi.     If  we  should  start 


DOWN    THE    MISSISSIPPI    RIVER 


119 


at  the  source  of  its  longest  branch,  the  Missouri,  and 
pass  down  to  the  mouth  of  the  Mississippi,  we  should 
sail  down  the  longest  river  in  the  world.  Look  at  the 
outline  of  the  river  on  your  map,  and  notice  the  num- 
ber and  size  of  its  tributaries  and  how  far  from  the 
west  and  the  east  they  come.  A  steamer  can  run 
on  this  river  system  nearly  twenty  thousand  miles. 
The  amount  of  land  drained  by  the  river  and  its 
branches  is  enormous. 

St.  Louis.  —  The  steamer  we  are  on  turns  and  passes 
northward  to  reach  St.  Louis,  a  short  distance  below 
the  mouth  of  the  Missouri  River.  The  city  is  near  the 
centre  of  the  United  States.  Perhaps  in  your  own 
city  you  have  ridden  in  electric  cars  made  in  St.  Louis. 
It  is  a  very  busy  place,  the  centre  of  numerous  rail- 
roads, and  also  of  fresh-water  commerce.  Not  far 
away  are  great  forests  of  pine,  coal  fields,  and  mines 
of  lead,  iron,  and  zinc.  Many  things  besides  cars  are 
made  here  and  shipped  to  different  places,  especially 


the  Crescent,  a  real  Mississippi  River   steamer  built  in 
three  stories.     The  lower  deck  is  used  for  freight,  and 


=-J             ^UHl 

^B 

&   1  j  i             mm 

^   -mi  ;      " 

1  fe^lMtoi  777 

J 

-^■HHHI^^ 

"Taj 

State  Street,  St.  Louis 

the  next  above  for  dining  rooms  and  sleep- 
ing berths.  The  third  or  upper  deck  is 
called  the  hurricane-deck.  Unlike  the 
steamer  shown  on  page  124,  this  is  a  side- 
wheeler  and  carries  a  long  plank  to  be  let 
down  when  it  reaches  port.  A  trip  down 
this  river  is  most  fascinating,  because  it 
is  very  different  from  other  trips  in  this 
country. 

A  Winding  River.  —  In  the  first  place, 
the  Mississippi  River,  as  your  map  shows, 
is  very  winding,  perhaps  the  most  winding 
river  in  the  world.  It  is  a  long  chain 
of  S's  and  '  "  ox-bows."  As  we  wind 
among  these  curves  we  can  sometimes 
see  other  boats  sailing  to  the   right    and 


Iron  Bridge  over  the  Mississippi  at  St.  Louis 

to  the  southwestern  part  of  the  country.  It 
is  a  city  of  parks  and  fine  homes.  I  shall  never 
forget  standing  on  the  great  iron  bridge,  watch- 
ing the  traffic  up  and  down  the  river  and 
the  busy  scenes  along  the  wharves. 

This  great  bridge  is  one  of  the  sights  of  the 
city.  It  is  a  two-story  structure,  the  driveway 
and  footpath  being  on  top,  and  the  railway 
tracks  down  in  the  middle  of  the  iron  work. 

At  St.  Louis  I  left  the  smaller  steamer  for 


Loading  the  Mails  at  the  Union  Station,  St.  Louis 


120 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


left  above  and  below  us.  In  passing  around  the  "ox- 
bows," we  often  go  ten  miles  in  order  to  get  one  mile 
farther  south.  A  river  always  makes  such  curves, no  mat- 
ter how  small  it  is,  when  it  flows  through  a  plain  or  broad 
valley  with  a 
very  gentle 
slope  and  fine, 
light,  loose 
soil,  free  from 
stones  or  peb- 
bles and  easily 
moved  by  the 
flowing  water. 
The  whole 
broad  Missis- 
sippi Valley  is 
made  up  of  fine 
soil  called  silt, 
brought  down 
from  the  up- 
lands by  the 
Mississippi  river  and  its  great  branches. 

As  you  look  at  the  water  over  the  side  of  the  steamer 
you  see  how  muddy  it  is,  just  as  streams  usually  are  in 
spring  or  after  heavy  rains.  We  talked  about  this  in 
the  lesson  on  soil.  If  you  fill  a  glass 
with  water  from  the  river  and  let  it 
stand  an  hour,  mud  will  settle  to  the 
bottom.  The  settlings  from  the  river 
make  very  rich  soil ;  and  this  river 
and  its  tributaries  have  for  countless 
ages,  by  overflowing  their  banks,  spread 
a  covering  of  silt  annually  over  the 
wide  valley  between  the  great  ranges 
of  mountains,  thus  preparing  for  man 
a  vast  fertile  field  on  which  to  raise 
all  kinds  of  crops.  There  is  certainly 
no  greater  or  richer  expanse  of  good 
soil  on  the  face  of  the  earth. 

The  Mississippi  is  very  wide  and 
deep  in  most  places,  but  bars  frequently 
form,  and  the  pilots  must  be  wide 
awake  not  to  run  aground,  especially 
in  the  night. 

A  Great  Highway.  —  Our  steamer  stops  often  for 
freight,  which  consists  mostly  of  bales  of  cotton.  We  see 
other  steamers  with  cotton  on  board.  We  pass  hundreds 
of  barges  loaded  with  coal  from  Pittsburg,  and  wheat  and 
corn  from  the  northern  central  part  of  the  country.     This 


A  Typical  View  on  the  Mississippi 


NEW  ORLEANS 

and  Vicinity. 


LAKE 


bulky  freight  is  carried  very  long  distances  on  the  river 
because  river  transportation  is  cheap.  This  river  is 
a  great  highway  of  travel  through  the  central  part  of 
the  country. 

The  Missis- 
sippi River  is 
not  only  very 
winding  and 
very  busy,  but 
it  is  at  times 
very  trouble- 
some. It  is 
cons'tantly 
changing  its 
course,  and  al- 
ways looking 
for  some  place 
where  it  can 
escape  and  run 
wild.  There  is 
a   constant 

fight  going  on  between  man  and  the  river.  Where 
the  natural  banks  are  low,  artificial  or  made  banks 
are  built  up  for  protection.  These  are  called  levees. 
There  are,  along  the  Mississippi  River,  about  two 
thousand  miles  of  levees,  built  at 
great  cost.  Notwithstanding  much 
watchfulness  during  the  spring 
months,  the  river  now  and  then  breaks 
through  the  levees,  forming  a  crevasse, 
and  covering  thousands  of  acres  of 
good  farm  land  with  water.  A  wide 
inland  sea  is  formed,  the  cattle  are 
driven  to  the  high  knolls,  which  have 
become  islands,  and  the  people  take 
refuge  in  the  second  stories  of  their 
houses.  Sometimes  cattle  and  people 
are  drowned  by  the  angry  waters,  or 
starve  before  they  are  rescued. 

New  Orleans.  — At  last,  one  hundred 
miles  above  the  mouth  of  the  river, 
we  reach  a  half-circle  bend  where  we 
see  many  boats  moving  about  and  more 
tied  up  on  the  left  bank.  Our  steamer 
turns  in  on  the  left,  and  soon  is  fastened  to  a  wharf. 
We  have  reached  New  Orleans,  the  greatest  cotton  mart 
in  the  world.  Here  there  is  much  to  see,  for  this  city 
is  quite  unlike  other  American  cities.  It  is  often  called 
the  "Crescent  City,"  because  it  is  built  on  a  graceful 


Scale  of  Miles. 


DOWN    THE    MISSISSIPPI    RIVER 


121 


bend  in  the  river.  I  would  like  to  call  it  a  French  city, 
because  the  French  people  first  settled  it;  the  names 
of  many  of  the  streets  are  still  French;  the  French 
language  is 
largely  spoken 
here,  and  here 
the  descendants 
of  the  French 
and  the  Spanish 
still  live.  They 
are  called  "  Cre- 
oles." French 
ways  and  man- 
ners are  com- 
mon. There  is 
nothing  the 
cultured  people 
enjoy  more  than 
a  good  French 
opera. 

New  Orleans 
is  one  hundred 
miles  above  the 
mouth    of    the 
Mississippi.     It 
was     built     on 
this     spot     be- 
cause of  its  nearness  to  an  arm  of 
the  sea.    Years  ago  sailing  vessels 
from  the  Gulf  could  much  more 
easily  sail   across    this  salt  lake, 
almost   to   the   great    river,  than 
they  could  sail  up  the  river  itself. 
Much  of  the  land   on  which  the 
city  stands  is  lower  than  the  sur- 
face of  the  water  in  the  river,  so 
the  city  is  protected  from  constant 
overflows   by   very    strong  levees 
fifteen  feet  wide.    These  form  the 
wharves  on  the  river  front.     The 
highest  place  in  the   city,  called 
the  ridge,  is  only  nine  feet  above 
the  level  of  the  sea.     Drainage  is, 
therefore,  a  serious  question. 

Houses  and  Gardens.  —  Canal  Street,  the  principal  busi- 
ness street  of  New  Orleans,  divides  the  city  into  two 
parts.  On  the  left  as  you  go  from  the  river  are  most  of 
the  homes  of  the  richer  class  of  people,  and  on  the  right 
those  of  the  laboring  classes  and  of   negroes.     Almost 


St.  Charles  Avenue, 
New  Orleans 


every  family,  no  matter  how  poor,  has  its  own  separate 
home,  as  in  Philadelphia;  only  here  there  are  no  blocks 
of  houses,  but  separate  buildings  with  gardens  and  fences 
around  them.  The  houses  on  St.  Charles 
Avenue  and  neighboring  streets  are  large, 
two  stories  high,  with  double  balconies  or 
piazzas.  They  are  surrounded  by  large 
gardens  filled  with  tropical  plants  and 
flowers.  Orange,  palm,  and  magnolia  are 
the  favorite  trees.  Most  of  the  houses  are 
built  of  wood,  because  brick  and  stone  are 
not  suitable  in  so  moist  a  climate. 

The  houses  are  built  for  a  hot  rather 
than  a  cold  climate.  The  stories  are  high, 
the  rooms  large,  with  polished  floors.  Rugs 
are  taken  up  in  summer  time  on  account 
of  the  heat.  The  windows  are  large  and 
extend  down  to  the  floor.  As  the  winters 
are  very  short  and  mild,  the  houses  are 
heated  by  open  fires. 

A  curious  custom  of  this  city  is  that  of 
burying  the  dead  in  tombs  above  ground. 
This  is  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  land  is 
low  and  a  grave  immediately  fills  up  with 

water. 


j. 

4. 

I               L=^.lil 

Ml] 

1  IffipE  ■ 

»                     !    U1S- 

Ji£J» 

it  i  m 

-   ii 

Ti^fc 

^*-*^"--"  —  -~          -J 

*  _M&fW» 

*§fcte     *■• 

5j*«te 

■jr 

b*wB& 

Ld 

New  Orleans 
is  the  great  city 
of  the  cotton 
and  sugar  belt. 
Its  situation  is 
favorable  to 
commerce,  and 
its  shipping  in- 
terests are  so 
great  that  it  is 
often  the  third 
city  in  this  re- 
spect in  the 
country.  The 
cotton  belt  in- 
cludes the  great 
state  of  Texas, 
which  produces 
an  enormous 
crop  of  cotton  every  year.  Remember  that  the  Gulf 
states  form  a  large  part  of  the  cotton  land,  although 
cotton  will  grow  as  far  north  as  Massachusetts.  It 
flourishes  best  in  the  Southern  states,  where  there  is  the 
right  amount  of  heat  and  moisture. 


Canal  Street,  New  Orleans 


122 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Cotton.  —  The  cotton  plant  is  raised 
from  seeds  planted  in  early  spring.  It 
will  grow  in  poor  and  sandy  soil.  It 
begins  to  blossom  in  June.  The  blos- 
soms are  the  first  day  a  pale  yellow, 
almost  white,  and  the  next  day  pink. 
They  are  very  beautiful,  but  soon  fall 
off  and  are  followed  by  the  pod  or 
boll.  The  plant  is  the  size  of  a  cur- 
rant bush,  and  grows  to  a  height  of 
two  to  six  feet.  The  bolls  contain  the 
seeds,  wrapped  up  very  snugly  in  a 
mass  of  soft,  downy  white  substance 
which  we  call  cotton.  This  is  to  pro- 
tect the  seeds  and  help  the  wind  to 
scatter  them. 

The  bolls  of  cotton  are  picked  by 
hand.  A  good  picker  can  gather  two 
hundred  and  fifty  pounds  in  a  day.    To 


Negroes  in  their  Cotton  Field 

get  rid  of  the  seeds,  the  cotton,  after  drying,  is  sent  to 
the  mill  and  the  seeds  are  removed  by  a  machine  called 
the  cotton  gin,  invented  by  Eli  Whitney.  Then  the  cot- 
ton is  pressed  into  bales  or  large  bundles  for  convenient 
handling  in  transportation.  These  bales  weigh  about 
four  hundred  and  fifty  pounds  and  are  worth  from  thirty 
to  forty  dollars.  Stalks  and  seeds  were  once  thrown 
away  as  worthless;  but  now  the  best  of  writing-paper  is 
made  from  the  stalks,  and  oil  is  pressed  from  the  seeds. 
The  refuse  makes  good  food  for  cattle. 

There  is  an  immense  amount  of  cotton  raised  in  this 


Cotton  awaiting  Shipment  at  a 
River  Port 

country,  more  than  three-fourths 
of  all  in  the  world.  New  Orleans 
handles  more  than  one-fourth  of  it 
all.  The  cotton  wharves,  where  the 
steamers  and  railroad  trains  un- 
load the  brown  bales,  are  very  busy 
places. 

When  the  bales  of  cotton  are 
shipped  from  the  South  they  go  to 
different  parts  of  the  world.  Much 
of  this  cotton  goes  to  New  Eng- 
land to  be  turned  into  cloth  in  the 
great  cotton  mills  of  New  Hamp- 
shire, Massachusetts,  and  Rhode 
Island.  A  part  of  the  cotton  is 
sent  to  England  to  be  made  into 
cloth.     Some  of  it  is  used  for  this 

purpose  in  the  newer  cotton  mills  of  the  South  itself,  as 

in  North  and  South  Carolina. 

SUMMARY 

The  Ohio  River—"  a  coal  chute." 
Corn  belt  —  on  both  sides  of  the  Ohio  River. 
St.  Louis  —  centre  of  fresh-water  commerce. 
Mississippi-Missouri  River — longest  river  in  the  world. 
The  mighty  Mississippi  River  —  bends,  silt,  cotton,  levees. 
New  Orleans  —  "Crescent  City,"   French  city,   "Creoles," 
cotton  and  sugar  centre. 


Cities  w.lthr.00,000  to  1,000,000  : .    ,  .  .StJLOU. 

Cities  witii  200,000  to  500,000  ; . . .  New  (Men  ns 

Cities  Willi  60,000  to  200,000: Mjeuipllls 

Smaller  riaces : St,  Augustine 

Capitals  with  leas  tliau  50,000  :.    .Montgomery 


INTERESTING  FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTHERN  STATES 

The  coast-line  of  the  Southern  states  is  more  regular  than  that 
of  New  England.    The  harbors  are  poor. 

The  climate  of  these  states  is  very  warm',  because  they  are  so  far 
south. 

There  is  plenty  of  rain  in  the  South.  It  is  brought  by  the  damp 
winds  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

For  these  reasons  the  South  can  raise  cotton,  sugar-cane,  and 
rice  successfully. 

Agriculture  is  the  leading  occupation  of  the  South. 

Other  industries  have  lately  sprung  up  there.  Cotton  mills  are 
now  found  in  several  Southern  states.  Mining  coal  and  iron,  and 
separating  the  iron  from  the  ore,  are  growing  industries  in  Alabama. 

From  the  pine  forests  come  tar,  turpentine,  pitch,  and  lumber. 

Atlanta,  in  Georgia,  is  to-day  one  of  the  largest  commercial 
cities  in  the  South. 

In  Texas  are  some  of  the  largest  cattle  ranches  in  this  country. 

During  the  winter  and  early  spring  vegetables  are  shipped  from 
the  warm  Southern  states  to  the  large  cities  of  the  North. 

A  large  amount  of  cotton  is  shipped  from  Galveston,  in  Texas  ; 
but  the  greatest  cotton  market  in  the  world  is  New  Orleans. 

Many  people  from  the  North  spend  a  part  of  the  winter  in  Florida, 
where  there  are  many  large  and  excellent  hotels.  Southern  people 
like  to  come  North  in  summer.     Why  ? 

Richmond  is  an  enterprising  and  growing  city. 

Missouri  is  called  the  Empire  State  of  the  Mississippi  Valley. 


MAP  QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SOUTHERN  STATES 

1.  In  what  direction  from  your  school  are  the  Southern  states  ? 

2.  Name  the  states  touching  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

3.  What  states  are  next  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean  1 

4.  What  states  touch  the  Mississippi  River? 

5.  Which  is  the  largest  Southern  state  ? 

0.  Does  the  land  of  these  states  slope  toward  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico  ?     How  do  you  know  ? 

7.  What  states  are  crossed  by  the  thirty-third  parallel  ? 

8.  Where  is  the  largest  river  ? 

0.  Why  do  so  many  rivers  flow  in  abont  the  same  direction  ? 

10.  Which  river  has  a  delta  ? 

11.  What  is  the  second  river  in  size  ? 

12.  Name  five  branches  of  the  largest  river. 

13.  Where  are  the  mountains  in  the  South  ? 

14.  Locate  St.  Louis,  the  largest  city  in  this  section. 

15.  Between  what  two  bodies  of  water  is  New  Orleans  ? 

16.  In  what  state  is  Birmingham  ? 

17.  Is  the  Indian  River,  in  Florida,  a  fresh  or  salt  water  river? 

18.  What  noted  city  is  south  of  Florida  ? 

19.  Tell  some  fact  about  each  Southern  state. 

20.  Compare  New  Orleans  and  Chicago. 

21.  Find  out  the  meaning  of  the  words  levee,  everglade,  delta, 
sound,  key,  reef,  bar,  staple,  cotton  market,  and  ''naval stores." 


124 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


5.     PICTURE   STUDY 


Steamer  on  the  Mississippi  River 


1.  In  what  part  of  the  United  States  is  the  Mississippi  River? 

2.  How  does  it  compare  in  size  with  other  rivers? 

:!.  Does  this  steamer  look  like  an  ocean  steamer?     Why? 

4.  Does  the  steamer  appear  to  he  on  a  small  or  a  large  river? 

5.  Is  it  a  side  or  an  end  wheeler  ? 
fi.  How  many  decks  has  it? 

7.  Why  do  river  steamers  draw  less  water  than  ocean  steamers? 

8.  What  is  this  steamer  carrying  ? 

0.  To  what  place  do  you  imagine  it  is  going? 

10.  (Jive  the  .steamer  a  name. 

11.  Write  an  account  of  a  trip  on  this  steamer. 


THE  GREAT  LAKES  AND  CHICAGO 


125 


go,  for  fear  a  big  stone  would  fall  on  my  head.  I 
greatly  enjoyed  looking  up  toward  the  falling  water 
and  standing  as  near  as  I  dared. 

"  We  then  went  up  to  the  top  of  the  bank  and 
walked  some  distance  to  Terrapin  Rock,  on  the  edge 
of  the  larger  falls,  the  Canadian  or  Horseshoe  Falls. 
The  water  moves  over  the  precipice  very  rapidly, 
and  falls  with  a  sound  like  thunder. 

"We  next  saw  the  Horseshoe  Falls  from  the 
suspension  bridge,  and  the  size  and  force  seemed 
greater.  A  nearer  view  was  obtained  from  the 
Canadian  side,  and  the  impression  of  greatness  and 
power  was  increased.  Here  I  saw  a  perfect  rainbow 
over  the  falls  about  three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon. 

"  The  next  day  my  mother  took  me  out  in  the 


The  American  Falls  at  Niagara 

38.   THE  GREAT   LAKES  AND   CHICAGO 

Niagara  Falls.  —  From  New  York  to 
Buffalo  is  a  ten-hour  run  in  a  fast  train'. 
The  trip  takes  one  across  a  rich  and  power- 
ful state,  well  called  the  "Empire  State." 
In  going  we  pass  by  noble  mountains, 
through  rich  fanning  lands,  and  busy  cities 
and  villages.  At  last  we  reach  nature's 
wonder,  Niagara  Falls,  the  grandest  falls  in 
the  world,  between  Lakes  Erie  and  Ontario 
and  between  this  country  and  Canada. 

A  little  boy  named  William  once  visited 
Niagara  Falls  with  his  mother  and  told  in 
this  way  what  he  saw  and  did  there :  — 

"  We  first  visited  Goat  Island,  by  walk- 
ing over  the  pretty  bridge  across  a  rapidly 
flowing  stream,  and  then  through  the 
woods  to  the  edge  of  the 
chasm.  Here  we  suddenly 
came  upon  a  good  view  of 
the  falls.  As  the  water 
falls,  the  mist  rises  like  rain 
clouds.  We  soon  descended 
long  wooden  stairs,  and 
stood  at  the  foot  of  the 
smaller,  or  American  Falls. 
I  saw  a  man  all  dressed 
in  rubber  go  behind  this 
sheet  of  falling  water,  but 
mother  would  not  let  me 


Mm 


The  Steamer  "Maid  of  the  Mist"  at  the  Foot  of  the  Falls 


The  Horseshoe  Falls  at  Niagara 

little  steamer,  the  Maid  of 
the  Mist.  We  both  put  on 
rubber  cloaks.  When  very 
near  the  vast  sheet  of  water 
falling  so  far  from  above, 
with  the  mist  upon  us  like 
rain,  and  the  great  noise 
in  our  ears,  I  began  to 
feel  the  grandeur  and  tre- 
mendous power  of  Niagara 
as  never  before. 


126 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


"We  took  a  carriage  to  the  Whirlpool 
Rapids,  some  distance  below  the  falls, 
where  the  river  sweeps  by  with  great 
swiftness  and  terrible  force.     The 
gorge  here  is  so  narrow  that  the 
waters    are    thrown    up    and 
dashed  about  in  great  green 
waves  of  motion." 

Cause  of  the  Falls.  —  You 
will  see  on  the  map  that 
Niagara  River  connects  two 
large  lakes.     Lake  Ontario 
is   three   hundred   and 
twenty-six  feet  lower  than 
Lake    Erie.        The     river 
moves  along  very  quietly  at 
first,  then    it    begins  going 
faster    and    faster    until    it 
comes  to  a  projecting  shelf  of 
hard  limestone,  where  it  drops 
straight    down  one   hundred  and 
sixty  feet  into  a  narrow  gorge,  thus 
making  the  famous  falls. 

The  falling  water  wears  away  the  soft 
shale  beneath  faster  than  the  hard  lime- 
stone above,  and  leaves  the  latter 
unsupported.  Sooner  or  later, 
therefore,  it  falls  by  its  own  weight. 
Thus  the  falls  are  wearing  away  at 
the  rate  of  about  five  feet  each  year. 
At  the  foot  of  the  falls  there  are 


The  Whirlpool  Rapids 


is  lighted  and  has  its  cars  driven  by  electri- 
city produced  by  great  dynamos  turned 
by  the  waters  of  the  Niagara  River. 
We  found  Buffalo  a  very  busy  place 
and  a  growing  city.     Transporta- 
tion  and   domestic    commerce 
are  very  active  here.     Vessels 
are    constantly     coming    in 
from  the  great  lakes  at  the 
West,  bringing  grain,  flour, 
lumber,  and  iron  ore.     The 
Erie  Canal  boats  and  rail- 
roads strive  for  this  freight, 
in  order  to  carry  it  to  the 
great  cities    in    the    East. 
The  lake  vessels  carry  back 
coal  and  manufactured  goods, 
and  sometimes  passengers. 
Through    the    Lakes.  —  One 
summer   I   took   this    trip  with 
several  friends.     We  left  Buffalo 
in  the  evening.     As  we  went  out  of 
the  harbor  we  met  several  vessels  com- 
ing in.     One  of  them  was  the  new  style 
of  boat  called  the  ivhahback,  on  account  of 


great  stones  which 
have  broken  off. 
William's  mother 
was  right  about  the 
danger  of  going 
under  the  falls. 

Buffalo. — A  short 
ride  from  Niagara 
Falls  brought  us  to 
Buffalo.     This  city 


The  Grain-carrying  Whaleback 

its  shape.  These  boats  are  used  especially  for  carrying 
grain.  Other  vessels  were  loaded  with  iron  ore.  Early 
the  next  morning  we  went  near  Presque  Isle,  and  entered 
the  picturesque  harbor  of  Erie  (associated  in  history  with 
Commodore  Perry).  Later  we  ran  along  near  the  well- 
wooded  shore,  and  reached  Cleveland  in  the  afternoon. 
The  appearance  of  this  city  from  the  lake  is  very  striking. 
The  handsome  Garfield  Memorial  is  plainly  seen  on  the 
top  of  a  hill.  The  captain  told  us  that  many  of  the  lake 
vessels  are  built  in  Cleveland. 


THE    GREAT    LAKES    AND    CHICAGO 


127 


Euclid  Avenue,  the  Finest 
Street  in  Cleveland 

We  left  Lake 
Erie  by  ascending 
the  Detroit  Eiver, 
and  stopped  next  at 
Detroit,  where  we 
saw  many  lake  ves- 
sels loaded  with 
iron  and  copper  ores, 
for  Detroit  makes 
many  cars  and  car 
wheels,  iron  and 
steel  goods.  We  saw 
also      many     ships 


loaded  with  grain.  The  amount  of  shipping 
passing  this  city  in  a  year  equals  that  of 
London  and  Liverpool  added  together. 

We  next  entered  the  little  shallow  Lake  St. 
Clair,  and  passed  through  the  swiftly  flowing 
St.  Clair  River  into  the  deep  Lake  Huron. 
This  lake  is  full  of  islands.  In  time  we  reached 
the  northern  end  of  the  lake,  and  entered  the 
river  connecting  this  lake  with  the  largest 
fresh-water  lake  in  the  world,  Lake  Superior. 
The  latter  lake  is  twenty-four  feet  above  Lake 
Huron. 

Our  steamer  passed  from  one  lake  to  the 
other  through  the  Sault  Ste.  Marie  or  "  Soo " 
Canal,  one  of  the  finest  canals  in  the  world. 
It  is  doing  more  business  to-day  than  any  other 

canal.  This  is  be- 
cause rich  iron  and 
copper  mines  have 
been  opened  on  the 
southern  side  of 
Lake  Superior  and 
because  a  good  deal 
of  wheat  is  now 
shipped  eastward 
through  the  lakes. 

The  steamer 
finally  reached  Du- 
luth,  at  the  western 
end  of  Lake  Supe- 
rior, about  six  days 
after  starting  from 
Buffalo. 


General  View  of  the  "  Soo  "  Canal 


The  Gates  of  the  Canal  Open 


The  Gates  of  the  Canal  Closed 


128 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Four  Maps  of  Chicago  and  its  Vicinity :   Note  Effect  of  Changes  in  Scale 


At  Duhith  and  the  other  places  mentioned,  we  saw 
long  and  very  high  piers.  These  contain  great  bins  into 
which  the  iron  ore  is  dumped  from  the  cars.  The  ore  is 
then  allowed  to  slide  out  of  the  bottom  into  lake  ves- 
sels anchored  beside 
the  pier  and  below  the 
bins.  Some  of  the  iron 
mines  are  open  mines 
and  the  ore  is  shovelled 
up  with  great  steam 
shovels  and  loaded  into 
the  cars.  Thus  most 
of  the  ore  is  handled 
and  carried  to  the  re- 
ceiving ports  on  the 
south  side  of  Lake  Erie 
and  to  Chicago  at  the 
south  end  of  Lake 
Michigan.  After 
spending  a  few  days 
in  Duluth,  we  went 
back  through  the  lake, 
changed  steamers  at 
Sault  Ste.  Marie,  and 
in  due  time  reached 
Chicago. 

Chicago  is  a  most 
interesting  city  on  ac- 
count of  its  wonderful 
growth  and  enterprise.  The  first  impression  it  makes  upon 
a  stranger  is  that  of  great  bustle,  noise,  and  stress  of  life. 
Its  rapid  increase  in  population  is  the  wonder  of  the  world. 
Nature  has  done  much  to  make  it  grow  thus  rapidly.     A 


State  Street,  Chicago 


little  river  flowing  into  the  southern  part  of  a  big  lake 
decided  the  position  of  a  fort.  Around  the  -fort  grew  a 
village.  The  rich  prairies  bordering  the  lake,  great  forests 
of  trees  to  the  north,  and  large  coal  fields  to  the  south 

supplied  pressing 
needs  for  raw  material. 
Then  man  began  to 
build  long  lines  of  rail- 
roads over  the  level 
prairies  to  connect 
with  the  inland  water- 
ways, and  as  fast  as 
this  Middle  West  grew, 
Chicago  grew. 

Let  me  read  you  a 
letter  from  a  Chicago 
boy  to  his  aunt :  — 

Chicago,  III., 
May  16. 

My  dear  Aunt  :  — 

I  am  now  in  the 
grammar  school  and 
study  geography.  My 
teacher  suggested  that 
I  write  you  a  letter 
about  our  city,  the 
streets  of  which  are  the 
busiest  I  have  ever 
seen.  The  business  part  of  Chicago  lies  south  of  the 
river  and  between  the  south  branch  and  the  lake. 

The  different  parks  are  connected  by  boulevards,  wide 
streets    lined    with   trees    and   flowers.      Most   of   the 


THE  GREAT  LAKES  AND  CHICAGO 


129 


streets  are  wide  and  straight  and  cross  one  another  at 
right  angles;  but  in  a  few  cases  there  are  streets  run- 
ning diagonally  to  the  other  streets,  and  these  are  called 
avenues.  Some  of  the  wider  streets  for  homes  are  also 
called  avenues.  One  of  these  wide  boulevards  is  Michi- 
gan Boulevard,  running  along  the  lake  front.  It  was  for 
years  devoted  to  family  residences  and  costly  houses ; 
now  the  lower  part 
of  the  street  is  given 
up  to  business  and 
to  great  hotels.  One 
of  the  noted  build- 
ings is  the  Audi- 
torium. 

The  three  great 
business  streets  are 
State,  Dearborn,  and 
Clark,  running  in  the 
same  direction,  par- 
allel with  each  other 
and  the  lake.  State 
Street  is  eighteen 
miles  long ;  it  is  the 

retail  shopping  street  and  is  generally  crowded. 
Western  Avenue  is  twenty-three  miles  in  length. 
On  Dearborn  Street  are  several  great  office  buildings. 
In  some  of  them  as  many  as  four  thousand  people 
are  working.  When  business  closes,  the  streets  are 
crowded  with  these  people  starting  for  home. 
Chicago,  you  know,  was  the  first  city  to  erect  such 
high  buildings,  and  we  always  call  them  sky-scrapers. 
There  are  several  of  them  here,  and  all  have  steel 
frames  covered  with  brick  or  stone  like  those  in  New 
York.  Many  of  these  tall  buildings,  as  the  Tacoma, 
the  Marquette,  and  the  Masonic  Temple,  are  beauti- 
ful inside. 

My  favorite  building  is  the  Auditorium,  a  strange 
combination  of  hotel,  theatre,  and  office  building. 
It  stands  near  the  lake  on  Michigan  Boulevard. 
From  the  water  it  looks  like  a  great  granite  wall  or 
fort.  It  is  immense  in  size,  and  the  great  central 
tower  reaches  up  two  hundred  and  seventy  feet.  Here 
the  weather-bureau  man  has  his  home.  He  must  enjoy 
fine  views  when  the  weather  permits,  as  a  great  expanse 
of  the  lake  and  many  ships  may  be  seen  from  this  tower. 
The  theatre  in  the  Auditorium  is  large  and  elegant.  It 
requires  ten  thousand  electric  lights  to  light  this  building 
and  thirteen  elevators  to  carry  the  people. 

In  this  and  other  tall   buildings    there   are  express, 


Lake  Shore  Drive 


local,  and  freight  elevators.  The  express  elevators  gen- 
erally do  not  stop  between  the  first  and  tenth  floors. 
They  make  the  ascent,  including  stops,  in  less  than  two 
minutes. 

Chicago  has  a  very  complete  system  of  parks.  They 
are  placed  in  different  parts  of  the  city  so  that  every 
family  can  easily  reach  one  or  more  of  them.     They  are 

carefully  kept  and 
constantly  im- 
proved. The  people 
go  to  the  parks  in 
great  numbers.  I 
often  see  whole 
families  eating  their 
suppers  sitting  on 
the  grass.  The  chil- 
dren ride  in  the 
boats  on  the  little 
ponds,  and  play  hide- 
and-seek  among  the 
trees. 

Chicago  has  two 


Ashland  Boulevard 

handsome  drives.  One  leads  from  the  centre  southward, 
over  the  wide  and  straight  Michigan  Boulevard,  by 
beds  of  flowers  and  the  homes  of  millionaires.  The 
other  is  north  of  the  river,  the  "  Lake  Shore  Drive  " ; 
a  street  called  Ashland  Boulevard  is  also  very  beauti- 
ful. No  cable  or  electric  cars  are  allowed  on  either  drive. 
The  Lake  Shore  Drive  has  on  its  left  many  fine  residences 
and  on  the  right  a  fringe  of  sward,  which  in  the  summer- 
time is  dotted  with  flower  beds  and  covered  with  beauti- 


130 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


ful  foliage.  Beyond  this,  you  see  the  blue  waters  of 
the  lake.  This  drive  carries  one  to  the  finest  of  the  city 
parks,  named  after  our  great  president,  Lincoln. 

The  flat  and  rough  prairie  has  here  been  changed  so 
much  that  we  may  well  be  astonished  at  man's  work. 
We  see  about  us  hills  and  dales,  open  spaces  and  rolling 
prairie,  the  graceful  winding  and  curving  avenues,  pond 
and  bridges,  little  knolls  and  valleys. 

This  park  has  Lake  Michigan  on  its  eastern  side.  My 
favorite  walk  is  along  this  side,  on  high  ground  over  the 
wide  promenade.  This  commands  fine  views  of  the 
lake,  the  speedway,  and  regatta  course  on  one  side,  and 
the  many  beauties  of  the  park  on  the  other. 

You  know  that  in  size  Chicago  is  the  second  city  in 
the   United    States.      It 


lH^^^X~~££=~1L'—:——-!-lLr "'"' ' 


has  a  growing  number  of 
industries,  and  competes 
with  Pittsburg  in  making 
steel  and  with  New  York 
in  making  books.  It  is 
the.  greatest  food  centre 
in  the  world.  To  carry 
on  all  this  business  re- 
quires an  enormous  num- 
ber of  cars  and  ships. 

There  are  thirty-five 
railroads  entering  the  city 
now,  and  so  many  tracks 
and  cars  that  some  people 
think  that  Chicago  is 
nothing  but  a  great  rail- 
road yard.  Nearly  all  the 
great  trunk  lines  in 
America  have  their  terminal  point  in  this  city.  More 
passengers  arrive  and  depart,  and  more  freight  is  handled 
here  daily,  than  in  any  other  city  on  the  globe. 

The  natural  harbor  is  very  poor,  but  it  has  been 
greatly  improved  and  enlarged  by  building  breakwaters. 
To-day  a  greater  number  of  vessels  sail  yearly  from  this 
port  than  from  New  York  and  Philadelphia  together. 

And  now  let  me,  in  closing,  tell  you  about  the  Union 
Stockyards  in  the  southern  part  of  the  city.  I  go  there 
with  father  every  year,  and  enjoy  the  visit  very  much. 
The  Stockyards  form  a  town  of  considerable  size,  laid  out 
in  streets,  and  instead  of  houses  there  are  pens  for  cattle, 
sheep,  and  horses.  Every  pen  has  a  gate,  a  trough  for 
water,  and  a  place  for  food.  Some  of  the  pens  are  roofed 
over.  Sheep  are  frequently  put  under  a  roof.  In  this 
packing  town  are  many  miles  of  railroad  tracks,  offices 


igy^^^^u^v  u;:.  ,j 


for  business,  a  bank,  and  great  slaughter  and  packing 
houses. 

Animals  are  sent  here,  not  only  from  the  surrounding 
states,  but  from  places  at  great  distances  in  the  West. 
There  are  several  places  from  which  you  can  get  ex- 
tensive views  of  this  town  of  pens.  Thus  we  can  see 
in  some  pens  cattle  feeding ;  in  others,  sheep  are  moving 
about ;  the  hogs  are  nearer  the  railroad  stations.  There 
are  elevated  streets  or  passageways  through  which  we 
often  see  live  stock  moving  toward  the  slaughter- 
houses. 

Every  part  of  an  animal  is  considered  of  value  and 
sold  at  a  profit.  The  horns  are  bought  by  the  comb  and 
knife-hilt  maker ;  the  head  and  hoofs  make  the  stock  for 

glue;   neat's -foot   oil    is 
made  from  the  feet. 

After  themeat  is  dressed 
it  is  placed  in  a  cold  room 
and  chilled.  Then  it  is 
loaded  on  great  wagons 
and  carried  to  butchers' 
shops  inthiscity,or  placed 
on  refrigerator  cars  and 
sent  to  you  in  the  East. 

Your  loving  nephew, 

Theodore. 


LANGUAGE  LESSON 

Write   a  letter  like  Theo- 
dore's about  your  city  or  town. 


A  View  in  the  Stockyards,  Chicago 


MAP  QUESTIONS  ON  THE  CENTRAL  STATES 

1.  What  river  divides  this  section  into  nearly  equal  parts  ? 

2.  What  states  border  the  Ohio  River  ? 

3.  Through  what  states  does  the  Missouri  flow  ? 

4.  Are  there  many  mountains  in  this  part  of  the  United  States  ? 

5.  What  fact  does  the  absence  of  mountains  show  about  the  land? 

6.  In  what  direction  does  the  land  slope  ? 

7.  What  five  lakes  touch  Michigan  ? 

8.  What  state  has  a  good  many  small  lakes  in  it  ? 

9.  Where  is  Chicago,  and  in  what  direction  from  it  do  you  live  ? 

10.  Is  Springfield  the  capital  of  Illinois  ? 

11.  What  sign  shows  that  a  place  is  a  capital  ?     What  is  meant 
by  "capital"  ? 

12.  According  to  the  scale,  how  far  is  it  from  Chicago  to  St. 
Louis  ?    From  Chicago  to  Kansas  City  ? 

13.  Locate  Cincinnati,   Cleveland,   Detroit,    Duluth,    Madison, 
Louisville,  Kansas  City,  Omaha,  St.  Paul,  Indianapolis. 


132 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


39.    THE  WHEAT  BELT 

Wheat  will  grow  in  a  great  variety  of  climates  and 
soils,  although  it  is  a  tender  plant.  One  kind  of  wheat 
is  sown  in  spring,  another  kind  in  the  fall.  The  latter 
is  called  winter  wheat.  It  ripens  the  summer  after 
planting,  and  earlier  than  spring  wheat.  Spring  wheat 
will  grow  in  a  colder  climate  than  winter  wheat. 

The  great  wheat  belt  includes  California  and  the 
states  north  and  west  of  Chicago.  No  other  country 
produces  so  much  wheat  as  the  United  States. 

Wheat  Farms.  —  The  largest  wheat  farms 
are  in  the  Dakotas,  in  the  valley  of  the  Red 
River  of  the  North.  Thousands  of  years 
ago  this  section  was  a  great  lake.  After  it 
was  drained  off,  the  bottom  of  the  lake  was 
found  to  have  a  very  rich  soil,  well  adapted, 
with  the  cool  climate,  to  spring-wheat  rais- 
ing. Some  of  these  wheat  farms  are  very 
large  and  employ  a  great  number  of  men. 
These  men  work  in  gangs  under  an  experi- 
enced foreman.  Most  of  the  work  can  be 
and  is  done  by  machinery  because  there  are 


the  farmer  to  have  many  machines,  horses,  and  men  to 
do  the  work. 

Harvesting.  —  The  wheat  needs  to  be  cut  and  harvested 
in  a  short  time  after  it  is  ripe  or  it  will  spoil.  On  these 
large  farms  several  machines  are  used  to  do  this  work. 
They  are  called  harvesters;  they  have  almost  as  many 
parts  as  a  locomotive.  They  cut  the  wheat,  gather  it  in 
bundles  or  sheaves,  and  tie  each  bundle  with  twine. 
Men  follow  the  machine  and  gather  the  sheaves  together 
to  form  a  stook  or  shod;  which  means  putting  the  sheaves 
together  so  that  they  will   shed  rain  and  become  dry. 


Ploughing  the  Wheat  Field :    Several  Ploughs  drawn  by  an  Engine 


no  stones  or  roots  in  the  soil  as  in  New  England,  and 
because  the  fields  are  so  level  and  of  such  great  extent. 

Early  in  spring  or  in  the  fall  the  land  is  ploughed,  per- 
haps with  a  sulky  plough.  Such  a  plough  is  mounted 
on  two  wheels  and  it  turns  two  furrows  at  once.  It  re- 
quires four  horses  to  draw  it.  Sometimes  several  of 
these  ploughs  are  fastened  together  and  an  engine  is 
used  to  draw  them.  After  ploughing,  the  land  is  still 
further  broken  up  by  wheel  harrows.  Then  follows  the 
machine  for  sowing  the  seed  in  drills.  This  machine 
furrows  the  ground,  puts  in  the  seed,  and  then  covers  it. 
It  is  drawn  by  two  horses  and  will  plant  ten  acres  in  a 
day.     The  shortuess  of  the  time  for   planting   requires 


Harvtsting  Wheat  by  Steam  Power 

Sometimes  the  harvesting  is  done  with  a  header, 
which  takes  off  the  heads  of  the  spears  of  wheat 
and  leaves  the  straw  standing. 

When  the  grain  is  well  dried,  it  is  threshed  in 
the  field  by  steam  threshers,  to  separate  the  grain 
from  the  straw.  The  straw  is  used  for  fuel  to 
run  the  threshing  machine.  One  machine  and 
ten  men  can  thresh  more  than  twelve  hundred 
bushels  of  wheat  in  a  day.  This  amount  of 
wheat  would  nearly  fill  half  a  schoolroom. 
Making  Flour.  —  In  grinding  wheat  into  flour  it  is 
necessary  first  to  separate  the  wheat  from  the  other 
seeds  mixed  with  it,  then  to  brush  off  the  dust.  Both 
of  these  things  are  done  by  machinery.  Then  it  is 
ground  gradually  finer  and  finer,  sifted,  and  ground 
again  and  again.  Ten  grindings  are  necessary  to  make 
some  brands  of  flour. 

In  early  days  the  best  flour  was  made  from  winter 
wheat;  but  the  invention  of  a  machine  called  the 
"  middlings  purifier "  made  the  hard  berry  of  spring 
wheat  more  valuable  than  winter  wheat.  This  led  to  the 
settlement  of  the  Northwest,  where  spring  wheat  can 
be  easily  grown. 


A    RANCH 


133 


Minneapolis  and  St.  Paul.  —  In  the  centre  of  this  wheat 
section  are  the  Falls  of  St.  Anthony,  on  the  Mississippi 
River,  which  afford  abundant  water  power.  How  nat- 
ural for  flour  mills  to  be  built  in  this  place,  and  for  a 
large  city  gradually  to  grow  up  around 
the  mills  and  the  falls  !  This  city  is 
beautiful  Minneapolis,  the  centre  of 
the  flour  business.  It  produces  more  flour  than 
any  other  city  in  the  world. 

On  the  other  side  of  the  river  is  St.  Paul,  built 
upon  the  bluff  of  the  Mississippi  River.  It  is  a 
noted  trade  centre  for  the  Northwest. 

LANGUAGE   LESSON 

Write  what  you  know  about  the  buying  of  flour 
and  the  making  of  bread  at  home  or  in  a  bakery. 

Tell  about  the  growing,  cutting,  and  harvesting  of 
any  kind  of  grain  near  your  home. 

40.    A  RANCH 

There  is  a  belt  of  high  plateau  land  east  of 
the  Rocky  Mountain  foot-hills,  stretching  from 
Texas  to  North  Dakota,  which  has  very  little 
rain,  not  enough  to  make  grain  growing  profita- 
ble, and  so  it  is  devoted  to  grazing.  Where  the 
buffalo  once  fed 
in  countless  num- 
bers now  graze 
thousands  of  cat- 
tle. A  stranger 
would  think  that 
these  treeless 
plains  were  quite 
unsuited  for  cat- 
tle, they  seem  so 
bare  and  brown; 
but  the  low,  sun- 
dried  grasses  are 
wonderfully 
sweet  and  nour- 
ishing. No  hay 
is  equal  to  these 
grasses,  dried 
where  they  stand, 
and  waiting  to  be 
nibbled  through 
the  winter 
months. 

In  many  cases  A  Cow-boy 


the  herds  are  small  and  are  kept  in  fenced  fields,  as  in 
New  England  and  the  Middle  states ;  but  sometimes 
the  cattle  are  in  immense  herds,  and  feed  upon  great 
tracts  of  unfenced  land,  where  it  is  necessary  for  men  to 

watch  and  care 
for  them.  These 
herders  are  called 
cow-boys. 

Cow-boys. — 
The  cow-boys  al- 
most live  in  the 
saddle.  They 
wear  overalls  of 
leather  and  wide- 
brimmed  hats, 
carry  large  re- 
volvers, and  use 
big  spurs  on  their 
long  boots.  They 
endure  rough 
fare,  hard  work, 
and  all  kinds  of 
exposure  to  the 
weather.  They 
become  so  hard- 
ened that  they 
can  live  in  a  tent 
all  winter,  and 
think  that  it  is  comfortable.  They  can  sleep  on  the 
ground  beside  a  herd  of  tramping,  bellowing,  noisy  cat- 
tle, or  make  their  home  for  days  under  a  tree.  Cow-boys 
receive  about  forty  dollars  a  month  for  all  this  hard 
work. 

The  cow-boy  learns  to  throw  the  lasso  or  rope  with 
great  skill,  for  he  practises  from  boyhood.  The  rope  is 
usually  made  of  leather  or  grass,  and  is  about  forty  feet 
long,  with  a  noose  at  one  end,  six  feet  or  more  in  length. 
The  coils  of  the  rope  are  held  in  the  left  hand,  and  the 
noose  is  swung  around  the  head  with  the  right,  and  then 
forward  and  over  the  head  or  around  the  feet  of  the  ani- 
mal to  be  caught.  If  the  throw  is  successfid,  the  rope 
is  turned  around  the  horn  of  the  saddle,  and  the  trained 
horse  plants  his  feet  to  pull  well. 

The  rope  is  used  for  catching  animals,  for  pulling  cows 
out  of  bog  holes,  for  hauling  logs,  for  pulling  a  team  up  a 
steep  pitch,  and  for  a  hundred  other  uses. 

Rough  Riding.  —  Cow-boys  are  skilful  riders.  They  ride 
through  the  streets,  picking  up  everything  thrown  toward 
them;   they  throw  their   ropes   around   pigs,   chickens, 


Throwing  the  Lasso  or  Rope 


134 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


horses,  and  their  friends.  Two  of  them 
try,  in  sport,  to  rope  each  other.  As  one 
flings  his  rope,  the  other  dodges  it  by  drop- 
ping down  on  his  horse's  neck ;  then  he 
quickly  jumps  up  and  tries  to  catch  his 
friend  when  off  guard.  The  horses  seem 
to  enjoy  such  contests. 

In  summer  the  cow-boy  rides  all  day 
among  his  cattle  to  see  that  they  do  not 
stray  too  far  from  good  feed  and  water. 
Toward  night  he  drives  them  to  the  bed- 
ding ground.  After  a  few  weeks  of  train- 
ing, the  cattle  will  go  to  the  night  camp 
without  much  trouble.  The  cattle  generally 
lie  down  at  night  and  chew  their  cud.  A 
few  cow-boys  are  on  duty  to  watch  them. 
Wild  cattle  are  easily  frightened  at  night ; 
then  they  jump  to  their  feet  and  start  to 
run  away.     It  is  not  easy  to  stop  the  ex- 


Cattle  on  the  Prairie  going  to  a  Round-up 


An  Unruly  Cow  lassoed 

The  third  one  of  the  brand  marks  shown  be- 
low would  be  called  the  "nail"  —  "shoe- 
nail" — brand;  the  seventh  one,  the  "duck" 
brand.  The  last  is  known  as  Quarter  Circle 
Diamond.  Specimens  of  another  class  of 
brands  are :  777,  OX,  VI,  and  76. 

A  Round-up.  —  The  round-ups  take  place 
in  the  autumn  and  spring.  The  cow-boys 
come  together  from  long  distances,  each  one 
knowing  not  only  his  own  brand,  but  that 
of  many  of  his  neighbors.     All  the  cattle  in 


cited  animals.      Sometimes  the  men   gallop     >£         ^ 

along  beside  the  leaders  and  gradually  swing 

them  around  into  the  tail  of  the  herd  until 

they  follow  one  another  round  and  round  in  a  circle. 

When  the  cattle  become  tired,  they  lie  down  again. 

Branding.  —  As  different  cattle  look  much 
alike,  it  is  necessary  for  the  owner  to  have 
his  initials  or  some  private  mark  on  every 
animal  in  order  to  prove  ownership  in  case 
the  cattle  stray  away  or  mix  with  other 
herds,  as  often  happens.  These  marks,  or 
brands,  are  written  on  the  hides  of  the  liv- 
ing animals  with  a  hot  iron  for  a  pen. 
Private  marks  are  frequently  combinations 
of  a  straight  iron  bar  and  a  half  circle. 


r    ¥    ®    i-    vr 


Brand  Marks 

a  certain  section  —  between  two  large  rivers,  for  instance 
—  are  driven  to  one  central  place.     There  may  be  nearly 


The  Round-up 


A    RACE  — THE    INDIANS 


135 


a  thousand  of  them.  The  largest  part  of  these  belong  to 
one  man,  but  there  are  among  his  cattle  many  animals 
that  have  strayed  into  this  section  from  ranges  far  away. 
A  man  rides  among  them,  and  when  he  sees  a  cow  or 
steer  with  his  own  brand  upon  it,  he  runs  it  out  of  the 
herd  to  a  second  man,  who  holds  it. 

A  well-trained  horse  is  a  great  help  in  doing  this. 
Many  of  the  best  horses  for  ranch  business  are  bred  in 
Texas,  where  large  herds 
of  cattle  are  still  raised. 
The  Texas  ponies  are  small, 
but  tough,  quick,  and  very 
intelligent.  Some  of  them 
are  docile  and  willing,  but 
others  are  apt  to  "buck." 
When  a  horse  bucks,  he 
puts  his  head  down  be- 
tween his  legs,  arches  his 
back  like  an  angry  cat,  and 
springs  into  the  air  with 
all  his  legs  at  once.  He 
comes  down  on  his  legs 
with  a  frightful  jar.  It 
takes  great  experience  to 
keep  in  the  saddle  when 
the  horse  "bucks." 
'  When  the  cattle  are  full 
grown  they  are  sent  by  rail 
to  the  stockyards  of  Kan- 
sas City  or  Chicago  (see 
page  130),  where  they  are 
turned  into  meat,  which  is 
shipped  to  all  parts  of  the 
country.  You  owe  the  roast 
beef  you  have  for  dinner 
to  the  grass  that  grows  on 
the  far-off  ranches  and  the 
labor  of  the  hard-worked 
cow-boys. 


LANGUAGE   LESSON. 

Tell  something  about  taking  care  of  a  horse,  dog,  cat,  or  any 
domestic  animal  or  pet. 

41.     A   RACE  — THE   INDIANS 

There  are  many  different  races  or  kinds  of  people  in 
this   country,  but  the  white   and  black  races  are  most 

numerous.     The  latter  live 


Ute  Indian  Brave 


SUMMARY 

Cattle  ranching  is  often  conducted  on  a  high  plateau  east  of 
the  Rocky  Mountains.  The  cattle  like  the  sun-dried  grasses 
there. 

Those  who  take  care  of  the  herds  are  cow-boys,  or  herders. 
The  cow-boy  is  skilful  in  riding  and  throwing  the  rope. 

The  "branding"  and  the  "round-up"  are  two  interesting 
features  of  ranching. 

The  cattle  on  the  ranches  are  sold  for  meat  to  firms  in 
Kansas  City  and  Chicago. 


largely  in  the  Southern 
states,  while  the  whites  are 
found  in  all  parts  of  the 
country.  The  yellow  race 
is  often  seen  in  large  cities. 
From  China  and  Japian, 
beyond  the  Pacific,  come 
the  Chinese  and  Japanese, 
who  are  members  of  the 
yellow  race. 

Color.  —  This  country  was 
once  inhabited  by  one  race 
only,  the  Red  Men,  or  Indi- 
ans. They  are  now  rarely 
seen  in  the  eastern  part  of 
the  United  States,  but  in 
the  West  they  are  often  met 
and  talked  about.  There 
are  still  many  Indian  tribes 
in  North  America,  and  their 
languages  are  so  different 
that  the  people  of  one  tribe 
cannot  understand  those  of 
another.  They  are  very 
different,  too,  in  their 
habits  and  ways  of  living. 
Some  wear  blankets  and 
moccasins,  which  are  soft 
leather  shoes  without  stiff 
soles.  Others  dress  like 
white  men.  Indians  are  generally  copper  colored,  which 
gives  them  the  name  "  red  men."  Their  abundant  hair 
is  long,  straight,  and  very  black.  They  have  high  cheek- 
bones and  broad  faces. 

Sometimes  a  tribe  is  found  in  which  the  people  are  tall, 
while  in  others  they  are  short.  Some  have  complexions 
more  nearly  white  than  others;  and  while  some  have 
slanting  eyes  like  the  Chinese,  in  others  the  eyes  are 
straight. 

Indian  women  are  called  squaws,  and  the  men  braves. 


136 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


The  squaw  carries  her  young  babe  about  on  her  back  in  a 
box  or  bag  strapped  to  a  board.  This  is  the  cradle,  and 
when  the  mother  goes  out  to  work,  she  stands  the  board 
with  the  baby  on  it  against  the  side  of  the  tent  or  beside 
a  tree.    Pretty  cradles  are  sometimes  made  of  birch  bark. 

Children.  —  Though   the    Indians    are   a   very   solemn 
people,  the  children  are  full  of  fun.     Boys  and  girls  do 
not  usually  play  together.     The  boys  ride  ponies,  even 
when  they  are  very  small, 
and  they  like   to  play  at 
shooting  with  the  bow  and 
arrow.   If  a  boy  succeeds  in 
killing  a  goose  or  a  squir- 
rel, his  father  is  pleased 
and  gives  him  much  praise. 
These  boys  are  as  fond  as 
white  boys  of  playing  ball, 
and  often   use  rackets   in 
their  games. 

The  doll  is  the  chief 
plaything  of  the  girls,  and 
they  play  with  it  much  as 
white  girls  do. 

Wigwams.  —  The  home 
of  the  Indian  is  sometimes 
a  tent,  called  a  wigivam, 
which  is  made  of  buffalo 
skins  or  cotton  cloth 
stretched  around  a  frame- 
work of  poles.  Such  a 
home  can  be  built  by  two 
women  in  five  minutes. 
The  smoke  from  the  fire  in 
the  centre  is  supposed  to 
escape  through  a  hole  in 
the  top. 

Some  tribes  live  in  long 
houses  made  of  poles  tied 
together  and  covered  with 

bark.  The  inside  is  divided  into  stalls  for  each  family. 
Perhaps  twenty  families  will  occupy  one  house,  thus 
making  it  an  Indian  apartment  house.  These  houses 
contain  little  furniture,  and  a  few  blankets  or  skins 
serve  as  beds.  The  cooking  is  done  over  an  open 
fire. 

Hunting.  —  The  Indian  brave  is  sometimes  called  "  a 
shiftless  creature,  willing  that  the  women  should  do  all 
the  work."'  Those  who  ought  to  know  tell  us,  however, 
that  the  work  is  carefully  divided  between  the  men  and 


Ute  Indian  Squaw 


the  women.     The  Indian  who  lives  by  hunting  and  fish- 
ing has  to  work  hard  to  find  enough  to  eat. 

Before  the  white  men  reached  the  West  the  Indians 
came  to  the  plains  from  long  distances  twice  a  year  tc 
hunt  and  secure  a  supply  of  buffalo  meat.  Killing  the 
buffalo  on  foot  with  arrows  and  spears  was  hard  and 
dangerous  business.  On  the  back  of  a  horse  it  was  much 
easier,  but  they  had  no  horses  till  the  white  men  came. 

Buffalo  meat  was  cooked 
by  putting  it  into  a  basin- 
like hole  in  the  ground 
lined  with  buffalo  skin 
Water  was  poured  into  this 
skin-lined  dish,  and  hoi 
stones  were  dropped  in  tc 
make  the  water  boil.  Aftei 
the  meat  was  cooked,  the 
family  ate  directly  from 
the  dish.  Indians  are  very 
fond  of  a  stew  of  beans  and 
corn  which  they  call  succo- 
tash, a  name  still  used  ir 
this  country. 

The  Indian  is  usually 
quiet,  reserved,  silent,  and 
grave  in  the  presence  ol 
white  people.  At  home, 
among  his  own  people,  he 
is  often  noisy,  full  of  fun, 
and  ready  with  jokes.  He 
has  then  great  power  in 
relating  stories,  and  has  a 
rude  oratory  full  of  sublime 
poetry  and  telling  gestures, 
Indians  usually  have  good 
memories  and  never  forget 
a  friend  or  an  enemy. 

War. — Nearly  all  Indians, 
like  savage  people  in  gen- 
eral, are  fond  of  war.  Bravery  is  their  idea  of  greatness. 
Stealth  and  craft  are  thought  to  be  of  first  importance  in 
carrying  on  war.  They  are  very  cunning  in  concealing 
themselves  when  approaching  the  enemy,  which  they  do 
by  the  help  of  trees,  bushes,  and  grass.  Sometimes  they 
cover  themselves  with  grass  and  appear  to  be  a  part  of 
the  field ;  or  they  place  a  gray  blanket  over  their  bodies 
and  sprinkle  it  with  dirt  so  as  to  resemble  a  boulder. 
Indians  are  generally  skilful  in  drawing  the  enemy  into 

f 

ambush  by  pretending  to  retreat. 


A    RACE— THE    INDIANS 


137 


6.     PICTURE   STUDY 


Wigwam  and  Indians 


1.  How  many  Indians  can  you  count  in  this  picture? 

2.  Tell  something  about  their  faces. 

3.  What  kind  of  hair  have  they? 

4.  What  is  the  color  of  an  Indian's  skin? 

5.  Is  this  wigwam  or  tent  in  an  Indian  village? 

6.  How  does  an  Indian  village  differ  from  a  white  man's  village? 

7.  What  do  the  two  children  in  the  picture  wear? 

8.  Of  what  is  the  wigwam  built? 

9.  What  do  the  Indians  wear  on  their  feet? 


138 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


A  favorite  Indian  ornament  is  a  circlet  of  eagle  feathers 
worn  on  the  head.  There  are  as  many  feathers  in  it  as 
the  owner  has  killed  enemies.  Persons  taken  in  war  are 
sometimes  adopted  as  brothers,  sometimes  set  at  liberty, 
but  more  frequently  they  are  tortured  or  killed.  These 
savages  have  a  horrid  custom  of  scalping  their  prisoners 
and  wearing  the  scalp-lock  dangling  from  the  belt. 

Customs.  —  Dancing  among  these  people  is  not  for 
pleasure,  but  in  honor  of  religion  or  war.  The  snake  and 
the  sun  dances  are  both  religious.  Music  for  dancing  is 
made  with  rattles  or  drums. 

Indians  have  strange  ways  of  disposing  of  their  dead. 
A  few  tribes  place  them 
in  trees  or  on  a  platform 
erected  on  poles;  but  most 
Indians  prefer  to  bury  in 
the  ground.  In  some 
tribes  it  is  the  custom  to 
place  the  body  in  a  sitting 
position  with  the  face 
turned  toward  the  spirit 
land.  With  the  body  are 
buried  many  things  used 
in  life  —  knives,  bows, 
arrows,  blankets,  and 
belts.  In  one  tribe  the 
man's  favorite  pony  is 
killed  at  the  grave  in 
order  that  his  master  may 
enter  the  Happy  Hunting 
Ground,  which    is    their 

heaven,  properly  mounted.     If  a  child  dies,  the  cradle 
and  playthings  are  buried  with  it. 

Indians  are  very  fond  of  dogs  and  horses.  The  dog 
has  been  the  companion  of  the  Indian  for  a  long  time, 
and  has  been  used  as  a  beast  of  burden  more  than  for 
hunting.  When  the  western  Indians  first  obtained 
horses  from  the  white  man,  they  could  easily  hunt  the 
buffalo  and  obtain  plenty  of  food. 

Soon  afterward  came  the  railroad,  and  white  men  who 
wanted  skins  and  furs  could  reach  the  plains  where  ani- 
mals abounded.  They  came  and  killed  off  the  buffaloes 
and  most  of  the  deer  and  antelope,  and  the  poor  Indian 
was  robbed  of  his  natural  food.  He  had  then  to  change 
his  habits  and  live  in  a  house  like  white  men,  and  eat 
vegetable  food  instead  of  meat. 

At  first  he  did  not  like  this,  and  became  sad,  sickly, 
and  ill-tempered;  but  slowly  a  new  generation  has 
sprung  up,  more  accustomed  to  the  new  mode  of  life, 


and  they  are  learning  by  degrees  to  live  and  work  in  the 
new  way,  like  white  men. 

Reservations.  —  The  government  gave  the  tribes  large 
tracts  of  land,  called  "reservations,"  on  which  to  live. 
As  the  white  people  went  farther  and  farther  west,  and 
these  lands  were  found  to  be  valuable,  the  government 
took  them  again,  promising  to  support  and  educate  the 
Indians  in  payment.  Many  of  the  Indians  still  live  on 
reservations,  which  are  mainly  in  the  West.  The  white 
man  in  charge  of  a  reservation  is  called  the  agent. 

Many  of  the  Indian  children  on  these  reservations  are 
now  attending  school  and  learning  the  elements  of  Eng- 
lish, reading,  writing,  and  arithmetic. 
Many  an  Indian  mother  is  very  proud 
of  her  boy  when  he  can  read  English. 
The  men  are  usually  taught  farm- 
ing, and  learn  to  raise 
corn,  oats,  potatoes,  and 
other  vegetables.  The 
Pine  Ridge  Agency,  in 
South  Dakota,  is  a  very 
prosperous  reservation. 
The  Indians  there  are  in 
the  cattle  business.  They 
have  thousands  of  head  of 
cattle,  and  sell  beef  to  the 
government.  They  like 
the  work  of  ranchmen  and 
are  doing  well.  They 
have  learned,  when  sick, 
to  consult  the  agency 
doctor  more  often  and 
the  medicine  man  less. 
The  medicine  man  is  the 
Indian  doctor,  who  pre- 
tends to  cure  sickness  by  dancing  and  weird  noises. 

Tribes.  —  The  Indians  that  lived  in  the  eastern  part  of 
the  country,  when  the  early  settlers  came  across  the  At- 
lantic, were  called  the  Algonquins.  Their  descendants 
are  very  numerous  and  live  now  in  the  West.  They  are  the 
Blackfoot,  Cheyenne,  and  Arapahoe  Indians,  and  others. 
The  Blackfoot  Indians  became  great  buffalo  hunters. 
They  have  very  sunny  tempers,  like  children.  They 
enjoy  feasts.  When  a  man  gives  a  feast,  he  cooks  the 
best  food  he  has,  and  then  calls  out  three  times  the  names 
of  the  friends  he  wishes  to  invite.  When  the  guests 
come,  each  one  is  given  a  dish  with  his  food  in  it.  It  is 
considered  polite  to  carry  away  what  is  not  eaten.  After 
the  meal  the  men  smoke  a  pipe  in  turn  and  tell  stories. 


E   CO.     H.  T.  *  C 


INDIANS 


A    RACE  — THE    INDIANS 


139 


Odd  Hair  Dress:   Moki 
Indian  Squaw 


The  North  Cheyenne  Indians  make  good  policemen, 
and  are  so  employed  in  parts  of  the  northern  United 
States.  For  this  hard  work 
they  are  paid  only  ten  dol- 
lars a  month.  These 
Indians  are  willing 
to  work,  and  in  hay- 
ing-time may  be 
seen  busy  in  the 
fields  till  nine 
o'clock  at  night. 
The  women 
make  beautiful 
lace,  which  finds 
a  ready  sale. 
Some  Indians 
now  live  in  good 
houses  and  dress 
and  work  like  white 
men. 

One  of  the  noted  Chey- 
enne chiefs  is  called  "  Blue 
Hawk."     He  was  a  white 

boy,  and  when  he  was  ten  years  old  he  lived 
with  his  parents  in  Mexico,  in  the  southern 
part  of  North  America.  While  herding  mules 
he  was  captured  by  the  Cheyennes,  carried  to 
their  home  in  the  northern  part  of  the  United 
States,  and  adopted  by  them.  He  lived  and 
acted  as  they  did,  and  was  named  "  Blue  Hawk  " 
because'  of  some  likeness  to  that  bird.  Years 
after,  his  brother  in  Mexico  found  out  where  he 
was  and  came  for  him.  With  much  difficulty  he 
persuaded  Blue  Hawk  to  return  to  his  relatives 
and  early  home.  He  started,  but  soon  his 
courage  gave  out  and  he  went  back  to  his  Indian 
friends. 

The  Ute  Indians  live  in  the  Rocky  Mountains. 
They  dress  partly  in  citizens'  clothes.  Where 
they  have  a  good  pasture  in  the  valley  and  on 
the  plateaus,  they  have  large  herds  of  cattle  and 
sheep.  Their  children  like  to  go  to  school,  but 
there  is  not  room  for  all  of  them. 

The  Moki  Indians,  of  whom  pictures  are  shown 
on  this  page,  live  in  the  southwestern  part  of 
the  United  States.  Their  appearance  and  cus- 
toms are  very  different  from  those  of  other 
Indians. 

The  Apache  women  make  journeys  of  fifteen. 


miles  to  the  mountains  near  their  homes.  With  great 
knives  they  cut  the  grass,  load  it  on  donkeys,  and  carry 
it  to  the  market. 

When   these  Indians  had  no  horses,  they  pulled  the 
plough  themselves  through  the  hard  soil.     If  they  had 
no  plough,  they  chopped  up  the  earth  with  a  hoe,  and 
thus  tried  to  raise  a  crop. 

The  Arapahoe  Indians  are  hard-working  farmers, 
and  raise  large  quantities  of  wheat,  oats,  and  hay, 
which  is  bought  by  the  government.     They  have  a 
large  number  of  children  in  the  schools. 

Rations. — Many  Indians  cannot  support  them- 
selves by  farming,  and  the  government  issues  them 
rations.     These  are  given  out  by  the  agent  on  cer- 
tain days.   The  women  pass  through  his  store.   Each 
of  them  carries  a  tag  on  which  is  printed  the  number 
in  her  family.    The  agent  reads  the  amounts  from  the 
tag,  and  his  assistant  puts  the  articles  in  the  woman's 
apron.    Some  of  these  women  are  very  old  and  wrinkled, 

with  coarse,  white 
hair.  Many  carry 
babies  in  knap- 
sacks on  their 
backs. 

The  men  are  fur- 
nished with  cattle. 
Each  steer  is  sup- 
posed to  supply 
twenty-five  Ind- 
ians with  beef  for 
two  weeks.  The 
agent  calls  out 
the  names  of  two 
or  three  Indians, 
—  "  Large  Look- 
ing-glass," "Deer 
Head,"  "Red 
Bird,"  or  others 
as  queer,  —  and 
these  men  ride  up 
and  receive  a  live 
steer.  They  drive 
him  off  to  their 
camp,  where  they 
shoot  him.  Then 
they  have  a  feast. 
Most  Indians  eat 
only  one  meal  a 
day. 


Moki  Squaw  grinding  Corn 


140 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


42.   PACIFIC  HIGHLAND  WONDERS 

In  Alaska.  —  Let  us  begin  our  sight-seeing  to-day  far 
away  to  the  north  on  the  island-fringed  shores  of  Alaska, 
the  most  northern  part  of  the  United  States.  It  is  a  cold 
country  like  Greenland.  A  good  many  Indians  are  found 
in  Alaska.  Only  a  few  of  the  Indian  children  attend 
school,  and  their  parents  are  poor,  although  gold  has 
recently  been  found  in  large  quantities  in  different  parts 
of  the  country.  The  winters  here  are  very  long  and 
vegetation  is  not  abundant.  Dogs  are  often  used  here 
for  drawing  loads,  as  they  are  in  Greenland  (see  page  61). 

Mountains.  — The  long  western 
range  called  the  Rocky  Mountains 
extends  to  Alaska,  and  throws  up 
several  very  high  peaks  not  far 
from  the  ocean.  One  of  these  is 
called  Mount  Saint  Elias.  It 
defied  for  years  any  man's  climb- 
ing to  its  summit.  At  last  an 
Italian  duke  came  over  here  with 
some  good  Swiss  climbers,  and 
after  serious  trouble  and  much 
danger,  five  men  succeeded  in 
reaching  the  top.  All  around  the 
foot  and  sides  of  this  peak  they 
found  immense  glaciers  or  rivers 
of  ice,  slowing  moving  down 
toward  the  sea.  Some  of  these 
frozen  rivers  were  many  miles 
long,  several  miles  wide,  and 
hundreds  of  feet  thick. 

The  highest  mountain  in  this 
section  is  named,  after  our  former  President,  Mount 
McKinley.  It  is  one  of  the  highest  mountains  in  the 
United  States. 

Glaciers.  —  South  of  this  is  a  region  where  many  of 
the  valleys  are  filled  with  glaciers  which  come  down  to 
the  edge  of  the  ocean.  These  ice  rivers  are  frequently 
visited  by  travellers.  I  went  there  once  in  a  steamer 
from  Oregon.  We  sailed  for  several  days  through  the 
inland  sea  with  high  mountains  on  the  right,  and  a  chain 
of  lovely  islands  on  the  left.  We  passed  only  a  few 
settled  places  and  finally  came  to  the  country  of  frozen 
rivers.  One  of  the  largest  of  these  was  named,  after  a 
learned  man  who  studied  it,  the  Muir  Glacier. 

Yellowstone  Park.  —  Farther  south  in  the  eastern  part 
of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  higher  up  than  the  top  of  Mount 
Washington,  is  a  section  of  the  United  States  which  con- 


The  Beehive  Geyser 


tains  many  natural  wonders  not  usually  found  so  close 
together.  The  government  has  made  this  tract  of  land  a 
great  National  Park,  in  order  to  preserve  the  wonders  for 
future  generations  to  see  and  enjoy. 

In  this  great  park,  two-thirds  as  large  as  the  state  of 
Connecticut,  are  very  deep  and  narrow  valleys,  lofty 
mountains,  great  plains,  immense  forests,  and  waterfalls 
twice  as  high  as  Niagara,  besides  the  many  geysers.  If 
all  the  city  parks  in  this  country  were  put  together,  they 
would  not  equal  the  National  Park  in  size.  Reservation 
is  a  longer  and  a  better  word  for  the  place. 
When  I  visited  the  place,  several  years  ago,  I  went  in 
by  the  northern  entrance  and 
rode  a  few  miles  beyond  the  end 
of  the  branch  railroad  in  a  coach 
and  slept  at  a  large  hotel.  At 
night  we  could  hear  the  bears 
behind  the  hotel,  fighting  and 
growling  over  the  refuse  heap. 

Hot  Springs.  —  A  party  of  us 
went  out  next  morning  to  see 
the  hot  springs.  We  found  the 
best  ones  in  a  valley  on  a  branch 
of  the  Yellowstone  River.  This 
is  the  principal  river  in  the  park. 
The  largest  spring  is  near  the 
edge  of  a  hill.  As  the  water,  full 
of  mineral  matter,  pours  down  the 
side  of  the  hill,  it  builds  up 
round  basins  of  various  shapes 
and  sizes.  The  depth  of  these 
basins  varies  from  six  inches  to 
eight  feet.  The  edges  of  the 
basins  are  adorned  with  a  beautiful  kind  of  bead- 
work.  The  colors  show  every  variety  of  yellow,  scarlet, 
and  green.  At  first  the  water  is  almost  boiling  hot,  but 
it  cools  as  it  flows  from  basin  to  basin.  The  bather  can 
thus  find  any  degree  of  warmth  he  wishes. 

A  very  long  ride  the  next  day  from  the  Hot  Springs 
to  the  southern  corner  of  the  park  brought  us  to  the 
greatest  wonder  of  this  strange  land,  the  "  Upper  Geyser 
Basin." 

Geysers.  —  On  the  blackboard  in  the  hotel  was  given  the 
time  when  each  geyser  would  spout.  The  "  Beehive  "  was 
due  to  act  in  about  an  hour,  so  our  party  walked  out  to 
see  the  wonderful  show.  It  was  easy  to  pick  it  out 
because  its  cone  was  shaped  like  an  old-fashioned  bee- 
hive, as  shown  in  the  picture.  We  patiently  waited  for 
the  end  of  the  hour,  and  then,  without  any  warning,  a 


PACIFIC    HIGHLAND    WONDERS 


141 


The  Hot  Springs 

great  column  of  water  and  steam  was  thrown  up  into  the 
air  some  two  hundred  and  fifty  feet.  All  this  was  ac- 
companied with  much  noise  and  foaming.  The  water 
thrown  out  disappeared  in  clouds  and  mists. 

Another  geyser,  called  "  Old  Faithful,"  spouts  very 
regularly  every  sixty-five  minutes.  Each  time  large  quan- 
tities of  water  fall 
back  and  flow  down 
the  valley.  Soap 
thrown  into  a  geyser 
causes  it  to  spout  at 
irregular  times,  and 
the  authorities  for- 
bid people  putting 
it  in.  Each  geyser 
has  its  growth  and 
decay  like  a  human 
being.  The  geysers 
seen  to-day  may  dis- 
appear in  a  few 
years  and  new  ones 
break  out. 

The  times  of 
spouting  differ.  The 
"  Splendid  Geyser  " 
spouts  every  three 
hours;  the  "Giant" 
once  in  four  hours ;  the  "  Giantess  "  only  once  in  two 
weeks.  The  result  of  all  this  spouting  is  to  make  hot 
mineral  water  very  abundant  here. 

The  Yosemite  Valley.  —  There  is  a  great  state  on  the 
Pacific  coast  called  California.  It  is  great  in  many  ways, 
but  it  is  known  far  and  wide  for  its  Yosemite  Valley  and 


The  Yosemite  Valley  :    El  Capitan  at  the  Left 


its  big  trees.  This  valley  is  near  the  centre  of 
the  state.  People  go  thousands  of  miles  to 
see  it. 

The  ride  from  the  nearest  railroad  station,  I 
remember,  was  up,  up,  up,  till  we  reached  a 
mountainous  district.  Our  first  glimpse  of 
what  was  before  us  came  when  the  driver  of 
the  coach  stopped  suddenly  and  pointed  with 
his  whip,  exclaiming,  "There  she  is!" 

The  trees  had  suddenly  disappeared  on  our 
right,  and  we  saw  in  their  place  an  array  of 
peaks,  domes,  mountains,  and  falls  of  water 
looking  like  ribbons  of  silver.  Far  below,  a 
deep  valley  wound  among  them.  Descending 
the  side  of  this  valley  we  reached,  in  time,  the 
bottom,  and  followed  the  river  through  its 
winding  course  toward  the  upper  part  of  the  great  gorge. 
Here  we  rested  in  a  good  hotel  and  learned  that  the 
valley  is  about  five  miles  long  and  from  a  half-mile  to  a 
mile  in  width.  This  valley,  it  is  said,  was  not  made,  like 
most  others,  by  the  wearing  away  of  the  earth  by  water, 
but  by  the  sinking  of  the  earth.     At  the  upper  end  it 

divides  into  three 
forks,  down  each  of 
which  flows  a  branch 
of  the  main  stream. 
As  we  moved 
about  in  the  valley, 
the  sides  seemed 
like  solid  rock  walls 
made  by  man,  they 
are  so  nearly  perpen- 
dicular. In  going 
up  the  left  branch, 
North  Dome  was 
seen  rising  three 
thousand  feet.  A 
little  farther  on  we 
came  to  a  beautiful 
lake,  reflecting  from 
its  glassy  surface 
the  images  of  peaks, 
cliffs,  and  great 
trees.  The  Indians  called  this  lake  "  Sleeping  Water"; 
but  the  white  men  have  named  it  "  Mirror  Lake." 

In  the  middle  branch  are  "  Vernal  Falls."  By  climb- 
ing up  the  side  of  these  falls  and  going  about  a  mile,  we 
saw  another  fall,  considered  by  some  the  grandest  in  the 
valley  because  it  has  the  largest  supply  of  water. 


142 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Other  persons  consider  the  falls  on  the  north  side 
more  lovely.  They  bear  the  same  name  as  the  valley, 
"Yosemite,"  which  means  a  great  grizzly  bear. 

They  are  broken  up  into  three  parts.  The  whole  de- 
scent measures  half  a  mile ;  that  is,  sixteen  times  the 
height  of  Niagara.  The  upper  part  is  best  seen ;  the  large 
stream  of  water  here  makes  a  clean  plunge  of  sixteen 
hundred  feet. 
It  sways  to  and 
fro,  and  the  ap- 
pearance of  the 
falls  constantly 
changes  like  the 
expression  of  a 
human  face. 
Much  of  the 
water  is  turned 
to  spray  long 
before  it  reaches 
the  bottom. 

Then  comes 
a  series  of  cas- 
cades and  then 
a  final  plunge 
of  four  hundred 
feet  to  the  bot- 
tom of  the  val- 
ley. One  lovely 
fall  is  called 
"  Bridal  Veil." 

Near  the  en- 
trance is  a  ma- 
jestic cliff  three 
thousand  feet 
high,  called  "  El 
Capitan."  It  is 
one  of  the  most 
clean-cut,  lofty, 
and  imposing 
faces  of  rock  to  be  found  in  the  world.  The  smooth  face 
is  in  one  place  marked  by  what  appears  to  be  a  small 
shrub,  but  which  is  said  to  be  a  large  tree  over  one  hun- 
dred feet  high.  This  shows  the  size  of  things  in  the 
valley.     El  Capitan  is  shown  on  the  previous  page. 

The  Big  Trees. — Not  far  from  the  wonderful  Yosemite 
Valley  is  a  grove  of  big  trees.  Several  large  trees  were 
seen  by  the  roadside  on  the  way  to  this  grove,  especially 
two  large  sugar  pines ;  but  the  driver  was  not  willing  to 
stop  and  waste  any  time  on  such  small  affairs.     As  the 


-'■  tWfV rSFra  1  •^3k\\\\Wm\\\u%  -      mtmv 

■-**  ■•           -*       .    v!^     Ws"  ^^<  '-■"•.*<>;/•  - 

'"V- *.                                       "231        H^a"*1?  'i^^ 

.»'Jp*'              4        ^«  -    Mm                                             "'S?7,               . 
'  "   '*$  ••                                                           •.•.•-■ 

,                                •                                                  v                                                                                                  *       *    ■♦  t   y  v 
|*V            '                                                 '                                                                                                                            .                   '.  "    \  *     . ' 

v.. 

■■W 

J 

Yosemite  Falls 


grove  drew  near,  larger  specimens  were  seen  which  the 
driver  admitted  belonged  to  the  real  big-tree  family.  Still, 
on  he  went  till  he  stopped  before  the  "  Grizzly  Giant," 
the  thickest  if  not  the  tallest  tree  in  the  world. 

In  walking  around  this  tree,  I  counted  fifty-three  steps. 
Measured  exactly,  it  is  ninety-three  feet  seven  inches 
around.    The  lowest  branch  is  ninety  feet  from  the  ground 

and  it  is  eigh- 
teen feet  in  cir- 
c  u  m  f  e  r  e  n  c  e. 
Strange  to  say, 
the  cones  are 
very  small,  only 
about  two  inches 
long,  while  the 
cones  of  the 
much  smaller 
sugar  pine  are 
sometimes  two 
feet  long.  It  is 
said  that  the 
seeds  will  sprout 
and  the  trees 
grow  well  in 
the  East  and  in 
Europe.  In 
Europe  one  tree 
grew  in  ten 
years  to  be  sixty 
feet  high.  The 
bark  of  this  tree 
is  soft,  spongy, 
of  a  light  brown 
color,  and  often 
one  foot  or  more 
in  thickness. 
The  wood  is  as 
red  as  that  of 
the  redwoods. 
In  the  upper  grove  are  more  of  these  gigantic  trees. 
They  are  all  named  and  many  of  them  bear  the  names 
of  great  men,  such  as  General  Grant.  One  of  the 
largest  lies  on  the  ground  and  is  called  the  "  Fallen 
Monarch."  The  bark  and  sap  of  this  tree  are  all  gone, 
but  it  still  measures  nearly  thirty  feet  in  diameter 
and  a  long  ladder  must  be  used  to  mount  the  trunk  as 
it  lies. 

The  road  runs  through  one  of  these  trees,  and  I  saw  a 
coach  and  four  horses  go  through  the  tree,  the  archway 


PACIFIC    HIGHLAND    WONDERS 


143 


measuring  ten  feet  by  twelve.     The  coach  may  be  seen 
in  the  picture. 

Farther  north,  and  much  nearer  San  Francisco,  is 
another  grove  of  trees  containing  even  more  giants,  six 
hundred  in  all.  One  tree  lying  on  the  ground  is  sup- 
posed to  have 
been,  before  it 
fell,  forty  feet 
in  diameter 
and  four  hun- 
dred and  fifty 
feet  high.  An- 
other one  has 
been  burned 
out  in  the  in- 
side, and  this 
has  made  a 
hollow  large 
enough  to 
allow  a  man 
on  horseback 
to  ride  in  at 
the  big  end, 
and  go  two 
hundred  feet 
into  the  tree 
trunk  before 
passing  out  at 
a  knothole. 

The  tallest  tree  standing  is  called  the 
New  York  tree.     It  is  three  hundred 
and  sixty-six  feet  high.     A  summer 
house  is  built  on  the  stump  of  one  of 
these  trees. 

The    names    of    other    trees    are 
"  Daniel    Webster,"     "  Mother    and 
Son,"  and  "The  Three  Graces."     It 
is  believed  that   some   of  these   trees 
are  over  two  thousand  years  old,  for  the 
rings   in    one    of    the    stumps   were    once 
counted  and  they  numbered  twenty-seven  hun- 
dred.    In  many  trees  a  new  ring  of  wood  is 
formed  with  every  year's  growth. 

The  Grand  Canyon.  —  Another  wonder  that  I 
kave  read  about  is  the  great  gorge  in  Arizona  through 
which  the  Colorado  River  flows  in  cutting  its  way  out  of 
the  Rocky  Mountains.     It  is  really  a  series  of  gorges  in 
the  southern  part  of  the  western  highlands. 

When  the  summer  sun  grows  warm,  it  melts  the  snow 


The  Grizzly  Giant 


on  the  mountain  sides,  and  millions  of  Brooks  unite  in 
ten  thousand  torrents.  These  creeks  join  to  make  a 
hundred  roaring  rivers,  and  the  latter  come  together  and 
form  a  powerful  stream,  carrying  countless  grains  of 
sand  that  act  like  the  teeth  of  a  saw.  This  sand  cuts 
through  the  hardest  rocks,  thus  making  a 
channel  through  long  mountain  ranges  and 
extensive  plateau  regions.  This  is  the 
origin  of  the  Grand  Canyon,  the  deepest 
and  longest  gorge  in  the  world.  It  is 
really  one  gorge  after  another  in  a  row. 

Only  a  few  persons  have  ever  been 
through  this  series  of  gorges.  Major 
Powell  and  some  companions  once  made 
the  perilous  journey.  Two  men  perished 
in  the  attempt.  They  encountered  hun- 
dreds of  rapids,  many  eddies,  whirlpools, 
cascades,  and  falls.  They  were  chilled  at 
night  and  baked  by  day.  Sometimes  the 
water  hurried  their  boats  on  with  the  speed 
of  a  railroad  train.  At  other  times  the 
boats  leaped  and  bounded  over  the  waves 
like  deer  rushing  through  a  forest. 

They  saw  in  some  places  steep  walls  ris- 
ing  on   each   side   to  remarkable   heights, 
tinted  with  all  the  colors  of  the  rainbow. 
They  walked  over  beautiful  pavements, 
polished  and  decorated  with 
strange    designs.     In 
other     places      the 
rocks    were    bare 
and    of    sombre 
hues.        The 
gorge      winds 
about     like     a 
great  river.    It 
has    different 
widths  and  depths 
and     many    branch 
gorges.   In  some  places 
great    mountains    rise    far 
above  the  canyon ;  in  others 
the   top   of   the  canyon   is 
finished   off    in   many  pin- 
nacles and  domes.     (See  picture  on  the  next  page.) 

Another  man,  Mr.  Owens,  tells  us  about  going  down 
one  side  of  the  Grand  Canyon.  Starting  at  the  hotel  at 
the  top,  he  followed  a  path  so  steep  that  he  walked,  ran, 
and  slid  down  the  first  three  miles  to  the  cabin.     The 


Spring  at  the  Bottom  of  the  Grand  Canyon 


144 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


scenery  on  the  way  was  very  interesting 
point  or  ledge  would  be  seen  far  below, 
wards  it  would 
seem  to  be  a 
thousand  feet 
above  his  head. 
He  kept  on 
descending  the 
side  canyon 
which  leads  to 
the  main  one. 
At  last  this  side 
canyon  was  only 
five  hundred  feet 
wide.  After  he 
had  gone  three 
miles  it  became 
only  twenty-five 
feet  wide,  and 
its  sides  were  al- 
most perpendic- 
ular. Then  he 
came  to  the  first 
rope  ladder  of 
ten  feet,  and 
then  down  he 
went,  clinging  to 
a  rope  forty  feet 
long.  Beyond 
this,  the  gorge 
narrowed  to 
about  five  feet, 
and  soon  ended 
in  a  pool  of  water 
which  had  to  be 
waded.  Forty 
feet  beyond,  he 
came  to  a  water- 
fall    fifty     feet 


Some  strong 
and  then  after- 


The  Grand  Canyon 


deep  and  four  feet  wide,  down  which  he  climbed,  clinging 
to  a  rope,  thus  enjoying  a  good  bath  at  the  same  time. 

Sliding  down  one 
more  steep  place 
he  soon  stood  on 
the  banks  of  the 
mighty  Colorado 
River,  at  the  bot- 
tom of  the  great 
Canyon.  The 
river  was  an 
angry,  mighty 
stream,  with 
rapids  at  short 
intervals.  It 
flowed  between 
rugged  granite 
walls  which  rose 
from  the  water's 
edge. 

Mr.  Owens  had 
a  long,  hard  pull 
in  returning,  but 
he  accomplished 
it  in  about  two 
hours.  What 
could  give  a  bet- 
ter idea  of  the 
kind  of  scenery 
here  than  the 
story  of  this 
trip? 

LANGUAGE  LES- 
SON 

Write  a  short  re- 
view or  summary 
of  these  and  other 
"Pacific  Highland 
Wonders." 


MAP  QUESTIONS   ON   THE  WESTERN   STATES 


1.  The  Rocky  Mountain  system  passes  through  what  states  ? 

2.  Where  would  you  find  many  valleys,  gorges,  passes,  and 
peaks  ? 

3.  Where  is  the  Great  Basin  ? 

4.  What  mountains  are  farther  west  than  the  Rockies  ? 

6.    What  rivers  rise  near  the  Mount  of  the  Holy  Cross  ?    Near 
Yellowstone  National  Park? 

6.   Which  of  these  rivers  passes  through  the  Grand  Canyon  ? 


7.  Where  is  the  Yellowstone  National  Park?    The  Yosemite 
National  Park  ? 

8.  What  shows  that  there  is  little  rain  in  some  parts  of  this 
section  ? 

9.  Are  there   any  rivers  here  which  do  not    flow   into  the 
ocean  ? 

10.    According  to  the  scale,  how  far  is  it  from  Denver  to  San 
Francisco  ? 


146 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


43.    A   LAND  OF   SUNSHINE,   FRUIT,   AND   FLOWERS 

When  Grandfather  was  a  young  man,  he  went  across 
the  country  to  California  to  search  for  gold.  He  found 
the  gold  washed  out  from  the  rocks  and  deposited  in  the 
beds  of  rivers,  and  in  gravel  hills,  and  he  found  it  by 
very  simple  processes.  He  found  sunshine  in  plenty, 
but  little  rain,  especially  in  the  southern  part,  and  dry 
deserts  all  through  the  south.  He  found  a  good  harbor 
in  the  central  part,  but  only  a  small  town  upon  it.  Wild 
animals  roamed  through  the  great  central  valleys.  There 
were  few  people  in  the  state  then,  few  houses,  few  stores, 
few  towns,  and  no  cities.  One  met  in  this  lonely  place 
only  miners,  Indians,  and  grizzly  bears. 

Grandfather  lately  revisited  this  section,  and  this  is 
the  way  he  talks  about  what  he  saw :  — 

San  Francisco.  —  "  I  crossed  the  country,  children,  in  as 


SAN  FRANCISCO        W'ST 

j  *rt    *_»*    .  Strait*  »f^ 

and  Vicinity.  caryii 


narrow  strait,  called 
the  Golden  Gate, 
into  a  very  large 
inner  bay,  forming 
a  splendid  harbor, 
even  larger  than 
New  York  Harbor. 
The  business  part 
of  the  city  is  near 
the  water's  edge. 

"  From  the  old 
ferry  slip  a  wide  and 
splendid  street,  lined 
with  fine  stores  and 
buildings,  runs  out 
nearly  across  the 
peninsula.  This  is 
Market  Street,  the 
Broadway  of  San  Francisco.  The  enormous 
Palace  Hotel,  theatres,  banks,  beautiful 
churches,  and  halls  are  found  on  this  street. 
A  magnificent  City  Hall  is  here  in  a  large 
open  park. 

"I  went  along  another  street,  running 
parallel  with  Market  Street,  and  called 
California  Street.  In  the  lower  part  were 
banks  and  big  stores.  Then  I  came  to  a 
great  market  occupying  a  whole  square.  I 
never  saw  such  a  display  of  big,  handsome 
fruit  and  vegetables.  By  and  by  this  street 
changed  from  business  buildings  to  houses; 
I  jumped  on  board  a  cable  car,  and  was 
drawn  up  a  steep  grade  to  the  top  of  'Nob 


Street  overlooking  the  Bay,  San  Francisco 

many  days  as  I  was  months  in  going  before. 
I  rode  in  a  Pullman  car  with  modern  com- 
forts,—  a  good  bed,  a  dining  car,  a  smoking 
room,  and  a  bathroom,  —  instead  of  in  a 
'  prairie  schooner '  with  no  bed,  and  walk- 
ing half  the  way. 

"When  I  reached  the  harbor  the  water 
was  there,  but  the  huts  and  little  stores  were 
all  gone,  and  on  the  bare,  narrow  peninsula 
which  you  see  on  the  map,  and  on  the  old 
sand  dunes  that  I  remember,  I  found  a 
modern  city,  called  San  Francisco. 

"The  Pacific    Ocean   flows   through    the 


Panorama  from  Telegraph  Hill 


A    LAND    OF    SUNSHINE,    FRUIT,    AND    FLOWERS 


147 


Hill,'  where  I  saw  several  elegant  wooden  houses,  built 
to  imitate  stone  buildings.  The  views  of  the  city  and 
harbor  from  this  elevation  are  very  fine,  and  I  was 
interested  to  see  the  wonderful  changes  in  fifty  years. 

"  I  next  visited  Chinatown,  a  low-lying  section  at  the 
foot  of  '  Nob  Hill,'  where  the  Chinese  live.  I  found  them 
living  in  very  crowded  quarters.  I  saw  them  in  restau- 
rants eating,  as  in  China,  with  '  chop  sticks,'  making  tea 


started  up  about  ten  o'clock.  I  put  on  my  overcoat. 
At  one  o'clock  the  fog  rolled  over  me,  and  soon  water 
dripped  from  trees  and  clothing,  and  everybody  was 
chilled  through.  The  temperature  went  down  more  than 
10  degrees,  and  I  had  to  put  on  more  wraps. 

"Farther  north  in  California  it  is  cold  in  winter.  In 
the  great  interior  valleys  there  is  intense  heat  in  summer, 
especially  in  the  middle  of  the  day,  but  it  is  cool  at 
night. 

Farming.  —  "  Where  we  miners  wandered  about  looking 
for  the  shining  particles  of  gold,  there  are  now  great 
farms,  some  of  them  equal  in  size  to  five  hundred  eastern 
farms.  The  coast  is  usually  so  dry  that  it  is  necessary  to 
water  the  crops  from  the  rivers  and  lakes ;  hence,  canals 
are  built  to  bring  the  water  from  long  distances. 

"  One  large  farm  has  over  three  hundred  miles  of 
canals.  It  raises  thirty  thousand  sheep,  thousands  of 
hogs,  and  hundreds  of  horses.  It  requires  fifteen  hundred 
men  to  work  such  a  farm.  The  vineyard  on  this  farm,  a 
friend  told  me,  is  the  largest  in  the  world.  It  is  di- 
vided into  blocks  and  cut  up  by  streets  running  in  different 
directions.  To  pick  the  grapes  when  they  are  ripe,  in 
August,  requires  the  work  of  a  thousand  boys  and  men. 


A  Park  full  of  Beautiful  Trees 

in  little  teacups,  and  smoking  opium,  a  much 
worse  habit  than  drinking  liquor. 

"  The  Chinamen  now  do  much  of  the  hard 
manual  work  in  this  state.  They  are  often 
cooks  and  servants  in  private  families,  and  are 
liked  because  they  are  hard  workers  and  very 
faithful. 

"  Hiring  a  team  one  day,  I  drove  out  toward 
the  ocean,  where  years  ago  there  was  nothing 
but  barren  rocks  and  yellow,  moving  sand.     I 
found  streets  of  homes  full  of  life  and  love, 
and  beautiful  cemeteries.     Then  I  came  to  a 
fine  park,  full  of  trees  such  as  are  found  on 
the  Pacific  Coast,  flowers,  and  flowering  shrubs.     Farther 
along,  I  took  a  road  winding  by  the  different  headlands, 
passed  some  good  houses,  and  arrived  at  a  summer  hotel 
known  as  the  Cliff  House.     The  views  of  the  ocean  and 
of  the  Golden  Gate,  on  this  drive,  were  sufficient  to  repay  ■ 
me  fully  for  the  time  and  trouble. 

"What  surprising  changes!  but  on  the  way  back  to 
my  hotel  in  the  afternoon,  I  noticed  one  old  friend,  the 
same  cold,  disagreeable  fellow  of  years  before,-1- the  chilly 
fog.     His  advent  was  made  known  by  a  cold  wind  which 


A  Vineyard  in  Southern  California 

"I  visited  a  smaller  farm  stretching  for  four  miles 
along  the  Sacramento  River.  This  farm  was  about  the 
size  of  an  ordinary  New  York  town.  The  grounds  around 
the  house  contained  two  hundred  acres.  The  vegetable 
garden  was  half  as  large.  Beets  and  pumpkins  grew 
here  to  be  enormous  in  size.  I  saw  one  beet  which  would 
weigh  as  much  as  a  small  boy.  One  large  cherry  tree 
produced  in  one  summer  a  ton  of  fruit.  The  wheat  raised 
on  this  farm  in  one  year  amounted  to  one  hundred 
thousand  bushels,  and  the  barley  to  nearly  half  as  much. 


148 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Fifteen  hundred  acres  of  land  were  devoted  to  orchards 
and  vineyards.  The  pay  roll  footed  up  $100,000  a 
year.  Farming  is  now  much  more  important  than 
mining  ■  in   this   state. 

Lumbering.  —  "I  found  the  lumber  business  very  im- 
portant in  California.  Redwood  trees  grow  in  great 
abundance  along  the  Pacific  Coast  north  of  San  Francisco. 
They  are  gigantic  in  size,  if  measured  by  ordinary  trees 
in  the  east.  They  frequently  reach  two  hundred  and 
fifty  feet  in  height,  and  it  often  requires  ten  men  with 
outstretched    arms    to  


watered  from  the  mountain  streams  by  long  canals.  For 
six  months  little  rain  falls.  There  is  no  fog  or  dew. 
The  white  grapes  are  picked  and  spread  out  on  trays 
placed  on  the  ground  between  the  rows  of  vines.  They 
are  left  in  the  hot  sun  day  after  day  for  a  month.  As 
the  grapes  dry,  the  color  changes  from  white  to  purplish 
black.  Thus  our  raisins  are  produced,  and  they  are 
equal  to  those  imported  from  Spain. 

"  Farther  on,  the  high  mountains    on  the  left  swing 
around  and  join  those  on  the  right,  enclosing  the  valley. 

In  order  to  get  out  of 


reach  around  one  trunk. 
They  owe  their  size  to 
the  richness  of  the  soil 
and  the  heavy  rains. 

Mining.  —  "I  in- 
quired about  the  min- 
ing, for  I  had  seen  very 
little  while  riding 
about.  They  took  me 
a  long  way  up  among 
the  high  mountains. 
There  I  found  that 
miners  had  sunk  shafts 
or  bored  tunnels  far 
into  a  mountain  and 
opened  a  regular  mine, 
as  if  looking  for  coal. 
Out  of  this  mine,  broken 
pieces  of  rock  were  car- 
ried and  then  crushed 
to  powder,  and  the  gold 
was  found  by  the  help 
of  mercury.  When  I 
proposed  to  buy  a  mine 
and  do  a  little  mining 
on  my  own  account, 
they  laughed  at  me  and 
said  that  this  mine  was  owned  by  a  large  company  of  rich 
men,  and  it  took  millions  and  millions  of  dollars  to 
run  it. 

Southern  California. — "  From  San  Francisco  I  journeyed 
southward  through  a  long,  broad  valley,  well  shut  in 
between  mountains.  I  went  through  the  granary  of  the 
West,  where  are  raised  endless  crops  of  grain  and  fruit. 
The  farms  here  are  all  sizes,  from  ten  to  thousands  of 
acres.  After  passing  many  wheat  fields,  we  came  to  large 
vineyards,  and  I  stopped  to  visit  them. 

"  I  learned  that  grapes  grow  well  here,  where  they  are 


The  Giant  Redwood  Trees 


the  valley  in  this 
southward  direction  we 
had  to  climb  up  through 
a  deep  pass  where  the 
railway  winds  back- 
ward and  forward,  and 
finally  crosses  its  own 
track,  plunges  into  a 
tunnel,  and  then  goes 
in  and  out  of  tunnel 
after  tunnel  till  the 
summit  is  gained  and 
the  other  side  is 
reached. 

"We  were  then  on 
the  edge  of  a  cheerless 
desert  and  hastened 
across  it  and  over  the 
low  Coast  Range  into  a 
new  world  known  as 
Southern  California,  or 
the  '  Italy  of  America.' 
"  Look  on  your  maps, 
children,  and  see  where 
I  was  at  that  time.  I 
was  on  a  long,  narrow 
strip  of  land  between 
the  Coast  Range  and  the  ocean.  In  this  section  the  cold 
winds  from  the  east  are  shut  out  by  the  mountain  wall  I 
had  just  crossed.  The  warm  winds  of  the  Pacific,  pass- 
ing over  warm  ocean  currents  of  water,  flow  landward 
and  produce  bright  sunshine  and  cloudless  skies,  day 
after  day,  month  after  month. 

Perpetual  Spring.  —  "  In  this  climate  the  air  is  dry  and 
the  winter  rains  are  moderate.  There  is  little  frost  the 
year  round,  and  no  snow.  The  sudden  changes  in  tem- 
perature so  common  in  the  East  are  entirely  unknown. 
It  is  every  day  much  warmer  at  noon  than  at  midnight. 


A  LAND  OF  SUNSHINE,  FRUIT,  AND  FLOWERS 


149 


Summer  and  winter  lose  much  of  their  meaning;  per- 
petual spring  is  the  one  season.  Sunshine  after  a  while 
becomes  rather  monotonous  and  one  longs  for  a  good 
rainy  day. 

"  Farming  was  not  very  profitable  here  till  towns  and 
communities  united  to  build  irrigation  works  and  brought 
water  from  long  distances  to  supply  the  lack 
of  moisture  caused  by  the  meagre 
rainfall.  Then  the  land  be- 
came fertile,  and  the  coun 
try  and  climate  were  soon 
found  well  adapted  for 
fruits  and  flowers. 

Orange    Growing.  — 
"  Without  question 
this  is  the  land  of  the 
orange.       The    orange 
tree,   I   learned,    begins 
to  bloom   here  in  March, 
and  the  fruit  is  ready  for  pick 
ing  between  the  January  and  June 
following.     After  picking,  the  fruit  is 
sorted  by  machinery  and  then  wrapped  by 
hand  in  tissue  paper  and  packed 
in  boxes.     These  are  immediately 
sent   to    the   large    cities   in   the 
Middle  West  and  in  the  East. 

"  If  a  train-load  of  oranges 
reaches  Chicago  or  New  York 
early  in  the  morning,  agents  meet 
it  at  once,  and  by  noon  the  con- 
tents are  placed  in  the  hands  of 
those  who  sell  this  fruit  by  the 
dozen.  The  success  of  the  busi- 
ness depends  upon  this  perishable 
fruit's  being  quickly  gathered, 
quickly  transported,  and  quickly 
sold.  I  was  surprised  to  find 
that  oranges  cost  as  much  by  the 
dozen  in  San  Francisco  as  in  New 
York,  and  that  they  were  no 
better. 

Lemons,  Olives,  Grapes.  —  "  All 
through  this  region  orange  and  lemon  orchards  abound. 
There  are  also  many  olive  orchards.  Olives  grow  on 
very  knotty  and  gnarled  trees,  not  handsome  to  look 
at.  The  fruit  is  picked  when  it  is  green  by  boys  and 
girls,  helped  by  men  and  women.  The  sound  olives  are 
picked  and  bottled;   the  bruised  ones  are  crushed  and 


In  an  Orange  Grove 


Climbing  Rose  Bushes,  Pasadena 


pressed  to  squeeze  out  the  juice,  which  makes  olive-oil 
for  salads. 

"  Vineyards  stretch  away  over  many  acres  of  ground. 
A  part  of  the  grapes  are  made  into  raisins  or  sent  East 
in  boxes ;  a  larger  part  are  pressed  and  the  red  juice  made 
into  wine.  I  tasted  here  for  the  first  time  fresh  figs,  and 
I  am  sure  that  no  fruit  growing  on  trees  is  more 
delicious.  Prunes  grow  here  and 
are  much  better  before  they  are 
dried  than  afterward. 

"All  the  cities  east  of 
Denver  have  cold  stor- 
age warehouses  where 
fruit    is    kept    for 
months.     Apples  will 
keep  well    for    eight 
months   in   a  temper- 
ature of  32°.      Certain 
kinds  of  fruit  are  sent  to 
market  in  refrigerator  cars. 
It  costs  $120  to  run  such  a  car 
from  California   to  New  York,  and  it 
takes  five  days.     The  growing  of  all  kinds  of 
fruits  and  nuts  on  this  coast  has 
greatly  decreased  the  importation 
of  these  fruits  from  other  countries. 
Cities.  —  "  The  climate  and  the 
success    of    fruit    farming    have 
caused   this   land   to   increase   in 
population.      Cities   have   sprung 
up  and  happy  homes  have  been 
formed.      Los  Angeles  is  a  large 
business  city,  and   not   far  away 
are  Pasadena  and  Riverside,  both 
delightful  home  cities. 

"About  the  houses  you  see 
flowers  instead  of  snowbanks  in 
our  winter  months.  Such  flowers 
as  roses,  violets,  geraniums,  and 
nasturtiums  bloom  out  of  doors 
in  January.  Houses  are  really 
embowered  in  roses,  surrounded 
by  orange  trees,  and  the  sidewalk  is 
lined  with  fan  and  date  palms.  No  wonder  the  people 
are  contented  and  happy  and  willing  to  remain  in  such  a 
land." 

LANGUAGE    LESSON 

Tell  how  people  live  in  California  and  compare  their  ways 
with  those  of  your  state. 


150 


JOURNEY    GEOGEAPHY 


44.    A   TRIP   ACROSS   CANADA 

The  map  of  North  America  (facing  page  88)  shows  a 
large  country  just  north  of  the  United  States  which  we 
should  visit  before  going  to  distant  lands.  This  country 
is  called  the  "  Dominion  of  Canada."  In  the  eastern 
part  of  this  country  is  the  city  of  Halifax.  It  is  noted 
for  its  large,  safe  harbor,  one  of  the  best  on  the  Atlantic 
seaboard.  To  see  it  and  the  city  to  the  best  advantage, 
we  must  climb  the  hill  behind  the  town. 

We  notice  also  how  thoroughly  fortified  the  town  is 
and  that  there  is  a  large  dockyard  covering  many  acres  — 
a  fact  which  indicates  that  the  city  is  an  important  naval 
station.  From  this  city  we  begin  our  long  trip  across 
the  picturesque  and  prosperous  Dominion  of  Canada. 

A     fast     express 


carries  us  northward 
from  Halifax 
through  the  forests 
of  New  Brunswick, 
beside  lakes  and 
bays  and  over  rivers 
where  there  is  ex- 
cellent fishing.  The 
train  goes  on  till  we 
reach  the  banks  of 
a  broad  river  which 
flows  through  the 
southern  part  of 
Canada.  This  river 
is  a  blessing  to  the 
country,  and  it  has  a  noble  name — the  St.  Lawrence.  It 
is  one  of  the  largest  rivers  in  the  world,  and  for  a  long 
distance  it  is  over  thirty  miles  wide.  The  size  is  due 
to  its  being  the  outlet  of  the  five  great  lakes  between 
Canada  and  the  United  States.  Most  of  the  water  in  this 
river  has  passed  over  Niagara  Falls.     (See  Lesson  38.) 

A  short  sail  of  "six  miles  brings  us  to  Quebec,  a  place 
most  unlike  American  cities,  reminding  us  of  some  old 
French  town.  It  was  settled  by  the  French.  It  is  in 
one  of  the  old  French  provinces,  and  Canadian  French 
is  the  language  which  most  of  the  people  there  speak. 

As  we  go  about  the  city  we  see  much  to  interest  us. 
Here  a  small  stream  enters  the  St.  Lawrence  River  from 
the  north,  and  in  the  angle  thus  formed,  a  lofty  promon- 
tory rises  far  above  the  river.  This  elevation  at  once 
suggested  to  the  early  settlers  an  excellent  place  for  a 
fort.  We  will  go  first  to  this  high  point,  and  visit  the 
Citadel.     It  forms  so  strong  a  fort  that  Quebec  is  called 


Approaching  the  Citadel,  Quebec 


the  "  Gibraltar  of  America,"  after  the  strong  fortification 
in  southern  Europe.  The  view  from  this  overhanging 
rock  is  one  never  to  be  forgotten.  Under  our  feet  flows  the 
great  river,  with  mountains  in  the  background,  while  the 
city  nestles  under  the  guns  of  the  Citadel  as  if  for  pro- 
tection. So  steep  is  the  side  of  the  cliff  next  to  the  river 
that  we  look  down  upon  the  decks  of  our  steamer  and 
hundreds  of  ships  in  the  harbor.  Many  of  the  streets 
are  very  quaint  and  picturesque. 

After  a  two  days'  trip  up  the  St.  Lawrence  from  Que- 
bec, we  come  to  a  very  large  island  in  the  river,  and  on 
the  island  is  so  extensive  and  busy  a  city  that  we  stop 
for  a  visit.  This  place  is  Montreal.  Owing  to  its  position, 
it  is  the  largest  city  in  Canada.  It  stands  at  the  head  of 
ocean  navigation,  and  at  the  beginning  of  lake  and  river 

navigation,  and  it 
has  railroad  connec- 
tion with  all  the 
great  cities  of  North 
America. 

Montreal  is  a 
much  more  modern 
city  than  Quebec, 
and  has  many  fine 
streets  and  some  ex- 
cellent public  build- 
ings. Its  cathedral 
is  very  large  and 
can  hold  ten  thou- 
sand people.  We 
visit     the     wharves 


and  find  them  busy  places,  crowded  with  ships  from  many 
distant  ports.  Several  of  the  vessels  are  loading  with 
grain  and  lumber  for  England. 

Behind  the  city  of  Montreal  rises  an  elevation  called 
Mount  Royal.  If  we  are  good  walkers,  we  can  climb  to 
the  top  of  it.  The  view  will  well  repay  the  effort.  The 
country  below  us  stretches  out  like  a  map.  The  city  is 
directly  beneath  our  feet ;  many  churches  and  other 
public  buildings  are  seen  above  the  trees.  The  broad  St. 
Lawrence,  like  a  ribbon,  winds  through  a  wide  plain  as 
level  as  a  prairie.  It  is  crossed  by  a  railroad  bridge 
nearly  two  miles  long.  There  is  no  bridge  over  the  river 
below  this  one. 

One  of  the  largest  tributaries  of  the  St.  Lawrence 
enters  the  river  at  Montreal.  This  is  the  Ottawa  River, 
and  some  distance  up  this  stream  we  come  to  the  head 
of  river  navigation  and  to  falls  which  furnish  plenty  of 
water-power  for  manufacturing  purposes.     As  forests  are 


A    TEIP    ACROSS    CANADA 


151 


great  mountain 
region  known 
as  the  "  Cana- 
dian Rockies." 
The  little  town 
of  Banff  is  here, 
in  the  centre  of 
grand  moun- 
tain scenery, 
and  we  stop 
over  at  this 
place  for  a  few 
days. 
At    last    we 


Panorama  of  Montreal  from  Mount  Royal,  showing 
Railroad  Bridge  across  the  St.  Lawrence 

extensive  hereabouts,  it  was  natural  for 
people  to  build  sawmills  below  the  falls 
and  also  natural  for  a  city  to  grow  up 
here.  This  city,  Ottawa,  is  now  the 
capital  or  the  seat  of  government  of  the 
Dominion  of  Canada.  On  the  high  banks 
of  the  river  are  the  beautiful  Parliament 
Houses,  in  which  the  laws  of  Canada  are 
made. 

We  return  to  Ottawa  and  step  on  board 
the  Pacific  express  for  a  long  journey 
westward.  We  stop  a  day  at  Winni- 
peg in  the  grain  lands,  the  present  head- 
quarters of  the 
fur  trade,  which 
flourishes  in 
Canada.  Our 
route  takes  us 
across  miles 
and  miles  of 
prairie  land, 
where  we  see 
many  grain  ele- 
vators, up  the 
gradual  slope 
on  the  western 
side  of  the 
great  interior 
basin,  through 
the  foot-hills, 
and      into      the 


The  Canadian  Rockies:  Banff 


The  Parliament  Build- 
ings, Ottawa 

come  to  Van- 
couver, in  British 
Columbia.  This 
city  is  on  a  mag- 
nificent harbor, 
and  we  see 
steamers  from 
San  Francisco, 
China,  Japan, 
and  Australia, 
and  realize  the 
growth  and  ex- 
tent of  Pacific 
Ocean  commerce. 


152 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


IN   SOUTH   AMERICA 


The  Harbor 


45.    BRAZIL   AND   THE   AMAZON  RIVER 

My  little  friend  Pedro,  who  lives  in  Portugal,  took  a 
long  journey  by  ship  to  visit  his  aunts  in  Rio  de  Janeiro. 
That  is  the  capital 
city  of  Brazil,  the 
largest  country  of 
South  America.  It 
is  very  nearly  as 
large  as  the  United 
States  with  Alaska. 
The  rivers  are  so 
big  that  good-sized 
ships  can  sail  into 
the  interior  of  the 
country.  Most  of 
the  people  of  Brazil 
are  descendants  of 
the  Portuguese. 

Pedro  and  his  father  started  from  Lisbon  in  the 
Don,  an  excellent  boat,  though  not  so  large  as  those 
sailing  to  New  York  or  Boston.  After  two  weeks  at  sea 
the  water  of  the  ocean  began  to  look  yel- 
low, and  they  knew  that  they  were  at 
last  near  the  mouth  of  the  Amazon 
River.  This  is  not  only  the  largest 
river  of  Brazil,  but  the  largest 
river  of  the  whole  world,  and 
in  many  ways  the  most  inter- 
esting. The  color  of  the 
water  is  yellow  from  the  clay 
that  it  brings  down  to  the 
sea.  It  carries  so  much  water 
that  it  colors  the  ocean  for 
miles  out  from  the  shore. 

Para.  —  Pedro's  first  stop  in 
the  new  country  was  at  Para,  at 
the  mouth  of  the  Amazon.  (See 
map  of  South  America,  page  157.)  As 
the  ship  was  to  be  some  hours  in  port,  he 
went  ashore  with  his  father  to  visit  friends 
and  see  the  city.  It  was  a  charming  home  to 
which  they  went,  with  large,  beautiful  rooms,  cool  and 
pleasant  in  spite  of  hot  January  weather.  Para  is  in 
the  hot  belt,  you  must  remember,  and  the  weather  is 
always  very   warm  and  sometimes  rainy. 

On  their  way  back  to  the  ship  they  saw  many  strange 


iahia,  Brazil 


sights  in  Para.  Not  a  breath  of  air  stirred,  and  the 
town  seemed  almost  asleep.  Grass  grew  in  the  streets. 
The  gardens  were, full  of  lovely  flowers.  The  street-cars 
were  drawn  by  mules.  Only  in  the  earlier,  cooler  por- 
tions of  the  day  is 
anything  going  on 
in  the  town.  Then 
the  low,  white- 
w ashed  market- 
houses  are  interest- 
ing, and  one  sees 
canoes  coming  laden 
with  provisions,  some 
carrying  monkeys 
and  parrots. 

Pernambuco. — 
Pernambuco  was  the 
next  port.  It  looks 
at  a  distance,  with 
its  buildings  of  white  stucco,  like  a  marble  city  rising 
out  of  the  blue  sea.  It  lies  very  low,  and  its  walls,  domes, 
and  spires  are  seen  some  time  before  the  trees  and  grass. 
A  river  runs  in  and  out  through  the  town, 
and  many  bridges  span  its  waters.  This 
makes  it  look  like  Venice.  It  has 
no  ugly  docks  and  warehouses  on 
the  water's  edge,  as  have  so 
many  cities.  Instead,  there 
are  large,  green,  waving  trees, 
which,  with  the  blue  water, 
bluer  sky,  and  the  white 
walls  and  towers  beyond 
tEem,  form  a  most  pleasing 
picture. 

Bahia.  —  Once  more  they  were 
on  the  way  along  the  coast. 
Only  one  more  port  before  Rio,  and 
that  was  Bahia.  Here  they  arrived 
at  night,  and  found  themselves  in  a 
large  circular  bay,  which  was  surrounded 
by  a  row  of  brilliant  lights.  Bahia  has 
one  of  the  best  harbors  in  America,  and 
the  largest  ships  can  easily  enter.  The  captain  pointed 
out  the  two  parts  of  the  town  —  the  newer,  finer  part, 
high  up  on  a  bluff,  and  the  older,  low  down  on  the  shore. 
There  is  a  steam  elevator,  which  carries  passengers  from 
one  part  to  the  other. 


Rio  de  Janeiro,  Brazil 


BRAZIL    AND    THE    AMAZON    RIVER 


153 


They  went  through  the  town  while  the  ship  waited, 
passing  fruit  women,  who  wore  gay  shawls  over  their 
heads  and  carried  trays  upon  them  full  of  good  things 
to  eat.  Negroes  drove  queer  little  horses  and  donkeys 
in  the  streets.  Then  Pedro  sailed  directly  from  Bahia 
for  Rio  de  Janeiro. 

Rio  de  Janeiro.  —  The  harbor  of  Rio  de  Janeiro  is  a 
magnificent  one.  The  opening  to  the  bay  which  forms 
it  is  so  narrow  that  its  discoverer  called  it  "  Rio,"  mean- 
ing river;  as  he  made  the  discovery  on  January  1,  he 
added  "de  Janeiro,"  which  means  "of  January."  How 
surprised  he  must  have  been,  on  passing  between  the  two 
islands  which  form  a  gateway,  to  find  a  great  bay,  and 
not  a  river.  The  bay  extends  in  behind  steep  mountains 
rising  out  of  the  sea,  giving  vessels  fifty  square  miles  in 
which  to  anchor. 

It  was  very  warm 
when  they  reached 
land,  and  Fedro  and 
his  father  were  glad 
they  were  going  to 
stay  outside  the 
town.  All  who  pos- 
sibly can,  leave  the 
city  during  the  hot 
months.  Pedro's 
aunts  lived  about  five 
miles  out  on  a  beau- 
tiful mountain  road. 
The  travellers  drove 
along  on  the  moun- 
tain, looking  down 
on  a  scene  that 
reminded  them,  in  its  delicacy,  of  a  water-color  painting. 
In  it  were  both  the  mountains  and  the  sea.  Hills  covered 
with  woods  are  all  about  Rio,  and  a  cluster  of  mountains 
with  steep  sides  and  queer  shapes  seems  to  rise  directly 
out  of  the  ocean. 

The  road  Pedro  travelled  was  a  good  one,  winding 
up  among  the  trees,  many  of  which  were  covered  with 
flowers  —  white,  yellow,  purple.  Everywhere  they  saw 
the  large  two-story  houses  common  in  Brazil.  In  one  of 
them  lived  Pedro's  aunts.  It  was  very  plain,  having  not 
even  a  bay-window  or  a  piazza.  The  garden  was  full  of 
brilliant  butterflies  and  humming-birds,  darting  about 
among  the  leaves  and  flowers.  There  was  a  bath  here, 
as  is  customary  in  this  warm  country.  Bathing  two  or 
three  times  a  day  seems  the  only  way  to  be  comfortable. 
Sometimes  the  basin  is  in  a  small  house.     It  is  often 


Drying  Coffee 


tiled  and  four  or  five  feet  deep.  This  one,  in  which 
Pedro  learned  to  swim,  was  enclosed  by  a  bamboo  hedge, 
and  stood  in  a  grove  of  trees.  A  rollicking  mountain 
brook  supplied  the  water,  entering  at  one  end  and  filling 
the  stone  basin.  Overflowing  at  the  other,  it  made  a 
shower  bath.  Near  by,  in  the  brook,  the  clothes  were 
washed.  They  were  beaten  on  the  rocks,  instead  of  being 
rubbed  on  a  wash-board,  and  then  were  spread  in  the  sun 
to  dry. 

Pedro  had  much  to  see  in  Rio.  It  was  dry  and  hot 
when  he  arrived,  and  he  could  not  go  to  see  the  city  on 
account  of  the  yellow  fever.  This  rages  during  March 
and  April,  and  May-day  is  welcomed  as  the  end  of  sum- 
mer, and  also  of  this  dread  disease. 

Pedro  went  to  the  city  with  his  aunts  when  the  danger 
from  fever  was  over.     The  streets  seemed  narrow  and 

dirty  after  his  cool, 
clean  mountain  home 
with  its  wide  views. 
They  drove  through 
streets  full  of  yellow 
stuccoed  buildings, 
and  houses  painted 
a  deep  red.  They 
passed  large  hos- 
pitals and  asylums, 
the  national  library, 
several  academies, 
and  a  college,  and 
enjoyed  the  hand- 
some parks  and 
public  gardens.  In 
one  of  the  gardens 
they  saw  a  magnificent  avenue  of  royal  palms  one  hun- 
dred feet  high.  There  are  eight  hundred  kinds  of  palms 
in  the  world,  and  Pedro  saw  many  of  them  in  Brazil. 

The  evening  is  the  gay  time  in  Rio.  Then  the  better 
class  of  people  come  out  in  their  fine  clothes  to  prome- 
nade. During  festivals  the  streets  are  brightly  lighted, 
and  are  crowded  with  people  till  daylight.  Pedro  noticed 
that  the  gentlemen  wear  high  hats  and  dark  heavy 
clothes  in  spite  of  the  warm  weather.  Ladies  wear  silks 
and  velvets.  This  is  to  distinguish  them  from  the  workers, 
who  dress  in  thin,  white  material. 

Coffee.  —  Pedro's  uncle  owned  a  coffee  plantation,  and 
the  boy  went  to  visit  him.  More  than  two-thirds  of  the 
coffee  of  the  world  is  grown  in  Brazil.  Rio,  and  Santos 
which  lies  a  little  farther  south  than  Rio,  are  the  great 
coffee  ports.     Inside  a  walled  enclosure  stood  his  uncle's 


154 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


house,  the  machine  shops,  and  the  quarters  of  the  negroes 
employed  on  the  plantation.  A  row  of  palms  led  up  to 
the  door  of  the  large,  low,  light-colored  house.  'With 
its  roomy  piazzas  and  growing  plants,  it  looked  very 
homelike.  In  front  of  it  was  an  immense  space,  paved 
with  cement  and  surrounded  by  a  low  wall,  in  which 
coffee  seeds  were  spread  to  dry,  and  then  cleaned. 

The  coffee  fields  were  on  the  hillsides.  Some  were 
worn  out  and  past  bearing,  others  were  full  of  shrubs 
with  dark  green  leaves  and  sweet  flowers,  and  still  others 
were  full  of  young  plants  just  set  out.  In  November  the 
whole  force  on  the  plantation  is  busy  gathering  the  ber- 
ries,—  men,  women,  and  children  being  at  work  from 
sunrise  until  sunset.  They  work  under  an  overseer,  and 
each  worker  gathers  in  a  day  what  will  make  fifty  pounds 
of  dried  seeds.  The 
fruit,  when  gathered, 
is  about  the  size  of  a 
cranberry  and  dark 
red  in  color. 

After  a  week 
passed,  Pedro's  fa- 
ther returned  to 
Para,  from  which 
place  he  took  a  jour- 
ney in  a  private  boat 
up  the  Amazon. 

The  Amazon. — The 
great  basin  through 
which  the  river  flows 
receives  more  rain 
than  any  other  tract  of  land  of  its  size  in  the  world;  so 
the  Amazon,  though  it  is  not  so  long  as  either  the  Mis- 
sissippi or  the  Nile,  carries  down  more  water  than  both 
of  them  put  together,  and  is  considered  the  largest  river 
in  the  world.  Nearly  all  rivers  have  flood  lands  near 
the  mouth ;  but  those  of  the  Amazon  are  found  far  up 
toward  the  headwaters  of  the  river.  The  land  which  is 
under  water  during  the  rainy  season  is  called  the  flood 
plain  of  the  river.     The  mainland  is  beyond  it. 

More  kinds  of  fish  are  found  in  the  Amazon  than  in 
any  other  river.  Some  of  them  are  unknown  elsewhere. 
One  of  the  sailors  in  the  boat  caught,  one  day,  a  huge  red 
fish,  which  is  as  useful  to  the  natives  as  beef  is  to  us. 
They  salt  and  dry  it  as  we  do  cod. 

Great  fresh-water  turtles  were  often  seen  on  the  jour- 
ney. The  Indians  like  to  eat  the  turtles,  and  capture 
them  when  they  go  to  bury  their  eggs  in  the  sand. 
The  Indians  surprise  them  and  turn  them  over  on  their 


The  Jaguar 


backs,  and  then  they  are  entirely  helpless.  Sometimes 
the  Indians  fish  for  them  from  boats.  They  wind  a  long 
line  around  an  arrow,  and  near  the  point  fasten  the  stone 
of  a  certain  fruit  through  which  a  hole  has  been  bored. 
They  then  shoot  the  arrow  with  great  force  into  the 
turtle's  shell. 

In  the  Forest.  —  Our  explorers  left  the  canoes  one  day 
and  went  into  the  dense,  tropical  forest  with  Indians  for 
guides.  That  part  of  the  country  between  ten  degrees 
north  and  ten  degrees  south  of  the  equator  is  covered 
with  thick  forests.  Rain  is  very  abundant  here  nearly 
all  the  year,  and  the  greater  the  rainfall  the  denser  the 
forest.  As  one  approaches  a  tropical  forest  it  looks  very 
brilliant  and  full  of  bright-colored  birds  and  blossoms 
and  masses  of  foliage.  Once  in  the  thick  woods,  how- 
ever, all  these  disap- 
pear, and  one  rarely 
sees  anything  but 
tree  trunks,  stems, 
and  branches.  Even 
palm  foliage  disap- 
pears. This  is  be- 
cause the  leaves  and 
flowers  and  birds 
seek  the  sun.  They 
are  all  in  the  forest 
roof  in  the  light  and 
air.  A  tropical  for- 
est is  different  from 
a  northern  forest  in 
several  ways.  It  is 
far  denser,  darker,  and  damper,  and  the  trees  are  taller, 
being  two  hundred  or  more  feet  high.  Huge  vine  stems 
clamber  up  the  trees  and  loop  themselves  in  great  fes- 
toons from  bough  to  bough.  Air  roots  fifty  or  sixty  feet 
long  hang  from  the  branches.  These  air  roots  grow  from 
the  branches  without  touching  the  ground.  This  abun- 
dant vegetation  makes  it  almost  impossible  to  pass 
through  such  a  forest. 

Wild  Animals. — The  jaguar  is  as  ferocious  as  the 
Bengal  tiger  of  India ;  but  most  of  the  animals  of  South 
America  are  not  so  fierce  and  large  as  those  of  Asia  and 
Africa.  The  jaguar's  coat  is  tan-colored  on  the  back, 
with  rows  of  black  rings  along  the  sides.  The  jag- 
uar is  sometimes  six  feet  long.  The  puma  is  another 
fierce,  cat-like  animal,  tawny  in  color.  It  is  not  so  strong 
and  ferocious  as  the  jaguar  and  does  not  often  attack 
large  beasts  or  man.  The  dense  forests  of  the  Amazon 
make  a  perfect  home  for  these  wild  animals. 


BRAZIL    AND    THE    AMAZON    RIVER 


155 


Several  animals  of  the  forest  look  like  the  pig  and  live 
on  fruits  and  roots.  The  tapir  is  the  largest  of  these. 
It  is  larger  than  a  boar.  It  hides  in  the  woods  during 
the  day,  coming  out  at  night  after  food.  It  is  a  good 
swimmer,  and  when  it  is  hot  goes  into  the  marshes  to 
keep  cool.  When  young,  its  skin  is  covered  with  white 
spots.  Fuller  grown,  it  has  a  thick  brown  skin  with  a 
few  silky  hairs  on  it.  One  night  Pedro's  father  saw 
one  running  swiftly,  head  downward,  through  the  deep 
forest,  his  trunk  pointed  straight  before  him.  In  this 
way  he  makes  great  speed  among  the  trees. 

Once  the  voice  of  a  howling  monkey  was  heard  some 
miles  away.  In  the  rainy  season  the  monkeys  fill  the 
woods  with  their  cries.  One  guide  found  an  armadillo 
on  its  back.  When  it  tumbles  over  it  cannot  easily  get 
up,  so  the  men  had  a  good  chance  to  look  at  it.  The  little 
fellow  is  about  as  large  as  a  baby 
pig.  His  short  legs  and  body  are 
covered  with  scales,  making  a 
suit  of  armor  of  three  parts,  so 
arranged  that  the  body  can  move 
easily.  The  armadillo  hides 
himself  in  the  ground  when  at- 
tacked, burrowing  a  hole  so  fast 
that  it  is  almost  impossible  to 
get  him  out.  He  eats  fruit, 
worms,  ants,  and  carrion.  He 
does  not  go  out  by  day  and  is 
very  timid. 

Snakes  and  Insects.  —  In  the  shade  of  the  trees  it  is 
difficult  to  see  the  insects  and  snakes.  Their  color 
and  shape  deceive  one.  Snakes  wind  themselves 
around  the  branches  like  vine  stems.  Some  spiders 
sit  folded  up  on  the  leaves  or  drop  down  like 
withered  flowers,  ready  to  catch  the  first  insect  that 
comes  along.  One  of  them  even  has  the  scent  of  a 
jasmine  flower.  The  butterflies  show  bright  colors 
when  they  fly,  but  resting  they  look  like  the  twig 
or  leaf  on  which  they  sit.  Ants  are  everywhere  — 
red  and  white  —  digging  tunnels  in  the  ground  and 
making  tube-like  passages  on  tree  trunk  and  branch, 
at  the  end  of  which  they  make  a  big  ball-shaped 
house  out  of  vegetable  matter  they  have  swallowed. 
There  is  a  big  black  ant  that  buzzes  like  a  bee  and 
has  a  dangerous  sting,  and  a  leaf-carrying  ant  that 
the  farmer  dreads. 

Birds.  —  Among  birds  the  toucan,  with  its  enor- 
mous bill,  is  the  oddest.  It  is  so  called  from  its  cry. 
The  bill  is  white  and  yellow  and  often  larger  than 


An  Armadillo 


the  body,  which  is  covered  witn  brilliant  feathers.  It 
throws  its  food  in  the  air  and  catches  it  again  in  its  beak. 
Another  bird  is  like  a  clock  for  the  Indians.  Its  cry,  a 
piercing  note,  is  heard  very  regularly  every  hour.  Par- 
rots, paroquets,  and  macaws  scream  in  the  trees.  There 
are  also  pigeons  and  turtle-doves. 

The  heat  of  the  tropics  is  intense  in  South  America, 
but  not  so  unbearable  as  that  of  desert  lands.  The 
masses  of  trees  and  plants  keep  it  cooler.  Vegetation 
is  very  rich,  and  there  are  many  useful  and  valuable 
products.  The  rubber  tree,  next  to  coffee,  is  the  most 
important. 

Rubber.  —  Our  party  found  the  true  rubber  tree,  with 
its  white  trunk  and  glossy  green  leaves,  growing  in  the 
forest.  As  the  men  returned  to  the  Amazon  they 
came  to  a  little  rubber  town  built  up  along  the  shore  on 
piles.  Part  of  it  stood  back  on 
a  low  bit  of  sandy  country,  with 
swamps  all  around,  and  the  main 
street  was  made  up  of  one  bridge 
after  another.  There  were  no 
hotels,  but  the  people  at  once 
gave  the  strangers  food  and 
shelter  and  they  decided  to  stay 
a  few  days.  Here  the  people 
travelled  in  canoes. 

In    the    morning    the   rubber 

gatherer  goes  into  the  forest  to 

tap  trees.     He  carries  a  basket 

holding  little  tin  cups  and  some  clay,  a  hatchet,  and  a 

pail.     Having  selected  his  tree,  he  makes  gashes  an  inch 


Rubber  Tree 


156 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


long  in  a  circle  around  fhe  trunk  and  fastens  a  cup  below 
every  gash  by  means  of  the  clay.  The  milky  sap  flows 
into  the  cups,  and  by  noon  they  are  all  full.  He  then 
empties  the  cups  into  the  pail  and  carries  the  sap  to  the 
hut.  Each  tree  yields  perhaps  a  gill  of  sap,  and  it  looks 
like  thick  cream.  The  next  day  he  goes  again  and  makes 
another  circle  of  gashes  below  the  first,  and  so  on  till 
the  roots  of  the  trees  are  reached. 

It  is  easier  to  make  pure  rubber  than  butter  and  cheese. 
The  gatherer  makes  a  fire  of  fuel  that  will  give  a  thick 
smoke.  He  then  dips  a  large  flat  slab  several  times  into 
the  pail  of  sap  and  holds  it  for  a  few  seconds  in  the 
smoke.  A  layer  of  elastic  gum  is  thus  formed  on  the 
slab.  He  dips  and  smokes  it  again,  and  so 
on  till  he  has  the  proper  amount,  when  he 
cuts  the  ball  at  the  top  with  a  moistened 
knife  and  removes  it.  Then  he  puts  it  in 
the  sun,  which  gives  it  its  dark  color. 

Cacao.  —  Another  lowland  product  is  cacao. 
The  tree  is  about  the  size  of  a  cherry  tree. 
The  foliage  is  dense,  making  a  thick  roof 
through  which  the  sun  cannot  pierce.  The 
fruit  is  oval,  with  a  ribbed  outer  shell,  and 
grows,  not  among  the  leaves,  but  immediately 
from  the  tree  trunk  and  main  branches. 
The  gatherers  take  out  the  seeds  and  sell 
them  for  the  manufacture  of  chocolate. 

Brazil  Nuts.  — The  Brazil-nut  tree  attracted 
the  notice  of  all  the  party  by  its  superb 
height  and  beauty.     It   is  sometimes  fifty 
feet  or  more  above  the   rest  of   the  forest 
and  rises  by  a  smooth,  straight  trunk  fifteen 
feet  in  diameter.    For  one  hundred  feet  from 
the  ground   there   are  often   no  branches. 
Sixteen  or  eighteen  nuts  grow  together  in  round,  hard, 
black  cases,  which  fall  when  ripe.     The  gatherers  run 
great  risk  from  failing  nuts,  which  sometimes  come  down 
with  force  sufficient  to  bury  them  six  inches  in  the  ground. 

MAP  QUESTIONS   ON   SOUTH  AMERICA 

1.  In  what  direction  from  New  York  is  South  America  ? 

2.  Through  what  part  of  South  America  does  the  meridian 
of  80°  pass  ?    Through  what  part  of  the  United  States  ? 

3.  Which    is  the    largest  country  in    South  America  ?    The 
longest  ? 

4.  When  it  is  night  in  Washington,  D.C.,  what  time  of  day  is 
it  in  Valparaiso,  Chile  ? 

6.  When  it  is  winter  in  Chicago,  what  season  Is  it  in  Rio  de 
Janeiro  ? 

6.   Where  are  the  high  mountains  in  South  America  ? 


7.  What  city  is  situated  on  the  equator  ?    What  two  causes 
affect  the  climate  there  ? 

8.  Why  is  the  Amazon  so  large  a  river  ? 

9.  In  what  country  is  the  Isthmus  of  Panama  ? 

10.  Locate  the  Llanos,  the  Silvas,  the  Pampas. 

11.  Name  all  the  countries  of  South  America. 

12.  Locate    Brazil,  Rio  de  Janeiro,  Para,  Argentina,  Buenos 
Aires,  Chile,  and  Santiago. 

46.  CHILE,  BETWEEN  THE  SEA  AND  THE 
MOUNTAINS 

In  the  southern  part  of  South  America,  lying  between 
the  Pacific   Ocean  and   the  snowy  range  of  the  Andes 


The  Harbor  of  Valparaiso,  Chile 

Mountains,  is  a  long  and  very  narrow  country  called 
Cliile.  It  is  a  republic,  and  one  of  the  most  important 
countries  of  South  America. 

If  we  were  going  to  Chile,  we  would  probably  take 
ship  for  Valparaiso,  its  chief  seaport,  and  the  chief 
Pacific  port  of  South  America.  It  is  halfway  along  the 
coast  of  Chile.  After  our  long  journey,  how  delightful 
it  would  be  to  sail  into  the  calm  harbor,  full  of  ships, 
and  see  before  us  the  houses  of  the  town,  rising  from  the 
many  hillsides  and  nestling  between  them.  A  mountain 
rises  behind  the  hills,  and  farther  away  the  snowy  line 
of  the  Andes  appears.  Above  them  all,  Mount  Aconcagua 
towers  so  high  that  it  seems  twice  the  height  of  the  other 
peaks.  Over  a  hundred  ships  can  find  moorings  here,  and 
that  is  a  large  number  for  a  harbor  to  hold  safely. 


SOUTH  AMERICA. 

Scale  of  Statute  Miles. 

0      100        500  1000 

840  MILES  TO  ONE   INCH. 

Cities  with  over  500,000 :  .  .  . .  BlieUOS  AiTOS  ' 

Cities  witii  100,000  to  5oo(ooo: Lima 

Other  Importaut  Cities  : Caracas 

Smaller  Places  : Conception         

alktand  islands  Capitals  thus  :  ®    Other  Cities  thus  :  • 

(To  Oreat  Britain) 

South  Georgia^ 

(To  QrcatBritain) 
j_ /  THE  M.-H.  WORKS,  9Uff»LQ,  «JY.   / 

50°  40°  30°  20°  10° 


158 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Valparaiso.  — Valparaiso  is  famous  for  this  first  view. 
It  looks  in  the  distance  like  a  city  of  marble  rising  out 
of  the  water,  so  closely  do  its  light-colored  buildings 
cluster  around  the  horseshoe-shaped  bay. 

Factories  and  quays  are  on  the  water's  edge,  and  the 
main  street  stretches  for  miles  along  the  sea.  The 
poorer  homes  are  on  the  lower  foot-hills  back  of  the  town. 
Sometimes  they  are  so  miserably  built  that  they  fall,  and 
slide  in  a  mass  of  ruin  to  the  streets  below.  On  the 
higher  hills,  reached  by  an  elevator,  are  the  homes  of 
the  wealthy,  where  nothing  is  wanting  to  make  life 
enjoyable. 


Chile  is  rich  in  mines,  especially  of  silver  and  copper, 
and  the  smelting  furnace  is  one  of  the  sights  of  the 
country.  Valparaiso  has  the  largest  one.  You  would  be 
much  interested  to  visit  it  and  see  how  the  minerals  are 
separated  from  the  ore,  which  is  brought  in  large  quan- 
tities from  the  Andes  Mountains. 

Perhaps  you  may  be  thinking  of  Valparaiso  as  a  hot 
place  in  summer;  but  it  has  a  good  friend  in  the  north- 
east wind,  which  blows  much  of  the  time  across  the 
snows  of  the  Andes,  and  makes  the  summer  scarcely 
warm.  In  winter  it  is  very  mild,  owing  to  the  nearness 
of  the  ocean.  There  are  six  squares  in  the  town,  with 
trees  and  flowers,  and  a  pavilion  for  musicians  in  the 
centre.     Every  city  of  Chile  has  a  band-stand. 

Santiago.  —  From  Valparaiso  we  go  by  rail  to  Santiago, 
the  capital  of  the  country.  We  shall  find  the  station  and 
the  trains  at  Valparaiso  much  like  those  of  our  own  coun- 
try. Some  of  them  have  the  big  engines  and  cars  of  the 
United  States,  and  others  the  small  engine  and  compart- 
ment cars  of  Europe.  We  seat  ourselves  comfortably 
and  have  a  delightful  ride  for  over  six  miles  along  the 
coast,  through  one  lovely  suburb  after  another.  The 
trees  are  beautiful,  and  the  flowers,  too.  These  places 
are  cool  in  summer  and  warm  in  winter.  For  four 
months  of  the  year  it  rains  a  little,  and  then  for  the 
next  eight  it  rains  not  at  all.  You  will  wish  that  you 
could  bathe  on  the  beaches  we  pass,  but  you  do  not 


A  Street  in  Valparaiso 

"  But,"  you  would  say,  "  I  do  not  feel  as 
if  I  could  be  in  South  America.  I  see  street 
cars,  telegraph  wires  and  poles,  electric 
lights,  telephones,  stone  pavements,  libra- 
ries, everything  to  make  the  city  a  con- 
venient place  to  live  in."  Yes,  and  that 
is  because  so  many  foreigners  from  the 
cities  of  Europe  and  America  live  here. 
There  are  many  English,  not  quite  so  many 
Germans,  and  some  French. 

In  taking  your  first  car  ride  around  the 
town  you  would  find  the  cars  different  from 
ours.  They  are  two  stories  high  and  their 
conductors  are  women.  This  is  true  in  all 
the  cities  of  Chile.  Once  when  Chile  was 
at  war  with  her  neighbors,  she  needed  all 
her  men  for  soldiers  and  then  women  became 
car  conductors.  They  have  remained  so  ever 
since. 


Santiago  from  the  Hill  of  Santa  Lucia 


CHILE,  BETWEEN  THE  SEA  AND  THE  MOUNTAINS 


159 


know  how  cold  the  water  is.  You  could  bear  it  but  a  few 
moments ;  but  the  Chileans  can  stay  in  it  for  an  hour  or 
two. 

Now  we  are  in  Central  Chile,  and  gardens  are  seen  all 
along  the  way,  full  of  green  trees,  flowers,  and  fruit. 
Such  beautiful  trees,  full  of  roses,  and  such  delicious 
peaches  in  the  orchards  we  pass !  This  is  the  central 
valley  of  the  country,  noted  for  its  vegetables,  grain,  and 
fruit.     Many  of  the  trees  are  those  of  the  tropics. 

Almost  before  we  know  it,  we  have  begun  the  hard 
climb  up  the  mountains.  We  are  among  the  mines,  and 
we  see  the  chimneys  of  copper  smelters.  The  way  is 
among  giant  rocks  and  towering  cliffs.  How  green  looks 
the  valley  we  have  left,  in  comparison !  Now  we  cross  an 
iron  bridge  spanning 
a  gorge,  and  up  and 
up  we  go  till  we  are 
in  full  view  of  San- 
tiago, which  stands 
on  a  plain  sur- 
rounded by  moun- 
tains, about  eighteen 
hundred  feet  above 
the  sea.  Then  we 
go  down  a  short 
distance  and  arrive 
at  the  railroad  sta- 
tion of  the  capital, 
five  hours  after  leav- 
ing Valparaiso.  It 
would  take  but  half 
an  hour  to  return, 
for  the  way  would  be  down  hill. 

You  learned  at  Valparaiso  to  expect  all  the 
conveniences  of  the  cities  of  the  United 
States,  so  you  will  not  be  surprised  to  find 
yourself  going  very  fast  indeed  in  an  auto- 
mobile from  the  station  of  Santiago  to  your 
hotel.  What  a  quiet  place,  you  think !  What 
has  happened  that  the  people  are  so  solemn  ? 
You  will  soon  learn  that  in  cities  of  Chile  men 
and  boys  do  not  whistle  or  sing  in  the  streets, 
and  they  are  never  boisterous. 

Buildings.  —  South  American  houses  are 
built  very  low  on  account  of  the  frequent 
earthquakes,  and  until  lately  those  of  Santiago 
usually  have  been  only  one  story  high.  Now 
many  of  these  have  been  torn  down  and 
houses  of  two  and  sometimes  of  three  stories 


A  Railroad  Bridge  on  the  Santiago  Railroad  in  the  Andes 


built  in  their  place.  Brick  and  adobe,  instead  of  stone, 
are  used  as  materials.  The  houses  are  built  around  a 
central  court,  which  is  open  to  the  sky  and  is  often 
planted  with  orange  trees.  These  make  a  handsome  gar- 
den. The  balconies  open  on  this  court.  The  walls  are 
often  painted  in  bright  colors,  blue  being  the  favorite. 
Sometimes  pictures  are  painted  on  the  walls.  If  you 
visit  one  of  these  houses  you  will  enter  through  this 
court.  You  will  find  the  owner  living  in  the  first  story 
and  letting  the  rest  of  the  house  to  others.  In  the  out- 
skirts of  the  city  you  will  still  find  the  old-fashioned, 
spacious,  one-story  house. 

The  finest  buildings  cluster  about  the  great  square, 
and  all  the  principal  streets  open  upon  it.     There  is  a 

garden  in  the  square 
and  several  beauti- 
ful sheets  of  water, 
a  great  ornament 
to  the  place.  Near 
this  square  is  the 
fashionable  prome- 
nade of  Santiago 
and  the  finest  shops 
of  the  city.  The 
street  is  about  a  mile 
long,  and  nowhere 
else  could  you  find 
such  a  magnificent 
view  of  mountains. 
The  snowy  Andes 
are  spread  out  in 
full  sight  of  the 
many  spectators. 

Between  four  and 
six  o'clock  every 
afternoon  the 
wealthiest  citizens 
and  the  most  beau- 
tiful women,  in  the 
finest  of  costumes 
and  hats,  go  in  and 
out  of  the  shops ;  but 
the  morning  hours 
find  the  women 
covered  by  a  large 
black  shawl,  two 
yards  on  a  side, 
called  here  a  manto, 
in    other    places    a 


The  Low,  One-storied  House 


160 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


mantilla.  This  is  the  head-dress  of  the  country.  The 
hat  will  soon  be  worn  very  generally,  however,  except  in 
church,  where  women  are  obliged  to  wear  the  mantilla. 
Even  strangers  dare  not  appear  in  hats,  as  they  are  not 
considered  dignified  enough  for  a  church.  On  Sunday 
you  can  see  poor  and  rich  women  on  their  way  to 
church,  in  these  mantos,  the  material  marking  the  only 
difference  in  wealth.  Each  one  carries  over  her  arm 
a  woollen  or  fur  rug,  which  she  will  spread  down  to  sit 
upon,  as  there  are  no  chairs  or  pews  in  the  churches. 

At  the  natural  history  museum  you  can  see  a  stuffed 
specimen  of  the  stag  of  Chile  and  the  great  bird  of  the 
Andes  —  the  condor.  The  condor  is  rarely  seen  alive 
except  in  the  Andes,  where  it  lives  in 
small  groups.  It  is  the  largest  of  all 
flying  birds.  Its  general  color  is 
black,  the  male  bird  having  a  great 
part  of  his  wings  white.  It  has  a 
white  ruff  of  feathers  around  its 
neck,  and  its  beak  is  very  strong. 
Condors  fly  higher  than  any  other 
bird  and  are  said  to  be  able  to  soar 
six  miles  up  in  a  straight  line.  Far 
up  on  the  highest  mountains  they  lay 
their  eggs  on  the  bare  rock,  for  they 
build  no  nest.    They  feed  on  carrion. 

The  stag  of  Chile  is  a  beautiful 
animal.  It  appears  with  the  condor 
on  the  national  shield. 

Santiago  is  a  very  warm  place  for 
four  months  of  the  year.  Wind  rarely 
blows  there,  as  the  city  is  shut  in  a 
valley.  Winter  nights  are  sometimes 
very  cold,  —  even  as  cold  as  five  degrees  below  zero. 

If  you  had  time  you  could  follow  the  railroad  to  the 
south  as  far  as  it  goes,  through  the  beautiful  central 
valley  of  Chile.  Every  year  the  government  builds  a 
new  section.  It  runs  through  a  fertile,  uncultivated 
land,  full  of  mines  which  have  never  been  worked  and 
streams  only  waiting  to  turn  many  mills.  Chile  would 
be  rich  if  she  used  all  her  gifts. 

Through  Santiago  runs  a  railroad  which  is  to  pass  over 
the  Andes  into  Argentina  and  on  to  the  wealthy  city  of 
Buenos  Aires.  You  look  at  the  great  wall  of  mountains 
and  wonder  where  it  can  be  crossed.  Between  Aconcagua 
and  a  neighboring  peak  is  the  best  known  of  the  six  passes 
over  the  Andes.  Through  this,  as  soon  as  there  is  money 
enough,  the  road  will  be  built.  All  the  rest  of  it  is 
finished.      In  the  summer-time  cattle  are  often  driven 


The  Condor 


over  this  pass  from  Argentina  to  find  pasture  in  the 
warm,  rich  valleys  of  Chile. 

Other  Parts.  —  In  southern  Chile  you  would  find  a 
strange  country,  filled  with  thick,  tangled,  evergreen 
forests.  If  you  tried  to  walk  through  them  in  the  rainy 
season,  which  begins  in  May,  you  would  find  it  more 
difficult  than  at  other  times,  as  the  vine  stems,  which  wind 
themselves  around  the  tree  trunks,  become  soaked  and 
fall  down,  blocking  the  way.  Sometimes  you  could  get 
along  only  by  following  the  bed  of  a  stream.  Travellers 
have  been  known  to  crawl  for  miles  in  a  half-bent  position, 
which  is  very  tiring.  At  this  season  you  would  see 
many  snakes  curled  up  to  keep  out  of  the  wet,  but  they 
are  mostly  harmless.  Bright-colored 
plants  and  tropical  birds  make  the 
woods  gay.  Giant  seaweeds  are 
found  along  the  coast. 

You  can  scarcely  think  of  anything 
more  different  than  southern  and 
northern  Chile.  Northern  Chile  is  a 
desert,  and  yet  Chile  has  spent  much 
money  and  lost  many  men  in  war  to 
keep  it  for  herself.  All  her  neigh- 
bors want  it,  too.  There  is  good 
reason  for  this:  there  are  in  this 
desert  vast  beds  of  nitrate  of  soda. 
It  is  valuable  as  a  fertilizer  and  for 
making  gunpowder,  soda,  and  iodine, 
and  Chile  makes  money  by  selling  it. 
To  see  the  nitrate  country  you 
must  start  at  Iquique  on  the  coast, 
and  a  very  queer  country  you  will 
find  it.  A  light  shower  of  rain  falls 
here  only  once  in  many  years.  The  mountain  sides  are 
hidden  for  one  thousand  feet  in  drifts  of  white  sand,  and 
the  gorges  are  full  of  it. 

You  cannot  see  the  nitrate  until  a  hard  crust  of  earth 
has  been  removed  from  it.  Then  it  is  seen  lying  in  beds 
ten  or  twelve  feet  thick  and  looking  like  marble  or  rock 
salt.  At  the  railroad  stations  it  is  broken  up  by  blasting 
and  carried  away  to  the  works,  where  the  soda  is  ex- 
tracted and  put  (in  small  lumps)  into  bags  for  export. 

Summary.  —  Chile  is  a  country  in  shape  very  long  and 
narrow.  Valparaiso  is  one  of  the  most  beautiful  cities  for 
situation  in  the  world.  Women  are  the  car  conductors. 
Santiago  is  in  a  valley  among  the  mountains.  The  houses 
are  built  low  on  account  of  the  frequent  earthquakes. 
The  women  wear  on  their  heads  a  large  black  shawl  called 
a  manto.     In  the  north  of  Chile  are  rich  nitrate  lands. 


IRELAND,    AND    CROSSING    THE    ATLANTIC 


161 


The  Steamship  Ivernia 


IN  EUROPE 


47.     IRELAND,  AND   CROSSING   THE   ATLANTIC 

The  Voyage.  —  Some  friends  and  I  once  sailed  from 
New  York  for  Liverpool  on  the  ocean  steamship  Ivernia. 
The  ship  was  a  large  iron  vessel  with  several  hundred 
people  on  board.  The  weather  was  fine  as  we  sailed 
down  the  harbor 
and  began  the  trip 
across  the  Atlantic 
Ocean.  In  a  few 
hours,  however,  all 
had  changed.  The 
ship  sailed  into  a 
storm.  The  wind 
blew,  the  waves 
rose,  the  steamer 
tossed  and  strained, 
and  almost  every- 
body was  seasick 
and  miserable.  The 
last  days  of  the 
voyage  were  calm 
and  enjoyable.  We 
became  acquainted 
with  many  pleasant 


people,  whom  we  met  upon  the  deck.  There  were  several 
children  on  board,  and  they  seemed  to  have  a  very  good 
time.  One  of  them  was  a  little  girl  named  Jessie,  who 
was  almost  blind,  and  whose  parents  were  taking  her  to 
Paris  to  have  her  eyes  treated. 
A  great  ocean   steamer   is  a  big 


The  Ivernia's  Saloon  Deck 


hotel  with  all  the 
comforts  of  modern 
life,  and  often  has 
on  board  over  a 
thousand  souls.  To 
carry  the  many  peo- 
ple who  visit  the 
old  world  each  sum- 
mer, for  business 
and  pleasure,  re- 
quires a  great  fleet 
of  steamers  sailing 
from  New  York, 
Boston,  Philadel- 
phia, Baltimore, 
New  Orleans,  and 
other  ports. 

Four  or  five  meals 
were  served  every 
day.        Music,  con- 


162 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


certs,  lectures,  and  religious  services  were  supplied ;  in 
the  library  there  was  a  good  collection  of  books ;  we 
had  the  use  of  drawing-rooms,  a   music  room,  a   dining 


This 


The  Landing,  Queens  town,  Ireland 

room,  a  coffee  room,  smoking  rooms, 
and  baths.  Every  part  of  the  ship 
was  brilliantly  lighted  with  elec- 
tricity. 

One  afternoon  after  we  had  been 
six  days  out,  the  captain  and  almost 
every  one  else  were  looking  toward 
the  horizon,  as  if  trying  to  see  a 
ship.  By  and  by  the  captain  said, 
"  Land ! "  but  only  he  and  the  sailors 
could  see  it._  Finally  a  black  speck 
was  observed  on  the  horizon,  which 
in  two  hours  proved  to  be  a  great 
rock  with  a  dark  shore  beyond  it. 
was  the  southern  coast  of  Ireland.  (See  map, 
page  175.) 

Queenstown.  —  We  left  the  steamer  at  her 
first  port  —  Queenstown  in  Ireland.  This 
country  is  a  great  island  on  the  other  side 
of  the  Atlantic  Ocean  from  America.  We 
were  glad  to  stand  once  again  on  solid 
ground,  to  see  the  green  fields,  hear  the  birds 
sing,  and  see  the  ways  of  other  people  in 
their  homes  and  shops. 

Queenstown  we  found  to  be  a  new  and 
modern  city,  built  on  an  island  facing  the 
coast.  Many  of  its  white  houses  are  erected 
in  terraces  upon  the  slope  of  a  hill.  From 
this  seaport  thousands  of  persons  have  sailed 
to  America  to  try  their  fortunes  in  the  new 
world.    We  stayed  here  only  one  night  and 


Blarney  Castle 


then  took  a  small  steamer  to  go  up  the  river  Lee  to  the 
larger  town  of  Cork. 

Cork.  —  The  first  thing  we  went  to  see  in  Cork  was  the 
church  and  steeple  of  Shandon,  the  subject 
of  the  well-remembered  poem.  Afterward 
we  climbed  a  hill  called  the  "Sunday's 
Well,"  from  which  we  saw  below  us  a  grand 
view  of  the  river,  a  large  part  of  the  city, 
and  the  landscape  for  miles  around. 

We  learned  that  Cork  is  the  largest  com- 
mercial city  in  Ireland  and  that  it  has  a 
fine  harbor.  It  exports  every  year  enormous 
quantities  of  butter  and  cheese,  great  num- 
bers of  cattle  and  pigs,  thousands  of  sides  of 
smoked  bacon,  and  huge  crates  of  eggs, 
nearly  all  of  which  go  to  feed  the  hungry 
mouths  in  London. 

In  the  afternoon  we  took  a  ride  in 
a  jaunting  car  to  the  groves  of 
Blarney.  The  jaunting  car  is  a  pe- 
culiar two-wheeled  Irish  carriage  in 
which  the  seats  face  the  outer  side 
of  the  vehicle,  so  that  the  people  sit 
back  to  back.  The  grounds  around 
Blarney  Castle  are  of  great  beauty. 
In  this  castle  is  the  famous  stone 
which,  if  kissed,  is  said  to  convey  all 
the  gifts  of  eloquence  and  persuasion. 
From  this  story  arises  the  use  of  the 
word  blaiiiey,  meaning  flattery  or 
smooth  talk. 


In  the  Wild  Gap  of  Dunloe 


IRELAND,    AND    CROSSING    THE    ATLANTIC 


163 


Lakes  of  Kil- 
larney.  —  From 
Cork  we  went  by- 
rail  to  the  south- 
western part  of 
Ireland  to  visit 
the  lake  region. 
Killarney  is  the 
name  of  the  lit- 
tle village  near 
one  of  the  lakes, 
and  so  the  three 
lakes  are  often 
called  the  Lakes 
of  Killarney. 

Our  guide 
drove  us  in  the 
morning  to  the 
upper  lake  in  a 

carriage  in  order  that  we  might  return  by  boat,  passing 
through  each  lake  in  turn.  We  passed  several  cottages 
beside  the  road.  We  first  rode  through  the  wild  Gap  of 
Dunloe,  a  narrow  passage  between  high  hills,  with  steep 
rocks  on  each  side  of  the  path,  looking  as  if  some  giant 
had  cleft  them  with  his  sword.  As  we  left  the  gap,  the 
picturesque  upper 
lake  burst  into  view. 
The  surface  is  dot- 
ted with  tree-clad 
islands,  looking  like 
so  many  emeralds 
set  in  silver. 

We  took  a  boat 
on  the  upper  lake 
and  slowly  passed 
among  the  islands, 
and  by  the  mouths 
of  creeks,  all  the 
time  shut  in  between 
lofty  mountains.  In 
one  place  we  heard 
a  wonderful  echo. 
The  guide  played 
first  a  single  note, 
which  was  caught 
up  and  repeated 
loudly,  softly,  again 
loudly,  again  softly, 
and  then  as  if  by  a 


General  View  of  Lakes  of  Killarney 


hundred  instru- 
ments. Then  he 
blew  a  few  notes, 
and  a  multitude 
of  hills  sent  forth 
replies.  This 
was  followed  by 
a  pause,  and  then 
a  marvellous 
chorus  mingled 
together  strains 
of  sublime  gran- 
deur and  sweet- 
ness. 

We  found  the 

middle  lake  less 

interesting   than 

the    upper    one. 

The     lower,     or 

third  lake,  contains  a  number  of  very  charming  islands  ; 

the  largest  is  Ross  Island,  on  which  are  the  ruins  of  an 

ancient  castle  covered  with  English  ivy. 

The  most  beautiful  part  of  the  three  lakes  is  in  and 
about  the  island  next  to  Ross,  called  "  Innisfallen."  The 
beauty  of  this  spot  is  owing  to  its  hills  and  dales,  the 

small,  pretty  rivers 
and  harbors,  the 
loveliness  of  the 
vegetation,  and  the 
grandeur. of  the  sur- 
roundingmountains. 
From  the  Killar- 
ney lakes  we  went 
by  train  to  Dublin, 
the  capital  and  larg- 
est city. 

Dublin.  —  In  Dub- 
lin are  many  fine 
streets,  some  fine- 
looking  buildings, 
and  plenty  of  poor 
people.  The  people 
do  not  get  up  very 
early  in  the  morning. 
We  went  out  at  eight 
o'clock  one  morning 
in  July  and  found 
the  shutters   closed 


Sackville  Street,  Dublin,  and  O'Connell  Monument 


and  streets  empty. 


164 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


The  principal  street  is  called  in  books  "  Sackville  Street," 
but  all  the  people  call  it  "O'Connell  Street,"  because  at 
the  head  of  the  bridge  across  the  river  is  an  imposing  monu- 
ment and  bronze  statue  of  O'Connell,  the  Irish  patriot. 

Making  Linen.  —  A  few  days  later  we  bade  Dublin  good- 
by  and  started  north.  The  first  place  of  importance  we 
came  to  was  Belfast.  In  this  city  and  the  villages  round 
about  much  excellent  linen  is  made,  because  this  part  of 
the  country  is  well  adapted  to  the  raising  of  flax,  a  little 
plant  from  the  fibres  of  which  linen  is  manufactured. 

By  and  by  we  came  to  Fan  Head,  a  promontory  near 
Scotland.  Here  the  views  were  fine,  salt  water  on  one 
side  and  fresh  water  in  lakes  on  the  other.  We  noticed 
that  all  the  cliffs  along  this  coast  were  composed  of 
enormous  stone  pil- 
lars, some  of  them 
black  and  some  a 
dazzling  white. 

Giant's  Causeway. 
— At  last  we  reached 
the  Giant's  Cause- 
way, where  the  pil- 
lars are  most  lmmer- 
ous.  There  are  here 
forty  thousand  col- 
umns standing  close 
together,  their  tops 
so  even  as  to  form 
a  pavement.  This 
slopes  down  to  the 
sea   and   under   the 


The  Giant's  Causeway 


among  them,  such  as  Moore  and  Goldsmith.  These  peo- 
ple are  especially  noted  for  their  wit.  Most  of  them  live 
in  the  country,  as  there  are  few  cities  in  Ireland  except 
on  the  coast. 

48.     ENGLAND   AND   HER   PEOPLE 

Central  England.  —  We  spent  several  weeks  in  a  carriage 
drive  through  the  central  part  of  England.  We  left 
London  about  the  first  of  July.  The  heat  then  was  not 
oppressive,  as  it  is  in  the  United  States ;  the  temperature 
was  moderate,  the  sky  was  a  soft  blue,  and  the  air  balmy 
and  just  right  for  outdoor  life.  As  we  passed  through 
town  after  town  it  seemed  more  and  more  as  if  we  were 

in  some  public  gar- 
den, for  on  every 
hand  we  saw  the 
beauty  and  fertility 
of  nature,  as  if  man 
and  nature  were 
working  together  in 
harmony. 

In  some  towns  we 
passed  through  lanes 
hidden  between 
green  banks,  past 
quiet  hamlets  with 
their  thatched  roofs 
and  windows  gay 
with  bright  flowers, 
under   arches    of 


water  toward  Scotland.  The  columns  vary  in  shape,  from 
three-sided  ones  to  nine-sided,  but  most  of  them  are  six- 
or  seven-sided.  One  section  is  called  the  "Giant's 
Organ,"  another  "  The  Stacks." 

You  will  wish  to  know  why  this  place  is  so  called. 
The  people  say  that  years  ago  it  was  built  by  Einn 
MacCoul,  an  Irish  giant.  He  built  it  out  of  politeness 
to  a  Scottish  giant,  whom  he  wished  to  come  over  and 
fight  him  "  without  wetting  the  soles  of  his  feet." 

This  story  well  illustrates  the  vivid  imagination  and 
extreme  politeness  of  the  Irish  people,  who  are  by  nature 
kind-hearted  and  impulsive.  The  love  of  the  members 
of  a  family  for  each  other  is  strong.  They  are  very 
sociable  and  neighborly.  They  are  fond  of  children  and 
pets.  They  have  also  a  very  strong  affection  for  their 
native  country. 

The  Irish  people  may  well  be  proud  of  their  statesmen 
and  generals.     There  have  been  some  delightful  poets 


elms  and  oaks.  We  saw  boys  playing  in  the  shadows 
of  these  trees,  and  we  frequently  came  upon  men  haying. 

Skylark.  —  One  day  we  heard  the  most  joyful  sound 
from  a  bird  warbler  that  had  ever  greeted  our  ears.  It 
seemed  to  drop  from  the  sky  over  our  heads.  After 
searching  we  discovered  a  tiny  point  of  black  in  the 
wide  expanse  of  heaven.  The  music  floated  out  from 
that  point  for  a  short  time,  then  suddenly  the  spot  be- 
gan to  fall  swiftly  through  the  air  as  if  it  would  fall 
into  the  carriage ;  but  just  before  it  reached  us,  wings 
were  outspread  and  the  bird  shot  ahead  a  little  distance 
over  the  ground  and  was  gone.  We  had  heard  and  seen 
the  celebrated  English  skylark.  Several  times  afterward 
we  saw  these  birds  suddenly  rise  from  the  hay-fields  and 
steadily  mount  till  they  seemed  to  vanish  in  the  upper 
air,  leaving  no  trace  except  their  happy  song. 

This  experience  helped  us  to  realize  how  faithfully  the 
poet  Shelley  described  this  bird  in  his  wonderful  poem. 


ENGLAND    AND    HER    PEOPLE 


165 


Stately  Homes.  —  As  we 
journeyed  northward,  we  saw 
constant  evidence  of  the  Eng- 
lishman's love  for  his  home. 
His  idea  of  a  home  is  first, 
privacy.  A  house  without  a 
good  strong  fence  around  it, 
so  common  in  America,  would 
not  be  a  home  to  him.  In  the 
next  place,  he  likes  plenty  of 
land  ;  the  more  the  better.  If 
he  is  rich,  he  demands  a  big 
house.  The  nobility  live  on 
great  estates,  which  have  been 
completed  by  many  genera- 
tions of  ancestors. 

Mrs.  Hemans  sings,  "The 
stately  homes  of  England, 
how  beautiful  they  stand."  In 
several  places  we  drove 
through  the  grounds  of  a 
nobleman's  estate.  After  leav- 
ing the  public  road,  we  usually 
drove  several  miles  through  a 
most  charming  landscape  and 

long  avenues  of  trees  before  reaching  the  mansion.  As 
we  passed,  we  saw  servants  in  livery  helping  guests  to 
depart. 

We  learned  that  most  of  these  mansions  have  several 
drawing-rooms,  a  complete  set  of  rooms  for  the  mistress, 
another  set  for  the  master,  besides  the  children's  rooms. 
There  is  a  large  library,  a  music  room,  a  smoking  room, 
a  breakfast  room,  a  dining  room,  a  great  hall,  a  grand 
staircase,  and  a  great  number  of  bedrooms.  All  these 
rooms  are  furnished  in  the 
most  lavish  manner.  Al- 
most every  county  in  Eng- 
land has  one  or  more  of 
these  stately  homes. 

In  the  central  part  of 
England  we  visited  a  very 
old  home  called  Haddon 
Hall,  standing  amid  beau- 
tiful surroundings  on  the 
banks  of  the  river  Wye. 
These  old  buildings  have 
beautiful  terraces  and  are 
erected  in  the  form  of 
quadrangles,  on  four  sides  Interior  of 


fc     . 

.-.«  "•'".'           :* 

K. 

T- 

\%s&J£a-&ji?3%t. 

<* 

V 

> 

2$ 

y^-y-f jj fc'J 

te*WM 

Jfc*''    '"' 

v^>  j3 

'^^jfHH 

jS 

■ 

dr  flr  V    -   n 

i 

glH/.v* 

**T 

<rasfia* 

■<?$*,: 

' 

, 

Haddon  Hall :  the  Terrace 


of  two  great  courts.  This  ar- 
rangement gives  them  ample 
space  and  light  without  their 
being  very  high. 

A  few  miles  from  Haddon 
Hall  we  found  Chatsworth,  a 
modern  estate,  the  home  of 
the  Duke  of  Devonshire. 
Here  we  found  the  great 
park  divided  into  two  parts 
by  the  beautiful  river  Der- 
went.  The  gardens  and 
grounds  were  marvels  of 
beauty  and  elegance.  One 
part  of  the  grounds  is  called 
the  French  gardens.  It  con- 
tains, besides  the  flowers  and 
shrubs,  a  perfect  forest  of 
pillars  surmounted  by  busts 
of  great  men.  Opposite  this 
is  the  orangery,  and  next  the 
sculpture  gallery.  The  beauty 
of  the  place  charms  the 
visitor. 

In  the  absence  of  the 
owner  we,  and  other  strangers,  were  shown  through  the 
palace.  As  we  came  away  we  felt  that  this  was  a 
home  large  enough  for  any  man,  a  home  the  result  of 
all  that  money,  good  taste,  and  time  could  possibly  accom- 
plish ;  and  yet  this  duke  has  another  stately  mansion  and 
grounds  in  the  north  of  England,  a  castle  in  Ireland, 
a  summer  resort  iu  the  south  of  England,  and  a  winter 
home  in  London. 

In  the  western  part  of  England  we  sailed  one  day  in  a 

small  steamer  up  a  lovely 
river  called  the  Dee.  The 
little  steamer  stopped  at  a 
fine  landing,  and  as  we 
stepped  out  we  saw  many 
terraces  rising  one  above 
another,  and  at  the  top 
extensive  buildings  around 
a  fine  court.  This  was 
Eaton  Hall,  belonging  to 
the  richest  man  in  Eng- 
and,  the  Duke  of  West- 
minster. We  visited 
it,  entering  the  chapel 
Eaton  Hall  first. 


v^s 

t!/r    ,    i       ; 

f.l  1  li 

111  »!■» 

^T".Tvv.>.-  ••■■.' '  ■  ■  Mart 

5  ^•^E      ■ 

RxS    ^ywl 

r  1      ^ZuHH 

\l™ 

166 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


plough  have  worn  away  the  roughness  of 
the  country,  which  is  not  true  of  America. 
All  the  lines  in  a  landscape  are  rounded 
and  soft ;  the  leaves  on  the  trees  and  vines 
are  velvety  and  beautifully  green.  The 
stone  walls  and  houses  are  often  completely 
covered  with  ivy. 

We  spent  a  few  weeks  in  a  little  village 
in  the  southern  part  of  England.  Many 
of  the  houses  were  over  three  hundred 
years  old.  They  had  roofs  of  tile  or 
thatch,  and  high  stone  walls  around  them. 
The  main  street  of  the  village  was  narrow 
and  irregular,  having  here  and  there  a  nar- 
row sidewalk.  A  few  houses  came  down 
to  this  sidewalk,  but  most  of  them  had  a 
few  yards  of  lawn  in  front  of  them. 

In  this  village,  as  every  where  in  England, 
some  classes  of  people  were  considered  to 
be  much  better  than  others.      The  squire 


An  English  Lane  :    Thatch-roofed  and  Ivy-covered  Cottages 

The  entrance  to  Eaton  Hall  was  paved  with  many- 
colored  marbles.  The  walls  were  panelled  in  alabaster, 
and  the  corridor  was  ornamented  with  busts  and  por- 
traits. The  billiard  room,  the  smoking  room,  the  library, 
the  dining  room,  and  the  drawing-room  were  large,  splen- 
didly furnished,  and  ornamented  with  costly  paintings, 
each  painting  having  been  especially  made  for  the  place 
it  occupied. 

I  could  never  tell  you  one-    

half  the  handsome  things  we 
saw  that  day,  both  in  the  Hall 
and  in  the  splendid  stables 
near,  where  many  racing  horses 
were  seen,  and  in  the  fine  gar- 
dens and  hothouses  as  well. 

English  Country  Life.  —  Life 
in  the  country  we  found  to  be 
especially  charming  in  England. 
As  we  rode  about,  it  seemed  as 
if  we  were  constantly  going 
through  a  fine  garden  laid  out 
with  the  best  of  taste.  The 
English  are  noted  everywhere 
for  their  excellent  landscape 
gardening,  the  result,  doubtless, 
of  natural  taste  and  centuries 
of  cultivation.      Spade  and 


Mowing  in  England 


A  Noonday  Rest  in  the  Field 

and  the  rector  are  always  quite 
above  the  farmer,  and  the 
farmer  is  far  above  the  day- 
laborer. 

On  riding  through  the  coun- 
try we  frequently  saw,  from 
the  elevations,  fields  of  varied 
greens  and  browns.  They  were 
divided  by  no  ugly  fences  or 
rough  stone  walls,  but  by  at- 
tractive hedges.  In  some  of 
them  the  farmers  were  mowing 
or  getting  in  the  hay.  The 
roads  were  almost  perfect,  and 
the  roadsides  as  carefully  culti- 
vated as  any  part  of  the  farm. 


ENGLAND    AND    HER    PEOPLE 


167 


A  bank  two  or  more  feet  high  often  skirted  the  high- 
ways. Hedges  crowned  the  banks,  sometimes  shutting 
out  the  view  just  as  they  do  on  prairie  farms  in  the 
western  part  of  the  United  States. 

Many  of  the  farm-houses,  we  notioed, 
were  large,  solid,  two-story  buildings  of 
stone  or  brick,  covered  with  ivy.  There 
was  generally  a  fine  garden  of  flowers  in 
front.  The  hay  and  grain  were  usually 
put  into  stacks,  or  "  ricks,"  as  the  Eng- 
lish call  them,  instead  of  into  barns. 
We  were  surprised  to  notice  that  women 
do  much  of  the  light  work  in  the  fields, 
such  as  weeding,  tying  hops,  raking 
hay,  etc. 

English  Children.  —  Everywhere  we 
went,  we  watched  the  English  children. 
They  are  generally  well  and  strong. 
They  have  clear,  rosy  complexions,  and 
red  cheeks,  as  they  are  out  of  doors 
much  of  the  time.  Owing  to  the  long  twilight  and  the 
mild  climate,  they  frequently  play  out  of  doors  till  ten 
o'clock  at  night.  They  are  often  dressed  for  this  play- 
in  heavy  corduroy  clothes  and  thick,  stubby  shoes,  the 
soles  of  which  are  well  studded  with 
broad-headed  nails.  They  like  to  play 
in  the  new-mown  hay,  throwing  it  and 
tumbling  in  it,  till  their  cheeks  are  red 
with  the  exercise. 

Saturday  afternoons  you  can  often  see 
a  group  of  boys  playing  scrub  cricket, 
imitating  their  elders ;  also  a  game  in 
which  kicking  the  ball  anywhere  in  any 
way  is  the  principal  thing  to  do.  Coun- 
try boys  find  great  fun  in  trying  to  go 
through  a  horse's  collar.  The  boy  first 
puts  a  foot  through,  then  his  head,  and 
then  tries  to  wriggle  his  body  through. 
Girls  and  boys  play  hop-scotch  in  the 
street,  just  as  they  do  in  America. 

The  English  boy,  we  observed,  likes 
to  hunt  for  birds'  nests.  In  the  spring 
he  often  eats  the  eggs,  but  always 
leaves  one  in  the  nest.  They  never 
rob  the  uests  of  robins  and  wrens  because  — 

"  Robins  and  wrens 
Be  God's  friends." 

In  London  we  often  saw  children  very  poor  in  appear- 
ance, without  hats  upon  their  heads,  dancing  in  the  rain 


^*$S6^^ 


An  English  Girl 


An  English  Schoolboy 


upon  the  sidewalk,  laughing   and   chatting  as  if  truly 
happy. 

The  children  of  the  wealthy  have  everything  which 
heart  can  desire.  They  usually  have  ponies  of  their 
own  and  are  taught  to  ride  very  early. 
I  have  seen  a  girl  only  eight  years  old 
ride  her  pony  very  fast  without  falling 
off. 

English  Schools.  —  Half  the  children  in 
England  now  go  to  government  schools, 
but  these  schools  are  inferior  to  Ameri- 
can public  schools  in  almost  every  par- 
ticular. 

The  other  half  of  the  children  attend 
church  schools,  with  no  better  accommo- 
dations. The  great  public  sehools,  like 
Eton  and  Rugby,  are  splendid  prepara- 
tory schools,  in  most  respects  far  supe- 
rior to  our  academies.  In  these  English 
schools  the  younger  boys  must  obey 
the  larger  and  older  ones  and  wait  upon  them,  doing 
their  errands  and  work.  This  is  called  "fagging." 
Thackeray  says :  "  When  he  shouted  out,  '  Under  boy,' 
we  small  ones  trembled  and  came  to  him.  I  recollect  he 
once  called  me  from  a  hundred  yards  off, 
and  I  came  up  in  a  tremor.  He  pointed 
to  the  ground.  'Pick  up  my  hockey- 
stick  ! '  He  was  too  great,  wise,  and 
good  to  stoop  to  pick  it  up  himself." 

The  big  boy  makes  the  little  one  black 
his  boots,  bring  his  water,  sweep  out  his 
room,  etc.  If  the  little  fellow  expresses 
dislike,  he  gets  his  ears  boxed;  if  he 
refuses,  he  is  flogged  by  the  bully.  All 
this  bullying  is  allowed  by  those  in 
authority  as  "  good  for  the  boys." 

SUMMARY 

England  has  a  moderate  temperature, 
especially  in  the  summer. 

The  skylark  is  a  wonderful  singer. 
There  are  many  grand  estates  in  England. 
Some  of  the  stately  homes  are  palaces. 
The  English  are  noted  for  their  landscape  gardening. 
English  villages  are  very  attractive. 

English  children   like  to  play  out  of  doors.      The  wealthy 
children  go  to  splendid  private  schools. 

English  people  like  manly  sports ;  they  enjoy  country  life. 
They  have  great  respect  for  rank  and  royalty. 


168 


JOUKNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


LONDON 

and  Vicinity. 


49.     LONDON,  THE   LARGEST   CITY  IN   THE  WORLD 

Fortunately  we  reached  London  in  broad  daylight,  and 
rode  for  miles  and  miles  on  an  elevated  viaduct,  looking 
down  upon  acres  and  acres 
of  houses.  It  seemed  as  if 
we  never  should  reach  the 
terminal  station.  Nothing 
gave  me  abetterideaof  the 
vastness  of  this  city,  not 
even  the  facts  that  fifteen 
regiments  of  police  guard 
its  streets,  and  that  these 
streets,  placed  end  to  end, 
would  reach  from  London 
to  Boston.  • 

The  Thames.  —  We  soon 
learned  that  the  Thames 
divides  the  city  into  two 
parts,  but  the  part  south 
of  the  river  is  the  least 
interesting.  There  we  saw 
nothing  but  manufactories 
and  acres  of  homely  brick 
houses,  the  dwellings  of 


Parliament  Houses;  View  of  the  Thames  and  Westminster  Bridge 

the  working  people.    The  part  north  of  the  river  is  the 
part  we  read  and  hear  most  about. 

Westminster  Abbey. — We  studied  it  in  three  aspects. 


First,  we  visited  some  of  the  historical  places.  We  walked 
from  our  hotel  to  Westminster  Abbey,  a  sacred  spot 
because  of  its  long  history  as  a  place  of  worship,  and  as 
the  crowning-place  of  so  many  English  monarchs.     We 

entered,  and  found  it 
shaped  within  like  most 
Gothic  cathedrals,  and 
filled  with  tombs  and 
memorials  of  celebrated 
men.  In  the  "  Poet's  Cor- 
ner" are  many  marble 
tablets  and  busts.  Even 
our  Longfellow  is  here 
remembered. 

Parliament  Houses.  —  A 
few  steps  from  the  Abbey 
brought  us  in  view  of  the 
great  Parliament  Houses 
which  cover  acres  of  land 
and  have  a  lofty,  hand- 
some tower  at  each  end. 
One  tower  has  a  wonder- 
ful clock  in  it ;  the  other 
is  much  higher,  and  is 
used  as  an  entrance  way 
by  the  sovereign  when  he 
goes  to  open  Parliament. 
The  best  view  of  these 
towers,  and  the  buildings 
between,  is  from  the 
Westminster  Bridge  over 
the  Thames. 

Trafalgar  Square.  —  We 
next  went  to  Trafalgar 
Square  to  see  the  Nelson 
monument  and  to  visit  the 
National  Gallery,  in  which 
is  a  wonderful  collection 
of  paintings.  You  will 
read  about  these  three 
noted  places  as  you  grow 
older,  and  the  more  you 
know  of  England's  his- 
tory, the  better  you  will 
enj  oy  seeing  them  and  look- 
ing  at  pictures  of  them. 


Busy  London.  —  The  next  day  we  rode  in  a  hansom 
through  the  very  crowded  streets  of  the  business  section 
of  the  city.     Most  of  the  people  here  still  ride  in  omni- 


LONDON,    THE    LARGEST    CITY    IN    THE    WORLD 


169 


buses,  but  subways  are  becoming  popular.  Electric 
trams,  or  cars,  are  found  only  on  the  south  side.  As  we 
slowly  rode  along,  we  noticed  that  the  streets  were  narrow, 
the  buildings  mostly  of  brick  and  stone,  dark  hued,  and 
very  close  together.     No  "  sky-scrapers  "  were  seen. 

The    Strand.  —  The    "  Strand "    is    one    of    the    most 
crowded  business  streets,  and  here  we  passed  by  news- 
paper offices,  theatres,  law  courts,  and  many  stores,  or 
"shops,"    as    the    English 
prefer  to  call  them. 

On  this  ride  we  saw  peo- 
ple of  almost  every  race 
and  nationality,  for  this 
great  city  is  the  home  of 
people  from  everywhere  on 
the  globe.  Some  of  the 
people  were  well  dressed, 
and  looked  happy  and  pros- 
perous ;  but  many  of  them 
bore  on  their  faces  evi- 
dences of  sorrow  and  pov- 
erty, for  London  has  a  vast 
number  of  the  wretchedly 
poor  within  its  gates.  We 
noticed  that  men  in  differ- 
ent kinds  of  business  wore 
something  to  indicate  their 
position.  The  'bus  drivers 
had  on  white  hats ;  the 
hansom  cab  drivers  wore 
artificial  flowers ;  young 
lawyers  wore  their  gowns 
and  wigs,  and  housemaids 
their  caps,  on  the  street. 
None  seemed  ashamed  of 
his  work. 

An  extension  of  the 
Strand  is  called  Fleet 
Street,  for  the  English  pre- 
fer short  to  long  streets.  This  is  another  crowded  busi- 
ness street,  full,  as  all  London  is  on  the  north  side,  of 
places  of  historical  interest.  Many  of  England's  famous 
men,  like  Dr.  Johnson,  Charles  Lamb,  Daniel  Defoe, 
and  Isaak  Walton,  are  in  some  way  associated  with  this 
street  and  the  Strand. 

St.  Paul's. — After  passing  Ludgate  Circus,  a  little 
opening  where  streets  cross,  we  came  to  St.  Paul's 
Cathedral,  a  large  and  very  noble  edifice,  in  the  midst  of 
the  city's  toil  and  noise.     Within  are  buried  several  of 


Cheapside,  London 


England's  greatest  heroes.  Wren,  the  builder,  was  thirty- 
five  years  in  finishing  this  cathedral.  The  dome,  on 
account  of  its  shape  and  size,  reminded  us  of  our  Capitol 
at  Washington. 

Cheapside  is  a  very  busy  street  near  by,  lined  with 
handsome  jewelry  and  dry  goods  shops. 

Not  far  away  from  St.  Paul's,  we  rode  into  another 
place  full  of  bustle  and  life,  the  square  in  front  of  the 

Bank  of  England.  Here 
thousands  of  omnibuses  ar- 
rive every  day,  turn  about, 
and  immediately  go  back 
over  their  various  routes. 

The  Lord  Mayor  lives  in 
one  of  the  large  mansions 
facing  this  square.  His 
house  has  six  pillars  in 
front,  and  servants  in 
livery  at  the  door. 

By  far  the  largest  build- 
ing facing  the  square  is  the 
great  Bank  of  England, 
known  to  the  whole  world. 
This  building  is  made  of 
granite,  with  very  thick 
walls,  and  not  a  window  to 
be  seen.  The  rooms  are 
lighted  by  open  courts 
within  and  skylights.  An 
immense  amount  of  money 
is  kept  here  in  gold  and 
silver  coins.  We  saw  the 
clerks  shovel  it  up  and 
weigh  it,  instead  of  count- 
ing it,  coin  by  coin,  as  we 
generally  do. 

West  End.  —  After  our 
trip  through  busy  London, 
we  devoted  time  to  the 
homes  of  the  people.-  First,  we  spent  several  days  in  the 
West  End  of  London.  "  West  End  "  sometimes  means  a 
large  part  of  the  town  west  of  the  old  gate  called  Temple 
Bar,  and  sometimes  it  means  only  the  part  still  farther 
west  and  north,  where  are  fine  parks  and  costly  houses. 
East  End.  —  From  the  West  End,  we  turned  our  atten- 
tion to  the  East  End,  where  the  common  people  live  and 
work.  What  a  contrast  between  these  two  parts  of  Lon- 
don, in  the  appearance  of  the  streets,  in  the  want  of 
squares  and  open  places,  and  in  the  looks  of  the  houses ! 


/V 


170 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Our  drive  took  us  across  London  Bridge.  Here  was 
built  one  of  the  first  bridges  across  the  Thames  River. 
This  bridge  is  crowded  with  carriages,  carts,  and  people 
all  day-  long.  Over  one  hundred  and  fifty  thousand 
people  cross  it  every  twenty-four  hours. 

We  went  back  by     

the  Tower  Bridge, 
just  below  London 
Bridge.  It  is  the 
latest  and  newest  of 
the  bridges  across 
the  river,  and  the 
one  nearest  the 
mouth.  The  part  of 
the  river  between 
these  bridges  is 
called  "The  Pool," 
and  is  full  of  ship- 
ping. The  Tower 
Bridge  has  high 
towers  at  each  end, 
in  which  are  " lifts,"  London  Bridge 

or  elevators,  and  an 


The  girls  make  things,  sew  things,  sell  things.  In  the 
big  factories  they  make  crackers,  matches,  boxes,  candy, 
and  jam;  they  wash  bottles  and  assort  papers.  The 
children  attend  the  board  or  public  schools  from  three 
years  of  age  till  they  are  fourteen.     These  schools  have 


educated  the  chil- 
dren in  habits  of 
cleanliness,  obedi- 
ence, and  good  man- 
ners. 

While  some  of  the 
streets  are  wide  and 
handsome,  like 
"  W  h  i  t  e  c  h  a  p  e  1 
Road"  and  "Mile 
End  Road,"  most  of 
them  are  narrow  and 
unattractive,  but 
clean.  Every  house 
has  a  dingy,  gray- 
brick  front,  a  door, 
a  window,  an  upper 
window,  eaves,  and 


elevated  footway  for  passengers  to  use  when  the  draw 
is  open  for  ships  to  pass  through. 

The  river  on  both  sides  of  this  bridge  was  full  of 
traffic.  Large  and  small  ships  were  coming  and  going 
all  the  time,  to  and  from  the  wharves,  which  line  the 
banks  for  many  miles.  These  ships  come  from  all  parts 
of  the  world,  bring- 
ing food  for  the 
hungry  and  raw 
material  to  be  made 
into  cloth.  Our  own 
country  sends  this 
city  every  day  many 
barrels  of  flour  and 
apples,  tons  of  beef, 
bacon,  and  lard. 
Ships  go  down  the 
stream  loaded  with 
manufactured  mer- 
chandise for  abroad. 

The  East  End  of  London  is  a  hive  of  working  bees, 
with  some  lazy,  half-starved,  skulking  drones,  who  will 
beg  and  steal,  and  who  hate  honest  work.  There  are  said 
to  be  two  million  working  people  here.  The  men  and 
women  and  boys  and  girls  work  in  factories,  in  shops, 
and  at  home ;   in  docks,  on  wharves,  and  in  warehouses. 


The  Tower  Bridge 


chimney-pots.  The  sidewalks  are  roughly  paved,  and 
the  street  between  is  filled  in  with  cobblestones.  There 
are  in  this  East  End  five  hundred  miles  of  streets  which 
look  just  alike.  The  streets  are  full  of  life  and  are 
often  used  as  stores,  where  all  kinds  of  goods  for  sale 
are  spread  on  the  sidewalk.      The  people  largely  live 

upon  the  street  and 
may  easily  be  seen 
and  studied. 

Some  streets  are 
given  up  to  making 
ready-made  gar- 
ments, others  to 
making  watches, 
furniture,  shoes, 
or  to  weaving  silk. 
People  who  work  on 
the  docks  live  near 
the  river.  The  Eng- 
lish workman  usu- 
ally lives  near  his  work.  The  dwellers  here  are  well 
dressed,  for  working  people. 

LANGUAGE  LESSON 
Write  an  account  of  a  trip  you  are  supposed  to  have  taken 
through  the  streets  of  London. 


GERMANY  AND  THE  GERMANS 


171 


50.  GERMANY  AND  THE  GERMANS 

Carl  and  his  sister  Hilda  live  in  a  flat  in  one  of  the 
towns  of  Germany.  Nearly  all  of  their  friends  live  in 
flats,  too,  because  it  costs  so  much  to  rent  a  whole  house 
in  that  country.  Some  of  the  poorer  people  have  only 
two  or  three  rooms  in  which  to  live  with  a  large  family. 
The  rooms  have  stained  or  painted  floors  with  a  rug  in 
the  middle.  Heavy  carpets  are  not  used.  There  is 
little  furniture  to  be  seen,  but  what  there  is,  is  good, 
and  lasts  a  long  time. 

Stoves.  —  Winter  in  Germany  is  very  cold  and  big  por- 
celain stoves  are  used  to  warm  the  houses.  Children 
love  their  stoves  as  good  friends,  as  indeed  they  are. 
The  stoves  are  square  piles 


eight  in  the  evening  the  family  sit  down  to  supper. 
The  table  is  spread  with  cold  meats,  smoked  fish,  salads, 
tea  or  beer,  and  dark,  heavy  rye  bread. 

If  there  is  a  guest  it  is  the  custom  to  wish  that  he 
may  have  plenty,  and  then  the  dishes  are  handed  around 
the  table  —  except  the  meat,  which,  if  there  is  any,  is 
cut  at  a  side  table.  This  is  the  happiest  hour  of  the 
day,  when  work  is  done  and  all  are  free  from  care. 
When  it  is  over,  all  shake  hands,  saying  to  each  other  — 
"  Blessings  on  the  meal ! " 

Housekeeping.  —  The  German  mother  is  proud  of  her 
housekeeping,  but  she  does  little  cooking.  From  the 
baker  she  gets  cake  and  a  huge  rye  loaf,  almost  as  big 
as  the  boy  she  sends  after  it.     Of  meat  she  uses  little, 

but  she  buys  fruit  to  eat 


of  brick  covered  with 
pretty  tiles  on  the  outside, 
and  reach  from  floor  to 
ceiling. 

Work.  —  Poor  children 
often  have  no  stove  to 
warm  them.  They  live 
with  their  parents,  broth- 
ers, and  sisters  in  one  room 
instead  of  in  several. 
Their  lives  are  then  very 
hard,  especially  in  the  long 
winter  months.  Mothers 
must  go  with  the  fathers 
to  work  in  the  factory,  for 
wages  in  Germany  are 
small.  Even  the  little 
girls  of  the  working-man's  family  must  often  be  taken 
from  school  at  thirteen  or  fourteen  to  work  and  help  sup- 
port the  family.  Women  are  sometimes  seen  taking 
milk-carts  drawn  by  dogs  through  the  streets  of  the 
town,  and  on  the  farms  they  do  much  hard  work  that  is 
done  by  men  in  most  countries. 

Meals.  —  Carl  and  Hilda  have  five  meals  a  day.  That  is 
the  way  in  Germany.  The  first  meal  comes  so  early  that 
it  is  often  necessary  to  have  a  light  by  which  to  eat  it. 
At  that  time  their  good  mother  gives  them  coffee  and 
sometimes  rolls.  At  eight  o'clock  they  have  another 
breakfast,  often  of  sausages  or  eggs.  At  twelve  there 
is  a  dinner  of  soup  and  vegetables.  There  is  seldom  any 
dessert.  At  four  in  the  afternoon  everybody  stops  long 
enough  to  rest  and  take  a  small  luncheon.  Hilda  and 
her  brother  have  coffee  and  cake  then ;  but  poorer  chil- 
dren have  coffee  and  bread  spread  with  lard.     About 


A  Milk-cart  drawn  by  Dogs 


raw  and  to  preserve,  cheese, 
sauer-kraut,  sausage,  and 
smoked  fish.  These  things 
form  the  principal  food  of 
the  people. 

Beds.  —  Bedtime  comes 
soon  after  supper;  for  all 
rise  early  and  are  busy  all 
day.  I  am  sure  you  would 
not  like  to  sleep  in  Hilda's 
bed.  It  is  very  different 
from  yours.  Like  most 
German  beds  it  is  only 
wide  enough  for  one  per- 
son. All  the  clothes  are 
too  small  for  it,  and  it 
cannot  be  "tucked  in"  as 
you  would  like  it.  On  top,  instead  of  a  counterpane, 
there  is  a  fat  feather-bed  with  a  fancy  cover,  under 
which,  on  cool  nights,  Hilda  sleeps.  For  foreigners  the 
pillows  are  never  the  right  size  and  are  either  too  hard  or 
too  soft ;  but  Hilda  likes  her  bed  better  than  any  other. 
Village  Life.  —  Carl  and  his  sister  often  visit  their  aunt 
in  a  small  village  not  far  from  their  own.  There  they 
see  houses  covered  with  quaint  carved  patterns,  the  upper 
stories  jutting  out  over  the  lower.  Canals  bring  the 
water  of  the  river  through  the  village  behind  every  large 
street.  Nearly  all  houses  have  a  wooden  platform  run- 
ning out  behind  them  into  the  canal,  where  washing  is 
done  and  where  the  family  take  supper  on  warm  evenings. 
They  do  not  wish  to  seem  to  be  richer  than  they  are, 
and  do  not  care  who  sees  them  at  their  simple  meal. 
Around  these  platforms  green  vines  are  planted,  and  on 
the  shore  large  elm  and  lime  trees  grow.     On  hot  evenings 


A i 


172 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


the  people  sit  out  of  doors,  the  men  smoking,  with  bright 
red  handkerchiefs  around  their  necks,  and  the  women 
chatting  while  their  busy  knitting-needles  keep  up  a  con- 
stant "  click,  click."  There  is  a  buzz  of  happy  voices,  and 
the  air  is  sweet  with  the  perfume  of  the  lime  blossoms. 

Storks.  — The  children  often  go  to  the  old  frog  pond  to 
see  the  storks.  These  tall,  white  birds  walk  slowly  around 
the  pond  on  their  long,  slim  legs,  now  and  then  curving 
their  thin  necks  and  reaching  into  the  water  for  food. 
They  are  said  to  arrive  in  the  German  towns  on  a  cer- 
tain day  in  spring  and  to  leave  as  regularly  in  the  fall. 
Often  they  select  a  chimney  of  a  house  on  which  to 
build  a  nest,  and  it  is  considered  good  luck  to  have  one's 
chimney  so  chosen.  When  the 
time  comes  for  the  birds  to  go, 
they  fly  slowly  south  to  Egypt, 
leaving  a  few  weaklings  behind 
as  unfit  for  the  journey.  The 
people  love  the  stork  and  are 
glad  to  have  it  return  to  them 
each  year. 

This  is  a  fine  old  town  which 
the  children  visit,  and  some  of 
the  peasants  still  wear  the  odd 
dress  of  the  olden  time.  One 
seldom  sees  the  old  style  of 
dress  now  in  a  trip  through 
the  country.  It  has  been 
dropped  for  the  late  fashions 
in  all  but  the  sleepiest  country 
villages. 

Soldiers.  —  Nowhere  in  Ger- 
many, not  even  in  the  quiet- 
est towns,  is  one  out  of  sight 

and  hearing  of  brass  bands  and  marching  soldiers.  Every 
morning  Carl  and  Hilda  are  waked  up  by  the  sound  of 
the  bugle  calling  the  soldiers  to  drill.  They  often  see 
mock  battles,  and  when  at  home  they  sometimes  visit  the 
fortress  which  guards  the  border  near  the  village.  Ger- 
many is  surrounded  by  other  countries  of  Europe  that 
have  not  always  been  friendly,  so  she  keeps  soldiers 
and  forts  ready  to  protect  her  from  her  enemies.  There 
are  so  many  men  wearing  uniforms  in  the  streets,  so  much 
warlike  nrasic,  so  much  marching  and  drilling,  that  the 
country  seems  like  a  big  military  camp. 

Every  boy  expects  sometime  to  become  a  soldier.  This 
is  what  Carl  looks  forward  to.  When  he  was  born,  his 
name,  address,  and  birthday  were  put  down  carefully  by 
an  officer  of  the  government,  and  twenty  years  afterward, 


Storks  on  Chimney  Tops 


if  he  lives,  he  will  see  his  name  on  the  bill-posting  tower 
in  the  town,  among  those  old  enough  to  become  soldiers. 
He  will  then  be  examined,  and  if  he  is  not  large  or  strong 
enough,  he  must  try  again  the  next  year.  Should  it  hap- 
pen that  he  were  not  well  enough,  or  wished  to  become  a 
minister,  or  if  he  should  have  a  family  to  work  for,  he 
would  be  excused  from  service.  But  if  he  is  to  become 
a  soldier,  he  must  go  into  training  for  seven  years.  After 
that  Carl  may  go  to  work,  but  he  must  be  ready  to  go  back 
at  any  moment  till  he  is  forty-five,  and  even  after  that, 
if  there  is  need  of  him  in  time  of  war.  Young  men  who 
do  not  become  soldiers  have  to  serve  in  the  army  for  three 
years  and  become  well  hardened  to  outdoor  life. 

Strict  Laws.  —  The  Germans 
have  strict  laws,  and  policemen 
are  watchful.  The  people  seem 
to  like  to  be  kept  in  order. 
They  are  made  to  keep  the 
cars  and  boats,  streets  and 
parks,  very  clean,  and  to  do 
as  their  laws  direct.  Carl  will 
be  arrested  and  obliged  to  pay 
a  fine  if  he  takes  the  wrong 
side  on  a  crowded  street,  or 
steps  on  the  grass  in  the  park. 
A  woman  who  sets  a  flower- 
pot on  her  window-sill  will  be 
fined,  and  also  a  person  who 
forgets  to  tell  the  police  that  a 
friend  is  visiting  him.  The 
police  wish  to  know  everything 
they  can  about  strangers  in  the 
towns,  to  be  sure  that  they 
are  not  dangerous  persons. 
Christmas.  —  The  happiest  time  for  Carl  and  his  sister, 
and  for  all  the  German  people,  is  Christmas.  This  is  their 
great  holiday,  and  no  one  thinks  of  work  for  three  days. 
On  Christmas  eve  each  family  gathers  about  its  own  tree, 
which  is  trimmed  with  tinsel  and  lighted  candles,  and  gen- 
erous presents  are  heaped  up  on  the  table  under  the  tree 
for  all  members  of  the  household.  Germany  is  the  home 
of  the  Christmas  tree  and  Kris  Kringle,  but  the  celebra- 
tion is  much  simpler  than  ours  at  that  time,  though  no 
less  joyful,  and  everybody  has  part .  in  it.  The  jails, 
workhouses,  and  soldiers'  barracks  have  their  trees,  and 
many  are  seen  in  the  cemeteries,  stuck  in  the  snow. 

Schools.  —  Until  they  are  fourteen,  all  German  children 
must  go  to  school.  Then  many  of  them  go  to  work  to 
help  support  the  family.     The  schools  are  so  good  that 


GERMANY  AND  THE  GERMANS 


173 


people  come  from  other  lands  to  visit  thern,  so  that 
they  may  learn  to  make  their  own  schools  better.  Carl 
and  Hilda,  who  do  not  expect  to  leave  school  at  fourteen, 
will  be  well  educated.  In  the  lower  schools  they  learn  all 
the  common  branches  of  study,  besides  gymnastics,  drill, 
singing,  and  sewing.  Then  there  are  "  scholars'  excur- 
sions "  into  the  woods  and  fields,  where  natural  science  is 
studied.  Baths  are  provided  in  some  schools,  and  in 
some,  luncheons. 

In  the  higher  schools  this  little  brother  and  sister  can 
learn  a  trade,  or  have  a  business  training.  They  can  go 
to  the  university  and  become  teachers,  lawyers,  doctors, 
or  ministers;  though  women  generally  become  teachers 
at  the  present  time.  In  the  girls'  schools,  housekeeping 
is  taught  to 
young  wo- 
men, so  that 
they  may 
make  good 
wives  and 
mothers. 

Berlin.  — 
There  are 
great  cities 
in  Germany 
which  Carl 
hopes  to 
visit  some- 
time in  his 
life.  He 
wishes  most 
to  see  Berlin, 
the  capital 
of  his  coun- 
try, where  the  laws  are  made,  where  there  are  many 
foreigners  to  be  seen,  and  where  the  German  emperor  lives 
with  his  court.  This  city  is  in  northern  Germany,  in  the 
large  province  of  Prussia.  The  country  about  it  is  not  at 
all  beautiful.  It  is  a  flat,  sandy  plain  with  few  trees,  — 
dusty,  hot,  and  uncomfortable  on  a  broiling  summer  day. 

The  streets  of  Berlin  are  broad.  Its  public  buildings, 
churches,  and  palaces  are  large ;  but  many  of  them  are 
very  plain-looking.  There  are  many  elegant  houses  in 
the  city  and  many  green  spaces  which  make  it  pleasant. 
The  emperor  has  put  some  good  statues  of  the  heroes  of 
Germany  in  the  principal  streets  and  has  done  much 
more  than  this  to  make  Berlin  an  attractive  city. 

Street  Scenes.  — Carl  would  enjoy  watching  the  soldiers; 
for  there  are  over  fifty  thousand  of  them  in  Berlin,  and 


Unter  den  Linden 


almost  every  other  man  you  meet  is  an  army  officer  in 
full  uniform.  Companies  of  mounted  and  foot  soldiers 
often  pass  up  and  down  the  streets,  and  military  bands 
are  always  playing.  "Berlin  is  a  great  place  for  manu- 
factories, too  —  the  greatest  in  the  country  for  electric 
plants,  guns,  and  machinery  of  all  sorts. 

The  street  of  this  famous  city  of  which  we  most  often 
hear  and  read  is  called  "  Unter  den  Linden,"  which 
means  "  under  the  lime  trees."  There  are  many  of  these 
trees  on  the  street.  One  expects  them  to  be  large  and 
shady,  and  is  much  surprised  to  find  them  small  and  mis- 
erable. "  Unter  den  Linden "  is  a  mile  long  and  very 
wide  and  straight.  In  the  centre  is  a  fine  walk  for  foot 
passengers.     On  each  side  of  this  is  a  carriage  drive  and 

a  path  for 
horseback 
riders.  Up 
and  down 
these  walks 
and  ways 
passes  an 
endless  pro- 
cession of 
people, 
horses,  and 
carriages. 
Elegant 
shops  and 
palaces  and 
large  hotels 
line  both 
sides  of  the 
street. 
A  magnifi- 
cent gateway  with  five  passages  through  it  stands  at 
the  southern  end  of  the  avenue.  It  is  called  the  Bran- 
denburg gate.  All  royal  visitors  enter  Berlin  by  this  gate. 
Fine  Buildings.  — It  is  the  boast  of  Berlin  that  no  other 
single  street  in  the  world  can  display  so  many  noted 
buildings  as  "  Unter  den  Linden."  It  is  well  provided 
with  fine  statues  of  German  heroes.  The  most  famous 
one  is  that  of  Frederick  the  Great  mounted  on  his  horse. 
Berlin  is  young,  compared  with  other  large  cities  of 
Europe.  No  other  capital  of  Europe  has  grown  faster 
than  Berlin,  however,  and  it  is  a  city  of  the  first  im- 
portance in  manufactures  and  commerce. 

LANGUAGE   LESSOR 
Make  a  summary  of  this  lesson. 


174 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


51.  BEAUTIFUL  PARIS   AND   THE   FRENCH   PEOPLE 

France  stands  third  among  the  six  great  countries  of 
Europe.  There  was  a  time  when  she  led  the  list,  but  now 
both  England  and  Germany  stand  ahead  of  her  in 
importance. 

Paris.  — You  will  expect  me  to  tell  you  of  the  great 
cities  of  France.  I  did  not  find  many.  The  capital 
is  so  important  that  all  the  other  cities  seem  small  and 
uninteresting.  Paris  is  the  Frenchmen's  pride.  They 
have  a  saying  which  shows  this  —  "  Paris  is  France." 
Many  consider  it  the  finest  of  all  cities,  because  it  is  so 
beautiful.  It  is  very  old,  but  it  still  sets  fashions  for 
the  world  in  dress,  art,  and  good  manners.  It  also 
gives  us  many  of  the  most  learned  men  of  the  day.  It 
is  now  the  largest  city  on  the  continent  of  Europe  and 
the  third  in  size  in  the  world. 

In  shape  it  is  like  a  wheel,  —  a  little  island  in  the 
Seine  River,  the  oldest  part  of  the  city,  forming  the 
hub ;  the  walls  are  the  tire,  and  the  radiating  avenues, 
the  spokes.  Once  these  were  crowded,  unsightly  parts, 
with  narrow  streets  and  miserable  houses  and  no  parks. 
Now  Paris  has  no  slums.  The  city  was  made  over  by 
Emperor  Napoleon  III.  He  had  two  great  lines  of 
boulevards  made,  one  within  the  other,  parallel  to  the 


tire  of  the  wheel;  many  trees  were  uprooted,  churches 
and  building  after  building  were  destroyed,  to  make 
room  for  these  streets.  He  saved  the  historic  buildings, 
which  he  improved  by  clearing  spaces  around  them.     He 


Argen 


Place  de  la  Concorde 


then  made  fine  avenues  leading  up 
to  them  and  showing  their  beauties. 
The  Eiffel  Tower  is  the  highest 
structure  in  the  world.  It  was 
built  for  a  great  French  exposition, 
but  it  is  still  standing,  and  in  the 
summer-time  it  is  visited  by  hun- 
dreds of  people.  In  it  are  restau- 
rants, shops,  and  a  theatre,  and  it 
will  hold  ten  thousand  people  at 
one  time.  There  are  two  galleries, 
to  which  elevators  constantly  run. 
I  went  to  the  top,  where  I  saw  a 
magnificent  view  of  the  city.  It 
is  a  city  of  trees.  I  was  told  that 
they  were  counted  some  years  ago, 
and  it  was  found  that  there  were 
ninety  thousand.  The  green  foliage 
looks  well  with  the  gray  walls  of  the 
town.  There  are  many  parks,  one 
for  nearly  every  section,  where  the 
people  enjoy  themselves  ;  for  they 
are  fond  of  outdoor  life.  From  this 
high  point  I  could  see  the  Seine 


INTERESTING  FACTS  ABOUT  EUROPE 

Europe  is  one  of  the  smallest  of  the  grand  divisions  in  area, 
but  it  contains  many  people  of  great  wealth  and  refinement. 

The  British  Isles  are  near  the  centre  of  the  great  land  masses  of 
the  world.    This  is  one  reason  why  Great  Britain  leads  in  commerce. 

The  Germans  are  fast  growing  in  industry  and  wealth. 

France  produces  great  quantities  of  wine,  silk,  and  works  of  art. 

In  many  parts  of  Europe  the  women  work  in  the  fields. 

Belgium  is  a  busy  workshop. 

Holland  has  many  canals  and  windmills. 

Hans  Christian  Andersen  lived  in  Denmark. 

Norway  has  many  picturesque  fiords,  or  narrow  arms  of  the 
sea,  running  through  breaks  in  the  mountains  near  the  ocean. 

Sweden  has  many  small  farms,  and  its  people  are  very  thrifty. 

The  Rhine  is  noted  for  its  picturesque  scenery,  and  is  visited  by 
tourists  more  than  any  other  river  in  Europe. 

Ring  Street,  in  Vienna,  is  said  to  be  one  of  the  finest  in  the  world. 

Russia  is  a  country  of  many  villages  and  few  large  cities. 


MAP  QUESTIONS   ON  EUROPE 

1.  In  what  direction  is  Europe  from  the  United  States  ?    Point 
toward  it.     (See  map  of  the  Hemispheres.) 

2.  How  would  you  go  there  from  your  home  ? 

3.  How  has  the  shape  of  the  coast  helped  the  people  of  Europe 
in  business  ? 

4.  What  country  in  Europe  looks  on  the  map  like  a  boot  ? 

5.  In  what  direction  do  many  of  the  rivers  of  Europe  flow  ? 

6.  Name  three  large  rivers  and  locate  them. 

7.  What  rivers  are  often  mentioned  in  the  newspapers  ? 

8.  Name  and  locate  four  mountain  ranges. 

9.  Do  any  of  these  mountains  keep  off  the  cold  north  wind  ? 

10.  What  countries  do  these  mountains  thus  shelter  ? 

11.  Name  in  order  several  countries  in  Europe. 

12.  Which  one  is  the  largest  ? 

13.  In  what  countries  do  you  find  London,  Paris,  Berlin,  and 
Constantinople  ? 


176 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


River  curving  through  the  city  from  east  to  west,  crossed 
by  many  bridges  —  almost  as  many  bridges  as  there  were 
streets  running  to  the  river. 

Streets*  —  To  see  the  city,  one  should  drive  through  it. 
What  clean  streets  it  has !  They  are  all  well  paved. 
Early  in  the  morning  they  are  washed,  and  sweepers 
brush  up  the  rubbish  through  the  day,  and  throw  it  into 
the  tall  boxes  placed  for  that  purpose  on  the  edge  of  the 
walks.  There  are  various  booths  on  the  pavements. 
Those  where  newspapers  are  sold  are  called  "kiosks." 
"When  lighted  at  night,  they  look  like  large  Japanese 
lanterns  set  down  on  the  walks,  for  they  have  panes  of 
colored  glass  and  are  covered  with  advertisements. 
Women  usually  have  charge  of  them.  There  are  also 
stands  where   lemonade 


and  soda  are  sold. 

When  my  driver  came 
to  the  fine  open  square 
called  the  Place  de  la 
Concorde,  I  knew  I  had 
reached  the  beginning  of 
the  grandest  of  the  many 
avenues  of  Paris.  It  has 
a  long  name  —  Avenue 
des  Champs  Elysees. 
It  is  a  park  as  well  as 
an  avenue,  being  very 
wide,  with  several  rows 
of  trees,  between  which 
are  driveways,  foot- 
paths,    and    paths    for 

horseback  riders.  For  two  cents  one  can  hire  a  little 
green  chair  and  sit  under  the  trees  to  watch  the  passing 
throngs.  A  stream  of  vehicles  passes,  three  rows  going 
up  and  three  down  the  driveway  at  certain  hours  of  the 
day.  I  saw  there  omnibuses  with  people  leaning  from 
the  top,  and  market  wagons  full  of  vegetables,  as  well  as 
elegant  four-in-hands  of  rich  Americans  and  stylish  turn- 
outs of  Paris  and  foreign  cities.  I  saw,  too,  gay  wedding 
parties  in  holiday  dress.  As  I  passed  along,  I  noticed 
many  shows  in  the  avenue  —  dancing  girls,  performing 
dogs  and  birds,  acrobats  and  singers.  They  say  the 
avenue  is  lovely  in  the  early  morning,  when  the  trees  are 
full  of  birds  and  dripping  with  dew.  On  sunny  days, 
like  all  the  open  spots  in  Paris,  it  is  full  of  nurses,  chil- 
dren, and  strollers.  In  the  evening  it  is  gay  with  visitors 
going  to  the  shows  and  the  open-air  concerts. 

The  Park.  —  At  last  Ave  reached  the  great  arch  at  the 
end  of  this  avenue,  where  twelve  streets  centre.     Driving 


French  Peasants  at  Work  in  the  Fields 


off  to  the  left,  we  were  soon  in  the  large  park  or  wood 
just  outside  of  the  city  walls,  called  the  Bois  de  Boulogne. 
It  was  between  the  hours  of  five  and  six,  and  all  the 
fashionable  people  of  the  city  were  out  driving.  Such 
crowds  of  elegant  carriages  as  thronged  the  roadways 
and  lake  shores !  You  will  be  sure  to  meet  wedding 
parties  on  the  way.  After  driving  around  the  lakes  and 
stopping  at  the  "cascade,"  they  return  to  the  Champs 
Elysees,  and  drive  thence  into  the  boulevards,  where  they 
go  to  a  restaurant  for  a  feast.  While  this  is  going  on, 
every  guest  is  obliged  to  do  something  to  make  the  feast 
lively.  Even  the  bride  herself  must  at  least  sing  a  song. 
Boulevards.  —  The  boulevards  begin  at  the  church  of 
the  Madeleine,  near  the  Place  de  la  Concorde.     This  is  a 

famous  church,  built  like 
a  Greek  temple.  Twice 
a  week  the  stranger  is 
surprised  to  find  the 
space  about  it  turned 
into  a  flower  market, 
the  pavement  covered 
with  ferns  and  white 
paper  cornucopias  filled 
with  roses.  During  the 
late  afternoon  and  even- 
ing the  boulevards  are 
very  gay.  Before  the 
cafes,  chairs  and  tables 
are  placed  on  the  pave- 
ment. There  the  Pari- 
sian comes,  before  going 
home,  to  rest  and  read  his  paper  and  to  watch  the  varied 
street  scene.  He  uses  this  place  as  an  office,  and  meets 
his  friends  to  talk  over  matters  of  business,  books,  or 
art,  rather  than  be  disturbed  at  home.  He  even  has  his 
letters  addressed  to  his  cafe. 

Outdoor  Life.  —  One  never  tires  of  watching  the  busy 
life  of  the  streets.  They  are  full  of  cabs  and  carriages, 
and  the  cafes  are  glittering  with  electric  light  and  mirrors. 
There  come  the  street  pedlers  with  flowers,  fruit, 
jumping-jacks,  pipes,  and  apples  on  sticks,  and  they  find 
a  good  market.  Sometimes  a  showman  comes  with 
trained  birds  and  dogs.  The  scavenger  is  here,  too,  and 
watches  the  crowd  for  cigar  ends  that  fall.  These  he 
gathers  up  with  a  hook  and  carries  away  to  sell.  Beggars 
bring  their  sad  tales,  and  receive  many  a  sou  from  the 
good-natured  crowd.  Now  and  then  I  have  seen  the 
chickweed  man  and  the  bread  girl  on  the  street.  The 
bread  girl  will  bring  delicious  bread  to  your  door  when- 


BEAUTIFUL    PARIS'AND    THE    FRENCH    PEOPLE 


177 


ever  you  wish.  For  six  months  of  the  year  the  chestnut 
man  is  on  the  streets  of  Paris.  The  French  are  great 
lovers  of  chestnuts,  which  form  a  national  dish.  One 
thousand  of  these  merchants  are  in  the  city. 

The  most  important  building  in  Paris  is  the  Louvre. 
It  stands  next  to  the  Garden  of  the  Tuileries.  First  it 
was  a  palace,  and  now  it  is  a  museum  of  art.  It  is  very 
important  because  of  its  fine  architecture  and  the  rare 
sculpture  and  other  art  treasures  it  contains.  The  gem 
of  the  whole  collection  is  the  beautiful  marble  Venus  of 
Milo,  which  every  one  visiting  Paris  goes  to  see. 

French  People.  —  The  peasants  of  France  are  a  thrifty, 
industrious  people.     They  own  their  farms  and  houses, 
and  men  and  women  work  side  by  side  in  the  field,  the 
men  in  blue  blouses  and 
the  women   wearing 
white     caps     and     ker- 
chiefs.     Work   is  their 
chief  pleasure,  and  they 
cannot  bear  to  lose  a  day. 
On  the  plains  they  raise 
grain,     and     near     the 
cities,  vegetables,  fruit, 
and  flowers,  which  they 
take  to  the  markets. 

Economy.  —  The  peo- 
ple go  into  the  forests 
and  pick  up  dead  wood, 
which  they  carry  home 
on  their  backs.  Some 
of  them  get  all  their 
winter  fuel  in  this  way. 
They  are  very  saving 
and  rarely  spend  any  money,  except  on  a  fete  day. 

Work  and  Play.  —  Little  Jean,  whose  parents  are 
French  peasants,  went  at  the  age  of  seven  to  be  a  servant. 
Many  boys  and  girls  from  seven  to  ten  years  old  do  this. 
They  wait  on  the  table,  answer  the  bell,  and  even  help 
with  the  cleaning.  When  older,  the  peasants  come  to 
despise  this  work  and  will  not  go  out  to  service.  Jean, 
as  well  as  his  father,  mother,  and  sisters,  and  all  French 
people,  loved  flowers,  music,  and  dancing.  He  was  glad 
to  go,  when  he  could,  to  the  good  public  school  provided 
for  him.  The  museum  in  the  village  was  open  on  Sundays 
and  feast-days,  and  there  he  could  examine  the  curious 
and  beautiful  specimens  of  art. 

Home  Life.  —  French  mothers  make  pleasant  homes. 
They  give  up  all  their  time  to  it.  They  will  sacrifice 
anything  to  the  good  of  their  children.      All  the  boys, 


A  Glacier:  a  Great  River  of  Ice 


when  they  become  citizens,  must  serve  three  years  in  the 

army  unless  they  are  to  become  clergymen  or  teachers. 

Little  girls  are  always  with  their  mothers.      They  are 

fond  of    all   household   duties.      As   young  ladies  they 

always  make  their  own  beds  and  dust  their  rooms.     They 

know  how  to  sew,  clean  silver,  and  take  care  of  china 

and  glass. 

LANGUAGE  LESSON 

Write  a  letter  from  Paris  to  your  teacher. 

52.    SWITZERLAND,  THE  LAND  OF  HIGH  MOUNTAINS 

No  matter  how  far  we  travel,  we  shall  not  find  so 
small  a  country  with  so  much  to  show  us  as  Switzer- 
land,—  the   smallest    of    all    the    European    countries. 

Tourists  cross  oceans 
to  see  its  wonderful 
scenery. 

Mountains. — Many  of 
them  go  to  the  south- 
west to  see  the  Alps, 
the  range  of  mountains 
in  which  is  Mont  Blanc. 
This  is  the  highest 
mountain  in  Europe. 
All  the  highest  peaks  of 
this  range  are  snow- 
capped through  the  en- 
tire year,  and  make  a 
picture  never  to  be  for- 
gotten, sparkling  in 
bright  sunshine  or  on 
moonlight  nights. 

Walking  at  the  foot 
of  the  chain,  you  can  see  many  glaciers,  some  far  up 
near  the  summits  and  others  down  on  the  mountain  sides 
almost  at  the  road.  They  are  great  rivers  of  ice  instead 
of  water.  They  always  have  at  least  two  branches, 
and  they  wind  slowly  down  the  mountain  until  the 
warm  sun  melts  them ;  then  they  run  away  over  the 
land  in  a  stream  of  leaping,  sparkling  water.  These 
glacier  streams  are  sometimes  the  beginnings  of  big 
rivers. 

Glaciers.  —  Little  Anton  Rey  lives  near  Zermatt,  which 
is  farther  east  in  southern  Switzerland.  His  father  is  a 
guide,  and  when  he  takes  a  party  up  the  mountains, 
Anton  goes  with  him  to  take  care  of  the  donkeys.  He . 
knows  some  of  the  glaciers  near  his  home  as  well  as  you 
know  the  park  near  yours.  Perhaps  he  does  not  know  that 
the  glaciers  move,  for  they  go  slowly.    He  knows  that,  in 


178 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


The  Matterhorn 


summer,   the     wild 

flowers  grow  in  the 

midst  of  the  snow, 

wherever  they  can 

find  a  bit  of  earth 

to  cling  to.      Many 

a  bunch  of  the  rare, 

starry   edelweiss   he 

has    found    on  the 

slopes    near    the 

glaciers,  and  carried 

to   his   mother  and 

sisters  in  the  valley, 

or  sold  to  visitors  in 

the  town.      As  he 

walks  on  the  ice  he 

finds  cracks  so  deep 

that  they   seem   to 

have    no    end.      He   drops   a   stone    in   and 

listens  as  it  clinks  against  the  blue  ice  walls 

until  its  sound  is  lost.     Anton  can  jump  over 

a  narrow  crack ;  but  some  of  the  cracks  are  so 

wide  that  men  have  fallen  into  them  and  have 

never  been  found. 

When  his  father  takes  a  long  journey 
among  the  glaciers,  Anton  cannot  go.  Only 
strong  men  and  women  can  endure  such  trips. 
Many  brave  travellers  and  guides,  too,  have 
lost  their  lives  in  the  fierce  storms  of  wind 
and  snow  that  come  up  suddenly 
among  the  mountains.  There  is 
a  famous  mountain  in  sight  from 
Anton's  home  —  the  Matterhorn, 
a  great  horn  of  black  rock,  tower- 
ing above  all  the  other  peaks. 
When  he  looks  toward  it  at 
night,  its  snowy  sides  and  sharp, 
black  summit  shining  in  the 
bright  moonlight,  it  is  awful  to 
see !  But  the  boy  loves  the 
mountain  and  hopes  some  day  to 
climb  it. 

How  would  you  like  to  go 
tobogganing  on  a  glacier  ?  It  is 
dangerous  sport.  Men  drag  their 
sleds  up  four  thousand  feet 
sometimes  —  higher  than  Mount 
Monadnock  in  southern  New 
Hampshire  —  for  the  fun  of  rid- 


'•**, 


_,x  '  .s'/;iia^mmuk 


'•£*) 


A  Chalet,  or  Swiss  House 


A  Swiss 
% 


Maiden 


ing  down.  They  do  not  take  the 
climb  all  at  once.  They  go  first  to 
a  hut  on  the  mountain,  where  they 
sleep,  carrying  big  bags  of  provisions 
with  them.  About  three  o'clock  the 
next  morning  they  begin  the  walk 
toward  the  glacier,  driving  stakes  as 
they  go.  They  start  early  to  see  the 
glorious  sunrise,  and  the  stakes  are 
to  help  them  find  their  way  back. 

Can  you  think  of  anything  more 
splendid  than  all  the  peaks  as  the 
sun  rises  and  seems  to  set  them  on 
fire,  their  snow-fields  ruddy  and 
sparkling  in  the  light  ?  At  last  the 
sleds  start,  moving 
slowly  at  first,  but 
soon  rushing  along, 
shooting  over  great 
cracks,  and  filling 
noses,  eyes,  and  ears 
with  flying  snow. 
Finally  no  one  can 
guide  them,  and 
they  whiz  along  at 
an  awful  speed  till 
they  stop  on  a  level 
plain  of  the  glacier. 
What  a  short  ride ! 
only  five  minutes  ;  but  it  took  an 
hour  to  climb  to  the  starting- 
point. 

Swiss  Children.  —  A  little  Swiss 
child  does  not  live  as  you  do.  If 
his  parents  are  wealthy  farmers, 
his  home  will  be  a  cottage  called 
a  chalet,  with  overhanging  roof 
and  prettily  carved  front.  On 
the  ground  floor,  where  your 
mother  would  have  her  best 
rooms,  the  farmer  keeps  his  cat- 
tle. On  the  middle  floor  the 
family  lives,  and  the  third,  up 
under  the  roof,,  is  the  hay-loft. 
It  is  barn  and  house  combined. 
For  breakfast  there  is  bread  and 
honey  ;  for  dinner,  soup,  potatoes, 
and  now  and  then  a  little  bacon. 
For  dessert  there  is  pudding.    In 


SWITZERLAND,    THE    LAND    OF    HIGH    MOUNTAINS 


179 


the  summer  there  are  many  kinds  of  vegetables,  but 
rarely  is  there  fresh  meat,  except  for  Sunday  dinner.  A 
peasant's  food  is  much  more  scanty  and  not  so  good. 

A  Swiss  child  goes  to  school  from  October  till  Easter. 
The  rest  of  the  year  he  is  out  of  doors  learning  to  do 
farm  work.  At  school  he  learns  much ;  for  the  schools  are 
good  and  he  works  hard,  and  by  and  by  he  may  go  to  the 
university,  which  is  free  to  all. 

Swiss  Farming.  —  One  bright  spring  day  the  little  Swiss 
boy  is  up  very  early.  The  cows  are  leaving  the  valley 
for  the  mountain  pastures,  to  feed  through  the  summer 
months.  The  village  is  astir  long  before  daybreak.  All 
are  in  holiday  dress, 
and  the  cows  are 
decked  with  wreaths 
and  bright  ribbons. 
Girls  in  their  gayest 
dresses  lead  the  long 
procession.  There 
is  a  band  of  music, 
and  the  cows  seem 
to  dance  along  the 
road  to  the  merry 
airs.  When  the  pro- 
cession reaches  the 
hills,  all  the  people 
except  the  herdsmen 
turn  back.  The  lat- 
ter go  to  the  chalets 
above  the  pine  for- 
ests to  live,  while  the 
cows  wander  about 
on  the  mountains,  eat- 
ing the  sweet  grass. 

The  Swiss  are  a  very  industrious  people  and  the  herds- 
man is  not  idle  all  summer;  he  is  making  good  Swiss 
cheeses  from  the  cream  and  milk,  and  sending  them  down 
the  mountain  on  the  backs  of  horses,  which  carry  an  odd- 
looking  machine  to  hold  them. 

Some  morning  early,  when  the  grapes  are  nearly  ripe, 
the  tinkling  of  cow-bells  will  tell  the  village  that  the 
cattle  are  coming  home.  For  days  they  will  come  in  from 
all  the  mountains  around  and  feed  in  the  valley  pastures 
until  winter  shuts  them  in  the  barns. 

If  you  were  Peter,  the  farmer's  little  boy,  you  would 
learn  to  make  hay  and,  after  the  harvests  in  the  valley, 
you  would  go  to  gather  the  coarse  grass  that-  ripens  late 
on  the  mountains.  You  would  help  put  the  hay  in  little 
huts.     There  it  would  be  left  till  the  deep  snow  fell. 


Lauterbrunnen,  a  Swiss  Village,  and  its  Waterfall :    the  Snow-capped  Jungfrau 

in  the  Distance 


Then  the  men  would  go  up  through  the  drifts  to  dig  out 
the  huts,  tie  the  hay  in  bundles,  pile  it  on  sleds,  and 
ride  down  on  it  to  the  farms  below.  This  is  a  dangerous 
thing  to  do;  but  only  so  can  they  get  this  good  hay  for 
the  cattle. 

When  not  in  school  during  the  winter,  Peter  learns 
wood-carving,  and  his  sister  learns  to  make  lace.  Many 
girls  may  be  seen  in  summer  along  the  Swiss  roads, 
sitting  with  their  mothers  at  the  cottage  doors,  making 
lace  ou  cushions.  The  lace  and  the  carving  are  sold  to 
buy  Peter  a  good  bow  and  arrow,  and  Frieda  a  new  string 
of  bright  beads,  and  perhaps  new  clothes,  too. 

Mountain  Life.  ■ — 
Swiss  boys  and  girls 
aft  not  so  merry  as 
those  of  France. 
Much  of  the  year 
they  must  work  be- 
side their  parents, 
who  lead  such  busy 
lives  that  they  grow 
quiet  and  stern. 
Perhaps  the  grand 
mountain  scenery 
sobers  them.  The 
great  winds  that 
sweep  down  the  val- 
leys are  so  powerful 
that  they  must  put 
heavy  stones  on 
their  roofs  to  keep 
them  on,  and  some 
day  a  great  ava- 
lanche may  come 
and  bury  the  whole  village.  It  is  not  strange  that  the 
Swiss  should  be  sober  with  such  terrible  things  to  fear. 

An  avalanche  is  a  mass  of  snow,  ice,  earth,  and  stones, 
that  slides  down  steep  mountain  sides.  It  moves  with 
force  enough  to  mow  down  whole  forests  and  destroy 
villages  in  its  way.  A  very  little  thing  sometimes  is 
sufficient  to  start  one  —  the  crack  of  a  driver's  whip,  a 
hunter's  call,  the  light  step  of  the  mountain  goat  up 
among  the  crags  near  the  mountain  tops. 

One  of  the  most  beautiful  and  majestic  of  Swiss  peaks  is 
called  the  Jungfrau,  which  means  maiden.  It  is  covered 
with  snow,  even  in  summer-time,  and  stands  out  grandly 
among  the  green  sister  peaks. 

LANGUAGE   LESSON 
Write  about  the  life  of  Anton  Rey. 


180 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


53.    SUNNY   ITALY 

Of  all  the  countries  we  have  thus  far  visited,  the  one 
we  shall  now  talk  about  is  the  most  fascinating,  because 
it  combines  its  own  natural  beauty  with  so  much  that  is 
pleasant  to  remember  in  history. 

Italy,  in  brief,  is  the  home  of  poets,  orators,  painters, 
sculptors,  architects, 
and  warriors  known 
and      honored     the 
world  over. 

If  you  look  upon 
the  map  of  Europe 
(page  175),  you  will 
observe  south  of 
Switzerland  the 
country  called  Italy. 
It  is  strangely 
shaped,  and  looks  on 
the  map  like  a  great 
boot.  A  few  years 
ago,  I  crossed  the 
great  mountain  wall 
of  the  Alps,  and 
descended  into  this 
country.  How  cold, 
foggy,  and  bare  it  seemed,  even  in  summer,  upon  those 
Alpine  heights;  but  the  low  plains  of  Italy  were  warm 
and  sunshiny,  and  were  covered  with  a  rich  mantle  of 
grass  and  many  fruit  trees.  Italy  was  on  the  south 
side  of  the  fence.  As  the  sun  set  that  day  behind  the 
great  mountains,  it  lighted  up  lake 
and  villa  with  soft  and  brilliant 
hues,  producing  a  most  charming 
effect. 

The  Lakes.  —  We  first  came  to 
several  wonderful  lakes,  among 
which  we  stayed  two  weeks.  These 
lakes  are  at  the  foot  of  the  mighty 
Alps,  and  are  fed  by  the  melting 
snows  from  the  mountain  sides. 
Every  day  we  went  to  row  or  sail 
upon  their  clear,  blue  waters.  In 
many  cases,  the  mountains  rose  from 
the  edge  of  the  lake  to  a  great 
height,  as  they  do  around  Lake 
George,  in  New  York  State,  their 
sides  covered  with  rich,  green  foliage. 
Among  the  trees   along  the   edge 


Lake  Maggiore 


VENICE 

and  Vicinity 


^ 


of  the  lakes  we  often  saw  stately  white  marble  palaces, 
or  villas,  the  homes  of  wealth  and  culture.  "We  were 
especially  pleased  with  Lake  Maggiore. 

Climate.  —  Although  the  Italians  are  very  poor  and 
beggars  abound  wherever  you  go,  they  are  a  very  con- 
tented people.  One  reason  for  this  is  the  delightful 
climate.     The  great  Alps  protect  the  land  from  the  cold 

winds  of  the  north, 
the  seas  wash  its 
shores  on  the  other 
sides,  and  the  heat 
from  the  desert  of 
Sahara,  tempered  by 
its  passage  across 
the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  makes  a  semi- 
tropical  climate 
which  is  the  envy 
of  people  in  all  other 
countries.  January 
in  Italy  is  like  April 
in  New  England, 
and  flowers  bloom 
out  of  doors  all 
through  the  winter 
months.  Oranges 
and  figs  flourish,  although  the  country  is  so  far  to  the 
north. 

Cities.  —  From  the  lakes  we  went  by  rail  to  Milan  and 
Genoa.  In  the  former  city,  we  enjoyed  a  visit  to  the 
great  white  marble  cathedral,  which  has  been  building 
for  hundreds  of  years,  and  which 
is  not  yet  finished. 

Genoa,  the  early  home  of  Colum- 
bus, still  lifts  itself  in  great  beauty 
from  the  sea,  its  splendid  palaces, 
churches,  and  other  buildings  rising 
tier  above  tier  on  the  steep  sides 
of  the  hills.  Most  of  the  people, 
however,  are  very  poor,  just  as  they 
were  in  the  days  of  the  great 
discoverer. 

Venice. — From  Genoa  we  took  a 
long  ride  across  the  northern  plains, 
where  we  saw  excellent  farms,  on 
which  were  growing  crops  of  wheat, 
corn,  oats,  and  rice.  In  the  after- 
noon we  reached  Venice.  The  rail- 
road   station    was    in    appearance 


Pttrto  tli 

Litlo 


A  DRIA  TIC 
SEA 


SUNNY    ITALY 


181 


The  Great  Square  of  Saint  Mark's,  with  View  of  Ducal  Palace 
and  the  Grand  Canal 

much  like  other  such  places,  and  the  usual  hackmen 

seemed  to  be  there  waiting  for  the  train.     We  handed 

one  of  them   our  checks   and  were 

ushered  by  him,  not  into  a  cab  or 

carriage,  but  into  a  long,  black  boat 

called  a  gondola,  —  for  this  city  is 

built  upon  hundreds  of  islands,  and 

all   its  wide  streets  are   salt-water 

canals.     In  this  ride  there  was   no 

dust,  no  jolting  of  springs  over  the 

cobblestones,  no  noise  of  wheels,  no 

tread  of  horses'  hoofs. 

"We  spent  several  weeks  in  this 
strange  city  and  enjoyed  many 
rides  with  our  gondolier,  Dandolo. 
Sitting  in  his  comfortable,  dry, 
clean  boat,  we  passed  many  happy 
hours  upon  the  water,  going  up  and 
down  the  Grand  Canal,  which  is 
lined  with  old  palaces.  In  the 
golden  days  of  Venice,  these  were 
the  houses  of  Venetian  nobles  and  merchant  princes  ; 
now  they  are  used  for  stores  and  hotels.  In  the  second 
picture  you  notice  the  posts  before  each  house  for 
fastening  the  boats.  In  the  first  picture  you  look  from 
St.  Mark's  Square  across  the  mouth  of  the  Grand  Canal  to 
a  beautiful  church  upon  an  island. 


Sometimes  in  the  afternoon,  as 
the  sun  was  sinking  behind  the 
great  Alps,  Dandolo  would  take  us 
far  beyond  the  limits  of  the  city, 
upon  the  great  lagoons  where  the 
water  was  very  shallow,  and  show 
us  how  the  fishermen  ply  their  trade, 
and  how  mussel-gatherers  sleep  in 
their  boats  tied  to  poles  driven  into 
the  yielding  mud.  In  these  trips 
the  gondolier  would  sing  Venetian 
songs  in  his  rich,  tenor  voice,  or 
tell  us  how  the  common  people  live. 
Several  days  were  spent  in  and 
about  the  great  square  of  St.  Mark's. 
Again  and  again  we  visited  the 
wonderful  church,  with  its  mosaic 
pictures  on  the  walls  of  the  interior 
and  even  on  the  outside,  and  its 
five  remarkable  domes.  In  front 
we  saw  the  four  famous  bronze  horses. 
We  entered  the  beautiful  Ducal  Palace,  or 
Palace  of  the  Doge  (on  the  left  in  the  picture), 
and  crossed  the  Bridge  of  Sighs  into  the 
dreadful  old  prison.  We  ascended  the  tower, 
or  Campanile,  by  an  inclined  plane,  and  from 
its  lofty  summit  obtained  an  extensive  view 


A  Gondola  on  the  Grand  Canal ;  also  the  Famous  Campanile  which  fell  down 


the 
but 


of  the  city  and  harbor.  The  tower  is  shown  in 
second  picture  on  this  page.  It  fell  down  in  1902 
is  to  be  rebuilt  exactly  as  it  was. 

We  also  fed  the  sacred  doves  which  are  always  flying 
about  this  square.  They  are  very  beautiful  and  tame, 
and  come  in  great  numbers  to  be  fed  by  the  city  officials 


182 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


every  afternoon  at  two 
o'clock.  No  one  is  al- 
lowed to  kill  them,  as 
they  are  supposed  to  pro- 
tect the  city. 

In  our  journey  from 
Venice  southward  we  saw 
much  of  the  raw  silk  in- 
dustry, and  passed  many 
orange,  olive,  grape,  and 
chestnut  orchards,  in 
which  the  peasant  folk 
were  busily  engaged.  As 
we  crossed  the  Apennines 
we  had  many  glimpses 
of  fine  mountain  and  val- 
ley views. 

Florence. — At  last  Flor- 
ence was  reached,  a  city 
which  seemed  more  quiet, 
restful,  and  homelike  than 
any  other  Italian  town  we 
had  yet  visited.  Here, 
as  elsewhere,  the  centre 
of  life  is  around  the 
cathedral,  which  is  built 
of  white  and  black  marble. 
The  campanile  of  this 
church  is  much  more 
beautiful  than  was  the 
one  mentioned  in  Venice. 
The  one  in  Florence  was 
built  by  Giotto,  the  cele- 
brated painter.  It  is  very 
tall  and  slim,  encased  with 
strips  and  small  pieces  of 
different-colored  marbles, 
making  a  most  pleasing 
mosaic.  No  wonder  that 
Charles  V  said,  upon  see- 
ing it  for  the  first  time, 
"  It  is  so  beautiful  that  it 
should  be  preserved  in  a 
glass  case,"  —  and  yet  it 
is  three  hundred  feet  high. 
As  you  see  in  the  picture, 
it  stands  by  itself. 

We  stopped  in  Florence 
mainly   to  see  the   great 


Giotto  Campanile,  Florence 


works  of  art,  and  we  were  never  disappointed.  There  are 
two  immense  art  galleries,  one  on  each  side  of  the  river 
Arno.     Many  happy  hours  we  spent  in  them. 

Rome.  — From  Florence  we  journeyed  farther  south  to 
Rome.  How  can  I  ever  tell  you  about  the  wonderful 
sights  to  be  seen  in  the  "Eternal  City"!  Once  the  capi- 
tal of  the  Roman  Empire,  now  the  seat  of  the  Roman 
Catholic  Church,  and  the  capital  of  United  Italy,  its 
history  is  more  wonderful  than  that  of  any  other  place 
in  the  world.  It  takes  people  longer  to  see  the  interest- 
ing places,  paintings,  statuary,  and  works  of  art,  modern 
and  ancient,  in  this  city,  than  in  any  other.  There  is 
space  here  to  speak  of  a  few  only. 

No  one  mentions  Rome  without  thinking  of  St.  Peter's. 
Many  times  we  visited  St.  Peter's,  which  is  the  largest 
church  in  the  world,  being  twice  as  large  as  St.  Paul's  in 
London.  A  whole  army  can  worship  within,  and  hardly 
be  noticed  by  the  visitors.  The  church  stands  on  the 
spot  where  Nero  put  to  death  so  many  Christians  in  his 
Circus,  more  than  eighteen  hundred  years  ago. 

We  never  lifted  the  heavy  leather  curtain,  which 
serves  for  a  door,  without  being  deeply  moved  by  the 
beauties  and  grandeur  of  the  interior.  Climbing  to  the 
dome  for  the  view,  one  day,  we  found  up  there  a  busy 
village  of  streets,  shops,  and  dwelling-houses,  in  which 
lived  smiths,  carpenters,  and  painters,  who  spend  their 
lives  in  keeping  this  majestic  cathedral  in  repair. 

On  the  right  of  St.  Peter's  is  the  Vatican,  or  palace  of 
the  Pope.     It  is  more  like  a  town  than  a  home,  as  it  con- 


JLa* 


MM^: 


A 


■  'iuj'_* 


View  in  Rome,  showing  Castle  of  St.  Angelo  on  Left;  St.  Peter's  in  the  Distance 


SUNNY    ITALY 


183 


fciWr^ 


Italian  Boys 

tains  over  ten  thousand 
halls,  chapels,  and  cham- 
bers. There  are  miles  of 
staircases  and  galleries,  and 
hundreds  of  servants  to 
take  care  of  them  all.  We 
found  the  art  and  antique 
treasures  here  beyond  all 
comparison.  On  the  left  is 
the  Castle  of  St.  Angelo, 
which  has  often  been  be- 
sieged. 

Our  visit  taught  us  that 
Borne  is  one  vast  museum 
of  antique  works  of  art 
and  well  -  known  master- 
pieces. Michael  Angelo, 
Raphael,  Guido,  Canova,  and  many 
others  are  now  very  real  to  us,  for  we 
have  seen  their  great  works. 

The  view  of  the  city  from  the  tower 
on  the  old  Capitoline  Hill  is  one  never 
to  be  forgotten.  Away  to  the  north 
is  St.  Peter's;  in  other  directions  are 
many  churches,  noted  buildings,  and 
the  seven  hills  on  which  ancient  Rome 
was  situated. 

Naples.  —  Finally  we  reached  Naples, 
the  lovely  City  of  the  Bay.  Our  hotel 
stood  upon  an  elevation,  from  which 
we  looked  down  upon  acres  of  houses, 


Italian  Milkman 


painted  in  pale,  flat  tones  of  brown,  red,  and  white. 
Through  the  various  streets  were  seen  the  dark  streams 
of  human  life  struggling  along.  Beyond  the  houses 
and  streets  appeared  the  great  curve  of  the  bay, 
dotted  here  and  there  with  many  fishing  boats. 

We  saw  many  curious  sights  in  Naples.  One  even- 
ing we  found  a  man  milking  a  cow  on  the  street, 
and  we  learned  that  the  Italians,  in  order  to  pre- 
vent cheating,  always  prefer  to  see  the  milk  taken 
directly  from  the  cow  before  buying.  In  some  stores 
macaroni  is  sold  to  the  boys,  who  eat  it  on  the  spot. 
Italian  boys  are  often  seen  playing  games  in  the  street. 
Vesuvius.  —  One  afternoon  I  visited  the  celebrated 
volcano,  Vesuvius.  A  ride  of  twelve  miles,  partly 
along  the  bay,  carried  our  party  to  the  foot  of  the 

cone.  From  this  place  the 
side  of  the  mountain  was 
ascended  by  an  inclined 
railroad.  We  were  then 
carried  over  the  soft,  vol- 
canic ashes  in  chairs  to 
the  edge  of  the  crater.  As 
darkness  came  on,  the  ter- 
rible effect  was  greatly  in- 
creased. We  looked  down 
into  the  huge  caldron  of 
boiling  lava,  watching  the 
fiery  mass  as  it  moved  and 
hissed  and  roared. 


LANGUAGE   LESSON 

Write  about  the  habits  of 
the  people  and  children  in 
Italy. 

Write  an  imaginary  letter 
from  any  city  in  Italy. 


PWTi^^^rP^PSHw  ^ECSrii ***"* 

-  .- 

lS^SSI  Su^ht^ 

^H_l  •  J  _1_2^M 

btm 

■ 

City  and  Bay  of  Naples :  Vesuvius  in  the  Distance 


184 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


54.    RUSSIA  AND  THE  RUSSIANS 

We  will  speak  now  of  Russia  in  Europe.  Its  emperor, 
who  is,  called  "  The  Czar  of  all  the  Russias,"  rules  over 
about  one-half  of  Europe ;  and  European  Russia  is  only 
one-third  of  his  dominions.  To  be  able  to  speak  to  all 
of  his  subjects,  he  would  need  to  know  at  least  forty 
different  languages  and  dialects.  Russia  in  Europe  is 
the  most  important  of  all  the  Russias.  Over  most  of  this 
country  it  is  winter  nearly  all  the  year  round,  and  exceed- 
ingly cold.  This  is  because  it  is  so  far  north,  and  open 
to  the  freezing  Arctic  winds,  besides  being  far  inland, 
away  from  the  warm  ocean  currents. 

The  Capital.  —  St.  Petersburg,  the  capital,  is  built  on 
several  islands  in  the  mouth  of  the  winding  river  Neva. 
It  is  interesting  to 
know  that  it  is  as 
far  north  as  the 
southern  end  of 
Greenland,  and  this 
helps  one  to  remem- 
ber what  climate  it 
has.  Emperor  Peter 
the  Great  planned 
this  modern  city, 
and  said  it  should 
be  the  capital  in- 
stead of  ancient 
Moscow.  He  placed 
it  so  it  should  be 
like  an  eye  looking 
into    and    watching 

the  rest  of  Europe.      Now,  where  once  were  desolate 
marshes,  stands  the  splendid  city  bearing  Peter's  name. 

The  houses  which  line  the  fine  wide  streets  and  avenues 
are  of  great  size.  They  are  usually  built  of  brick  and 
covered  with  stucco.  Then  they  are  painted  white,  yel- 
low, pale  blue,  green,  or  pink,  as  the  owner  may  wish. 
These,  with  the  bright-colored,  onion-shaped  domes  of  the 
odd-looking  Russian  churches,  make  a  striking  picture. 
Some  domes  are  covered  with  gold,  which  glitters  splen- 
didly in  the  sun,  and  others  are  blue,  with  gilt  stars. 

I  am  sure  you  would  like  to  know  about  the  little 
house  on  every  important  street  corner.  It  is  a  police- 
man's house.  His  duty  is  to  keep  peace  in  the  city  and 
awaken  those  who  fall  asleep  in  the  snow  on  cold  nights. 
Sometimes  it  is  so  cold  that  fires  are  kept  burning  all 
night  in  the  public  squares  and  in  front  of  theatres  for 
the  cabmen  and  others  who  must  be  out  of  doors.     The 


The  Nevsky  Prospect 


policeman  must  attend  to  these  fires  as  well  as  to  his 
other  duties. 

Street  Scenes.  —  The  streets  and  avenues  of  St.  Peters- 
burg are  wide  and  the  squares  large,  so  they  never  seem 
uncomfortably  crowded.  The  greatest  of  the  avenues  is 
the  Nevsky  Prospect. 

Even  in  the  gay  season  it  is  quiet  on  the  Prospect  till 
noon,  for  the  sun  himself  does  not  rise  till  nine  o'clock  so 
far  north.  In  the  afternoon  almost  every  kind  of  people 
may  be  seen  walking  on  the  avenue.  The  strange  cos- 
tumes of  Asia  are  there,  as  well  as  those  more  familiar 
to  us.  The  Russian  gentleman  hurries  along  in  his  furs 
and  long  felt  top-boots,  afraid  that  his  nose,  the  only  part 
of  his  face  that  can  be  seen,  will  freeze  before  he  knows 
it.     He  is  thankful  to  the  passer-by  who  stops  and  tells 

him  that  his  nose 
is  whitening,  which 
shows  that  it  has 
begun  to  freeze,  and 
waits  to  let  him  rub 
it  warm  with  snow. 
Many  uniformed 
officers  are  on  the 
crowded  pavements. 
There,  too,  are  Rus- 
sian peasants,  in 
their  red  shirts  and 
sheepskin  coats, 
walking  with  their 
wives  or  daughters, 
who  wear  bright  red 
bodices  and  head 
covering.      It  is  a  brilliant  scene. 

While  the  snow  lasts,  the  better  classes  ride  in  elegant 
sleighs.  Sledges  take  the  place  of  the  familiar  droshky  or 
cab  until  March,  when  the  droshky  again  appears  in  the 
streets.  It  is  usually  an  odd-looking  cab,  with  four 
wheels  about  large  enough  for  a  wheel-barrow,  and  two 
narrow  seats,  one  in  front  for  the  driver  and  one  behind 
for  the  passengers.  The  droshky  driver  is  very  good- 
natured  and  he  drives  at  a  furious  rate.  His  horse  is 
small  and  very  fleet  of  foot.  Over  its  shoulder  is  a  tall 
bow,  three  or  four  feet  high,  to  which  bells  are  fastened. 
You  and  I  would  find  it  very  entertaining  to  walk  on 
this  fine  avenue  and  watch  the  people.  We  would  spend 
some  time  looking  at  the  magnificent  displays  in  the 
goldsmiths'  shops  and  in  those  of  the  furriers.  Nowhere 
else  are  the  furs  so  fine  as  here.  We  should  see  some 
curious  things  in  the  way  of  fruit  and  other  food,  —  pine- 


RUSSIA    AND    THE    RUSSIANS 


185 


apples  at  five  dollars  and  ten  dollars  apiece,  tiny  oysters 
from  the  Black  Sea,  at  twelve  and  a  half  cents  each,  fishes 
in  jelly,  and  game  cheeses.  We  should  hear  the  bells  of 
St.  Isaac's  Cathedral,  the  deep  rich  boom  of  the  large 
bells  and  the  soft  harmonies  of  many  smaller  bells 
chiming   all   through   the   day. 


Moscow.  —  Moscow,  the  old  capital  of  Russia,  is  the 
city  next  in  importance  to  St.  Petersburg.  It  is  in  the 
centre  of  the  country  and  is  reached  from  St.  Petersburg 
by  rail.  There  are  not  many  railroads  in  the  Czar's 
country,  and  they  are  almost  all  owned  by  the  govern- 
ment. Before  many  Russian  stations  one  finds  a  huge 
kettle  of  hot  water  for  passengers  wishing 
to  make  tea.  The  Russians  are  great  tea- 
drinkers.  Tea  with  lemon  is  named  for 
them  because  it  is  their  favorite  way  of 
making  tea. 

Moscow  is  loved  by  the  Russians  as  the 
ancient  capital  and  the  crowning-place  of 
all  their  emperors.  So  strong  is  their  feel- 
ing for  it  that  the  people  burned  the  city 
when  Napoleon  reached  its  gates  rather 
than  let  it  fall  into  the  hands  of  the 
stranger.  Like  all  Russian  cities,  Moscow 
has  a  Kremlin  or  fortification.  If  you 
could  look  down  on  this  ancient  city  from 
the  great  tower  of  the  Kremlin,  you  would 
find  it  different  from  St.  Petersburg.  It 
looks  like  a  city  of  the  far  East,  while  St. 


The  Winter  and  Admiralty  Palaces,  St.  Petersburg 

The  great  Alexander  Park,  the  Winter 
Palace,  and  the  Palace  Square,  where 
twenty  thousand  troops  can  drill  at  once, 
are  at  the  end  of  the  Prospect. 

The  Neva.  —  The  Neva  freezes  six  feet 
in  winter,  and  becomes  a  boulevard  covered 
with  skaters  and  with  sleighs  full  of  people, 
dashing  along  at  a  mad  pace  and  jingling 
with  bells.  At  night  the  river  is  lit  up 
with  lamps  driven  into  the  ice.  The  canals 
about  the  city  are  sometimes  turned  into 
"  skating  gardens,"  and  skaters  appear  in 
fancy  dresses  which  make  foreigners  shiver. 
A  band  plays  through  the  evening,  and 
the  ice-hills  around  are  all  lighted  by  electricity  and  are 
black  with  skaters  and  sledges.  Sledge  roads  are  marked 
out  on  the  river  with  evergreen  bushes,  and  plank  walks 
are  laid  down  for  foot-passengers.  Russians  on  skates 
push  green  chairs,  in  which  are  seated  one  or  more  per- 
sons well  wrapped  in  lap  robes,  over  ice-paths  made  for 
the  purpose.  These  chairs  take  the  place  of  the  ferry- 
boats, and  you  can  cross  from  one  shore  to  the  other  for 
less  than  one  cent.  If  you  visit  the  Laplanders'  camp 
on  the  river,  you  may  have  a  ride  with   real  reindeer. 


St.  Petersburg  from  across  the  Neva 

Petersburg  is  so  modern  that  it  reminds  one  of  Chicago. 
In  place  of  St.  Petersburg's  wide,  straight  streets,  and 
magnificent  stone  and  brick  buildings,  there  are  in 
Moscow  narrow,  winding  streets,  lined  with  odd-looking 
buildings,  mostly  of  frame,  painted  white,  pink,  or  yellow, 
and  nearly  all  with  roofs  painted  green. 

In  Russia  there  are  only  a  few  large  cities  like  St. 
Petersburg  and  Moscow,  Warsaw  and  Odessa.  (Find 
them  on  the  map  of  Europe  on  page  175.)  Then  there 
are  some  middle-sized  towns,  and  the  rest  are  small,  poor 


ISO 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


villages.  In  these  the  buildings  are  of  wood  or  logs,  and 
among  them  rise  the  domes  of  a  Greek  church,  the  state 
church  of  Russia. 

Country  Life.  —  The  nobles  and  their  families  leave  the 
city  in  the  spring  and  go  far  into  the  country  to  attend 
to  their  estates,  unless  they -are  very  rich  and  can  afford 


house.     The  peasants  are  glad  if  they  can  have  one. 

They  use  its  broad  top  for  a  bed.     Sometimes  they  crawl 

into  the  oven  to  keep  from  freezing. 

Russia  is  so  far  north  that  daylight  lasts  a  long  time. 

At  ten  o'clock  the  sunset  colors  are  still  in  the  sky,  and 

they  are  often  there  until  time  for  sunrise. 

Peasants.  —  About  four-fifths  of  all  the  people  of 
Russia  are  peasants,  and  they  are  a  most  important 
class.  They  were  serfs  or  slaves  for  so  long  that 
they  are  very  ignorant.  Rarely  can  oue  read  or 
write.  They  are  good-natured,  and  honest  in  their 
dealings  with  one  another.  They  work  best  in 
gangs  like  slaves,  with  an  overseer.  That  is  because 
they  were  serfs  so  long.  Now  they  are  free,  they 
often  do  not  know  how  to  care  for  themselves. 
This  is  not  true  of  all  of  them.  Some  go  to  the 
cities  in  the  winter-time  and  become  skilful  in 
manufacturing  and  in  the  arts. 

Most  of  the  people  employed  on  the  country 
estates  are  peasants ;  sometimes  the  housewife  on 
one  of  these  estates  will  have  fifty  or  sixty  of 
these  people  to  feed  every  day.  Many  of  these 
were  serfs  on  the  estates  in  the  old  days  before 


Russian  Peasants 

to  employ  an  overseer.  Then  they  prefer  to 
remain  in  the  city.  The  change  to  country 
life  is  very  great  after  the  gay  winter 
season. 

They  leave  the  fine  houses  and  palaces 
of  the  city  and  go  to  live  in  a  house  usually 
made  of  square  beams  from  one  foot  to  a 
foot  and  a  half  thick.  These  are  laid 
horizontally  upon  each  other  to  form  walls, 
and  are  fastened  together  with  wooden 
bolts  a  yard  long.  All  the  little  spaces 
are  filled  in  with  ntoss  soaked  in  pitch. 
Planks  are  then  laid  over  it  all,  inside 
and  out,  and  when  the  outside  is  painted 
and  the  inside  plastered,  you  have  a  house 
warmer  than  one  made  of  brick  or  stone. 
The  cold  wind  cannot  possibly  blow  into  it. 

Although  the  house  is  made  nearly  air-tight,  the  Rus- 
sians need  good  stoves  to  keep  them  warm  in  cold 
weather.  The  stoves  are  much  like  those  in  northern 
Germany.  They  reach  nearly  to  the  ceiling  and  are  set 
in  the  wall,  between  two  rooms,  to  heat  both.  It  takes 
ten  or  fifteen  of  these   stoves  to  heat  a  large  country 


Panorama  of  Moscow:  the  Kremlin  in  the  Distance 

they  were  made  free.  The  owner  of.  the  estate  often 
cannot  afford  to  pay  them  in  money,  so  he  gives  them  a 
part  of  his  crops  for  their  labor,  which  helps  to  keep 
them  from  hunger  through  the  winter.  Many  of  these 
poor  people  die  of  famine  when  crops  fail  or  when  they 
cannot  get  work. 


ON    THE    DESERT 


187 


IN  AFRICA 


55.    ON  THE  DESERT 

An  Arab  Boy.  —  Murad  is  a  bright-eyed,  dark-skinned, 
white  boy,  fortunate  enough  to  be  born  in  a  tent.  This 
tent  is  pitched  beside  a  spring  of  water,  under  several 
date-palm  trees,  in  the  wide-spreading  desert.  His 
mother  taught  him  to  follow  the  Koran,  or  Arab  bible, 
and  bathe  five  times  a  day.  If  water  were  not  found  for 
bathing,  she  took  sand.  After  bathing  he  must  say  his 
prayers,  kneeling  on  a  mat,  several  times  every  day. 
His  sister,  Fatoom,  was  not  taught  much,  except  to  look 
after  the  sheep  and  sweep  out  the  tent. 

The  tent  where  Murad  sleeps  is  supported  in  the 
centre  by  an  upright  pole.      His  mother  made  the  cover- 


Tent  on  the  Desert  in  which  Murad  lived 


ing  out  of  black  camel's-hair  cloth.  The  tent  pegs  are 
made  of  camel  bones.  The  inside  of  the  cloth  house  is 
divided  into  two  rooms  by  a  camel's-hair  cloth.  On  the 
ground  is  spread  a  mat  made  of  grass.  At  night  this  is 
the  bed. 

As  Murad  grows  up,  he  plays  about  in  the  open  air. 
His  father  often  takes  him  to  see  the  horses  and  camels, 
and  by  and  by  teaches  him  to  shoot  and  hunt. 

Murad  dresses  just  like  his  father.  He  wears  over 
his  body  a  linen  shirt,  wide  trousers  reaching  down  to 
his  knees,  a  waistcoat  with  silver  buttons,  and  over 
these  a  white  garment,  a  kind  of  loose  cloak.  On  his 
head  he  wears  a  fez  cap  with  a  small  tassel,  over  which 
he  may  put  on  a  wide  turban. 


The  Sahara.  —  Murad  grew  up  on  the  Sahara,  a  land 
of  sand  in  northern  Africa.  This  great  extent  of  sand, 
known  as  a  desert,  is  caused  by  the  small  amount  of 
moisture,  the  great  amount  of  heat,  and  the  general  low- 
ness  of  the  country.  Yet  the  land  is  not  as  smooth  and 
level  as  a  floor.  In  some  parts  are  high  mountains  or 
sharp-pointed  hills,  table-lands  covered  with  stones  or 
pebbles,  and  low-lying  plains,  crossed  by  winding 
valleys,  dry  most  of  the  year. 

The  sand  of  the  desert  is  as  impossible  to  measure  as 
the  water  of  the  ocean.  Both  are  greatly  affected  by  the 
wind.  It  banks  up  the  sand  in  low  ridges,  and  all  is 
silent  and  without  life.  Possibly  one  bird  may  be  seen 
in  a  whole  day's  ride.      The  colors  most  seen  are  brown 

and  yellow.  Some- 
times the  horizon 
seems  very  near; 
then  it  seems  miles 
away. 

Murad's  land  is 
one  of  silence.  The 
sand  and  the  lime- 
stone reflect  the 
rays  of  the  sun  by 
day,  causing  a  great 
longing  for  shade. 
At  night  the  heat 
is  rapidly  given  up 
and  it  is  cold.  A 
thick  blanket  or 
robe  is  very  com- 
fortableonthe  mat. 
Camel.  —  As  the  ship  is  needed  to  cross  the  ocean, 
so  a  creature  made  to  live  in  the  sandy  and  dry  wastes 
is  needed  for  Murad's  travels.  Such  an  animal  is  the 
camel.  The  camel's  long  neck  gives  a  wide  range  of 
sight  over  the  desert,  and  it  enables  him  to  reach  far  for 
the  shrubs  on  each  side  of  his  path.  His  upper  lip 
projects  so  that  he  can  easily  grasp  his  food.  The 
inside  lining  of  his  mouth  enables  him  to  eat  hard  and 
thorny  plants,  such  as  grow  in  the  desert.  His  ears  are 
small,  but  his  nostrils  are  large  for  breathing ;  they  can 
be  closed  at  will  against  the  wind-driven  sand.  His 
eyes  stick  out,  but  they  are  protected  by  a  heavy  over- 
hanging upper  lid,  which  guards  them  from  the  burning 
rays  of  the  noonday  sun. 


188 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Murad's  father  obtained  from  his  camels  good  rich 
milk  and  hair  for  making  tent-cloth,  ropes,  and  shawls. 
From  the  dead  camels  he  obtained  meat  and  leather. 
All  of  his  camels  were  the  one-humped  kind,  but  some 
of  them  belonged  to  better  breeds  than  others.  He  had 
two  Osman  dromedaries  that  were  as  fleet  as  race-horses. 
His  common  camels  would  go  only  about  eighteen  miles 
in  a  day,  but  on  one  of  the  dromedaries  he  once  rode 
over  two  hundred  miles  in  three  days. 

Desert  Life.  —  Murad  lived  near  a  living  spring  of 
water  in  a  green  spot  in  the  desert  called  by  his  father 
an  oasis.  There  were  a  few  trees  and  some  grass  there. 
The  trees  were  principally  date-palms.  This  tree  has  a 
single  trunk  some  sixty  feet  high  without  a  branch.  It 
has  a  cluster  of  leaves  and  the  fruit  is  at  the  top. 

His  mother  could  cook  this  fruit  in  nearly  a  hundred 


Murad's  Father:  the  Sheik  on  his  Camel 

Like  the  horse,  the  camel  has  teeth  in 
both  jaws,  which  makes  his  mouth  a  weapon 
of  defence.  His  feet,  being  divided,  spread 
apart  on  the  sand  and  do  not  readily  sink 
into  it;  they  are  also  cushioned,  which 
makes  it  easy  for  the  rider.  His  hump  is 
a  real  storehouse  of  food.  His  stomach 
is  a  reservoir  for  water,  enabling  him  to 
travel  four  or  five  days  without  drinking. 
The  camel  is  very  strong  and  tough.  A 
large  one  can  carry  a  weight  of  a  thousand 
pounds  because  his  backbone  is  constructed 
like  an  arch. 


An  Oasis 


A  Caravan  on  the  Desert 

different  ways,  and  it  was  their  principal 
article  of  food,  just  as  flour  is  with  us. 
His  father  also  obtained  from  these  trees  a 
kind  of  soap,  a  syrup,  vinegar,  nuts  which 
are  ground  up  and  fed  to  the  cows  and  sheep, 
and  a  kind  of  rattan  for  making  beds,  tables, 
chairs,  boats,  bird-cages,  and  crates.  From 
the  bark  of  the  tree  he  made  baskets,  fans, 
and  string.  The  wood  in  the  trunk  supplied 
him  with  the  little  lumber  he  needed. 

Caravans.  —  Murad's  home  was  a  stopping- 
place  for  many  travellers.  He  frequently 
saw  large  parties  coming  and  going  with 
their  camels  and  horses.    Such  a  party  is 


AFLOAT    ON    THE    NILE 


189 


called  a  caravan.  A  large  caravan  of  camels  and  camel 
drivers  is  a  picturesque  sight  on  the  desert.  The  camels 
follow  one  another  in  single  file,  unless  the  caravan  is 
very  large.  They  move  slowly  across  the  sandy  plain 
and  disappear  on  the  horizon. 

The  heat  on  the  desert  increases  till  about  two  o'clock, 
when  it  is  given  off  from  the  sand  so  strongly  that  it 
shows  itself  in  rippling  waves  in  the  air,  often  causing 
an  image  of  the  principal  objects  in  the  landscape  to 
appear  upside  down  in  the  sky.  Sometimes  the  heat 
waves  dance  within  a  few  yards  of  the  eyes.  A  line 
of  rocks  two  hundred  yards  away  may  keep  time  and 
look  like  a  regiment  of  men  marching  in  line.  Beautiful 
groves  of  trees,  lakes  of  fresh  water,  grass,  and  houses 
appear  and  then  disappear,  deceiv- 
ing the  onlooker.  Murad  learned 
from  his  father  to  know  that  these 
appearances  were  not  real,  and  to 
call  this  deception  the  mirage. 

Arabs.  —  Murad  and  his  parents 
belong  to  that  branch  of  the  white 
race  known  as  Arabs.  The  Arabs 
who  live  in  cities  and  towns  are 
generally  called  Moors ;  those 
who  live  on  the  desert  are  known 
as  Bedouins.  The  latter  have  dark 
brown  complexions,  regular  fea- 
tures, and  deep-set,  piercing  eyes. 
They  are  noted  for  kindness  to 
their  guests. 

Murad's  sister  Fatoom  was  glad 
that,  when  she  grew  up,  she  would 
not  have  to  cover  her  face  with  a 
veil  like  the  Moorish  Arab  women ; 

that  she  could  wear  very  bright  colors  like  her  mother, 
and  plenty  of  silver  jewelry.  Now,  she  was  quite  con- 
tent with  her  dark  blue  dress,  which  seemed  good  enough 
for  the  work  around  and  inside  the  tent.  • 

Fatoom  never  liked  the  idea  that  she  could  not  eat 
with  her  father  and  brother,  but  had  to  help  her  mother 
in  waiting  on  them. 

Murad's  father  was  a  sheik,  or  chief ;  his  business  was 
to  guard  and  protect  and  guide  the  caravans.  He  es- 
corted them  on  their  way  from  the  seaports  in  the  north 
across  the  Sahara  to  the  Sudan.  This  was  a  very  good 
business  and  one  that  Murad  hoped  to  learn.  Hence  his 
father  sometimes  took  him  on  the  short  journeys. 

On  these  trips  he  learned  to  ride  the  camel.  He  says : 
"You  mount  them   while  they  are  lying  down.     First 


A  Veiled  Arab  Woman 


you  notice  a  furious  heaving  backward  when  the  camel 
rises  to  his  knees ;  then  a  hurl  forward  as  his  hind  legs 
are  raised;  this  is  followed  quickly  by  a  milder  pitch 
backward  when  the  front  legs  are  straightened,  and 
then  the  deed  is  done." 

Night  in  Camp.  —  As  soon  as  the  hot  day's  work  was 
done  the  Arabs  woidd  gather,  from  the  vicinity  of  the 
camp,  brush  and  roots  for  a  fire.  When  a  bed  of  coals 
formed,  they  threw  upon  it  a  large  cake  of  dough  and 
quickly  covered  it  up  with  ashes.  By  and  by  the  heap 
of  coals  was  opened  and  the  cake  was  turned  over ;  in  a 
few  minutes  more  the  bread  was  ready.  It  was  then 
broken  up  into  a  pot  with  other  things  and  a  porridge 
was  made.  All  the  men  gathered  around  this  central 
dish  and  ate  the  contents  with  their 
fingers.  After  this  they  lighted 
their  pipes  and  smoked,  talked, 
laughed,  and  sang  till  late  at  night. 
Murad  liked  to  join  the  camel 
drivers  and  sit  around  the  camp- 
fire  to  listen.  Thus  he  grew  up 
to  know  nature  and  men. 

SUMMARY 

Murad  is  an  Arab  boy,  living  on 
a  desert  in  Africa.  His  sister's  name 
is  Fatoom.  They  live  in  a  tent. 
Murad,  like  his  father,  wears  wide 
trousers  and  a  turban.  The  desert  is 
a  great  extent  of  sand,  hot  and  dry, 
with  little  water.  The  camel  is  well 
adapted  to  the  desert  because  he 
can  go  so  long  without  water.  Dates 
are  a  common  article  of  foiod  on  the 
desert.  People  on  the  desert  generally  travel  in  large  parties  for 
protection ;  such  a  party  is  called  a  caravan.  The  camels  follow 
one  another  in  single  file  in  a  caravan.  Murad  liked  to  go  with 
his  father  on  trips  across  the  desert.  He  liked  to  sit  by  the 
camp-fires  and  hear  the  Arabs  talk. 


56.    AFLOAT   ON   THE   NILE 

Egypt.  —  Egypt  is  one  of  the  oldest  countries  in  the 
world,  and  is  mentioned  in  the  Bible  many  times.  Bun- 
ning  through  this  country  is  a  celebrated  river  called  the 
Nile.  This  river  forks  near  its  mouth.  The  land  be- 
tween these  branches  is  called  a  delta,  because  it  is 
shaped  like  that  Greek  letter.  Not  far  from  one  of 
these  branches  is  a  seaport  called  Alexandria. 


190 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


because  the  steps,  or  courses  of  stone,  are 
irregular  and  sometimes  far  apart.  It  is 
like  trying  to  climb  up  the  side  of  a  room 
by  piling  up  tables  of  different  sizes  and 
stepping  from  one  to  the  top  of  the  next 
one.  Travellers  do  climb  the  great  pyra- 
mid, each  one  having  three  guides  to  help. 
One  guide  takes  hold  of  each  hand  and  the 
third  pushes  behind.  From  the  top  one 
sees  Cairo,  with  its  many  mosques  and 
minarets ;  the  farm-lands  of  Egypt,  which 
look  like  a  chess-board  of  green  and  brown ; 


1 


An  Arab  School,  Cairo 

Cairo.  —  The  largest  city  in  Africa,  however,  is  Cairo, 
situated  at  the  forking  of  the  Nile,  and  visited  by  many 
sightseers  every  year.  Every  one  should  visit  the  cita- 
del fortress,  for  it  is  one  of  the  important  sights.  It 
is  built  on  high  ground,  and  has  within  its  walls  the 
mint,  the  government  offices,  barracks  for  the  soldiers, 
and  the  palaces  of  the  chief  ruler,  who  is 
called  the  Khedive.  There  is  also  a  beautiful 
mosque,  all  of  alabaster  and  marble,  built  by 
one  of  the  former  rulers.  You  would  never 
forget  the  view  from  the  citadel.  Some  have 
said  it  is  the  finest  of  its  kind  in  the  world. 
The  domes  and  minarets  of  the  churches  and 
the  flat  roofs  of  the  houses  lie  below  you.  In 
one  direction  are  the  villas  of  the  rich,  who 
are  mostly  Europeans.  In  the  distance  is  the 
ribbon  of  the  river,  and  the  great  iron  bridge 
over  it.  Away  to  the  left  are  seen  the  ancient 
pyramids. 

Pyramids.  —  The  pyramids  stand  upon  a  rise 
of  ground,  on  the  edge  of  the  Libyan  desert. 
This  ridge  stretches  south  for  about  twenty- 
five  miles,  and  many  pyramids  or  pyramid  ruins 
and  tombs  are  seen  along  its  course. 

It  is  a  hard  climb  to  go  up  the  great  pyramid, 


the  river 
Nile,  the 
sandy 
desert, 
and  close 
at  hand, 
the  other 
pyramid. 


Cairo 


One  of  the  Pyramids  and  the  Sphinx 


30°       Longitude      2U°   Xmi       from    10°    firwnwIHi       0 


10° 


20°       Xongltnde     30°  TTwl       from    40°     Qwwlch     50° 


0  Cape  Verde  Is.     /;,,- 

•    •(I'.hij  Z2S2& 

„  °      StiLouiaP      ^« 


800  MILES  TO  ONE  INCH. 
Cities  with  over  100,000    .   A  le  \;hmI  ria 
Other  Import  ant  Cities  :  .  .  .  Zanzibar 
Smaller  Places  : Mozambique 

Capitals  thus  :  ®    Other  Cities  thus :  • 

,    WORKS,   BuV/ALO,  N.Y. 


MAP  QUESTIONS  ON  AFRICA 


1.  What  is  the  general  shape  of  Africa? 

2.  In  what  direction  is  it  from  Europe  ? 

3.  What  body  of  water  separates  it  from  Europe  ?  from  North 
and  South  America  ? 

4.  Where  does  the  equator  cross  this  grand  division  ? 

5.  Where  would  the  hot  belt  be  found  ? 

6.  Where  is  the  Desert  of  Sahara  ? 

7.  Where  is  there  a  group  of  lakes  ? 

8.  What  three  rivers  rise  in  or  near  these  lakes  ? 

9.  In  what  directions  does  the  land  slope  from  these  lakes  ? 


10.  What  river  flows  through  a  desert  ? 

11.  What  river  has  a  delta  ? 

12.  Locate  Cairo,  Alexandria,  Zanzibar,  and  Cape  Town. 

13.  Find  the  Suez  Canal  in  the  northern  part  of  Africa. 

14.  What  countries  in  Europe  have  possessions  in  Africa  ? 

15.  In  what  belt  is  Mount  Kenia  ?    Mount  Kilimanjaro  ? 

16.  Near  what  city  are  the  Pyramids  ? 

17.  Where,  in  South  Africa,  is  Kimberley,  the  diamond  town  ? 

18.  Where  is  the  Island  of  St.  Helena,  on  which  Napoleon  was 
imprisoned  ? 


192 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


On  coming  down,  one  naturally  pays  a  visit  to  the 
Sphinx.  This  is  an  immense  stone  lion  with  the  face 
of  a  woman.  It  is  carved  out  of  solid  rock,  and  is  one 
hundred  and  fifty  feet  long.  It  is  always  more  or 
less   covered   by  the  drifting  sand. 

Bazaars.  — At  midday  the  bazaars,  or  street  fairs,  are 
crowded  with  purchasers;  women  with  veiled  faces, 
Turks,  Nubians,  camels,  donkeys,  and  horses,  all  mingled 
together,  for  there  are  no  sidewalks.  Sharp  bargains  are 
driven,  and  a  long  time  is  spent  over  every  purchase. 

The  Voyage.  —  If  the  traveller  is  in  Cairo  the  first  of 
December,  he  will  be  likely 
to  hire  a  house-boat,  or  daha- 
Leah,  and  enjoy  two  months 
afloat  on  the  Nile.  These 
boats  are  under  the  charge  of 
a  captain  called  a  dragoman. 
Every  boat  is  a  floating  house 
furnished  with  the  comforts 
of  a  home. 

On  this  trip  one  sees  small 
Egyptian  farms,  divided 
into  small  squares  and  rec- 
tangles by  the  ditches  dug 
for  running  water.  In  these 
fields  are  grown  wheat  and 
other  grains,  beans,  and  len- 
tils, a  kind  of  small  pea. 
Mud  cottages  are  seen  now 
and  then,  with  their  groves 
of  palm  trees  and  flocks  of 
pigeons. 

Water-  wheel.  —  The  an- 
cient water-wheel  for  raising 
water  is  frequently  seen.  It 
is  called  a  sakiyeh,  and  is  a 
large  wheel  having  earthen 

jars  tied  to  the  rim.  As  it  goes  around,  these  jars  dip 
into  the  water  and  fill.  As  they  come  to  the  top  of  the 
wheel,  and  begin  to  turn  to  go  down  on  the  other  side, 
the  water  runs  out  into  a  trough,  whence  it  flows  into 
the  ditches,  and  so  to  the  soil.  The  wheel  is  turned  by 
oxen  or  buffaloes. 

As  the  boat  moves  up  the  river,  other  boats  and  steamers 
are  seen,  and  there  are  sometimes  exciting  races  be- 
tween different  house-boats. 

The  River.  —  There  is  much  movement  and  life  along 
the  banks.  Natives  are  travelling  with  loaded  donkeys 
and  camels,  boats  are  loading  and  unloading,  women  are 


A  Dababeah  or  Nile  House-boat 


coming  down  to  fill  their  water-bottles,  which  they 
poise  gracefully  on  their  heads,  and  children  quite 
naked  are  playing  about. 


SUMMARY 

Alexandria  is  a  seaport,  where  cotton  and  sugar  are  bought 
and  sold.  Cairo  is  the  largest  Arab  city  in  the  world.  There 
is  a  fine  view  of  the  city  and  River  Nile  from  the  Citadel.  The 
pyramids  are  very  old  and  very  large.  The  Nile  changes  Egypt 
from  a  desert  to  a  fertile  strip  of  land.  The  best  way  to  see  the 
Nile  is  to  go  up  the  river  in  a  dahaheah  or  house-boat.     The 

people  drink  the  water  from 
the  river  and  use  it  to  make 
the  crops  grow. 


57.    AN  AFRICAN  SCHOOL 

Early  Life.  —  Not  many 
years  ago  a  child  named 
Besolow  was  born  in  Bendoo, 
Central  Africa,  west  of  the 
Niger  River.  He  was  the  son 
of  a  king,  and  hence  enjoyed 
many  privileges.  He  was 
kindly  cared  for  and  spent 
the  first  part  of  his  life  in  a 
pouch-like  bag  fastened  to 
his  mother's  back  with  tough 
leather  thongs. 

His  home  was  a  hut,  cone 
shaped,  and  built   of   burnt 
clay   and   grass.       In   other 
parts  of  Africa  the  huts  are 
very  different  in  shape.    The 
doorway  was  very  small,  being 
only    twenty-five    inches    in 
height    and   narrow    in  pro- 
portion.     This  was  for  protection  from  enemies.      The 
furnishings  of  the  hut  were  two  stools,  two  hammocks,  a 
spear  or  two,  and  a  few  rude  cooking  utensils. 

If  the  boys  were  disobedient  in  Bendoo,  they  were 
punished  very  severely  with  leather  straps,  and  some- 
times a  finger  was  cut  off. 

Without  any  clothes  to  bother  him,  for  the  climate  is 
very  warm,  he  grew  up,  played,  and  enjoyed  life.  The 
boyish  games  of  his  village  were  those  in  which  skill  in 
running  and  throwing  were  required.  Besolow  became 
very  swift  footed,  and  soon  was  able  to  outrun  all  the 
boys  of  his  own  age. 


AN    AFRICAN    SCHOOL 


193 


nor  were  their  parents  allowed  to  visit  them.  The 
boys  were  first  taught  to  use  the  bow  and  arrow, 
then  the  spear  and  sword.  Every  morning  they  prac- 
tised with  their  weapons.  In  the  afternoon  they  were 
sent  out  into  the  forests  to  hunt,  and  great  displeasure 
was  shown  if  every  one  did  not  bring  back  as  much 
game  as  the  teacher  thought  he  ought  to.  The  usual 
punishment  for  poor  luck  was  to  go  without  food.  Many 
a  time  Besolow  went  to  bed  without  his  supper. 

The  second  year  the  children  were  taught  how  to  fight. 
Besolow  became,  at  the  age  of  fifteen,  so  good  a  fighter 
that  his  father  praised  him  for  his  courage. 

Besolow  was  afterwards  sent  to  a  mission  school  on 
the  coast  to  learn  English,  because  it  was  valuable  in 
carrying  on  commerce.  He  then  hated  the  white  men 
so  intensely  that  he  ran  away  several  times  from  school 


A  Village  on  the  Kongo :  the  Home  of  Besolow. 
The  Walls  are  about  Five  Feet  in  Height 

When  eight  years  old,  he  was  made  very 
proud  by  receiving,  as  a  present  from  his 
father,  a  bow  and  a  quiver  of  well-sharp- 
ened arrows.  From  fifty  to  oner  hundred 
boys  would  meet  him  every  day,  to  practise 
shooting  at  a  target  placed  forty  feet  away. 
The  boy  whose  arrow  hit  the  bull's  eye  was 
allowed  to  take  all  the  arrows  of  the  boys 
who  had  tried  and  failed.  Besolow  was 
often  successful  in  this  sport,  and  then 
his  companions  would  cheer  him  and  carry 
him  on  their  shoulders  about  the  village. 
If  he  was  successful  in  wrestling  or  in 
running,  a  wreath  of  palm  leaves  was 
given  him.  He  also  learned  to  swim  like 
a  duck,  and  to  paddle  the  native  canoe. 

School. — At  twelve  years  of  age  Beso- 
low, with  many  other  boys,  was  sent  a 
long  way  from  home  to  an  African  school. 
This  school  was  held  in  a  dense  jungle  on  a  peninsula. 

The  forests  in  this  part  of  Africa  are  very  thick  and 
full  of  animals,  such  as  monkeys,  zebras,  antelopes,  deer, 
wildcats,  elephants,  and  lions.  Many  gaily  feathered 
birds  and.  some  with  beautiful  songs  live  in  the  trees, 
and  great  snakes  and  poisonous  insects  are  common. 

In  this  jungle  school  four  hundred  boys  were  educated 
at  one  time,  under  fifty  teachers.  ■  Their  teachers  were 
old  warriors  and  hunters.  The  principal's  name  was 
Zolusengbe.  He  was  a  hard,  cross  master,  very  severe 
with  his  pupils.     The  boys  were  not  allowed  to  go  home, 


An  African  School 

and  home  to  his  mother.  He  was  a  whole  year 
learning  the  alphabet,  because  he  did  not  wish  to  learn 
it,  and  two  years  in  learning  to  read.  Then  his  ideas 
changed  and  he  made  good  progress,  and  afterwards  came 
to  America  to  complete  his  education. 

Girls.  — Girls  in  Africa  are  sent  away  to  schools  as 
Besolow  was.  One  kind  of  school  for  girls  is  called 
a  sandy.  In  such  a  school  the  girls  learn  to  sing,  play, 
and  dance.  In  a  boyale  they  learn  to  carry  water, 
gather  wood,  and  light  a  fire.  There  are  a  few  mission 
schools  where  girls  are  taught  very  differently. 


194 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


A  View  of  Cape  Town,  showing  Table  Mountain 


58.     SOUTH  AFRICA 


Cape  Town.  —  In  the  southern  part  of  Africa  is  a  city 
of  some  size  called  Cape  Town.  It  was  settled  by  both 
Dutch  and  English  people,  and  newspapers  there  are 
printed  in  both  languages.  The  view  of  this  place  from 
the  water,  as  it  nestles  below  Table  Mountain,  is  striking 
and  beautiful. 

The  streets  are  narrow  and  bordered  with  low,  one- 
story  houses.  In  these  streets  are  seen  Dutch,  English, 
Hindus,  Xegroes,  and  Malays. 

Table  Mountain  is  a  steep  and  partly  wooded 
slope,  so  level  on  top  as  to  suggest  the  name. 
Looking  from  the  summit,  one  sees  the  intense 
blue  sea,  the  busy  streets  and  wharves  of  the 
town,  and  farther  away  the  surrounding 
country. 

Products.  —  This  part  of  the  world  produces 
large  quantities  of  wool,  gold,  diamonds,  and 
ostrich  feathers.  The  feathers  come  from  the 
many  ostrich  farms  in  Cape  Colony.  The 
greatest  diamond  mines  in  the  world  are  at 
Kimberley.     (See  map,  page  191.) 

The  ostrich  has  long  legs  and  is  a  fast  runner. 
It  can  go  faster  than  a  horse.  It  can  give  a 
very  hard  kick,  and  a  man  must  look  out  for 
himself  when  he  attempts  to  take  care  of  these 
big  birds.      When  taken  from   one  place  to 


another,  the  ostriches  are 
frequently  blindfolded. 
The  hen  ostrich  sometimes 
lays  twenty  eggs  in  one 
nest.  These  are  hatched 
in  the  sun.  Wild  ostriches 
are  still  found  in  South 
Africa ;  their  feathers  are 
finer  than  those  of  the 
tame  ones. 

Animals.  —  The  desert 
is  good  hunting  -  ground, 
and  here  are  found  the 
most  graceful  of  the  wild 
animals  of  Africa  —  the 
antelopes,  of  which  there 
are  many  kinds.  The  eland 
is  the  largest  of  these  crea- 
tures, being  frequently  the 
size  of  an  ox,  and  stands 
six  feet  tall.  He  has  slim 
legs  and  moves  upon  them  swiftly  and  gracefully.  Like 
the  camel,  he  can  go  a  long  time  without  water.  The 
flesh  of  the  eland  tastes  like  young  beef.  His  favorite 
haunt  is  the  lonely  parts  of  the  Kalahari  desert. 

In  this  same  part  of  Africa  is  found  the  handsome 
gemsbok,  carrying  aloft  his  sharp,  spearlike  horns,  some- 
times four  feet  long.  With  these  horns  he  can  resist 
dogs,  lions,  and  leopards.  He  stands  a  little  under 
four  feet  tall  and  his  general  color  is  gray.  His  black 
tail  is  long,  full,   and   sweeping.     His    white    head  is 


"•*»,'  •  .*■ 
"    > 

}    T  ■"""'.  • 

11       ,.P. 

f  '■' 

.J& 

'  r 

. 

1* 

i 

l 

Ostriches  and  Eggs 


SOUTH    AFKICA 


195 


marked  with  black,  so  that  it  looks  as  if  he  were  wearing 
a  head-stall. 

A  smaller  antelope,  more  frequently  seen,  is  the  fleet, 
agile  animal  called  the  springbok,  because  when  excited, 
he  arches  his  back,  raises  the  crest  of  white  hair  upon  it, 
and  begins  a  wonderful  series  of  leaps  from  all  four  legs, 
from  eight  to  ten  feet  straight  up  in  the  air.  This  leap- 
ing is  repeated  several  times,  then  he  runs  away  very 


A  Kaffir  loves  his  cattle.  Instead  of  racing  with  horses 
he  races  with  oxen,  the  latter  running  without  riders 
over  a  course  ten  miles  in  length.  Cattle  are  used  as 
money.  When  a  girl  marries,  her  father  gives  her  a 
cow.  This  cow  is  called  "  a  doer  of  good,"  and  is  consid- 
ered sacred.  A  hair  from  this  cow's  tail  is  tied  around 
the  neck  of  each  child  when  it  is  born. 

The  work  in  the  diamond  mines  at  Kimberley  is  done 
by  Kaffirs.  They  are  locked  into  a  vast 
enclosure  from  which  they  cannot  go  out 
while  working  for  the  company.  This  is 
done  to  prevent  the  men  from  getting 
liquor  and  from  stealing  the  diamonds. 

In  Cape  Colony  the  English  and  Dutch 
carry  on  most  of  the  work.  The  Boers  are 
the  Dutch  who  have  "  trekked,"  or  moved 
farther  north  upon  the  uplands.  They 
are  mostly  farmers  and  owners  of  cattle. 
Besides  farming  proper,  ranching  and 
mining  are  the  leading  occupations  of 
the  people  of  South  Africa.  Owing  to 
poor  coal  and  a  lack  of  water-power,  this 
part  of  the  world  is  not  likely  to  become 
a  manufacturing  country. 


Inside  the  Kraal  :  the  Home  of  the  Kaffir 

fast.  The  springbok  stands  about  three  feet  high  and 
weighs  about  seventy  pounds.  His  color  is  a  common 
fawn.  His  horns  are  lyre-shaped,  and  about  twelve 
inches  long.  It  is  a  beautiful  sight  to  see  a  number  of 
these  animals  moving  about  over  the  plain. 

Natives.  —  The  Kraal  of  a  native  is  often  built  upon 
a  grass-covered  tract  of  land.  In  the  centre  of  this 
pasture  is  an  enclosure  for  the  cattle,  formed  of  upright 
poles  stuck  in  the  ground.  If  there  is  a  scarcity  of  trees, 
a  stone  wall  is  built.  Near  this  enclosure  are  the  various 
huts  forming  the  home  of  the  chief.  A  hut  is  shaped 
like  a  low  beehive,  and  is  between  twelve  and  twenty 
feet  in  diameter.  Sometimes  its  sides  are  perpendicular, 
and  the  top  is  covered  with  a  grass  roof.  The  sides  of 
the  huts  are  made  of  sods  or  of  wattles  covered  with 
mud.  In  the  centre  are  a  few  stones  showing  the  posi- 
tion of  the  fireplace. 

The  floor  is  usually  swept  clean,  and  the  sleeping  mats, 
made  of  rushes,  are  rolled  up  by  day  and  placed  on  end 
against  the  wall.  The  front  door  of  one  of  these  huts 
is  only  four  feet  high. 

Kaffirs  are  negroes  of  the  Bantu  tribe.  There  are 
many  of  them  in  South  Africa.     They  have  few  wants. 


-* 

-•^-jc-^Sflfc^S 

—i. —  ,.  •     nap     JHGk' 

a        _ja  •  JSf.  ifl&EF~*i 

ft!     i^EVn4Lifd^tf^fA*#Htt ' X  Ak^ 

v^9BU 

£W3L^" 

jS|&3p! 

A  Boer  Farm 


SUMMARY 


Cape  Town  is  the  largest  city  in  South  Africa.  Table 
Mountain,  behind  the  town,  is  level  on  top.  Ostriches  are 
raised  in  South  Africa,  on  farms,  like  cattle.  The  greatest  dia- 
mond mines  in  the  world  are  found  in  Kimberley,  South 
Africa.  On  the  Kalahari  desert  are  seen  herds  of  antelopes. 
The  kraal  is  an  enclosed  place  for  the  cattle  and  the  huts  of 
the  Kaffirs  and  other  negroes.  The  Boers  are  the  Dutch  who 
live  in  the  Transvaal. 

COMPOSITION 
Write  a  letter  to  your  teacher  from  South  Africa. 


196 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


59.   THE   INTERIOR   OF   AFRICA 


Lakes  and  Forests.  —  Once  more  look  at  your  map  of 
Africa,  on  page  191,  and  find  a  "  land  of  lakes  "  at  the 
sources  of  the  Nile  River.     You  can  count  here  a  num- 
ber of  lakes  of  varied  shapes  and  sizes,  most  of  them  in 
the  Hot  Belt.     Around  them  live  many  tribes  of  strange 
black  people,   and   here 
is    the    home    of    "big 
game,"   as    the   hunters 
call  the  native  animals. 

The  Negroes.  — Around 
the  northern  end  of  Lake 
Nyassa  lives  a  tribe  of 
negroes  not  very  dark 
in  color.  They  are  pleas- 
ant people  and  build  neat 
and  pretty  huts.     Some 

of  the  huts  are   square  r  Lak( 

and  some  round.     Many 

rest  upon  clay  foundations,  and  have  a  drain  to  draw- 
off  the  water  when  it  rains.  These  people  work  skilfully 
in  metal.  They  are  prosperous  and  have  cattle,  goats, 
and  sheep.  They  raise  various  kinds  of  vegetables,  and 
play  with  some  skill  upon  simple  musical  instruments. 

Most  of  the  people  in 
Central  Africa  have  no 
idea  of  time;  they  would 
not  do  an  hour's  work,  if 
promised  a  fine  watch. 
They  are  happy  and  have 
scarcely  any  wants.  One 
stick  makes  them  a  spear ; 
two  sticks  rubbed  together 
make  a  fire  j  fifty  sticks 
and  a  few  leaves  make  a 
house ;  the  bark  taken  from 
these  sticks  makes  the  few 
clothes  needed;  the  fruits 
which  hang  upon  these 
sticks  make  the  food.     Is 


The  White  Ants.  —  The  land  north  of  Lake  Nyassa  is 
where  the  white  ants  have  their  home.  These  creatures 
live  upon  wood,  and  very  soon  destroy  anything  made  of 
that  material.  The  wooden  house  is  quickly  turned  into 
sawdust ;  leather  bags  are  also  devoured.  Nothing  defies 
them  except  tin  and  iron.  They  are  greatly  dreaded  by 
travellers.     If  there   is  a   dead  limb  on   a  tree,   these 

ants  build  a  tunnel  of 
reddish-brown  earth  up 
the  side  of  the  tree  so 
that  they  have  a  safe  pas- 
sage to  the  limb.  This 
is  made  for  protection 
from  their  many  enemies. 
Every  company  of 
white  ants  consists  of 
males,  workers,  soldiers, 
and  the  queen.  Every 
ant-worker  is  defended 
from  other  ants  by  two 
or  three  soldiers  who  have  powerful  jaws  for  fighting. 

Where  these  creatures  abound,  every  fallen  branch  is 
eaten,  and  the  floor  of  the  forests  has  a  clean  appearance 
quite  unlike  those  of  other  African  woods. 

These  white  ants  dig  out  great  underground  tunnels 
and  mine  the  earth  to  the 


A  Lion 


it  any  wonder,  then,  that  men  who  need  so  little  should 
work  so  little  ? 

These  people  are  so  ignorant  that  they  are  filled  with 
awe  to  see  a  man  button  his  coat  or  strike  a  match. 
Nothing  astonishes  them  more  than  to  see  a  person  set 
fire  to  the  grass  with  a  burning  glass.  White  men  are 
looked  upon  as  spirits,  which  they  greatly  fear;  hence, 
white  men  are  rarely  killed  by  them. 


depth  of  several  feet.  The 
material  from  the  under- 
ground chambers  and  gal- 
leries is  carried  above 
ground  and  forms  great 
ant-hills.  These  are  some- 
times thirty  feet  high,  and 
as  many  feet  in  diameter. 
They  stand  out  against 
the  sky  like  columns. 
Excellent  clay  for  making 
bricks  is  supplied  by  the 
ant-hills.  Sportsmen  often 
use  them  as  a  screen  in 
hunting  lions. 

The  work  of  these  creatures  is  that  of  the  earthworm 
—  to  break  up  and  mix  the  different  layers  of  earth  and 
thus  make  the  soil  lighter  and  more  fertile. 

Lion.  —  The  terrible  roar  of  the  lion  is  heard  around 
these  lakes,  when  he  comes  down  to  the  water  in  the 
evening  for  his  daily  drink.  A  hunter  in  this  region 
says  that  one  day  he  saw  a  very  large  and  noble-looking 
lion  quietly  gnawing  the   ribs  of  a  zebra.     Some   two 


THE    INTERIOR    OF    AFRICA 


197 


hundred  vultures  formed  a  circle  around  the  lion,  keeping 
very  carefully  away  from  the  switch  of  his  tail.    Farther 

away,  and 
behind  the 
circle  of 
birds,  sat 
four  little 
jackals  in 
a  row, 
watching 
for  the 
king  of 


Elephant 

beasts  to  finish  his  supper.  The  old  lion 
leisurely  chewed  and  crunched  the  tidbits, 
regardless  of  his  audience. 

Elephant.  —  The  African  elephant  has 
very  large  ears,  which  cover  the  whole  of 
his  shoulders.  Wild  elephants  were  once  found  in  many 
parts  of  Africa,  but  now  they  are  seen  in  the  interior  only. 
On  the  bank  of  a  river  in  this  region  is  a  large  reserva- 
tion where  they  roam.  Here  they  are  sometimes  seen 
moving  nimbly  about  in  play. 

Rhinoceros.  —  In  the  interior  are  several  large  animals 
besides  the  elephant  and  lion.  One  of  these  is  the 
rhinoceros,  which,  next  to  the  elephant,  is  the  largest 
animal  in  the  world.  It  is  a  slow,  sluggish  beast  with 
poor  eyesight,  so  it  is  easily  shot,  and  only  a  few  are  left. 
It  has  a  good  friend  in  a  bird  that  utters  warning  cries 
when  a  hunter  approaches.  When  startled,  it  goes 
madly  forward  like  a  bison,  charging  right  and  left 
through  everything  which  happens  to  be  in  the  way,  be 
it  a  span  of  oxen,  a  wagon,  or  a  caravan.  The  hide  of 
this  great  brute  is  so  thick  that  it  makes  good  whips, 
shields,  and  even  canes. 

Hippopotamus.  —  In  the  rivers  and  some  lakes  in  the 
eastern  part  of  Africa  is  found  a  huge  and  unwieldy 
creature,  called    a   hippopotamus,  a  name  which   means 


"river-horse."  This  creature  often  weighs  six  thousand 
pounds.  He  has  an  enormous  mouth,  large, teeth,  narrow, 
slanting  eyes,  small  ears,  and  a  thick  hide  of  a  bright 
brown  hue.  He  is  only  five  feet  high,  because  his  legs 
are  short,  and  he  is  about  ten  feet  long.  He  frequently 
stands  in  the  mud  and  water  and  can  stay  under  water 
several  minutes  without  coming  up  to  breathe.  It  is 
hard  to  kill  him,  for  he  has  a  thick  skin  and  skull  like 
the  rhinoceros.  The  meat  of  the  young  cow  is  very 
good  eating,  tasting  somewhat  like  beef.  The  hip- 
popotamus feeds  mostly  on  grass  and  vegetables,  and 
does  much  damage  to  crops  by  his  depredations. 

Giraffe. — 
The  tallest 
animal  in 
the  world  is 
the  giraffe, 
found  in 
Africa.  His 
legs  and 
neck  are 
both  long, 
so  he  some- 
times stands 
nin  et een 
feet  high. 
His  skin  is 
beautifully 
marked    in 


Rhinoceros 


Hippopotamus 

patches  of  all  shades  from  common  fawn  to  tawny 
orange  upon  a  creamy  ground.  This  curious  animal 
has    a   long    tail,  which   ends  in  a  tuft  of  wiry  hairs. 


198 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


His  tongue  is  very  long,  as  well  as  bis  neck,  to  enable 
him  to  feed  on  the  leaves  and  twigs  of  trees.  It  is  a 
beautiful  sight  to  see  a  herd  of  giraffes  feeding.  Strange 
to  say,  the  giraffe  has  no  voice  and  makes  no  sound. 

Monkeys  are  very  numerous  in 
Africa.  They  run  in  troops  through 
the  tree  tops,  and  often  play  mis- 
chievous tricks  upon  the  natives. 
The  chimpanzee,  shown  in  the  pic- 
ture on  this  page,  is  one  kind  of 
monkey. 

REVIEW 

Tell  about  the  animals  found  in  the 
central  part  of  Africa.  Look  at  the 
pictures  of  the  giraffe  and  the  hippo- 
potamus. Tell  some  of  the  important 
differences  in  appearance  between  them. 


MAP  QUESTIONS   ON   ASIA 

1.  For  how  many  miles  does  one  inch 
stand  on  this  map  ? 

2.  How  far  is  it,  then,  from  the  Red 
Sea  to  the  Japan  Sea  ? 

3.  How     far     is     it     across     North 
America  ? 

4.  Is  Asia  about  as  large  as  North  and 
South  America  ? 

5.  Where  are  the  mountains  in  Asia  ? 

6.  Tibet  is  surrounded  by  what  ? 

7.  Where  is  Mt.  Everest,  the  highest 
mountain  in  the  world  ? 

8.  What    three    rivers    are    in     the 
north  ?   in  the  east  ?   in  the  south  ? 

9.  What  three  capes  are  on  the  north 
of  Europe  and  Asia  (Eurasia)  ? 

10.  What  three  seas  are  on  the  east  ? 

11.  What  three  peninsulas  are  at  the 
south  ? 

12.  Locate  Bombay,  Calcutta,    Hong- 
kong, Shanghai,  Peking,  and  Tokio. 

13.  What  countries  in  Asia  are  very 
warm  ? 

14.  What  parts  are  very  cold  ? 

15.  Japan  is  called  the  "  Land  of  the 
Rising  Sun."     What  reason  for  this  can  A  Chimpanzee 
you  find  on  the  map  ? 


A  Giraffe 


IN   ASIA 

60.    THE   HOME  OF    THE   CHINESE 

One  of  the  largest  countries  in  the  far-away  East  is 
China,  in  the   eastern  part  of  Asia.      My  friend  Mr. 


Smith,  who  lived  in  the  country  for  over  twenty  years, 
has  told  me  many  interesting  facts  about  the  people. 

Chinese  Children  are  well  taken  care  of.  When  one  month 
old  the  little  yellow  baby  has  his  head  shaved.  Friends 
are  invited  and  a  feast  is  given. 
At  this  time  a  fanciful  name  is  given 
to  the  child,  as  "  Number  Two,"  or 
"  Rose."  This  name  is  called  the 
"  milk-name."  After  the  first  shav- 
ing, the  hair  is  left  to  grow  on  the 
back  of  the  head  so  as  to  form 
the  beginning  of  a  pigtail. 

When  the  child  is  a  year  old, 
another  feast  is  made,  and  his  par- 
ents place  before  him  and  within 
his  reach  several  things,  such  as 
money-scales,  a  pen,  a  book,  a  pair 
of  shears,  a  foot-measure,  silver  or 
gold  ornaments,  fruit,  or  a  looking- 
glass.  Then  they  carefully  watch 
to  see  what  he  will  take  up  first,  be- 
cause that  choice  decides  what  he 
will  do  in  his  future  life. 

A  Chinese  child  is  taught  to  be 
polite,  to  bow  very  low  to  his  par- 
ents or  those  older  than  he,  and  to 
speak  of  his  papa  as  "  Venerable 
Father."  Before  the  boy  is  two 
years  old  he  is  dressed  like  his 
grandfather.  Around  his  neck  he 
wears  charms  to  keep  him  from 
evil. 

The  Chinese  have  great  respect 
for  education  and  most  villages  have 
a  school.  The  school-teacher,  who 
is  always  a  man,  is  greatly  respected. 
The  school  is  usually  in  a  room 
in  a  private  house  or  in  a  temple. 
The  schoolroom  has  little  furniture 
in  it  —  a  few  tables  and  heavy 
benches,  and  sometimes  the  life- 
sized  figure  of  the  god  of  litera- 
ture, before  which  the  children  burn 
incense  sticks  every  day. 

When  a  boy  is  five  or  six  years  of  age,  he  goes  to  school 
and  receives  a  school  name,  such  as  "  Promising  Study," 
or  "Ink-Grinder."  At  school,  for  the  first  six  months, 
he  is  taught  to  read,  not  by  learning  his  "A,  B,  C," 
because  the  Chinese  language  has  no  alphabet,  but  by 


200 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


learning  three  thousand  signs.     Each  one  of  these  stands 
for  a  word ;  as,  for  instance,  the  following :  — 


EAR 


EYE  MOUTH 


WATER 


Chinese  Children 

The  little  boy  does  not  have  any  easy  lessons  at  first 
from  a  primary  reader,  but  after  learning  his  three  thou- 
sand characters  or  word  signs,  he  reads  at  once  from  the 
wisest  and  hardest  book  in  the  country. 

School  begins  at  sunrise,  stops  for  breakfast,  continues 
till  noon,  and  keeps  several  hours  in  the  afternoon.  In 
the  hot  weather,  teacher  and  children  often  take  a  nap 
during  the  afternoon  session. 

In  school  every  pupil  studies  out  loud  at  the  top  of 
his  voice,  in  order  to  show  his  teacher  that  he  is  at  work. 
The  number  of  pupils  in  a  room  is  very  small.  When 
one  of  them  recites,  he  turns  his  back  upon  his  teacher. 
The  teacher  pronounces  a  line,  and  the  children  look  at 
the  strange  words  or  signs  and  try  to  pronounce  it  after 
him.  When  the  pupil  has  done  this  several  times,  he 
goes  from  the  teacher  and  says  the  line  aloud  to  himself, 
till  he  remembers  the  sounds  and  puts  them  with  the 
proper  signs. 


In  many  parts  of  China  the  children  learn  first  from 
"  A  Classic,"  composed  eight  hundred  years  ago,  which 
contains  about  one  thousand  Chinese  sign-words.  The 
first  sentence  is  the  following:  "Men,  at  their  birth, 
are  by  nature  radically  good ;  in  their  natures  they  ap- 
proximate, but  in  practice  differ  widely."  Another  sen- 
tence is,  "  If  men  neglect  to  learn,  they  are  inferior  to 
insects." 

The  Chinese  pupil  spends  year  after  year  in  commit- 
ting to  memory.  The  children  are  taught  separately; 
there  are  no  classes.  Ten  pupils  is  the  average  number 
in  a  school.  They  begin  to  write  by  tracing  signs  upon 
thin  paper,  using  small  brushes  instead  of  pens,  and 
India  ink,  which  is  largely  made  in  China. 

If  a  boy  goes  to  school,  he  then  stops  working.  He 
feels  above  working  with  his  hands,  except  to  cook  for 
himself.  He  is  never  taught  in  school  how  to  count 
money,  or  cash,  a  common  Chinese  coin.  Grown-up 
Chinese  scholars  have  great  trouble  in  doing  simple 
examples  in  arithmetic.  The  object  of  the  Chinese 
teacher  is  first,  to  make  his  pupil  remember;  second,  to 
make  him  remember;  third,  to  make  him  remember. 

Nearly  all  schools  are  private,  and  the  parents  pay  the 
teacher  a  small  sum  of  money,  not  more  than  five  or  ten 


Chinese  Girl  with  Compressed  Feet 


THE    HOME    OF    THE    CHINESE 


201 


dollars  a  year.     They  give  him  besides  an  allowance  of 
food  and  a  little  extra  food  at  annual  festival  seasons. 

Girls.  —  Chinese  girls  do  not  receive  much  education, 
and  it  is  not  considered  at  all  necessary  for  them  to 
learn  to  read.  The  little  girls  wear  jackets  and  trousers 
of  gay  colors  with  bangles  and  chains. 

The  feet  of  the  girls  are  compressed  about  the  sixth  or 
seventh  year.  Long  bandages  are  used.  The  object  is 
not  so  much  to  make  the  foot  very  small,  as  to  cramp 
its  growth  into  a  certain  shape.  Four  of  the  toes  are 
bent  under  the  sole,  the  big  toe  being  left  free.  In  this 
way  the  instep  is  forced  upward  into  a  bulge,  or  what  is 
supposed  to  be  a  beautiful  arch.  The 
girl  must  then  walk  by  taking  short, 
quick  steps,  supporting  herself  by  lean- 
ing on  some  other  person,  or  upon  her 
umbrella  used  as  a  cane. 

Boys. — Chinese  boys  love  fun  and 
games.  They  go  through  the  streets, 
and  enjoy  the  shows  of  dancing  dolls  and 
of  shadow  figures  which  swallow  knives, 
turn  somersaults,  and  do  other  strange 
things. 

The  boys  play  "  dragon,"  by  making  a 
dragon  of  bamboo  hoops  covered  with 
cloth,  lighted  up  inside  with  lanterns  and 
held  up  on  poles.  It  can  easily  be 
turned  and  twisted  about  so  as  to  make 
it  look  alive.  Another  lively  game  is 
played  by  two  boys,  dressed  up  to  look 
like  lions,  chasing  a  third  boy  who  carries 
a  ball  and  runs  and  dodges  to  keep  it 
from  the  others.  But  the  favorite  game 
is  that  of  the  kite,  played  by  both  boys 
and  grown-up  men. 

The  kites  are  of  all  sizes  and  shapes.  They  are  made 
to  represent  bats,  butterflies,  flowers,  pagodas,  buildings, 
snakes,  birds,  trees,  men,  and  women.  Kite  day  comes 
every  year  on  the  ninth  day  of  the  ninth  month,  and  all 
the  boys  and  men  go  out  to  fly  kites. 

Chinese  children  are  often  frightened  by  their  parents 
and  told  that  unless  they  mind,  a  terrible  creature  in  the 
parent's  sleeve  will  catch  them.  The  boatman  tells  the 
children  who  call  after  him  that  he  will  pour  boiling 
water  upon  them. 

When  Chinese  children  become  of  age,  they  "go  through 
the  door."  A  door  is  placed  in  each  corner  of  the  room, 
and  a  procession  is  formed  of  priests,  musicians,  and  the 
youth  or  the  maiden.     They  go  through  the  doors  and 


A  Chinese  Boy 


round  and  round  the  room  many  times.  "  Coming  of 
age  "  does  not  mean  that  the  child  is  free  to  do  as  he 
pleases.  He  must  obey  his  parents  as  long  as  they  live, 
or  be  punished.  All  his  wages  go  to  them,  and  his  busi- 
ness is  managed  by  them  while  they  live. 

Adults.  —  The  ordinary  Chinaman  is  a  very  queer  man. 
He  does  things  and  thinks  so  differently  from  the  people 
in  our  own  country  !  Many  of  his  ways  are  just  the  op- 
posite of  ours.  When  a  Chinaman  makes  a  call,  he  keeps 
his  hat  on,  in  order  to  be  polite.  He  goes  up  to  his  host, 
closes  his  fist,  and  shakes  his  own  hands.  He  begins  his 
dinner  with  nuts  and  sweetmeats,  and  ends  it  with  soup. 
He  pays  his  doctor  when  he  is  well  in- 
stead of  when  he  is  sick. 

The  Chinese  read  their  books  from  the 
back  toward  the  front,  from  the  top  to 
the  bottom,  following  the  columns  from 
right  to  left.  The  title  of  the  book  is  at 
the  bottom  of  the  page,  and  the  foot-notes 
are  at  the  top.  "When  we  would  say, 
"  How  do  you  do  ?  "  they  say,  "  Have  you 
eaten  rice  ?  " 

Chinese  Habits.  —  The  Chinese  have 
many  good  qualities.  They  are  the  most 
patient  of  people.  The  student  goes  on 
year  after  year,  taking  his  examinations 
for  a  degree,  until  sometimes  he  becomes 
eighty  or  ninety  years  old,  or  dies  in  the 
attempt.  He  makes  a  good  hunter,  fisher, 
or  beggar.  Chinese  servants  rarely  com- 
plain. They  are  willing  to  work  a  long 
time  for  small  rewards.  They  rise  early 
and  work  late  in  China  just  as  we  see 
them  do  in  the  laundry  business  here. 
They  should  therefore  be  called  very  in- 
dustrious, or  as  one  says,  "  They  have  a  passion  for  work." 
They  are  very  economical  and  can  live  comfortably 
upon  a  few  cents  a  day.  The  fuel  used  in  cooking  consists 
usually  of  leaves,  straws,  stalks,  and  roots  of  the  crops. 
This  fuel  is  largely  gathered  by  the  children.  Even  the 
dead  leaves  are  picked  from  the  trees.  Small  children 
go  naked  in  summer  to  save  their  clothes.  The  wheel- 
barrows creak  to  save  the  oil.  They  cannot  afford  clocks 
and  so  tell  the  time  of  day  by  the  sun.  They  live  al- 
most entirely  upon  rice,  beans,  vegetables,  and  fish. 
Beef  and*  mutton  are  rarely  eaten. 

The  Chinese  are  very  cheerful  and  contented.  They  be- 
lieve "  What  can't  be  cured  must  be  endured."  They  are 
ready  talkers,  and  whether  they  are  old  friends  or  per- 


202 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


feet  strangers  makes  no  difference.  There  is  little  sym- 
pathy among  them  for  those  who  are  suffering,  and  they 
have  a  habit  of  laughing  when  a  beloved  friend  dies. 

Homes.  —  There  are  few  comforts  in  the  homes  of  the 
poorer  Chinese,  in  which  respect  they  are  far  behind  the 
Japanese.  Their  houses  are  not  warmed,  even  in  very 
cold  weather.  They  have  few  articles  in  the  kitchen,  and 
cook  only  one  kind  of  food  at  a  time.  Their  benches 
are  narrow ;  their  chairs  very  uncomfortable.  Their 
shoes  are  so  made  and  the  roads  so  poor 
that  they  stay  at  home  when  the 
weather  is  bad. 

All  business  is  gen- 
erally    suspended 
during    a     rain. 
"  Stopped    by 
the  rain  !  "  is 
a  common  ex- 
cuse.     Even 
their    money 
is   constantly 
changing   in 
value,      which 
makes     travelling 
through  the  country 
very  annoying.    "Cash" 
to  the  value  of  one  dollar 
weighs  not  less  than  eight 
pounds.     The  standard  of 
comfort  and  convenience  in 
China  is  the  same  that  it  was  three  hundred  years  ago. 

The  Chinese  are  usually  spoken  of  by  those  who  live 
with  them  for  a  long  time,  as  very  insincere.  They  are 
not  apt  to  speak  the  truth  or  to  believe  it  when  others 
speak  it.     A  fact  is  hard  to  get  in  China. 

A  Chinese  City.  —  The  buildings  in  a  Chinese  city  are 
crowded  together.  The  streets  are  narrow  and  carriages 
cannot  pass  through  most  of  them.  Sidewalks  are  very 
uncommon.  Mats  are  often  stretched  across  the  street 
from  one  building  to  another,  to  keep  out  the  terrible 
heat.  A  Chinese  city  is  apt  to  be  dirty,  and  foul  smells 
abound. 

Pedlers  are  seen  everywhere,  and  from  them  almost 
everything  can  be  bought.  They  usually  carry  a  gong 
which  they  beat  to  call  attention  to  their  wares. 

Canton  is  now  the  largest  city  in  China.  It  is  perhaps 
the  cleanest.  The  older  part  of  the  city  is  surrounded 
by  a  wall  seven  miles  in  length.  This  wall  has  sixteen 
gates  and  every  gate  has  a  name.     The  houses  are  very 


On  the  Canton  River,  where  the  Chinese  live  on  Boats  for  Houses 


near  together,  and  most  of  the  streets  very  narrow,  often 
not  more  than  six  or  eight  feet  wide.  Strange  names  are 
given  to  the  streets,  like  "  Golden  Flowers,"  "  Green  Pea 
Street,"  "  Dragon  Street." 

Thousands  and  thousands  of  Chinese  in  Canton  live  on 
the  river.  There  are  miles  and  miles  of  river  boats,  used 
as  houses,  where  children  are  born  and  grow  old,  knowing 
no  other  kind  of  home.  When  the  children  are  young, 
they  are  tied  by  ropes  to  the  masts  of  the  boats  to  keep 
them  from  falling  overboard. 

There  are  many  other  very  large 
cities  in  China,  among  them 
the     capital    city,    Pe- 
king,  which  is   the 
home  of  the  Em- 
peror.     Life  in 
these  cities  is 
very    much 
like    life    in 
Canton. 


LANGUAGE 
LESSON 

Write  a  review 
story  of  the  Chinese 
children.  ' 
Imagine  you  are  living  in 
a  Chinese  village,  and  write 
a  letter  from  that  place  to 
your  teacher  telling  about 
your  life. 


61.    JAPAN,  THE  LAND  OF  THE  RISING  SUN 

Off  the  coast  of  China  is  a  group  of  many  islands, 
known  as  the  "  Land  of  the  Rising  Sun,"  or  Japan. 

Children.  —  This  country  has  been  called  "  the  Paradise 
for  children."  Children  there  are  called  by  parents 
"treasure-flowers,"  and  the  Japanese  spend  much  time 
in  making  them  happy,  father  and  mother  playing  with 
them  by  the  hour.  When  seven  days  old,  the  baby  re- 
ceives a  name.  This  name  is  changed  when  he  is  seven 
years  old,  and  again  when  he  is  fifteen,  as  is  the  Chinese 
custom.  The  Chinese  and  Japanese  children  look  some- 
what alike,  as  both  have  sloping  eyes  and  a  yellow  tinge 
to  the  skin.  The  Japanese  children  are  more  apt  to  be 
of  a  brownish  yellow  hue. 

Chinese  children  grow  up  to  be  much  taller  and  heavier 
than  the  Japanese,  and  the  Japanese  never  wear  pigtails 
like  their  Chinese  neighbors. 


JAPAN,    THE    LAND    OF    THE    RISING    SUN 


Some  travellers  say  that  the  Japanese  baby  and  the 
Hindu  baby  never  cry ;  but  it  would  probably  be  nearer 
the  truth  to  say  that  they  seldom  cry,  because  they  are 
so  comfortable.  They  are  both  dressed  in  loose,  flowing 
garments,  with  no  pins  to  prick  or  strings  to  cut.  Chil- 
dren here  are  rarely  scolded  or  whipped,  and  yet  they 
are  usually  obedient. 

Young  children  are  carried  about  a  good  deal,  often  on 
the  backs  of  their  sisters,  who  run  and  play  at  the  same 
time.  (See  colored  picture  of  Japanese  children  on  first 
page.)  This  is  one  thing  that  prevents  much  crying,  as 
the  child's  attention  is  largely  occupied  with  what  is 
going  on  around  him. 

The  Japanese  baby  does  not  learn  to  creep,  but  to  sit 
on  his  heels.  When  he 
is  about  four  months  old, 
he  eats  rice  for  the  first 
time;  and  rice  he  will 
eat  every  day  of  his  life 
afterward. 

Almost  the  first  words 
a  child  learns  are 
"  please"  and  "thank 
you."  In  the  morning 
he  bows  his  head  to  the 
ground  to  his  father  and 
mother.  By  the  time  he 
is  ten  years  old,  he  has 
become  very  polite,  and 
would  never  think  of 
saying,  "I  don't  want 
to,"  "  I  won't,"  "  I 
sha'n't." 

Many  story-books  and 
Mother  Goose  books  are  supplied  to  the  children  by  their 
indulgent  parents.  They  bring  their  joys  and  sorrows 
to  father  and  mother  to  be  shared  or  healed.  They  are 
taught  to  be  very  patriotic.  The  boy  baby  has  a  banner 
standard,  to  remind  him  that  he  must  become  a  soldier. 
When  children  are  about  ten  years  old,  they  begin  to  take 
up  their  share  of  the  family  work. 

School.  —  Much  attention  is  paid  here  to  education. 
The  Japanese  children  go  to  school  at  seven  o'clock  in 
the  morning,  and  come  home  for  the  day  at  noon.  They 
have  all  the  afternoon  for  play  or  work.  Badly  be- 
haved pupils  have  to  be  punished,  but  they  are  never 
whipped  or  kept  after  school.  They  are  burned !  A 
little  "  moxa "  is  made  upon  the  finger  by  putting 
a  piece  of  lighted  pith  or  punk  upon  the  finger  of  the 


A  Japanese  Schoolroom 


naughty  boy,  and  allowing   it   to  burn  as  long  as  the 
teacher  thinks  best. 

Play.  —  All  children  are  encouraged  by  their  parents 
to  play  and  have  a  good  time,  and  their  parents  often 
play  with  them.  The  common  games  are  "blind  man's 
buff,"  which  they  call  "  eye  hiding,"  "  jack-stones," 
"  puss  in  the  corner,"  "  hiding  the  shoe,"  and  "  proces- 
sion." When  playing,  these  children  are  gentle  and 
kind,  and  rarely  bully  one  another. 

They  play  at  sham  battle,  where  every  boy  has  a  flag, 
and  the  object  of  each  boy  is  to  snatch  the  flags  away 
from  the  other  boys.  The  boys  walk  on  stilts  and  fire 
off  pop-guns.  In  winter,  which  comes  at  the  same  time 
as  with  us,  the  boys  in  Japan  play  in  and  on  the  snow. 

They  coast  and  slide  and 
make  snow  forts  and 
snow  men. 

Japanese  boys  play 
with  kites  as  do  the 
Chinese  boys;  but  they 
do  not  have  so  many 
differently  shaped  kites. 
They  have  a  game  with 
them,  the  point  being  to 
cut  the  string  of  the  other 
boy's  kite  while  it  is  in 
the  air.  This  is  done 
by  making  a  file  of  a  part 
of  the  string  by  covering 
it  with  powdered  glass. 
The  fallen  kite  belongs 
to  the  boy  who  cuts  the 
string ;  and  the  boy  that 
loses  his  kite,  cheerfully 
gives  it  up.  Sometimes  they  send  a  message  up  to  the 
kite.  When  it  reaches  the  kite,  a  jerk  of  the  string 
opens  a  package,  and  out  falls  a  shower  of  colored  paper. 
Both  boys  and  girls  have  a  festival  each  year.  The 
boys'  comes  the  fifth  day  of  May,  when  the  banners  fly- 
ing from  almost  every  house  are  all  in  the  shape  of 
gigantic  fishes.  Some  are  painted  blue,  some  red  or 
gray,  with  silver  scales,  and  every  one  is  shaped  to  re- 
semble a  big  carp.  These  fish  banners  are  made  of  paper 
or  cloth  and  are  hollow,  so  that  they  rise  and  sink  as  the 
wind  fills  or  empties  them.  They  look  very  natural, 
with  their  gaping  mouths,  huge  eyes,  and  fins,  as  they 
float   in  the  breeze  from  the  top  of  the  gilt  poles. 

The  carp  in  Japan  is  the  emblem  of  a  boy,  and 
also  of  good  luck.     On  the  birth  of  a  son,  the  friends 


204 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


water. 


send  or  bring    live  carp,    swimming   about   in   tubs   of 
At  this  feast,  parents  display  a  paper  fish  for 

each  son, 
and  the 
younger 
the  son 
the  larger 
the  fish. 

Girls. — 
Japanese 
girls  are 
very  win- 
ning and 
sweet,  but 
they  are 
not  con- 
sidered so 
important 
as  boys. 
They 
dress  like 
their  mo- 
thers, ex- 
cept that 
the  girls' 
dresses 

are  of  brighter  and  gayer  colors.     The  dress  is  made 

somewhat  like   a  slip  with  very  wide  sleeves,  simple, 

and  so  long  that  it  hangs  down  and  sweeps  the  floor. 

The     skirt     is     beautifully    embroidered    around    the 

lower  part,  and  the  sash,  or  obi,  is 

very  wide,  and  gaily  colored.      This 

is  the  most  useful  part  of  the  dress, 

as  from  it  hang  the  school  books,  and 

in  it  are  carried  the  fan  and  several 

dozen  paper  handkerchiefs.    The  pocket  is  made 

by  sewing  up  the  front  of  the  sleeve,  thus  mak- 
ing a  bag  of  it.     The  girls  are  very  clever  at 

stowing  things  away  in  their  pockets. 

The  hair  of  the  Japanese  girls  is  allowed  to 

grow  and  is  often  worn  in  bangs  in  front.     It 

is  done  up  in  different  styles,  according  to  their 

age  and  condition.     The  way  a  woman's  hair  is 

done  up  tells  whether  she  is  married.     A  boy's 

head   is    shaved  while  he  is  growing  up,  except 

a  tuft  of  hair  on  top,  and  perhaps  one  over  each 

ear. 

Dolls.  —  The  girls  are  very  fond  of  playing 

With    dolls.       They   have  dolls   of    all   sizes   and        A  Japanese  Girl  in  a  Kimono 


Fish  Banners  for  the  Boys'  Festival 


kinds.  Some  of  them  can  walk  and  some  can  dance. 
They  are  taken  out  to  tea,  dressed  and  undressed,  put  to 
bed,  nursed  as  if  sick,  and  treated  in  all  respects  as  if 
they  were  living  beings. 

On  the  third  of  March  comes  the  girls'  festival,  called 
the  Dolls'  Festival.  The  shops  at  this  time  of  the  year 
are  full  of  dolls,  and  parents  go  with  the  children  to  buy 
dolls  and  doll  furniture.  Then  the  storehouse  is  opened 
and  dolls  by  the  dozen  are  brought  out.  Tables  are  pre- 
pared, and  the  dolls  are  set  out  with  their  toys,  and 
with  flowers  and  food.  Many  of  these  dolls  are  dressed 
to  represent  people  in  different  stations,  or  noted  his- 
torical persons,  such  as  the  emperor  or  empress,  or  some 
well-known  general  or  poet. 

Some  of   the   Japanese   girls    learn   to   dance   when 
very  young,  and  do  it  gracefully.     They  are  frequently 
taught  fancy  steps,  and  show  great  freedom  and  grace  in 
their  movements.     Their  little  bodies  sway  over  to  one 
side  and  then  come  back  to  the  right  angle.     They  seem 
to  rise  from  the  ground  on  their  long,  wing-like  sleeves, 
and  then  strike  it  in  anger  with  their  little  white  heels. 
They  turn  and  twist  and  whirl  their  skirts  like  a  wheel. 
Dress.  —  The    Japanese    men    and   women,    both    old 
and    young,  wear   a   garment    like    our    long    dressing- 
gown,  called  a  kimono.     It  is  sewn  together  so  loosely 
that  it  can  be  taken  to  pieces  when  it  is  washed.     The 
women  wear  dark-colored  ones,  with 
a    purple  or    striped  sash;   but   the 
girls  dress   in    such  brilliant   colors 
that  they  remind  one  of  Indians  in 
their  graceful  picturesqueness.     The 
women  take  great  pains  in  dressing 
their  hair.      The  people  wear  socks 
made  of  a  white  cotton  material,  with 
a  division  for  the  great  toe,  like  that 
which    our    mittens     have    for    the 
thumb.     Through  this  the  thong  is 
passed  that  keeps  on  the  clog,  or  soft- 
soled  shoe;  but  it  keeps  it  on  only 
when  the  wearer  shuffles  along.     If 
obliged  to  run,  he  goes  barefooted, 
or  uses  straw  sandals. 

Instead  of  shaking  hands,  the 
Japanese  make  deep  bows  to  each 
other.  If  a  woman  makes  a  present, 
both  giver  and  receiver  bow  to  the 
floor.  Politeness  is  common  to  all 
classes  of  people  in  Japan  and  this 
makes  life  there  very  agreeable. 


JAPAN,    THE    LAND    OF    THE    RISING    SUN 


205 


Customs.  —  Many  of  the  ways  of  Japan  seem  strange  to 
us  who  live  in  America.  The  workmen  sit  down  to  work 
more  than  ours  do.  Screws  and  nuts  turn  in  the  opposite 
way  from  ours.  .In  building  a  house,  the  roof  is  first 
made  on  the  ground  and  then  raised  on  bamboo  poles. 
The  houses  are  made  principally  of  wood  and  paper. 


Japanese  Girls  in  a  jinrikisha 

Horses  wear  straw  shoes 
tied  on  with  strings.  The 
horse  is  backed  into  his 
stall. 

Grown-up  people  ride  in 
baby  carriages  drawn,  not 
by  horses,  but  by  men.  In 
the  cities  these  men  are 
now  dressed  in  dark  blue 
cotton,  and  wear  big,  mush- 
room hats.  They  generally 
go  on  a  run  and  splash  gaily 
in  and  out  of  the  puddles. 
As  they  hurry  around  the 
corners  they  utter  sharp 
cries  to  warn  the  foot- 
passengers  and  other  baby-carriage  men.  These  car- 
riages are  called  jinrikishas,  which  means  man-car- 
riages. Most  foreigners  like  this  method  of  moving 
from  place  to  place.  The  men  can  run  fifteen  miles 
in  a  little  over  two  hours,  —  about  as  fast  as  a  horse 
would  draw  a  carriage.  They  make  a  journey  of  forty 
miles  in  a  day. 

Houses.  —  The  Japanese  are  small  in  size,  the  men 
being  no  taller  nor  larger  than  our  women.  Their  houses 
are    therefore   small,   and   sometimes    seem    like   dolls' 


Interior  of  a  Japanese  House :  notice  the  Sliding  Paper  Walls 


houses.  They  are  usually  one  story  high,  and  have  no 
doors,  no  chimneys,  no  stoves,  furnaces,  nor  cellars,  and 
no  windows,  unless  you  call  a  screen,  with  a  piece  of 
paper  stretched  over  it,  a  window.  The  strongest  and 
most  important  part  of  the  house  is  the  roof.  These 
houses  are  not  made  to  be  very  firm,  but  are  elastic,  so  as 
to  withstand  the  shocks  from  the  frequent  earth- 
quakes. The  wealthy  have  very  beautiful  gardens 
about  their  houses. 

The  side  of  the  house  next  to  the  street  is  usually 
made  of  paper  stretched  upon  frames,  which  can  be 
slid  back  and  thus  open  the  front  room  to  the  gaze 
of  the  passers-by.  All  the  rooms  are  divided  inside 
by  these  paper  screens,  which  are  usually  drawn  out 
in  the  night  and  slid  back  in  the  daytime.  If  you 
wish  to  go  out  of  your  room,  or  out-of-doors,  you 
simply  move  away  one  side  of  the  room  and  walk 
out.  There  is  no  privacy  in  such  a  house.  One 
can  always  hear  what  is  said  in  the  next  room ;  but 
the  Japanese  do  not  mind  that. 

As  yon  see  in  the  picture,  the  house  can  be  made 
in  the  daytime  into  one 
large  room  or  grand  saloon. 
The  size  of  a  room  or  of  a 
house  is  arranged  by  the 
number  of  mats  which  can 
be  spread  upon  the  floor. 

The  Japanese  have  little 
furniture  in  the  rooms,  and 
very  few  pictures.  If  they 
own  several  pictures,  they 
rarely  show  more  than  one 
at  a  time,  the  others  being 
kept  in  the  store-room. 
They  usually  sit  upon  the 
floor,  which  is  covered  with 
clean,  soft  straw  mats,  so 
fine  that  foreigners  in  a 
little   while   learn    to  use 


them,  especially  in  hot  weather. 

Tea  is  made  by  the  heat  from  a  charcoal  brazier,  which 
is  carried  from  one  room  to  another.  Most  of  the  cook- 
ing is  done  over  a  small  bed  of  coals  placed  in  a  box  of 
sand,  sunk  in  the  centre  of  the  floor. 

Meals. — The  meals  are  served  in  tiny  bowls  about 
the  size  of  tea-cups,  upon  a  small  table  which  stands 
only  a  few  inches  above  the  floor,  and  the  persons  eat- 
ing sit  upon  the  floor.  A  regular  meal  in  a  Japanese 
hotel  may  consist  of  cold  soup,  hot  soup,  curry,  rice,  tiny 


206 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


bits  of  radish,  ginger,  cooked  chestnuts,  two  kinds  of  fish, 
and  little  cups  of  tea.  The  food  is  eaten  with  chop- 
sticks, which  foreigners  find  it  hard  to  use.  The  Japanese 
rarely  eat  bread  and  butter,  potatoes,  pies,  or  custards; 
they  do  not  usually  drink  milk  or  coffee,  but  are  fond 
of  tea  without  milk  and  sugar. 

Going  to  Bed.  —  When  the  Japanese  are  ready  to  go  to 
bed  they  usually  take  a  hot  bath  and  put  on  their  day 
clothes.  As  many  bedrooms  as  are  needed  are  made  by 
moving  screens  so  as  to  divide  off  one  room  after  another. 
Thick  quilts  are  spread  over  the  soft  mats  upon  the  floor. 
A  wooden  pillow,  with  a  wad  of  paper  on  top,  is 
placed  at  the  head,  which  must  be  toward 
the  north.  Near  the  head  is  placed 
some  food  and  a  light,  which  burns 
all  night,  for  the  Japanese  are  afraid 
of  the  darkness.  Over  their  day 
clothes  they  put  on  a  long  wad- 
ded wrapper;  for  their  houses 
are  not  heated.  Over  this  they 
draw  another  quilt  and  go  to 
sleep. 

In  the  morning  the  members 
of  the   household   get   up,  roll 
the   quilts,  pillows,  and  wrap- 
pers into  packages  and  put  them 
in  a  closet,  slide  back  the  screens, 
and  the  house  is  in  perfect  order 
for  the  daytime.     The  wooden  pil 
low  is  used  by  the  women  to  protect 
their  hair.    The  men  use  a  hard  bolster, 

Japan  is  a  most  interesting  country 
The  people  are  very  active,  quick,  and  pro 
gressive.     You  will  learn  more  about  these 
people  in  the  large  geography. 


Maseh  and  his  Mother 


LANGUAGE  LESSON 
Write  what  you  can  remember  about  Japanese  children. 
Tell  other  facts  that  you  have  learned  about  Japan. 

62.    LIFE  IN  INDIA 

In  the  southern  part  of  Asia  is  a  great  peninsula,  the 
three  sides  of  which  are  each  about  two  thousand  miles 
long.  It  lies  at  the  foot  of  the  highest  range  of  moun- 
tains in  the  world.  This  country  is  called  India,  and  it 
is  about  half  the  size  of  the  United  States. 

The  people  of  India  are  divided  into  several  classes,  or 
castes,  and  a  person  of  one  caste  will  have  nothing  to  do 
with  those  of  a  lower  caste. 


Childhood.  —  There  was  born  in  this  strange  land,  one 
hot  day,  a  baby  boy,  who  was  at  first  called  Laska.  His 
home  was  a  leaf-thatched  cottage,  the  walls  of  which  were 
made  of  mud,  which  becomes  hard  in  ^this  dry  climate. 
A  great  feast  was  given,  and  the  priest  made  an  offering 
of  bran  and  mustard  to  the  god  of  fire.  Then,  if  the 
stars  were  favorable,  he  helped  the  parents  choose  a  suit- 
able name.  The  name  was,  as  is  usual,  that  of  some 
favorite  god.  If  the  baby  should  be  ill,  the  mother 
would  not  send  for  a  doctor,  but  she  would  put  a  pan  of 
rice  in  the  street,  believing  that  any  one  who  touched  the 
pan  would  carry  away  the  illness  from  her  dear 
baby  boy. 

When  Laska  was  six  months  old,  there 

was  another  feast,  and  friends  gathered 

to  see  baby  eat  his  first  dish  of  rice. 

Laska  was  so  good-natured  that  he 

rarely  cried,  even  if  he  had  to  lie 

all  day  in  his  cradle  or  be  carried 

on   his   mother's   hip  while   she 

was  at  work.      It  was  so  warm 

that   he  was  not  troubled  with 

clothes  till  he  was  three  or  four 

years  old.     His  parents  thought 

so  much  of  him  that  they  put 

on,  in  place  of  garments,  all  the 

jewelry  they  could  buy.    He  had 

rings,  chains,  necklaces,  armlets, 

bracelets,  and  anklets,  just  like  his 

sister. 

Laska  played  with  a  little  toy  ele- 
phant made  of  wood,  feeding  it  with 
rice  and  giving  it  water  to  drink.  He  had 
a  funny-looking  wooden  cow  also,  and  a 
dog  with  a  red  head  and  tail.  As  he  grew 
older  he  and  his  boy  friends  played  puss- 
in-the-corner,  odd  and  even,  and  blindman's-buff.  Boys  in 
India  also  play  jackstones  with  nuts,  marbles,  and  tops. 
They  fly  kites  without  tails,  and  make  mud  pies. 

School.  —  At  three  years  of  age  the  boy  was  sent  to 
school.  His  name  was  now  changed  to  Maseh,  and  he 
put  on  a  muslin  cap  and  coat.  He  was  not  expected  to 
run  about  and  play,  for  that  would  make  him  a  beggar. 
His  schoolhouse  was  under  a  tree.  Sometimes  the 
schoolhouses  are  in  a  thatched  shed.  His  slate  or  paper 
was  the  sand  on  which  he  sat  and  in  which  he  worked 
his  examples.  His  lessons  were  learned  "  by  heart "  and 
shouted  to  his  teacher,  as  is  the  way  in  schools  in  the 
East.     Only  a  few  of  the  boys  in  India  go  to  school. 


LIFE    IN    INDIA 


207 


Zeida.  —  Maseh's  sister  Zeida  was  very  shy.  When 
she  was  old  enough  to  go  to  school,  she  was  dressed  in 
gauze  and  loaded  with  jewelry.  At  home,  she  played 
with  a  doll  made  of  wood  and  painted  in  bright  colors. 
If  Zeida  had  been  wealthy,  she  would  have  had  many 
dolls  and  a  room  for  them,  and  her  parents  would  make 
feasts  for  the  dolls. 

At  a  very  early  age  the  father  selects  a  husband  for 
his  daughter  and  her  school  days  end.  Then  she  wears 
a  veil,  the  ends  of  her  fingers  are  dyed  pink,  and  she 
lives  apart  from  her  friends.  Her  mother  now  teaches 
her  cooking  and  religion.  A 
man's  wife  in  India  always  cooks 
and  serves  the  food  for  her  hus- 
band, no  matter  how  many  ser- 
vants she  may  have.  She  never 
eats  with  him. 

Village  Life.  —  Maseh  and 
Zeida  live  in  a  small  village.  In 
India  such  a  place  is  a  little 
world  in  itself.  A  large  part  of 
the  people  live  in  little  villages. 
There  is  usually  a  cluster  of 
cocoanut,  tamarind,  and  mango 
trees ;  a  group  of  dwellings 
made  of  palms  or  mud, — some 
thatched,  some  tiled ;  a  small 
temple  in  the  centre,  and  near  it 
a  tank  of  water  for  bathing  pur- 
poses. There  will  be,  perhaps, 
sixty  houses  and  three  hundred 
people  in  such  a  village. 

The  great  man  of  the  town  is 
called  the  headman.  He  owns 
about  fifty  acres  of  land.  He . 
is  a  kind  of  judge,  lawyer,  and 
collector  of  taxes.  His  assistant 
keeps  the  accounts  and  writes  letters  for  the  people. 
There  is  a  man  like  our  policeman  who  watches 
the  village  at  night.  Another  important  man  is  the 
astrologer,  who  tells  the  people  by  the  stars  when  to 
begin  to  build  a  house,  what  day  to  select  for  the 
marriage  of  a  daughter,  or  who  has  been  stealing  the 
jewelry. 

The  temple  has  two  priests,  who  live  upon  the  gifts  to 
the  god  worshipped  there.  The  schoolmaster  is  also  im- 
portant. He  knows  by  heart  thousands  of  stanzas.  He 
teaches  each  boy  spelling,  reading,  arithmetic,  and  writ- 
ing.    He  governs  the  children  not  only  in  school  but  at 


Two  Priests  of  the  Temple 


home.     If  a  boy  behaves  badly  at  home,  his  parents  send 
for  the  schoolmaster  to  make  him  mind. 

The  village  doctor  tells  sick  people,  in  verse,  what  to 
do  for  themselves,  and  gives  them  many  kinds  of  pellets. 
He  always  asks  the  relatives  to  go  to  the  temple  and 
make  offerings  to  the  gods.  Besides  the  carpenter,  who 
makes  ploughs,  carts,  boxes,  and  houses  for  the  people, 
and  the  blacksmith,  who  makes  axes,  scales,  spades,  and 
crowbars,  there  is  in  each  village  a  herdsman.  He  is  a 
very  busy  man,  looking  after  his  own  cattle  and  those  of 
his  neighbors.  He  milks  them  all,  drives  them  to  pas- 
ture, and  goes  after  them. 

The  washerman  and  his  wife 
wash  the  village  clothes  in  the 
river,  beating  them  on  stones. 
They  are  paid  in  rice.  The  potter 
makes  the  lamps,  cooking  dishes, 
and  drinking  vessels,  and  mends 
these  things  when  they  are 
broken.  The  barber  is  usually 
a  musician  also,  and  he  arranges 
marriages.  The  storekeeper, 
whose  shop  is  called  a  bazaar, 
is  a  money  lender  and  charges 
high  rates.  The  goldsmith  is  a 
busy  man,  for  the  people  love 
ornaments. 

Below  the  villagers  in  rank  are 
those   who  work    on    the   land. 
They   are   required   to  live  out- 
side  the  village.     They  plough 
the  land,  sow  the  rice,  water  and 
weed,  reap   and   gather.      They 
work  for  the  same  family  from 
generation  to  generation,  and  re- 
ceive  as   wages   about  one   dol- 
lar's worth  of  rice  each  month. 
At  the  village  well  in  the  evening,  men  are  washing 
clothes,  women  are  washing  their  cooking  utensils,  and 
the  water  seller  is  filling  his  skin  bottle  and  then  carry- 
ing it  away  on  his  brown  back. 

The  women  in  the  village  rise  early,  sweep  the  house, 
and  then  go  to  the  temple  tank  to  bathe  and  to  wash 
their  clothes.  Here  they  talk,  laugh,  and  tell  the  news. 
Every  person  in  a  village  does  the  work  allotted  to 
him,  and  everything  goes  like  a  machine.  All  work 
hard  from  morning  till  night,  leading  peaceful,  con- 
tented lives,  happy  in  their  humble  cottage  homes,  and 
caring  nothing  for  what  goes  on  beyond  their  village. 


208 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Animals.  —  Maseh's  coun- 
try contains  some  interest- 
ing animals.  It  is  a  great 
place  for  birds,  for  the  na- 
tive people  rarely  shoot 
them.  In  the  c.ities  they 
feed  them  carefully,  and  in 
some  places  they  build 
bird-houses  on  every  street. 
These  rest  on  poles  about 


A  Tiger 

as  high  as  the 
lamp  posts.  The 
birds  find  here 
food  and  drink 
supplied  by  the 
people.  Wild 
ducks,  geese,  and 
cranes  are  fre- 
quently  seen; 
sparrows  and 
crows  are  very 
common. 

Leopards  and 
bears  are  found  in 
many   hilly    parts 


A  Leopard 


of  India  poisonous  snakes 
are  found,  and  they  kill 
thousands  of  human  beings 
every  year.  Always  when 
Maseh  thinks  of  going  in 
swimming,  he  must  find 
out  if  crocodiles  are  com- 
mon in  that  part  of  the 
river  or  in  that  pool.  As 
the  people  never  kill  any 
living  thing,  and  as  they 
are  constantly  bathing  out 
of  doors  because  it  is  so 
warm,  terrible  accidents  often  occur. 

The  third,  and  most  dangerous  of  all  the  wild 
animals,  is  the  tiger,  found  wherever  forests 
abound.  The  tiger  is  about  as  strong  as  the  lion. 
He  can  crush  in  the  head  of  a  bullock  with  a  sin- 
gle blow  of  his  paw,  and  carry  a  large  cow  in  his 
mouth  while  running  up  the  side  of  a  mountain. 
When  the  tiger  grows  old  and  less  active,  and 
is  unable  to  catch  deer  and  such  wild  animals,  he 
takes  to  preying  upon  sheep  and  cattle,  and  even 
human  beings,  because  he  can  catch  them  more 
easily.  Then  he  becomes  very  dangerous,  and 
Maseh  calls  him  a  "  chetah,"  that  is, 
a  man-eater. 

In  some  parts  of  India  buffaloes, 
like  those  in  Africa,  are  used  in  place 
of  horses  or  oxen.  Maseh's  father 
owns  two  white  humped  cows.  These 


Elephants  that  Work 


of  India.  Wild  elephants  were  once  very  common,  and 
are  now  sometimes  found  wandering  in  herds  through 
the  dense  forests.  Tame  elephants  are  employed  to  some 
extent  to  move  and  pile  up  lumber,  to  carry  stores  for  the 
army,  and  to  hunt  the  tiger. 

Maseh   and  his   family   have  to  look  out  constantly 
for  danger  from  three  kinds  of  creatures.     In  all  parts 


animals  draw 
the  wooden 
plough,  haul 
the  cart-loads 
of  rice,  and 
take  the  family 
on  journeys. 


Maseh's  Father  ploughing 


AUSTRALIA  AND  STRANGE  ISLANDS 


209 


63.     AUSTRALIA    AND    STRANGE    ISLANDS 

Crossing  the  Pacific  Ocean.  —  One  day  we  stepped  on 
board  a  steamer  in  the  harbor  of  San  Francisco,  and 
sailed  through  the  Golden  Gate  into  the  Pacific  Ocean. 
Our  ship  was  headed  toward  a  group  of  islands  two 
thousand  miles  away,  belonging  to  the  United  States. 
They  are  called  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  and  their  position 
is  marked  on  the  map  of  the  Western  Hemisphere  by 
the  letter  H.     (See  map,  page  82.) 

As  we  sailed  day  after  day  over  the  wide  Pacific,  we 
noticed  that  it  was  very  blue  by  day,  and  at  night  fire- 
like in  color  from  the 


Trees,  Fruits,  and  Flowers.  —  The  vegetation  in  and 
about  Honolulu  is  tropical  and  very  interesting.  There 
is  one  long  avenue  of  trees  which  have  tall,  dark  red 
trunks.  The  tops  are  umbrella-shaped  and  they  bear 
bright  scarlet  flowers.  Another  tree,  called  "  the  golden 
rain,"  has  masses  of  yellow  bloom  and  deep  green  leaves. 
Some  trees  have  royal  purple  flowers ;  others,  flowers  of 
white  and  gold;  the  hibiscus  shows  crimson  blossoms, 
and  the  mango  tree  is  laden  with  yellow  fruit. 

The  mango  grows  on  a  wide-spreading  tree,  making  a 
dense  shade.  The  fruit  is  about  the  size  and  shape  of 
an  orange.     The  pulp  is  very  delicious.    It  is  often  made 

into  sauce  and  has  the 


millions  of  small,  phos- 
phorescent creatures  it 
contains.  Jellyfish  now 
and  then  rose  to  the 
surface  of  the  water 
near  the  side  of  the 
ship,  and  flying  fish 
leaped  out  as  if  pursued 
by  an  enemy.  One 
day  a  school  of  por- 
poises entertained  us 
with  their  play. 

Hawaiian    Islands.  — 
As  the  ship  approached 
the  coast  of  one  of  the 
Hawaiian    Islands, 
mountain  tops  first  ap- 
peared, and  then  green 
slopes    and     fern-clad 
hills.      Later  cocoanut 
groves,    sugar    planta- 
tions,  and   green    pas- 
tures came  clearly  into  view.     This  island  is  called  Oahu. 
As  we  approached  the  city  of  Honolulu,  on  the  southern 
side  of  the  island,  it  seemed  half  buried  in  groves  of 
trees.     (See  map,  page  211.) 

I  The  country  around  Honolulu  is  flat,  but  a  few  miles 
aland,  bare  rugged  hills  rise  to  a  considerable  height, 
dost  of  the  streets  of  Honolulu  are  broad.  In  the  busi- 
ness part  they  are  lined  with  brick  blocks  in  which  are 
stores  containing  every  variety  of  goods.  In  the  sub- 
urbs the  houses  are  deeply  embowered  in  shrubbery. 
Most  of  the  houses  have  verandas  where  the  young 
people  dance  by  the  light  of  the  moon  to  the  soft  music 
of  the  natives.  As  we  strolled  about,  we  felt  all  the 
charm  of  this  pleasant  island  life  and  climate. 


Honolulu  Bay 


flavor  of  rhubarb. 

When  hanging  from 
the  tree,  the  breadfruit 
looks  like  a  large 
orange,  but  it  is  more 
like  a  vegetable  than 
a  fruit.  It  is  baked 
like  a  potato,  and  the 
inside  resembles  a 
sweet  potato  in  taste, 
but  the  color  is  white. 
After  leaving  this 
volcanic  island  the 
ship's  prow  was  turned 
toward  another  group 
of  islands  far  away  to 
the  south.  The  trade- 
winds  blew  regularly 
every  day,  and  the 
ocean  kept  up  a  deep, 
heaving  motion.  There 
was  no  storm  to  disturb 
the  scene,  and  only  one  ship  passed  us  in  a  week.  Won- 
derful sunsets  were  seen  day  after  day. 

Samoan  and  Society  Islands.  —  The  Samoan  Islands  ap- 
peared in  sight  on  the  seventh  day  and  we  stopped  a  few 
hours  at  Apia,  the  principal  town.  The  natives  of  these 
islands  are  fine-looking  men  and  women.  Their  houses 
are  simple  huts  with  thatched  roofs  and  floors  of  stone. 
Matting  is  the  usual  bed.  One  of  the  smaller  islands 
in  this  group  now  belongs  to  the  United  States. 

East  of  the  Samoan  Islands  is  another  group  called 
the  Society  Islands.  The  location  of  these  islands  is 
shown  by  the  letter  S  on  the  map  of  the  Western  Hemi- 
sphere (page  82).  We  reached  them  in  a  small  steamer 
from  Apia.     The  name  of  the  principal  town,  Papeite, 


210 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


the  day  is  five  o'clock  in  the  morning,  when  the 
people  go  to  the  market.  The  mayor  and  other 
officials  are  also  out  at  that  time.  The  women  are 
dressed  in  bright  colors  and  wear  sweet-smelling 
flowers  in  great  abundance,  as  the  picture  of  a 
family  in  Tahiti  plainly  shows.  The  color  of  the 
skin  is  tawny,  sometimes  almost  fair.  The  hair 
and  eyes  are  usually  black. 

Copra,  the  meat  of  the  cocoanut,  is  the  principal 
production  carried  from  many  of  the  small  islands 
in  the  Pacific  Ocean  to  Europe  and  the  United 
States.     From  it  soap  and  oil  are  obtained. 

In  many  of  the  coral  islands  where  the  water  is 
not  fit  to  drink,  the  natives  drink  cocoanut  milk. 
They  become  quick  and  nimble  in  climbing  trees 


Apia,  Samoa 

on  the  largest  island,  means  "  a  basket  of  water."  The 
island  is  called  Tahiti.  The  streets  of  the  town  are 
heavily  shaded  with  double  rows  of  tropical  trees.  The 
common  trees  on  this  island  are  orange,  lemon,  bread- 
fruit, mango,  and  cocoanut.  Several  cocoanut  trees  are 
shown  in  the  picture  at  the  right.  The  native  huts 
are  thatched  with  palm-leaves.     The  fashionable  hour  of 


1 

iff  ctt#*fl 

w\ 

1 

I 

WjL 

1 

1  jhfc 

m 

III 

ffi 

li 

'■;1H    1  Jji 

JfLrtM^ 

1  J^ 

i 

ft" 

7  mm:    i 

'  '^fe^f 

4 

W 

tS 

m 

m 

?  i 

^^.  - 

v 

tt 

•-v'i 

.    . 

. 

- 

MM5g*l?  T  ■ 

A  Tahiti  Family 


A  Tahiti  Boy  climbing  a  Cocoanut  Tree 

for  fresh  nuts.  In  doing  this  they  move  hands  and  feet 
alternately,  like  the  toy  monkey  on  a  stick. 

New  Zealand.  —  Our  next  stopping-place  was  Auckland 
in  New  Zealand.  We  entered  a  pretty  harbor,  but  the 
town  is  less  attractive  than  many  other  places  in  this 
part  of  the  world.  It  is  surrounded  by  a  fertile,  hilly 
country. 

Here  we  learned  that  New  Zealand  consists  of  two 
large  islands  and  many  small  ones.  Sheep  raising  and 
gold  mining  keep  many  persons  busy.  The  natives  look 
like  gypsies.  Most  of  them  are  lazy  and  good  beggars. 
The  country  has  been  settled  largely  by  people  from 


SAMOA 

%  .    Savaii^w1!"1' 

FIJI         i 

.(Br.)         ..* 


INTERESTING  FACTS  ABOUT  AUSTRALIA,  THE  PHILIP- 
PINES.   AND   OTHER  ISLANDS 

Australia  has  little  moisture,  and  its  rivers  are  short.  It  has 
many  valuable  mines.     Australia  means  "Southern  Land." 

Wool-growing  and  mining  are  two  important  kinds  of  business. 

The  kangaroo  mother  carries  her  young  in  a  pouch. 

The  northern  part  of  Australia  is  the  hottest  part. 

October  is  the  coldest  month  of  the  year. 

Tasmania,  south  of  Australia,  is  spoken  of  as  "a  fairyland." 
Hobart,  the  largest  town,  has  a  fine  situation. 

New  Zealand  has  snow-clad  mountains  which  are  so  picturesque 
that  they  are  called  "  Alps." 

The  natives  of  the  Tonga,  or  Friendly  Islands,  wear  mats  of 
reeds  around  their  waists  and  garlands  of  flowers  about  their  necks. 

The  Philippine  Islands  contain  as  much  land  as  New  England, 
New  York,  and  New  Jersey  together.  Earthquakes  and  volcanoes 
are  common  there.  Mosquitoes  are  very  troublesome.  Snakes 
are  used  instead  of  cats  to  catch  rats.  There  are  many  different 
tribes,  and  many  languages  are  spoken.  The  weather  ia  hot.  These 
islands  are  governed  by  the  United  States. 


MAP  QUESTIONS  ON  AUSTRALIA  AND  PACIFIC  ISLANDS 

1.  In  what  direction  is  Australia  from  the  United  States  ? 

2.  How  could  you  go  to  Australia  ?     From  what  city  ? 

3.  When  it  is  night  here,  what  time  of  day  is  it  in  Australia  ? 

4.  Which  is  larger,  Australia  or  North  America  ? 

5.  How  many  miles  is  it  across  Australia  from  west  to  east  ? 

6.  What  is  the  largest  island  in  the  world  ? 

7.  How  many  groups  of  islands  are  there  in  the  Pacific  Ocean  ? 

8.  To  what  countries  do  these  islands  belong  ? 

9.  What  islands  belong  to  the  United  States  ? 

10.  Why  are  certain  islands  called  Spice  Islands  ?    Near  what 
country  are  the  Philippine  Islands  ? 

11.  What  is  the  largest  river  in  Australia  ? 

12.  Why  are  there  so  few  rivers  in  the  interior  ? 

13.  Where  did  Admiral  Dewey  win  his  great  victory  ? 

14.  Name  and  locate  four  large  cities. 

15.  Where  does  the  equator  cross  this  map? 
10.  On  what  island  is  Manila  ? 


212 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


Bourke  Street,  Melbourne,  Australia 

Great  Britain  and  Ireland.  The  mountains  along  the 
west  coast  are  very  beautiful  aud  remind  the  traveller 
of  Switzerland. 

Australia.  —  It  is  a  voyage  of  twelve  hundred  miles 
from  Auckland  to  the  nearest  seaport  of  Australia,  the 
southern  grand  division.  This  seaport,  the  city  of 
Sydney,  has  a  beautiful  harbor,  shaped  like  an  oak 
leaf.  The  shores  are  hilly  and  the  hills  nearest  the 
sea  are  dotted  with  summer  homes.  The  points  of  land 
that  we  passed  were  crowded  with  beautiful  houses. 

Sydney.  —  The  city  of  Sydney,  with  its  crooked 
streets  and  its  Common,  reminds  one  of  Boston.  The 
plans  of  the  two  cities  are  also  similar.  Its  suburbs 
are  beautiful,  but  the  bay  is  its  chief  attraction  and 
its  great  pleasure  park.  Every  holiday  finds  the 
people  on  its  waters  in  all  kinds  of  sailing  craft. 
There  is  plenty  of  coal  in  this  part  of  Australia,  and 
it  is  so  cheap  that  Sydney  is  a  great  manufacturing 
centre. 

To  see  as  much  of  the  country  as  we  could,  we 
travelled  for  several  weeks  over  the  railroads  of 
Australia.  These  are  owned  by  the  different  colonies 
and,  strange  to  say,  are  of  different  gauges,  thus 
preventing  the  passage  of  through  trains.  Even 
the  mails  have  to  be  changed  from  one  car  to 
another  every  time  a  border-line  is  crossed. 

From  Sydney  to  Melbourne  we  rode  nearly  all 
the  way  through  a  farming  country.  The  land  was 
level  or  rolling,  with  only  a  few  elevations.  Gum  and 
wattle  trees  were  frequently  seen. 


Melbourne.  —  Melbourne  is  the  largest  city  on  this 
island  grand  division.  Its  streets  we  found  very  wide, 
but  lacking  in  shade  trees. 

Climate  and  Products. — This  part  of  Australia  has  a 
dry,  healthful  climate.  The  heat  in  the  summer  is 
not  hard  to  bear.  The  soil  is  rich  and  very  productive, 
if  watered.  Wheat,  oats,  and  barley,  hops,  fruit,  and 
grass,  are  all  raised  with  profit.  Sheep  raising  and 
the  export  of  wool  and  mutton  form  a  large  business. 

The  Kangaroo.  —  The  remarkable  animal  of  the 
country  is  the  kangaroo,  noted  for  its  long  leaps  and  its 
strong  legs  and  tail.  The  mother  kangaroo  has  a  pouch 
or  pocket  in  which  she  carries  her  young  wherever 
she  goes.  For  self-defence  the  kangaroo  uses  its  long 
legs,  with  which  it  can  easily  kill  a  man. 

Adelaide.  —  Adelaide  was  reached  by  rail  from  Mel- 
bourne after  a  ride  of  several  hours.    We  were  delighted 
with  this  city  and  gave  it  the  name  of  "  White  City,"  on 
account   of   the    light-colored    stone  of  which  its  many 
public  buildings  were  made.   The  wide  streets  in  this  place 
were  very  clean,  and  were  lined  with  trees  or  shrubs. 

People.  —  The  people  of  this  country  are  a  manly  race. 
They  have  vigorous  bodies  and  bear  the  stamp  of  in- 
dependence and  self-reliance.  They  live  better,  work 
fewer  hours  each  day,  and  enjoy  outdoor  sports  to  a 
greater  extent  than  their  cousins  in  Europe. 


A  Mother  Kangaroo,  with  a  Young  Kangaroo  in  her  Pocket 


THE    PHILIPPINES 


213 


As  we  travelled  north  from  the  southern  part  of  Aus- 
tralia, we  were  at  first  surprised  to  find  that  it  grew 
warmer  instead  of  colder,  till  we  remembered  that  we 
were  in  the  south- 


ern hemisphere, 
and  were  going 
nearer  and  nearer 
to  the  Hot  Belt 
or  Tropical  Zone. 
It  was  summer 
in  Australia, 
though  we  knew 
that  it  was  win- 
ter at  home. 

New  Guinea  and 
Coral  Seas.  —  Our 
ship     next    pro- 
ceeded    to     the 
strangely  shaped 
island   called   on 
the     map     New 
Guinea.    Here  we 
found  the  bread- 
fruit   trees   with 
their  big   leaves, 
also  the  straight- 
stemmed   papaws,  the    betel   nut,   and   sago- 
palms.      The  fruit  of  the  tropical  papaw   is 
of  a  green  color.     It  looks  like  a  small  melon 
and    has  a  similar  taste.      The  juice   of  the 
fruit   and   the   sap   of   the  tree   make  tough 
meat  very  tender.     The  natives  use  the-  leaves 
in  place  of  soap  in  washing  clothes.     The  stran- 
gest animal  we  saw  here  was  the  flying-squirrel. 
It  is  small,  but  its  fur  is  beautifully  marked. 
It  has  between  the  legs  folds  of  skin  which 
are  spread  out  when  the  squirrel  jumps  from 
a  high  tree  and  which  act  as  wings. 

Pearl  Diving.  —  The  people  on  the  islands 
in  this  part  of  the  world  make  a  living  by 
collecting  pearl-shell  and  diving  for  the  pearl- 
oyster.  The  men  put  on  the  diving-dress,  and 
search  at  the  bottom  of  the  sea  for  a  bed  of  pearl-oysters. 
When  found,  the  oysters  are  sent  up  and  dumped  into  the 
boat.  In  the  large  boat  or  on  shore  the  oysters  are  opened 
and  the  pearls  are  taken  out  and  shipped  to  London.  The 
business  of  gathering  the  oysters  is  very  dangerous,  on 
account  of  the  great  pressure  of  the  water  at  a  depth 
of  one  hundred  feet  or  more. 


Java.  —  At  last  we  reached  one  of  the  largest  of  the 
islands,  called  Java.  We  greatly  enjoyed  our  stay  with 
the  Javanese.  These  people  are  small  in  size,  of  a  cop- 
pery brown  color,  with  straight,  shining,  black  hair.  They 
do  their  hair  up  in  a  handkerchief  tied  around  the  head. 
They  usually  wear  umbrella-like  hats  and  look  somewhat 
like  the  Japanese.  They  are  a  hard-working  people. 
When  at  work,  they  wear  very  little  clothing.  The  na- 
tive houses  have  a  framework  of  bamboo,  walls  of  split 
bamboo,  and  a  roof  of  grass  thatch. 

64.     THE   PHILIPPINES 

After  leaving  the  Island  of  Java,  our  steamer  took  us 
to  Hong  Kong  in  China,  and  thence  directly  to  Manila, 
the  largest  city  on  the  Philippine  Islands.  This  group 
of  islands  now  belongs  to  the  United  States. 

Manila.  —  Manila  is  on  the  island  of  Luzon,  the  largest 
of  the  group,  and  the  fourteenth  island  in  size  in  the 
world.  It  is  thirty  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  bay  to 
the  city.  As  one  sails  up  the  bay,  the  city,  which  is  on 
very  low  ground,  comes  into  view  so  suddenly  as  to  sur- 
prise one.  A  strange,  busy  sight  meets  the  eye  as  the 
vessel  nears  port.      The  bay  is  full  of  craft  of  all  sorts. 


Papaw 

nut,   and 


Street  Scene  in  Manila:  Carabaos  drawing  Carts 

Besides  foreign  steamers  and  schooners,  there  are  great 
canoes,  each  made  of  one  tree  trunk,  which  carry  cargo, 
and  small  dugouts,  with  awnings,  for  passengers.  Brown 
Malay  boatmen  in  short  trousers  push  the  canoes  and 
dugouts  up  the  bay  with  long  bamboo  poles. 

The  city  is  divided  into  Old  and  New  Manila.     Old 
Manila  is  also  called  the  citadel.     It  is  walled  in,  and 


214 


JOURNEY    GEOGRAPHY 


surrounded  by  a  moat  over  which  are 
eight  drawbridges.  It  is  a  sleepy  place. 
Inside  the  walls  are  public  buildings,  in- 
cluding the  city  hall,  the  cathedral,  and 
several  churches,  but  only  a  few  shops  and 
homes  of  the  people.  Extending  along  the 
bay,  from  the  end  of  the  wall,  is  a  drive  and 
promenade,  the  pleasure-ground  of  Manila. 
On  it  are  band  stands  and  chairs  for  public 
use.  Fine  concerts  are  often  given  in  the 
evening,  when  the  place  is  crowded  with 
gaily  dressed  people ;  but  by  day  it  is 
deserted. 

In  Xew  Manila  there  are  many  fine 
houses  standing  in  well-kept  grounds.  One 
needs  a  large  house  in  this  tropical  land,  so 
as  to  be  able  to  run  away  from  the  sun. 
Carpets  and  curtains  are  never  used,  and 
the  floors  are  made  of  polished  wood. 

Buildings  and  household  arrangements 
in  this  part  of  the  world  are  made  with 
reference  to  earthquakes.  Buildings  are 
rarely  over  two  stories  high.  The  Cathe- 
dral and  a  few  churches  are  the  only  fine  structures  in 
Manila.  When  the  earth  begins  to  shake,  all  petroleum 
lights  are  put  out,  and  cocoanut  oil  is  burned  instead. 
Heavy  pieces  of  furniture  are  often  bolted  to  the  wall 
that  they  may  not  be  thrown  over  and  injure  some  one. 
The  shells  of  a  kind  of  oyster  are  used  instead  of  glass 
for  windows,  because  they  are  not  so  easily  broken. 
These  shells  are  called  conchas. 

Philippine  Houses.  —  Many  houses  in  the  city  have  a 
central  court.  Some  are  heavily  built,  of  stone,  and  others 
are  light  and  airy  looking,  being  made  of  bamboo.    These 


A  House  made  of  Bamboo  and  Palms,  near  Manila 


A  Group  of  Filipino  Boys  and  Girls 

stand  on  piles  to  lift  them  above  the  floods  of  the  rainy 
season.  The  upper  stories  of  the  houses  are  often  made 
entirely  of  frames  filled  with  conchas,  which  slide  back, 
throwing  the  rooms  open  to  the  air.  These  stories  are 
used  by  the  family,  the  lower  floor  being  given  up  to 
servants'  rooms,  store-rooms,  shops,  and  offices.  In  the 
living-rooms,  stone  flower-pots,  full  of  palms,  ferns,  or 
flowering  plants,  are  placed  about  on  pedestals  as  orna- 
ments. 

A  Philippine  bedroom,  with  its  high-post  bedstead  and 
little  other  furniture,  seems  bare  to  us.  The  bed  nearly 
always  has  a  mosquito  bar,  and  is  usually  draped 
with  lace.  It  has  a  cane  netting  like  our  cane-seat 
chairs,  instead  of  springs.  On  this  is  laid  a  fine 
grass  mat,  the  coolest  thing  one  can  find,  one  or 
two  sheets,  a  pillow,  and  a  bolster.  To  get  into 
bed  without  mosquitoes  is  difficult. 

Baths  are  almost  necessary  to  life  in  this  hot 
land.  Large  earthen  tubs  brought  from  China  are 
found  in  the  bath-rooms  of  the  houses.  They  are 
filled  at  night  so  that  the  water  may  grow  cool 
before  morning. 

We  may  see  native  houses  in  the  small  towns 
near  Manila.  They  have  frames  and  floors  of 
bamboo,  and  roofs  and  sides  of  a  kind  of  palm.  In 
the  hot  season  they  grow  so  dry  that  they  are  easily 


THE    PHILIPPINES 


215 


•  ■ 


set  on  fire.     As  many  as  seven  thousand  of  them  in  one 
village  have  been  burned  in  two  hours. 

The  People.  — One  sees  here  many  kinds  of  people  and 
many  interesting  sights.  The  Escolta  is  the  principal 
busy  street.  It  is  crowded  with  shops,  many  of  them 
Spanish.  Ladies  do  not  often  go  shopping  on  account 
of  the  heat  and  the  dust.  They  are  glad  to  buy  from 
the  Chinese  and  other  merchants  who  bring  goods  and. 
"  notions  "  to  their  doors. 

Manila  girls  and  women 
are  often  very  attractive. 
They  have  beautiful  hair 
hanging  almost  to  their 
heels.  If  they  have  small 
feet,  they  are  very  proud. 
Their  slippers  have  no 
heels,  and  only  a  strip  of 
leather  across  the  toes. 
They  wear  no  stockings, 
and  sometimes  their  slip- 
pers are  so  small  that  some 
of  their  toes  are  crowded 
outside. 

Sometimes  the  dress  of 
the  Manila  women  is  very 
pretty.  It  consists  of  a 
bright-colored  skirt  with  a 
train,  around  which  is 
tightly  drawn  a  square  of 
black  material  from  waist 
to  knees.  The  waist  of 
the  dress  is  often  of  thin 
goods,  with  flowing  sleeves, 
and  is  used  over  an  em- 
broidered garment.  Around 
theneck  isawhite kerchief, 
with  the  ends  crossed. 

Island  Tribes.  —  The  best  of  the  Filipinos  are  the 
Tagals  of  central  Luzon.  They  keep  themselves  clean, 
and  wear  more  clothing  than  the  others.  Of  their  hair 
they  are  very  careful,  washing,  oiling,  and  scenting  it. 
Some  of  them  own  rich  bracelets  and  chains  of  gold, 
which  they  love  to  wear.  The  people  of  this  tribe  have 
light-colored  skins  and  graceful  figures.  It  is  astonishing 
how  quickly  they  learn,  especially  in  music.  These 
people  have  settled  homes,  and  the  wife  and  mother 
is  respected  by  her  husband  and  children.  The  Tagals 
love  their  sons  and  daughters,  and  desire,  above  all 
things,  that  they  be  well  educated. 


i-.  -  "» V- 


%%     ■ 


A  Bamboo  Tree 


Plant  Life.  —  Plant  life  in  the  Philippines  is  very- 
luxuriant.  The  cocoanut  palm  flourishes  on  the  low- 
lands, growing  in  very  poor  soil  where  nothing  else  will 
live.  It  brings  wealth  to  the  islanders  from  the  nuts  it 
bears.  In  some  provinces  there  are  many  of  these  trees 
and  the  business  of  making  cocoanut-oil  and  copra,  or  of 
sending  them  to  the  Manila  markets,  is  thriving. 

These  islands  make  more  money  from  hemp  than  from 
any  other  production.      This  is  really  a  kind  of  plantain, 

and  looks  so  much  like  the 
banana  that  only  an  expert 
can  tell  them  apart.  It 
grows  best  where  there  is 
volcanic  material  in  the 
soil,  and  it  likes  to  live 
at  a  certain  distance  above 
the  sea.  It  also  loves  the 
bright  sun,  the  heavy  rain, 
and  the  Pacific  breezes 
which  it  gets  in  the  Philip- 
pines. In  exchange  for 
these  it  has  made  the 
islands  rich  and  famous. 
The  fibre  is  separated  from 
the  pulp  in  presses,  and  it 
makes  the  best  and  cheap- 
est cordage  and  sail-cloth. 
As  no  hurtful  insect  injures 
the  tree,  it  is  easily  raised. 
The  Filipino  thinks  the 
bamboo  the  most  useful 
of  all  the  plants  in  his 
land,  and  he  is  right.  A 
native  once  said  that  if  he 
had  a  large  knife  and  some 
bamboos  he  could  get  a 
good  dinner.  He  then  went 
to  a  clump  of  bamboos,  got  a  dry  joint,  and  cut  it  in  two. 
Rubbing  the  two  parts  together,  he  made  a  spark  and 
kindled  a  fire.  He  made  a  pot  out  of  a  green  joint, 
boiled  water  in  it,  and  stewed  some  young  bamboo  shoots, 
which  make  very  good  greens.  Then  of  bamboo  he  made 
a  plate, and  a  knife  and  fork  with  which  to  eat  the  greens. 
These  people  make  the  frame,  siding,  and  often  the  roofs 
of  their  houses  of  the  bamboo  canes.  Besides  dishes, 
knives  and  forks,  and  spoons,  they  make  their  farming 
implements,  sledges,  fences,  bridges,  rafts,  boats,  fish- 
traps,  bows,  bowstrings,  lance-heads,  arrows,  water- 
pipes,  and  musical  instruments  from  bamboo. 


,  4*V'^M 


INDEX 


GUIDE  TO  PRONUNCIATION 

a,  as  in  cap;  a,  as  in  cap'e;  a,  as  in  far ;  a,  as  la  fall;  a,  as  in  last;  a,  as  in  care;  ti,  as  in  senate ;  e,  as  in  pen;  e,  as  in  mete  ;  e,  as 
in  her;  e,  as  in  event;  i,  as  in  pin;  Z,  as  in  pine;  0,  as  in  not;  6,  as  in  cold;  6,  as  in  for;  u,  as  in  tub;  8,  as  in  mute;  fi,  as  in/uW; 
w,  as  in  pull ;  ub,  as  in  pool ;  ob,  as  in  foot ;  oi,  as  in  oil ;  ow,  as  in  cow  ;  g,  as  in  get ;  g,  as  in  gem  ;  c,  as  in  cat ;  c,  as  in  cent ;  n,  as  in 
bank ;  s,  as  in  wise. 

A,  e,  i,  o,  and  u  marked  thus  :  a,  e,  i,  g,  u,  indicate  a  sound  obscured.     Accent  is  shown  by  the  sign  '. 


Adelaide  (Sd'elad),  212. 

Africa  (Sfrlka),  84,  187-198. 

Alaska  (a  las'ka),  140,  8,8. 

Albany  (al'bani),  46,  90. 

Alexandria  (al  §gs  iln'drl  a),  189,  192. 

Algonquin  (31  gon'kwln),  138. 

alligator  (al'llgater),  97. 

Alps  (31ps),  177-180. 

Amazon  (am'a  zon)  River,  152,  154-156. 

Ammonoosuc  (3m  mft  noo'suc) ,  41,  42,  43. 

animals,  72-74. 

alligator,  97. 

antelope,  194. 

armadillo,  155. 

bear,  72,  97. 

beaver,  73. 

buffalo,  96. 

caribou,  73. 

crocodile,  208. 

deer,  72,  96.^ 

eland,  194. 

elephant,  197,  208. 

elk,  73. 


gemsbok,  194. 
giraffe,  197. 
hippopotamus 
jackal,  197. 
jaguar,  154. 
kangaroo,  212. 
leopard,  208. 
lion,  196. 
monkey,  198. 
moose,  73. 
ostrich,  194. 
polar  bear,  63. 
rhinoceros,  197 
seal,  62. 
springbok,  195. 
tapir,  155. 


197. 


tiger,  208. 

walrus,  62. 

white  ant,  196. 
Antarctic  Ocean  (3n  tark'tlk),  85. 
antelope  (an'te"  lop),  194. 
Anthony's  Nose  (Sn'tgnl),  47. 
Apache  Indians  (apa'cha),  139. 
Apia  (S'pea),  209,  210. 
Apennines  (Sp'pen  ninz),  182. 
Arabs  (Sr'abs),  187-189. 
Arapahoe  Indians  (arSp'ahO),  138. 
Arctic  Ocean  (ark'tlk),  85. 
Arizona  (arlzO'na),  103. 
armadillo  (ar  madil'lft),  155. 
Asia  (a'shla),  84,  198-208. 
Atlantic  Ocean  (atian'tlk),  85,  161. 
Auckland  (ak'land),  210. 
Aurora  (a  ro'ra),  61. 
Australia  (astra'lia),  84,  212. 

Bahamas  (ba  ha'mas),  65. 

Bahia  (ba6'a),  152. 

Baltimore  (bal'tlmor),  112. 

Banff  (bamf),  151. 

Bank  of  England,  169. 

Bar  Harbor  (bar  har'bor),  108. 

Bath  (bath),  104. 

bears,  72,  97. 

beaver,  73. 

Bedouin  (bfid'ooen),  189. 

Belts  or  Zones  of  heat  and  cold,  85-86. 

Bendoo  (b6ndo6'),  192. 

Berlin  (bgrlin'),  173. 

big  trees,  142. 

Blackfoot  Indians,  138. 

Blackstone  River,  101. 

Blackstone  Valley,  101. 

Blarney  (blar'nl),  162. 

Bloomington,  64. 

217 


book  making,  103. 

Boon  Island  (boon),  58. 

Boston  (bds'ton),  104-106. 

Brazil  (bra  zll') ,  152-156. 

Bridgeport  (brij'pOrt),  98. 

Bristol  (brfs'tgl),  104. 

British  Columbia  (kg  lum'bi  a),  151. 

Brockton  (brok'tgn),  103. 

Brooklyn  (brook'iln),  90. 

Brooklyn  Bridge,  91. 

buffalo  (buff a  15),  96. 

Buffalo  (buffalo),  126. 

Bunker  Hill,  105. 

cacao  (kaka'6),  156. 

Cairo  (kt'r6),  190,  192. 

California  (kai  I  fdr'nl  a),  146-149. 

Canada  (kan'ada),  88,  150-151. 

Canadian  Falls,  125. 

Cape  Colony,  194-195. 

Cape  Town,  194,  195. 

Casco  Bay  (kas'ko) ,  108. 

cattle  raising,  133. 

ceiba  (cg'i  ba) ,  68. 

Central  States,  map,  131. 

Charles  River,  103. 

Cheyenne  Indians  (shi  8n'),  138. 

Chicago  (shi  ka'go),  128-130. 

Chile  (chS'lft),  156-160. 

China  (chi'na),  198-202. 

Cincinnati  (sin  sin  na'tl),  118. 

Cleveland  (klev'land),  126,  127. 

coffee,  153. 

Colorado  River  (kol  g  ra'do),  143. 

compass  (ktim'pas),  8. 

Concord  River  (konk'urd),  102. 

Connecticut  (kbn  nfit'I  kut),  98. 

Connecticut  River,  100. 

copra  (ko'pra),  68,  210. 


218 


I^DEX 


Cork,  162. 

cotton  growing,  122. 

cotton  manufacturing,  101. 

Crawford  Notch  (kraw'fgrd),  41. 

Cuba  (ku'ba),  65-70. 

dahabeah  (dii'habe'a),  192. 

Dawson  (da'sgn),  88. 

deer,  72,  96. 

Dee  River,  165. 

Delaware  River  (dSl'awar),  111. 

Detroit  (detroii'),  127. 

Detroit  River,  127. 

diamonds,  194. 

direction,  6. 

Dover  Cliff  (do'ver),  58. 

drumlin  (drum'lin),  36. 

Duluth  (dulooth'),  128. 

edelweiss  (a'delvis),  178. 
Egypt  (e'jipt),  189. 
Egyptian  obelisk  (ob'elisk),  95. 
Eiffel  Tower  (If'fel),  174. 
eland  (e'land),  194. 
elephant  (el'efant),  197,  208. 
England  (in'gland),  164-170. 
equator  (Gkwfi'ter),  77. 
Erie  Canal  (e'ri),  46,  126. 
Erie,  Lake,  126,  128. 
Eskimo  (es'kl  mo),  60-64. 
Eton  (6'tgn),  167. 
Eurasia  (u  ra'shi  a),  84. 
Europe  (u'riip),  84,  161-186. 
Europe,  map,  175. 

Fall  River,  101. 

Faneuil  Hall  (fan'l),  105. 

farming,  51,  53,  69,  132,  166,  179. 

Florence  (fl5r'ens),  182. 

Florida  (flor'ida),  115. 

flour,  132. 

Fort  Putnam,  47. 

France  (frans),  174-177. 

frigid  zone,  86. 

gemsbok  (gfimz'bok),  194. 

Genoa  (jen'ga),  180. 

Germany  (jEr'mg,ni),  171-173 

geyser  (gi'sSr),  140-141. 

Giant's  Causeway,  164. 

giraffe  (jiraf),  197. 

glacier  (gla'shSr),  26,  177. 

Glens  Falls,  45,  46. 

globe,  76. 

Golden  Gate,  146. 

gondola  (g6n'd6la),  181. 

Grand  Canyon,  143,  144. 

grapes,  149. 

Greater  Antilles  (an  til'lez  or  an  tel'),  66. 

Great  Lakes,  53. 

Greenland,  60. 


Hadley  (had'li),  100. 
Halifax  (hal'e  faks),  150. 
Hartford  (hart'fgrd),  98. 
Harvard  University,  105. 
Havana  (hfjvan'a),  66. 
Hawaiian  Islands  (hawi'ean),  209. 
hemisphere  (hem'isfer),  82,  83. 
hibiscus  (ht  bis'kus),  209. 
hippopotamus  (hippo  pot'amus),  197. 
Holyoke  (hol'yok),  100. 
Hong  Kong  (hong  k5ng'),  212. 
Honolulu  (ho  nokw'loo),  209. 
Hudson  River  (hud'sgn),  44-49. 
Huron,  Lake  (hfi'rgn),  127. 

iceberg,  60. 
ice-cutting,  71. 
igloo  (Ig'loo),  64. 
Illinois  (Illinoi'),  54. 
India  (in'dia),  206-209. 
Indian  Ocean,  85. 
Indians,  135-139. 
industries  (types):  — 

book  making,  103. 

cotton  manufacturing,  101. 

cotton  raising,  122. 

farming,  179. 

ice  cutting,  71. 

linen  manufacturing,  164. 

lumbering,  115. 

mining,  193. 

paper  manufacturing,  100. 

ship  building,  104. 

shoe  manufacturing,  103. 

sugar  manufacturing,  69. 

watch  manufacturing,  102. 
Ireland  (ir'land),  161-164. 
Irvington  (er'ving  ton),  48. 
Italy  (It'all),  180-183. 

jaguar  (ja  gwiir'),  154. 
Jamaica  (jama'ka),  87,  88. 
Japan  (japan'),  202-206. 
Java  (ja'va),  213. 
Jersey  City  (jEr'zI),  49. 
jinrikisha  (jln  rik'i  sha),  205. 
Jungfrau  (yoong'frou),  179. 

Kadiak  (kad'i  ak),  72. 

Kaffir  (kaf'fer),  195. 

Kalahari  Desert  (ka  la  ha'rT),  194. 

kangaroo  (kangaroo'),  212. 

kayak  (ka'ak),  62. 

Kennebec  River  (kfinebek'),  109. 

Khedive  (kftdev'),  190. 

Killarney  Lakes  (kilar'nl),  163. 

Kimberley  (klm'bPrll),  194. 

Kittery  Point  (klt'erl),  56. 

Koran  (kO'ran),  187. 

kraal  (kral),  195. 

land  forms,  14. 

Lauterbrunnen  (lowt'erbroonen),  179. 


Lawrence  (lgr'ens),  102. 

lemons,  149. 

leopard  (lfip'erd),  208. 

levee,  120. 

lignum  vitae  (llg'num  vi'tg),  68. 

linen,  164. 

lion,  196. 

Liverpool  (liv'er  pool).  161. 

London  (lun'dun),  168-170. 

Long  Island  Sound,  90. 

Los  Angeles  (I6sau'h61  6s),  149. 

Lowell  (15'gl),  101,  102. 

lumbering,  115. 

Luzon  (loozon'),  215. 

Lynn  (Hn),  103. 

Maggiore,  Lake  (maj  i  o're).  180. 

Maine,  106-10'9. 

Manchester  (man'ches  ter),  102. 

mango  (man'go),  209. 

Manhattan  Island  (manhat'an),  49. 

Manila  (manil'a),  43.  213-215. 

map  making,  79. 

Massachusetts  (mas  a  chu'sets),  101. 

Matterhorn  (mat'tPrhorn).  178. 

Melbourne  (mel'burn),  212. 

Meriden  (mgr'iden),  98. 

meridians  (meTld'I  anz),  78. 

Merrimac  River  (mgr'Imak),  101. 

Mexico  (meks'ikO),  88. 

Michigan,  Lake  (mlsh'Igan),  130. 

Middle  Atlantic  States,  map,  117. 

Milan  (mi  lan'  or  mll'an),  180. 

Minneapolis  (min  e  ap'o  lis) ,  181. 

mining,  128,  148,  195. 

Mississippi  River  (mlsisip'I),  118-122. 

Mississippi  Valley,  43. 

Missouri  River  (mlsoo'ri),  118-120. 

Mohawk  River,  46. 

Moki  Indians  (mO'kl),  139. 

monkey  (mun'ki),  198. 

Mont  Blanc  (m&n  blon'),  177. 

Montreal  (montreal'),  88,  150. 

Moors,  189. 

Moscow  (mos'ko),  185. 

Mt.  Everest  (gv'Prest),  198. 

Mt.  McKinley  (mackln'li),  140. 

Mt.  Monroe  (mun  ro'),  cut,  43. 

Mt.  Royal  (roi'al),  160. 

Mt.  St.  Elias  (sAnt  e  li'as),  140. 

Mt.  Washington,  41-44. 

Muir  Glacier  (mur),  140. 

Naples  (na'plz),  183. 

Narragansett  Bay  (naragan'set),  101. 

Nassau  (nas'a),  65. 

Neddick  Cape  (ned'dik),  58. 

Neva  River  (na'va),  184. 

New  Bedford  (bed'fgrd),  101. 

New  Brunswick,  150. 

Newburgh,  47. 

New  Castle,  57. 


INDEX 


219 


New  England  (In 'gland),  98-106. 

New  England,  map,  107. 

Newfoundland  (nu'fgndland),  88. 

New  Guinea  (gin'e),  213. 

New  Hampshire  (h&nip'shjr),  41,  102. 

New  Haven,  98,  100. 

New  Jersey  (jer'zl),  109-110. 

New  Orleans  (6r'le  anz),  120-121. 

New  York  City,  48,  89-96. 

New  York  Harbor,  49. 

New  Zealand  (ze'land),  270. 

Niagara  Falls  (niag'ara),  125-126. 

Niger  River  (ni'jer),  192. 

Nile  River  (nil),  189. 

North  America,  84,  89-149. 

North  Pole,  77. 

North  River,  49. 

Norwood  (nor'wood),  103. 

Nubble  Island  (nub'bl),  cut,  58. 

Nyassa,  Lake  (nt  as'sa),  196. 

Oahu  (oa'hoo),  209. 

Odessa  (odes'sa),  185. 

Ohio  River  (o  hl'5),  185. 

olives,  149. 

Ontario,  Lake  (onta'nC),  120. 

Opalescent  River  (OpaleVsent),  45. 

oranges,  149. 

ostrich,  194. 

Ottawa  (Ot'tawa),  151. 

Ottawa  River,  150. 

Pacific  Ocean  (pa  slf'ik),  11,  146,  151, 

Palisades  (p51 1  sads'),  48,  49. 

Papeite  (pape'te),  209. 

paper,  100. 

Para  (pa  ra'),  152. 

Paris  (p&r'Is),  174-177. 

Pasadena  (p5s  a  de'na),  149. 

Pawtucket  (pa  tuk'et),  101. 

pearls,  213. 

Peking  (p6  king'),  202. 

Penobscot  Bay  (pe  nSb'scot),  109. 

Pernambuco  (p8r  nam  bob'ko),  152. 

Philadelphia  (til  a  dgl'fl  a),  111-112. 

Philippine  Islands  (fil'ip  In),  212-215. 

pineapples,  116. 

Piscataqua  (pis  k&t'a,  qua),  56,  57. 

Pittsburg,  118,  120. 

polar  bear,  63. 

Portland  (port'land),  108. 

Portsmouth  (ports'muth),  55,  56,  57. 

Poughkeepsie  (po  klp'sl),  46 

Prado  (pra'do),  66. 

Presidential  Range,  41. 

Presque  Isle  (prfisk  el),  126. 

products  (types)  :  — 

cacao,  166. 

cattle,  133. 

coffee,  153. 

copra,  210. 

cotton,  122. 


flour,  132. 

grapes,  149. 

lemons,  149. 

mango,  209. 

olives,  149. 

oranges,  149. 

pearls,  213. 

pineapples,  116. 

rice,  114. 

rubber,  155. 

wheat,  132. 
Providence  (prov'I  dens),  101. 
Pyramids  (pir'a  mid),  190. 
python  (pi'thon),  97. 

Quebec  (kwe  bfik'),  150: 
Queenstown,  162. 
Quincy  (kwln'zl),  104. 

rain,  17. 

ranching,  133. 

Red  Sea,  198. 

rhinoceros  (ri  nos'eros),  197. 

Rhode  Island  (rod),  101. 

rice,  114. 

Richmond  (rich'mond),  114. 

Rio  de  Janeiro  (re'S"  d&  zha  na'e  ro)  ,152, 153. 

Riverside,  Cal.,  149. 

Rochester  (roch'ester),  90. 

Rocky  Mountains,  143. 

Rome  (rom),  182. 

rubber,  155. 

Rugby  (rug'bl),  167. 

Russia  (rush'a),  184-186. 

Sacramento  River  (sakramgn'to),  147. 

Sahara  (saha'ra),  187. 

St.  Clair,  Lake  (klar),  127. 

St.  Johns,  88. 

St.  Lawrence,  150. 

St.  Louis  (loo'Is),  119. 

St.  Paul,  133. 

St.  Petersburg  (pe'terzburg),  184-185. 

sakiyeh  (sSk'I  yft),  192. 

Samoan  Islands  (samo'an),  209. 

Sandy  Hook,  90. 

San  Francisco  (s5n  fr5n  sls'ko),  146. 

Santiago,  Chile  (santga'gS),  158. 

Santo  Domingo  (san'to  domgn'gS),  88. 

Santos  (san'tos),  153. 

Sault  Ste.  Marie  (soo  s6nt  ma'ri),  127. 

schools,  167,  172,  179,  192,  193,  198,  200, 

203,  206. 
Schuylkill  (skool'kll),  111. 


62. 

seasons,  22. 

Seavey  Island  (sfi'vl),  55,  56. 
Seine  (sftn),  174. 
Shandon  (shSn'don),  162. 
sheik  (shek),  188. 
ship-building,  104. 
shoes,  103. 


Sleepy  Hollow,  48. 

Society  Islands,  209. 

soil,  32. 

"Soo"  Canal,  127. 

South  America,  84,  86,  152-160. 

South  America,  map,  157. 

South  Dakota  (da  ko'ta),  53,  138. 

Southern  California,  148. 

Southern  States,  112-116,  120-124. 

Southern  States,  map,  123. 

South  Pole,  77. 

Sphinx  (sflnks),  190. 

springbok  (sprlng'bok),  195. 

Springfield,  100. 

stockyards,  130. 

Storm  king,  47. 

sugar,  69. 

Superior,  Lake  (supe'rISr),  127. 

Switzerland  (swlt'zer  laud),  177-179. 

Sydney  (sld'nl),  212. 

Syracuse  (sir'akus),  90. 

Tahiti  (tahe'ti),  210. 

tapir  (ta'per),  155. 

Tappan  Zee,  48. 

Tarrytown,  48. 

temperate  belts  or  zones,  86. 

Texas  (teks'as),  121,  135. 

Thames  River  (temz),  168,  170. 

thermometer  (thgrmom'e  tSr),  21. 

tides,  37. 

tiger,  208. 

Toronto  (to  ron'tO),  88. 

torrid  belt  or  zone,  86. 

toucan  (too'kSn),  155. 

Tropic  of  Cancer,  65. 

Troy,  46,  90. 

umiak  (oo'ml  5k),  62. 
United  States,  99. 
United  States,  map,  99. 
Ute  Indians  (ut),  131. 

"Valparaiso  (val  pari'so),  156,  158. 
Vancouver  (van  kob'ver),  151. 
Vatican  (v£t'Ikan),  182. 
Venice  (vfn'is),  180. 
Vernal  Falls  (vEr'nal),  141. 
Vesuvius  (vgsu'vlus),  183. 

walrus  (wSl'rus),  62. 
Waltham  (wol'tham),  102. 
Warsaw  (war'sa),  185. 
Washington,  113. 
watch-making,  102. 
water  forms,  14. 
weather  chart,  22. 
Western  States,  140-149. 
Western  States,  map,  145. 
West  Indies  (In'd^z),  65-70. 
Westminster  Abbey,  168. 
West  Point,  47. 


220 


INDEX 


wheat,  132. 

white  ants,  196. 

White  Mountains,  41. 

winds,  17. 

Winnipeg  (wln'I  peg),  151. 


Wisconsin  (wlsk5n'sln),  54. 
Worcester  (wdos'ter),  100. 

York,  65. 

York  Harbor,  58. 


Yosemite  Falls  (yfcsem'I  t£),  140,  142. 
Yosemite  Valley,  141. 

Zermatt  (zgrmat'),  177. 


LIST    OF    MAPS 


PAGE 

Hudson  River     .                44 

Coast  from  Portsmouth  to  York 55 

Hemispheres 82,  83 

Grand  Divisions 84 

North  America,  facing  page 88 

Relief  Map  of  North  America,  facing  page       ....  89 

New  York  City 90 

.New  England  States 107 

Boston 107 

Philadelphia Ill 

Middle  Atlantic  States 117 

New  Orleans 120 

Southern  States 123 


*  i-A'.r 

Buffalo 120 

Chicago 128 

Central  States ' 131 

Western  States 14") 

San  Francisco 146 

South  America 167 

London 168 

Paris 174 

Europe .  17"> 

Venice 180 

Africa 191 

Asia  199 

Australia  and  Islands  of  the  Pacific 211 


U  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


7          JJ5 

M  f 

jfcSSi  GUS 

.IAN  1  1  1QR7 

JAN  3    RECp 

SEMSTER  LOAN 

MAY  2  6  1987 

Clin  iroT  to  nrpdi  i 

LD  21-100m6,'56 
(B9311sl0)476 

General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 

ye  06:e8* 


541;*27 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


!'&'    '     ■"     :^ 


%mmm 


